OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series V100R001

Configuration Guide

Issue Date Part Number

06 2009-06-01 00423994

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Starting the T2000.......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000.............................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Starting the Computer............................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server......................................................................................................................1-3 1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status.........................................................................................................1-4 1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................1-4 1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client...........................................................................................................................1-5 1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server...........................................................................................................1-6 1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer.................................................................................................................1-6 1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views...............................................................................................................1-7 1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology..................................................................................................................1-7 1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................1-8

2 Creating Network.......................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches........................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2 Creating a Single NE..............................................................................................................................2-5 2.2 Creating an NE User.......................................................................................................................................2-6 2.3 Switching a Logged-In NM User....................................................................................................................2-8 2.4 Configuring NE Data......................................................................................................................................2-8 2.5 Adding Boards.................................................................................................................................................2-9 2.6 Adding Sub-Boards.......................................................................................................................................2-10 2.7 Configuring the Equipment-Level Protection...............................................................................................2-11 2.7.1 Creating a TPS Protection Group of Sub-Boards.................................................................................2-11 2.7.2 Querying the Board 1+1 Protection Group..........................................................................................2-12 2.8 Creating Fibers for PTN Equipment Manually.............................................................................................2-12 2.9 Creating a Topology Subnet..........................................................................................................................2-13 2.10 Configuring Inband DCN............................................................................................................................2-14 2.11 Configuring Clocks.....................................................................................................................................2-15 2.11.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode...............................................................................................2-16 2.11.2 Setting the PTP Clock........................................................................................................................2-16 2.11.3 Configuring the NE Clock Source.....................................................................................................2-16 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Contents

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide 2.11.4 Configuring the Clock Source Protection..........................................................................................2-17 2.11.5 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources.......................................................................2-18 2.11.6 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion...........................................................................................2-19 2.11.7 Configuring the Phase-Locked Source for External Clock Output....................................................2-19 2.11.8 Setting the Clock Source Quality.......................................................................................................2-20 2.11.9 Configuring the SSM Output.............................................................................................................2-21 2.11.10 Switching a Clock Source................................................................................................................2-21

2.12 Configuring Linear MSP.............................................................................................................................2-22 2.12.1 Linear MSP........................................................................................................................................2-22 2.12.2 Configuring Linear MSP....................................................................................................................2-23 2.13 Parameter Description.................................................................................................................................2-24

3 Configuring the QoS Policy.....................................................................................................3-1 4 Configuring Interfaces..............................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces............................................................................................................................4-5 4.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces..................................................................................4-7 4.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of SDH Interfaces..................................................................................4-8 4.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of SDH Interfaces..................................................................................4-8 4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces..............................................................................4-9 4.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces..........................................................................................................................4-10 4.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces......................................................................................4-12 4.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces................................................................................4-12 4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces............................................................................4-13 4.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces....................................................................................................................4-14 4.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces..........................................................................4-16 4.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces...........................................................................4-17 4.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface........................................................................4-17 4.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces.......................................................................4-18 4.3.5 Configuring Flow Control....................................................................................................................4-18 4.4 Configuring Serial Interfaces........................................................................................................................4-19 4.4.1 Creating Serial Interfaces.....................................................................................................................4-20 4.4.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface.............................................................................4-21 4.4.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces...............................................................................4-22 4.5 Configuring ML-PPP....................................................................................................................................4-23 4.5.1 Creating MP Groups.............................................................................................................................4-24 4.5.2 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups...................................................................................4-26 4.6 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface.....................................................................................................4-27 4.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces..............................................................4-27 4.6.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces..............................................................4-27 4.7 Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Group............................................................................................4-28 4.8 Configuring the IMA.....................................................................................................................................4-28 4.9 Parameter Description...................................................................................................................................4-29

ii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Contents

5 Configuring the Control Plane................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol..................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol..............................................................................................................................5-4 5.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol............................................................................................................................5-6 5.1.4 ARP Protocol..........................................................................................................................................5-7 5.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol...............................................................................................................5-10 5.2.1 Setting Node Attributes........................................................................................................................5-10 5.2.2 Setting Port Attributes..........................................................................................................................5-11 5.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing........................................................................................5-12 5.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information......................................................................................................5-13 5.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol...........................................................................................................5-13 5.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities......................................................................................................5-13 5.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol..................................................................................................5-14 5.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol........................................................................................................5-14 5.5 Configuring Static Routes.............................................................................................................................5-15 5.6 Configuring the Address Parse......................................................................................................................5-16 5.7 Parameter Description...................................................................................................................................5-17

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................6-3 6.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel.......................................................................................................................6-3 6.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel...........................................................................................................6-3 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function.............................6-5 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function.......................................................................6-10 6.4 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS...................................................................................................6-12 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis..............................................................................................6-13 6.6 Querying the Tunnel Label Information.......................................................................................................6-14 6.7 Configuring MPLS OAM..............................................................................................................................6-14 6.8 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group................................................................................................6-15 6.9 Configuration Case of the Dynamic MPLS Tunnel......................................................................................6-17 6.9.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................6-17 6.9.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................6-18 6.9.3 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel......................................................................................................6-20 6.10 Configuration Case of the Static MPLS Tunnel..........................................................................................6-26 6.10.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................6-27 6.10.2 Service Planning.................................................................................................................................6-28 6.10.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function............................................................6-30 6.10.4 Configuring a Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................................6-35 6.11 Parameter Description.................................................................................................................................6-40

7 Configuring an IP Tunnel........................................................................................................7-1
7.1 IP Tunnel.........................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Creating IP Tunnels.........................................................................................................................................7-2 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Contents

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

7.3 Parameter Description.....................................................................................................................................7-3

8 Configuring a GRE Tunnel......................................................................................................8-1

8.1 GRE Tunnel.....................................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Creating GRE Tunnels....................................................................................................................................8-2 8.3 Parameter Description.....................................................................................................................................8-3

9 Configuring a CES Service.......................................................................................................9-1

9.1 CES Service Type........................................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services..............................................................................................................9-5 9.3 CES Service Operation Tasks.........................................................................................................................9-7 9.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function............................................................9-8 9.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function..........................................................9-10 9.3.3 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis.........................................................................9-12 9.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis.........................................................................9-13 9.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI CES Service........................................................................................9-16 9.4.1 Case Description..................................................................................................................................9-16 9.4.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................9-17 9.4.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function......................................................................9-18 9.4.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................................................9-21 9.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI CES Service........................................................................................9-24 9.5.1 Case Description..................................................................................................................................9-24 9.5.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................9-26 9.5.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function......................................................................9-29 9.5.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................................................9-38 9.6 Checking the Correctness of the Service Configuration...............................................................................9-49 9.7 Parameter Description...................................................................................................................................9-50

10 Configuring an ATM Service...............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Basic Information........................................................................................................................................10-2 10.1.1 ATM Service......................................................................................................................................10-2 10.1.2 ATM Traffic.......................................................................................................................................10-4 10.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow..............................................................................................................10-6 10.3 Operation Tasks Related to ATM Services...............................................................................................10-11 10.3.1 Creating ATM Services by Using the Trail Function......................................................................10-11 10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................................................10-15 10.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI ATM Service..................................................................................10-19 10.4.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................10-19 10.4.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................10-20 10.4.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis...............................................................................10-22 10.4.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis............................................................................10-27 10.5 Configuration Case of the UNIs-NNI ATM Service................................................................................10-32 10.5.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................10-32 10.5.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................10-33 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Contents

10.5.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis...............................................................................10-36 10.5.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis............................................................................10-47 10.6 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration.................................................................................10-66 10.7 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................10-68

11 Configuring an E-Line Service............................................................................................11-1

11.1 E-Line Service.............................................................................................................................................11-3 11.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service.................................................................................................11-6 11.3 Operation Tasks for the E-Line Service....................................................................................................11-12 11.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service ...............................................................................................11-13 11.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port...................................................................11-14 11.3.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW....................................................................11-15 11.3.4 Creating a QinQ Link.......................................................................................................................11-17 11.3.5 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link.....................................................11-18 11.3.6 Creating a V-UNI Group..................................................................................................................11-19 11.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI E-Line Service................................................................................11-21 11.4.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................11-21 11.4.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................11-22 11.4.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at an NE........................................................................................11-24 11.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports.....................................................11-27 11.5.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................11-27 11.5.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................11-28 11.5.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at the Source NE...........................................................................11-29 11.6 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the PW.................................................11-31 11.6.1 Case Description..............................................................................................................................11-31 11.6.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................11-32 11.6.3 Configuring the E-Line Service of the NE.......................................................................................11-34 11.7 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link......................................11-39 11.7.1 Case Description..............................................................................................................................11-39 11.7.2 Service Planning...............................................................................................................................11-40 11.7.3 Configuring the E-Line Service ......................................................................................................11-42 11.8 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration.................................................................................11-45 11.9 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................11-48

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service............................................................................................12-1

12.1 E-LAN Service............................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service......................................................................................................12-3 12.3 Operation Tasks for the E-LAN Service.....................................................................................................12-4 12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service...............................................................................................................12-4 12.3.2 Managing the Blacklist.......................................................................................................................12-9 12.3.3 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression........................................................................................12-10 12.3.4 Creating a V-UNI Group..................................................................................................................12-11 12.4 Configuration Case of the E-LAN Service...............................................................................................12-12 12.4.1 Case Description..............................................................................................................................12-13 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Contents

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide 12.4.2 Configuring E-LAN Service for the NE..........................................................................................12-15

12.5 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................12-18

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service........................................................................................13-1

13.1 E-AGGR Service.........................................................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service.............................................................................................13-2 13.3 Operation Tasks for the E-AGGR Service..................................................................................................13-4 13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service............................................................................................................13-4 13.3.2 Creating a V-UNI Group....................................................................................................................13-6 13.4 Configuration Case of the E-AGGR Service..............................................................................................13-7 13.4.1 Case Description................................................................................................................................13-8 13.4.2 Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs.......................................................................13-12 13.4.3 Configuring an NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs.....................................................................13-13 13.5 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................13-14

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution................................................................14-1

14.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................14-2 14.2 Service Configuration Flow for the Offload Solution.................................................................................14-5 14.3 ATM-Based Service Configuration Case....................................................................................................14-8 14.3.1 Case Description................................................................................................................................14-9 14.3.2 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................14-16 14.4 ETH-Based Service Configuration Case...................................................................................................14-20 14.4.1 Case Description..............................................................................................................................14-21 14.4.2 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................14-28 14.5 IP-Based Service Configuration Case.......................................................................................................14-32 14.5.1 Case Description..............................................................................................................................14-32 14.5.2 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................14-39

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces....................................15-1

15.1 Application of the Environment Monitoring Interfaces..............................................................................15-2 15.2 Setting Attributes of the Input Relay...........................................................................................................15-3 15.3 Setting the Output Status of the Alarm Relay.............................................................................................15-3 15.4 Querying and Configuring the Board Temperature Monitoring.................................................................15-4

16 Backing up the Configuration Data....................................................................................16-1

16.1 Periodically Backing Up the T2000 MO Data............................................................................................16-2 16.2 Backing Up NE Databases..........................................................................................................................16-3

A Glossary..................................................................................................................................... A-1 B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1 C Parameter Reference................................................................................................................ C-1

C.1 64KTs.............................................................................................................................................................C-7 C.2 AF1 Schedule Weight....................................................................................................................................C-7 C.3 AF2 Schedule Weight....................................................................................................................................C-8 C.4 AF3 Schedule Weight....................................................................................................................................C-9 vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Contents

C.5 AF4 Schedule Weight....................................................................................................................................C-9 C.6 ATM Port Type............................................................................................................................................C-10 C.7 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling....................................................................................................................C-11 C.8 BPDU (E-Line)............................................................................................................................................C-12 C.9 CBS..............................................................................................................................................................C-13 C.10 CC Test Transmit Period...........................................................................................................................C-13 C.11 CC Status...................................................................................................................................................C-14 C.12 CIR.............................................................................................................................................................C-14 C.13 CoS.............................................................................................................................................................C-15 C.14 CRC Check Length....................................................................................................................................C-16 C.15 IP Address Negotiation Result...................................................................................................................C-17 C.16 IP Mask Negotiation Result.......................................................................................................................C-17 C.17 Specify IP...................................................................................................................................................C-18 C.18 LSP Mode..................................................................................................................................................C-19 C.19 MAC Address Learning Mode...................................................................................................................C-19 C.20 Self-learning MAC Address......................................................................................................................C-20 C.21 MTU(byte).................................................................................................................................................C-21 C.22 NNI (Ethernet Service)..............................................................................................................................C-22 C.23 OAM Working Mode.................................................................................................................................C-22 C.24 Enable OAM Protocol................................................................................................................................C-23 C.25 PBS............................................................................................................................................................C-24 C.26 PHB............................................................................................................................................................C-24 C.27 PHY Loopback...........................................................................................................................................C-25 C.28 PIR.............................................................................................................................................................C-26 C.29 PPP Link Status..........................................................................................................................................C-27 C.30 PW ID........................................................................................................................................................C-27 C.31 PW Egress Label........................................................................................................................................C-28 C.32 PW Direction.............................................................................................................................................C-28 C.33 PW Type....................................................................................................................................................C-29 C.34 PW Signaling Type....................................................................................................................................C-31 C.35 QinQ Link ID.............................................................................................................................................C-31 C.36 RTP Head...................................................................................................................................................C-32 C.37 S-VLAN ID................................................................................................................................................C-33 C.38 Tag Type....................................................................................................................................................C-33 C.39 Tunnel........................................................................................................................................................C-34 C.40 Enable Tunnel............................................................................................................................................C-35 C.41 UNI (Ethernet Service)..............................................................................................................................C-36 C.42 VCCV Verification Mode..........................................................................................................................C-36 C.43 VLAN Forwarding Table Item..................................................................................................................C-37 C.44 V-UNI ID...................................................................................................................................................C-37 C.45 V-UNI Group Type....................................................................................................................................C-37 C.46 WFQ Scheduling Policy............................................................................................................................C-38 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Contents

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.47 Packet Type................................................................................................................................................C-39 C.48 Packet Color...............................................................................................................................................C-39 C.49 Packet Loading Time.................................................................................................................................C-40 C.50 Packet Loading Time (us).......................................................................................................................... C-41 C.51 Duplicated Policy Name............................................................................................................................C-41 C.52 Local Working Status................................................................................................................................C-42 C.53 Test Result.................................................................................................................................................C-43 C.54 Policy ID....................................................................................................................................................C-43 C.55 Policy Name...............................................................................................................................................C-44 C.56 Member Interface.......................................................................................................................................C-45 C.57 Bearer Type................................................................................................................................................C-45 C.58 Egress Port.................................................................................................................................................C-46 C.59 Handling Mode..........................................................................................................................................C-47 C.60 Handling Mode (Ethernet Unknown Frame).............................................................................................C-47 C.61 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame)....................................................................................................C-48 C.62 Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)...........................................................................................................C-49 C.63 Error Frame Second Threshold (s).............................................................................................................C-49 C.64 Error Frame Second Window (s)...............................................................................................................C-50 C.65 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries)..........................................................................C-50 C.66 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries)........................................................................C-51 C.67 Error Frame Period Threshold (frame)......................................................................................................C-51 C.68 Error Frame Period Window (frame).........................................................................................................C-52 C.69 Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag.......................................................................................................C-52 C.70 Unidirectional Operation...........................................................................................................................C-53 C.71 Address Table Specified Capacity.............................................................................................................C-54 C.72 Address Detection Upper Threshold (%)...................................................................................................C-54 C.73 Address Detection Lower Threshold (%)..................................................................................................C-55 C.74 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes).......................................................................................................C-56 C.75 Discard Probability (%).............................................................................................................................C-57 C.76 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes)........................................................................................................C-57 C.77 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time.........................................................................................................C-59 C.78 Port Transmit Status...................................................................................................................................C-59 C.79 Port Receive Status....................................................................................................................................C-60 C.80 Port Mode...................................................................................................................................................C-61 C.81 Enable Port.................................................................................................................................................C-62 C.82 Port Priority................................................................................................................................................C-63 C.83 Peer IP........................................................................................................................................................ C-64 C.84 Transmitted Packet Length........................................................................................................................C-65 C.85 Transmitted Packet Count..........................................................................................................................C-66 C.86 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM)...............................................................................C-66 C.87 Direction....................................................................................................................................................C-67 C.88 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port)........................................................................C-68 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Contents

C.89 Encapsulation Type....................................................................................................................................C-69 C.90 PIR.............................................................................................................................................................C-70 C.91 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm...................................................................................................................C-71 C.92 Load Sharing..............................................................................................................................................C-72 C.93 Working Mode...........................................................................................................................................C-73 C.94 Loopback Status (EFMOAM Parameter)..................................................................................................C-74 C.95 Revertive Mode..........................................................................................................................................C-75 C.96 Laser Interface Enabling Status.................................................................................................................C-77 C.97 Laser Transmission Distance (m)..............................................................................................................C-77 C.98 Activation Status........................................................................................................................................C-78 C.99 Scrambling Capability (POS Port).............................................................................................................C-79 C.100 Detection Result.......................................................................................................................................C-80 C.101 Static MAC Address................................................................................................................................C-81 C.102 LAG Type................................................................................................................................................C-82 C.103 Control Channel Type..............................................................................................................................C-83 C.104 Control Word (ATM Service)..................................................................................................................C-84 C.105 Aging Ability...........................................................................................................................................C-85 C.106 Aging Time (min)....................................................................................................................................C-86 C.107 Connection Type......................................................................................................................................C-87 C.108 Enable Differential Delay........................................................................................................................C-88 C.109 Link Event Notification...........................................................................................................................C-89 C.110 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing...............................................................................................C-89 C.111 Traffic Classification Rule.......................................................................................................................C-91 C.112 Name........................................................................................................................................................C-92 C.113 Default Packet Relabeling Color.............................................................................................................C-92 C.114 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules...............................................................................................C-93 C.115 Match Type..............................................................................................................................................C-94 C.116 Match Value.............................................................................................................................................C-97 C.117 Default Forwarding Priority...................................................................................................................C-100 C.118 Coloration Mode....................................................................................................................................C-101 C.119 Uplink Policy.........................................................................................................................................C-103 C.120 Clock Mode............................................................................................................................................C-103 C.121 Clock Mode (PDH/SDH Port)...............................................................................................................C-104 C.122 Split Horizon Group...............................................................................................................................C-105 C.123 Split Horizon Group ID.........................................................................................................................C-107 C.124 Split Horizon Group Member................................................................................................................C-107 C.125 Sink Interface Type................................................................................................................................C-108 C.126 Sink Node...............................................................................................................................................C-109 C.127 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address......................................................................................C-110 C.128 Used Port................................................................................................................................................C-110 C.129 Hop Count..............................................................................................................................................C-111 C.130 Wildcard.................................................................................................................................................C-112 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Contents

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.131 Maintenance Domain Level...................................................................................................................C-114 C.132 Tail Drop Threshold (256bytes).............................................................................................................C-115 C.133 Unknown Frame Processing..................................................................................................................C-116 C.134 Location.................................................................................................................................................C-117 C.135 Physical Port ID.....................................................................................................................................C-118 C.136 System Priority (LAG)...........................................................................................................................C-118 C.137 Downlink Policy....................................................................................................................................C-119 C.138 Line Encoding Format...........................................................................................................................C-120 C.139 Response Maintenance Point ID............................................................................................................C-120 C.140 Signal Type............................................................................................................................................C-121 C.141 CDVT (us).............................................................................................................................................C-122 C.142 Service Type (ATM Service).................................................................................................................C-123 C.143 Service Type (ATM Policy)...................................................................................................................C-124 C.144 Service Type (Ethernet OAM)...............................................................................................................C-125 C.145 Service Name.........................................................................................................................................C-126 C.146 Source Interface Type............................................................................................................................C-127 C.147 Remote OAM Parameter........................................................................................................................C-128 C.148 Remote OAM Working Mode...............................................................................................................C-128 C.149 Remote Side Loopback Response..........................................................................................................C-129 C.150 Remote Working Status.........................................................................................................................C-130 C.151 Used Timeslot........................................................................................................................................C-132 C.152 Frame Format.........................................................................................................................................C-132 C.153 Frame Type............................................................................................................................................C-133 C.154 VC-Switching-Supported VPIs..............................................................................................................C-134 C.155 Main Port...............................................................................................................................................C-135 C.156 Main Port Status.....................................................................................................................................C-136 C.157 Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port)..........................................................................C-137 C.158 Compositive Working Status.................................................................................................................C-139 C.159 Impedance..............................................................................................................................................C-140 C.160 Max. OAM Packet Length (byte)..........................................................................................................C-140 C.161 Max. VCI Bits........................................................................................................................................C-141 C.162 Max. VPI Bits........................................................................................................................................C-142 C.163 Max. Differential Delay (100 us)...........................................................................................................C-143 C.164 Max. Concatenated Cell Count..............................................................................................................C-143 C.165 Max Data Packet Size(byte)...................................................................................................................C-144 C.166 MBS (Cells)...........................................................................................................................................C-145 C.167 Max Frame Length(byte)-Ethernet interface.........................................................................................C-146 C.168 Min. Activated Link Count....................................................................................................................C-146 C.169 Direction................................................................................................................................................C-147

Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figures

Figures
Figure 2-1 Typical application...........................................................................................................................2-20 Figure 2-2 SDH 1+1 linear MSP........................................................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-3 SDH 1:1 linear MSP.........................................................................................................................2-23 Figure 4-1 Procedure for configuring an SDH interface......................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-2 Procedure for configuring a PDH interface......................................................................................4-11 Figure 4-3 Procedure for configuring an Ethernet interface..............................................................................4-15 Figure 4-4 Procedure for configuring a serial interface.....................................................................................4-20 Figure 4-5 Procedure for configuring an MP group...........................................................................................4-24 Figure 5-1 LSP tunnel created by using the MPLS-RSVP.................................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-2 ARP frame format.............................................................................................................................. 5-8 Figure 5-3 ARP address resolution...................................................................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5-4 Example of setting the route color....................................................................................................5-11 Figure 6-1 MPLS tunnel in the MPLS network...................................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Transparent transmission of point-to-point data packets....................................................................6-4 Figure 6-3 Protection principle for unicast tunnels..............................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-4 Networking diagram of an MPLS tunnel.........................................................................................6-18 Figure 6-5 NE planning......................................................................................................................................6-18 Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of an MPLS tunnel.........................................................................................6-27 Figure 6-7 NE planning......................................................................................................................................6-28 Figure 7-1 ATM PWE3 over IP tunnel................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 8-1 ATM PWE3 over GRE tunnel............................................................................................................8-2 Figure 9-1 CES service networking sample.........................................................................................................9-3 Figure 9-2 External Clock synchronization of CES service clock.......................................................................9-4 Figure 9-3 UNI-UNI CES service configuration flow.........................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-4 UNI-NNI CES service configuration flow.........................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-5 Networking of the CES service........................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-6 NE planning diagram........................................................................................................................9-17 Figure 9-7 Networking diagram of the CES service..........................................................................................9-25 Figure 9-8 NE planning......................................................................................................................................9-25 Figure 9-9 Checking the CES service................................................................................................................9-49 Figure 10-1 ATM service networking sample...................................................................................................10-3 Figure 10-2 ATM connection convergence sample...........................................................................................10-3 Figure 10-3 Configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service.........................................................................10-7 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Figures

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide Figure 10-4 Configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service.......................................................................10-9 Figure 10-5 Networking of the ATM service...................................................................................................10-20 Figure 10-6 NE planning diagram....................................................................................................................10-20 Figure 10-7 Networking of the ATM service...................................................................................................10-33 Figure 10-8 NE planning diagram....................................................................................................................10-33 Figure 10-9 Connection diagram for ATM service connectivity test...............................................................10-66 Figure 11-1 UNI-UNI E-Line service................................................................................................................11-3

Figure 11-2 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports......................................................................................11-4 Figure 11-3 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW.....................................................................................11-4 Figure 11-4 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link...........................................................................11-5 Figure 11-5 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line service.....................................................................11-6 Figure 11-6 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports......................................................................................11-7 Figure 11-7 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs.......................................................................................11-9 Figure 11-8 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link...........................................................................11-11 Figure 11-9 Networking diagram for the UNI-UNI E-Line service.................................................................11-21 Figure 11-10 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports....................................11-28 Figure 11-11 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW.................................11-32 Figure 11-12 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link......................11-40 Figure 11-13 OAM of the E-Line service........................................................................................................11-46 Figure 12-1 E-LAN service................................................................................................................................12-2 Figure 12-2 Flow diagram for configuring the E-LAN service.........................................................................12-3 Figure 12-3 Networking diagram for the E-LAN service................................................................................12-13 Figure 13-1 E-AGGR service.............................................................................................................................13-2 Figure 13-2 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR service..................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-3 E-AGGR service networking diagram............................................................................................13-9 Figure 14-1 Offload solution..............................................................................................................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Offload scenario for the ATM-based service.................................................................................14-3 Figure 14-3 Offload scenario for the ETH-based service..................................................................................14-4 Figure 14-4 Offload scenario for the IP-Based services....................................................................................14-5 Figure 14-5 Configuration flow of the ATM-based service in the offload solution..........................................14-6 Figure 14-6 Configuration flow of the ETH-based service in the offload solution...........................................14-7 Figure 14-7 Configuration flow of the IP-based service in the offload solution................................................14-8 Figure 14-8 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the ATM forwarding and packet encapsulation format.........................................................................................................................................14-10 Figure 14-9 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the ETH forwarding and packet encapsulation format.........................................................................................................................................14-22 Figure 14-10 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the IP forwarding and packet encapsulation format.........................................................................................................................................14-33 Figure 15-1 Application of the alarm input/output interfaces............................................................................15-2 Figure C-1 Non-load sharing static LAG is created between NE A and NE B.................................................C-64

xii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 Attributes of NEs ...............................................................................................................................2-24 Table 2-2 NE user parameters............................................................................................................................2-25 Table 2-3 Descriptions of the parameters for Linear Multiplex Section Protection (LMSP) group..................2-27 Table 4-1 Types of PTN service interfaces..........................................................................................................4-1 Table 4-2 Application scenario of SDH interfaces...............................................................................................4-5 Table 4-3 Application scenario of PDH interfaces.............................................................................................4-10 Table 4-4 Application scenario of Ethernet interfaces.......................................................................................4-14 Table 4-5 Application scenario of serial interfaces............................................................................................4-19 Table 4-6 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface General Attributes...............................................4-29 Table 4-7 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface Layer 2 Attributes...............................................4-30 Table 4-8 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface Layer 3 Attributes...............................................4-31 Table 4-9 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of the SDH interface.................................4-34 Table 4-10 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface General Attributes.............................................4-34 Table 4-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface Layer 3 Attributes.............................................4-35 Table 4-12 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface Advanced Attributes.........................................4-37 Table 4-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface General Attributes.......................................4-38 Table 4-14 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Layer 2 Attributes.......................................4-40 Table 4-15 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Layer 3 attributes........................................4-41 Table 4-16 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Advanced Attributes...................................4-43 Table 4-17 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Flow Control...............................................4-44 Table 4-18 Descriptions of the parameters for Serial interface General Attributes...........................................4-45 Table 4-19 Descriptions of the parameters for Serial interface Layer 3 Attributes............................................4-46 Table 4-20 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet virtual interface General Attributes............................4-49 Table 4-21 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet virtual interface Layer 3 Attributes............................4-50 Table 4-22 Descriptions of the parameters for Link Aggregation Group Management.....................................4-51 Table 4-23 Descriptions of the parameters for MP Group General Attributes...................................................4-53 Table 5-1 Descriptions of the parameters for IGP-ISIS Configuration..............................................................5-17 Table 5-2 Descriptions of the parameters for MPLS-LDP Configuration.........................................................5-21 Table 5-3 Descriptions of the parameters for MPLS-RSVP Configuration.......................................................5-23 Table 5-4 Descriptions of the parameters for Static Route Management...........................................................5-24 Table 5-5 Descriptions of the parameters for Address Parse.............................................................................5-25 Table 5-6 Parameters of the node configuration.................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-7 Parameters of the port configuration..................................................................................................5-26 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

Tables

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide Table 5-8 Parameters of the route importing......................................................................................................5-26 Table 5-9 Parameters of the link TE information...............................................................................................5-26 Table 6-1 Configuration parameters of NEs.......................................................................................................6-19 Table 6-2 Configuration parameters of Tunnels.................................................................................................6-19 Table 6-3 Configuration parameters of NEs.......................................................................................................6-28 Table 6-4 Planning of Tunnel parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-29 Table 6-5 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the General Attributes tab..................6-41 Table 6-6 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Select Node tab...............................6-41 Table 6-7 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Positive Route Constraint (Reverse Route Constraint)tab.........................................................................................................................................6-42 Table 6-8 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Priority tab.....................................6-44 Table 6-9 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Fast Re-Route tab..........................6-44 Table 6-10 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the General Attributes tab......................6-45 Table 6-11 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the Select Nodes tab.................................6-45 Table 6-12 Descriptions of the parameters for the static tunnel in the Route Information tab........................6-46 Table 6-13 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the Tunnel Information tab....................6-47 Table 6-14 Descriptions of the parameters for Basic Configuration..................................................................6-47 Table 6-15 Descriptions of the parameters for Static Tunnel.............................................................................6-48 Table 6-16 Descriptions of the parameters for APS Protection......................................................................... 6-50 Table 6-17 Descriptions of the parameters for OAM.........................................................................................6-52 Table 7-1 Descriptions of the parameters for IP Tunnel Management................................................................7-3 Table 8-1 Descriptions of the parameters for GRE Tunnel Management............................................................8-3 Table 9-1 CES service clock type.........................................................................................................................9-4 Table 9-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI CES service................................................................................9-5 Table 9-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service..............................................................................9-6 Table 9-4 Configuration parameters of NE1......................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-5 Configuration parameters of NEs.......................................................................................................9-26 Table 9-6 Planning of Tunnel parameters.......................................................................................................... 9-26 Table 9-7 Configuration parameters of the CES service: NE1-NE3 (E1 timeslots partially used)....................9-28 Table 9-8 Configuration parameters of the CES service: NE1-NE3 (E1 timeslots fully used)......................... 9-29 Table 9-9 Descriptions of the parameters for CES Service Management.........................................................9-50 Table 9-10 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of CES Service Management................ 9-53 Table 9-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PW General Attributes of CES service management...............9-54 Table 9-12 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS of CES Service Management............................................9-56 Table 9-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of CES Service Management................. 9-57 Table 10-1 ATM service type and traffic...........................................................................................................10-4 Table 10-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI ATM service...........................................................................10-7 Table 10-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI ATM service.........................................................................10-9 Table 10-4 Configuration parameters of NE1..................................................................................................10-20 Table 10-5 Service types and QoS requirements..............................................................................................10-21 Table 10-6 Configuration parameters of NEs...................................................................................................10-34 Table 10-7 Planning of Tunnel parameters......................................................................................................10-34 Table 10-8 Configuration parameters of NE1..................................................................................................10-35

xiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tables

Table 10-9 Configuration parameters of NE3..................................................................................................10-36 Table 10-10 Descriptions of the parameters for Creating ATM Services.......................................................10-68 Table 10-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Attributes.......................................................................10-69 Table 10-12 Descriptions of the parameters for ATM Service Management by NE.......................................10-72 Table 10-13 Descriptions of the parameters for ATM Connection Configuration by NE...............................10-73 Table 10-14 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Configuration by NE.....................................................10-74 Table 10-15 Descriptions of the parameters for CoS Mapping by NE............................................................10-77 Table 10-16 Descriptions of the parameters for CoS Mapping........................................................................10-78 Table 11-1 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service........................................................................11-6 Table 11-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service carried by a port.............................................11-8 Table 11-3 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs.............................................11-10 Table 11-4 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link...................................11-12 Table 11-5 Requirement of the E-Line service.................................................................................................11-22 Table 11-6 Configuration parameters of NE1..................................................................................................11-22 Table 11-7 Configuration parameters of QoS..................................................................................................11-22 Table 11-8 Planning of the UNI-UNI E-Line service......................................................................................11-23 Table 11-9 Configuration parameters of NEs...................................................................................................11-28 Table 11-10 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports..........................................................11-28 Table 11-11 Configuration parameters of NEs.................................................................................................11-32 Table 11-12 Planning of the tunnel carrying the PW.......................................................................................11-33 Table 11-13 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW......................................................11-33 Table 11-14 Planning of the PW......................................................................................................................11-34 Table 11-15 Configuration parameters of NEs.................................................................................................11-40 Table 11-16 Planning of the QinQ link carrying the service............................................................................11-41 Table 11-17 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link............................................11-41 Table 11-18 Descriptions of the parameters for V-UNI Group........................................................................11-48 Table 11-19 Descriptions of the parameters for E-Line Service......................................................................11-49 Table 11-20 Descriptions of the parameters for PW........................................................................................11-50 Table 11-21 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS.......................................................................................11-51 Table 12-1 Planning of the tunnel that carries the PW.....................................................................................12-14 Table 12-2 Planning of the E-LAN service carried by a PW...........................................................................12-14 Table 12-3 Planning of the UNI port................................................................................................................12-15 Table 12-4 Planning of the PW........................................................................................................................12-15 Table 12-5 Descriptions of the parameters for an UNI Port.............................................................................12-18 Table 12-6 Descriptions of the parameters for NNI Port.................................................................................12-19 Table 12-7 Descriptions of the parameters for PW..........................................................................................12-19 Table 12-8 Descriptions of the parameters for QinQ Link...............................................................................12-21 Table 12-9 Descriptions of the parameters for Split Horizon Group...............................................................12-22 Table 12-10 Descriptions of the parameters for MAC Address Learning Parameters.....................................12-22 Table 12-11 Descriptions of the parameters for Unknown Frame Processing.................................................12-23 Table 12-12 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS.......................................................................................12-23 Table 12-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Maintenance Association......................................................12-25 Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

Tables

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide Table 12-14 Descriptions of the parameters for MEP Point............................................................................12-26 Table 12-15 Descriptions of the parameters for E-LAN Service.....................................................................12-26 Table 12-16 Descriptions of the parameters for Static MAC Address.............................................................12-28 Table 13-1 Planning of the tunnel carrying the PW...........................................................................................13-9 Table 13-2 Planning of the E-AGGR service carried by the PW.....................................................................13-10 Table 13-3 Planning of the PW........................................................................................................................13-10 Table 13-4 Planning of the VLAN forwarding tables of NE1 and NE2..........................................................13-11 Table 13-5 Planning of the VLAN forwarding table of NE3...........................................................................13-11 Table 13-6 Descriptions of the parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item...............................................13-14 Table 13-7 Descriptions of the parameters for E-AGGR Service....................................................................13-14 Table 14-1 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service..........................................................................................14-12 Table 14-2 Planning of the UNIs......................................................................................................................14-12 Table 14-3 Planning of the NNIs......................................................................................................................14-13 Table 14-4 Planning of the MPLS tunnel.........................................................................................................14-14 Table 14-5 Planning of the PW........................................................................................................................14-14 Table 14-6 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900..................................................................14-15 Table 14-7 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900..................................................................14-15 Table 14-8 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service..........................................................................................14-24 Table 14-9 Planning of the UNIs......................................................................................................................14-24 Table 14-10 Planning of the NNIs....................................................................................................................14-25 Table 14-11 Planning of the MPLS Tunnel......................................................................................................14-26 Table 14-12 Planning of the PW......................................................................................................................14-26 Table 14-13 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900................................................................14-27 Table 14-14 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900................................................................14-27 Table 14-15 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service........................................................................................14-35 Table 14-16 Planning of the UNIs....................................................................................................................14-35 Table 14-17 Planning of the NNIs....................................................................................................................14-36 Table 14-18 Planning of the static routing table entries...................................................................................14-36 Table 14-19 Planning of the Tunnel.................................................................................................................14-37 Table 14-20 Planning of the PW......................................................................................................................14-38 Table 14-21 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900................................................................14-38 Table 14-22 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900................................................................14-39 Table C-1 Default threshold for the port WRED policy....................................................................................C-56 Table C-2 Port buffer size of each board for the OptiX PTN 3900...................................................................C-56 Table C-3 Default threshold for the port WRED policy....................................................................................C-58 Table C-4 Port buffer size of each board for the OptiX PTN 3900...................................................................C-58

xvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to configure various services on the equipment. In details, this document describes the basic information and configuration process, and uses configuration examples to show how to set specific parameters.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX PTN 3900 OptiX iManager T2000 Version V100R001 V200R007C03

Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document are:
l l l

Installation and Commissioning Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer

Organization
This document is organized as follows. Chapter 1 Starting the T2000 Description This chapter describes some basic operations on the T2000.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Chapter 2 Creating Network

Description This chapter describes how to use the T2000 to create an NE, configure data, add boards, create fibers, create a subnet, configure the clock and configure protection. This chapter describes how to configure the QoS policy. This chapter describes how to configure interface attributes of boards. For PTN equipment, attributes for SDH interfaces, PDH interfaces, Ethernet interfaces and Serial interfaces can be configured. In addition, Trunk interfaces can be configured. This chapter describes the IGP-ISIS, MPLS-LDP and MPLS-RSVP protocols on the control plane, and describes how to configure these protocols. This chapter describes the MPLS, MPLS tunnel and application scenarios for the MPLS tunnel. In addition, this chapter describes how to use the T2000 to create an MPLS tunnel, an MPLS tunnel protection group and MPLS OAM. This chapter describes the basic information on the IP tunnel, and how to use the T2000 to create an IP tunnel. This chapter describes the basic information on the GRE tunnel, and how to use the T2000 to create a GRE tunnel. This chapter describes the basic information on the CES service, and uses an example to show how to configure a CES service. This chapter describes the basic information on the ATM service, and uses an example to show how to configure an ATM service. This chapter describes the basic information on the E-Line service, and uses an example to show how to configure an E-Line service. This chapter describes the basic information on the E-LAN service, and uses an example to show how to configure an E-LAN service. This chapter describes the basic information on the EAGGR service, and uses an example to show how to configure an E-AGGR service. This chapter describes the basic information on the Offload, and uses some examples to show how to configure the Offload. This chapter describes the basic information on the external environment monitoring interfaces, and how to configure the external environment monitoring.

3 Configuring the QoS Policy 4 Configuring Interfaces

5 Configuring the Control Plane 6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

7 Configuring an IP Tunnel 8 Configuring a GRE Tunnel 9 Configuring a CES Service

10 Configuring an ATM Service 11 Configuring an E-Line Service 12 Configuring an E-LAN Service 13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service 14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution 15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

About This Document

Chapter 16 Backing up the Configuration Data A Glossary B Acronyms and Abbreviations C Parameter Reference

Description This chapter describes the operations to back up and restore the NE configuration data. This appendix lists the terms used in this document. This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document. This appendix lists some parameters in this document.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows. Symbol Description

DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time.

WARNING

CAUTION
NOTE

TIP

General Conventions
Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation
Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Based on Product Version V100R001

The updated contents are as follows.
l

As the NMS interfaces about per-trail creation of CES services and ATM services are changed, the related description is modified. Chapter 6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel: The configuration process is added. Chapter 9 Configuring a CES Service: The configuration process and the configuration examples of the CES services are optimized.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

About This Document

Chapter 11 Configuring an E-Line Service: The configuration process and the configuration examples of the E-Line services are optimized.

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-03-16) Based on Product Version V100R001

The updated contents are as follows.
l

Chapter 6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel: Information about the rerouting mode is modified.

Updates in Issue 04 (2009-02-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

The updated contents are as follows.
l

Chapter 2 Creating Network: The setting of the frequency source selection mode and setting of the PTP clock are added. Chapter 10 Configuring an ATM Service: The configuration process and the configuration examples of the ATM services are optimized.

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-10-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

The updated contents are as follows.
l

Chapter 2 Creating Network: The configuration of a TPS protection group of sub-boards is added. Chapter 12 Configuring an E-LAN Service: Information about how to manage the blacklist and how to set the broadcast storm suppression is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-08-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

The updated contents are as follows.
l

Chapter 9 Configuring a CES Service: The example of configuring the CES service is optimized. Chapter 14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution: The configuration flow diagram is optimized.

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-05-10) Based on Product Version V100R001

This document of the V100R001 version is the first release.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1 Starting the T2000

1
About This Chapter

Starting the T2000

The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, troublefree launch of the T2000. 1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000 The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000. 1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views The T2000 common views are the key interfaces to manage various network objects, for example, Main Topology and NE Explorer. You can use these views to manage the topology, equipment.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 Starting the T2000

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000

The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

Context
l

You are recommended to start the computer and the T2000 application in the following sequence: Start the computer, start the T2000 server, and then start the T2000 client. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 application and the computer in the following sequence: Exit the T2000 client, stop the T2000 server, and then shut down the computer.

1.1.1 Starting the Computer To avoid computer damage or data loss, strictly follow the procedure provided, to start the computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required. 1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network. 1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty. 1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client. 1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the T2000 client. 1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut down the T2000 server. 1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

1.1.1 Starting the Computer

To avoid computer damage or data loss, strictly follow the procedure provided, to start the computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1 Starting the T2000

Prerequisite
l l

The T2000 must be installed correctly. The power cable of the workstation or the computer, the power cable of the monitor, data line and Ethernet line must be connected correctly. If there is printer, modem or other peripherals, their power line and data line must be connected correctly.

Background Information
The T2000 can run in the UNIX or Windows operating system. The functions are the same in each operating system. To learn about the recommended hardware configuration, refer to the OptiX iManager T2000 Product Description.

Procedure
l On UNIX 1. 2. 3. 4. l 1. 2. 3. 4. ----End Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals. Power on the workstation and the Solaris is automatically started. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User: t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default). Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals. Power on the computer and the Windows is automatically started. The Login dialog box is displayed. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User: t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default). Click OK to open the Windows user interface.

On Windows

1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server

After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the T2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisite
l l l l

The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly. The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly. The T2000 license must be in the server directory. The SQL Server must be started and work normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-3

1 Starting the T2000

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter User Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name: admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.) and Server: Local.
NOTE

Periodically change the password and memorize it.

Step 3 Click Login. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server is started successfully.
NOTE

If the System Monitor application is started, you can restart the T2000 server on the System Monitor. Perform the following step: Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in the Running state, the T2000 server is started properly.

----End

1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status

When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

Background Information
To view the status of the T2000 processes by UNIX command line, run the following command:
# /T2000/server/bin/showt2000server

If each process entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change, the T2000 processes are normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Start and log in to the System Monitor. Step 2 In the user interface of the System Monitor, click the Process tab, and view whether the status of each process is Running.
l

If the process status is Stopped, right-click on the process, and choose Start Process from the shortcut menu. In this manner, the process is in the Running state. If the manual startup fails, it indicates that the process is abnormal. To save resources, you can close unwanted processes. Set the startup mode of the desired process to Manual, and then select Stop Process.

l l

----End

1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client

You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the T2000 client.

Prerequisite
The T2000 server must be started correctly.
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1 Starting the T2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000 Client icon on the desktop. Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password of the T2000 client in the Login dialog box. For example, User Name: admin; Password: T2000.
NOTE

l l

By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 from unauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password. The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters. 1. 2. 3. Click to display the Setting dialog box.

Click New to display another Setting dialog box. In the Setting dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode and Server Name.
NOTE

l l l

The IP address is the IP address used by the T2000 server. The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you choose the Security (SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted. The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. Otherwise, the client cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the server, choose System > Communication Security Setting on the Main Menu of the System Monitor client. You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Port number automatically.

4. 5.

Click OK to complete adding a server. Click OK to complete the server settings.

Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000. ----End

1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client

Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the T2000 client.

Prerequisite
The T2000 client must be started normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
NOTE

If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Confirm dialog box appears asking you whether to save the changes. After you confirm the dialog box, automatically exit the client.

----End
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-5

1 Starting the T2000

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server

When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut down the T2000 server.

Prerequisite
All the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down.

Background Information
When performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000), you need to shut down the T2000 server first. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 server in the way of "shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor".

Procedure
l Shut down the T2000 server only.
NOTE

In this case, the MDP process is not shut down and the database cannot be initialized.

1. 2. l

In the System Monitor, choose System > Stop All NMS Service from the Main Menu. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. When all the processes are in the Stopped status, the T2000 server is stopped normally.

Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor.

NOTE

After all the T2000 processes are finished, you can initialize the database.

On Windows, enter net stop imapservice under the prompt in the DOS window and press Enter.
TIP

On Windows, click Start and then click Run. In the Run window, enter cmd and click OK. The DOS window is displayed.

----End

1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer

Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

Prerequisite
The T2000 server and client applications must be stopped.

1-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

1 Starting the T2000

Precaution

CAUTION
To avoid equipment damages or data loss, perform the following step one by one to shut down the workstation.

Procedure
l On UNIX platform 1. Enter the following commands in the terminal window, the UNIX workstation shuts down automatically:
% su root Password: rootkit # sync;sync;sync;sync;sync # shutdown -y -g0 -i5
NOTE

l l

rootkit is the default password of super user root. If the password is changed, enter the new password. To restart the Sun workstation, the last command is # shutdown -y -g0 -i6.

2. l 1. 2. 3. ----End

Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. The computer shuts down automatically. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.

On Windows platform

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views

The T2000 common views are the key interfaces to manage various network objects, for example, Main Topology and NE Explorer. You can use these views to manage the topology, equipment. 1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology After opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology, for example, creating a topology object, creating a subnet, and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology. 1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a hierachical manner.

1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology

After opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology, for example, creating a topology object, creating a subnet, and locking the position of an NE icon in the topology.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-7

1 Starting the T2000

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be a Network Management (NM) user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
l l To open the Main Topology, log in to the T2000 client. Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer

The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a hierachical manner.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

Procedure
Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu. ----End

1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

2
About This Chapter

Creating Network

NEs and fibers or cables can be managed on the T2000 only after their topologies are created. 2.1 Creating NEs Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one. 2.2 Creating an NE User The default NE user is a system-level user. To ensure the data security of the NE, allocate different authorities for different NE users according to their working content. This section describes how to create an NE user on the T2000 and how to allocate the authority. In this way, you can control the access and configuration of the NE operators. 2.3 Switching a Logged-In NM User Different NM users have different authorities. You can log in as another user to perform operations of different levels. 2.4 Configuring NE Data Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE. There are two ways of configuring the NE data: copy NE data and upload. 2.5 Adding Boards When configuring the NE dataAfter the NE data is configured, if physical boards are added, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment. 2.6 Adding Sub-Boards The equipment can realize different functions after you add different sub-boards to a processing board. 2.7 Configuring the Equipment-Level Protection The equipment-level protection includes the subcard TPS protection and board 1+1 protection.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-1

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2.8 Creating Fibers for PTN Equipment Manually NEs communicate with each other through fibers. After creating boards for each NE, you need to create fibers for further configuration of services. In this situation, you can manually create fibers one by one. 2.9 Creating a Topology Subnet The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them in one topology subnet. 2.10 Configuring Inband DCN The inband DCN refers to a DCN solution in which the service channels provided by the managed equipment are used to complete the network equipment management. When inband DCN is applied, the T2000 information is transported through service channels of the equipment. When the inband DCN is used for networking, no exclusive DCN channels are required. Hence, much network construction cost is saved. 2.11 Configuring Clocks The stable clock is the basis to normal functioning of an NE. You must configure clocks for all NEs prior to configuring services. In addition, you need to configure clock protection for complex networks. 2.12 Configuring Linear MSP In a chain network, you can configure a linear multiplex section protection (MSP) to protect services in the link. 2.13 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the network configuration.

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

2.1 Creating NEs

Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two methods of creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in batches. When you need to create only a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs one by one. 2.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches When the T2000 communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the NE. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation. 2.1.2 Creating a Single NE The T2000 can manage an NE after the NE is created. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and accurate as creating NEs in batches, you can perform this operation regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.

2.1.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the T2000 communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the NE. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher. The T2000 must communicate properly with the GNE. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Search for NE from the Main Menu. The Search for NE window is displayed. Step 2 Click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set Address type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, click OK.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NOTE

You can repeat Steps 2 through 3 to add more search domains. You can delete the system default search domain.
l

If you use IP address to search for NEs:

l

Usually, the broadcast function is disabled on the routers on a network, to avoid network broadcast storm. Therefore, by using the IP Address Range of GNE method, only the NEs in the same network segment can be searched out. To search the network segments across routers, the IP Address of GNE method is recommended. Through a gateway NE, you can search out the NEs in the network segment of the gateway NE.

Step 4 Click Start. The Search for NE dialog box is displayed. Step 5 In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations: l l Select Search for NE and click OK to search for all NEs in the selected domain. Select Create device after search, and enter NE user and Password. Then, click OK.

NOTE

l l

The default NE user is root. The default password is password.

Select Upload after create and click OK, so that the NE data can be uploaded to the T2000 after the NE is created.

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

2 Creating Network

If you select all options in the Search for NE dialog box, you can search for NEs, create the NEs, and upload the NE data at one time.

Step 6 Optional: If you select Search for NE only, you can select the NEs, which are not yet created, in the Result list after the search for NEs is complete. Click Create and then the Create dialog box is displayed. Enter User Name and Password in the Create dialog box, and then click OK. ----End

Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l l

The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

2.1.2 Creating a Single NE

The T2000 can manage an NE after the NE is created. Although creating a single NE is not as fast and accurate as creating NEs in batches, you can perform this operation regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher. The license must be installed and the license must support creating the NE of the type. The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Context
First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE. If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the T2000 is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the shortcut menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree. Step 3 Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks. Step 4 To create a GNE, proceed to Step 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to Step 6. Step 5 Choose Gateway Type, Protocol and set the IP address. 1. 2.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the Protocol type.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

If the T2000 communicates with NEs through IP protocol

Do...

Select IP from the Protocol drop-down list. Enter the IP Address and use the default value for the Port number of the GNE.

NOTE

The domain address that contains a maximum of 13 bytes is entered by the user. NSEL is the port number of the network-level protocol, with a fixed value of 1d (one byte).

Step 6 Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which the NE is associated to from the Affiliated Gateway drop-down list. Step 7 Enter the NE User and Password.
NOTE

The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.

Step 8 Click OK. Then, click in the blank space of the Main Topology and the NE icon appears in the position where you clicked. ----End

Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the T2000 database.

Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l

The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID. The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user. The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

l l

2.2 Creating an NE User

The default NE user is a system-level user. To ensure the data security of the NE, allocate different authorities for different NE users according to their working content. This section describes how to create an NE user on the T2000 and how to allocate the authority. In this way, you can control the access and configuration of the NE operators.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher. The NE must be successfully created.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

2-6

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Background Information
The default NE user has the system level authority. To guarantee NE data security, it is recommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE User Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Object Tree, select an NE and click .

Step 3 Click Add and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.
NOTE

For details on the parameters for NE User attributes, seeTable 2-2.

Step 4 Enter the NE user name in the NE User field. Step 5 Select the User Level as needed. Step 6 In the NE User Flag field, select a user type according to the type of the terminal through which the user logs in to the NE. Step 7 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password field. Step 8 In the NE Name field, select the NEs that this NE user is allowed to manage.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-7

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 9 Click OK. ----End

2.3 Switching a Logged-In NM User

Different NM users have different authorities. You can log in as another user to perform operations of different levels.

Prerequisite
You have already logged in to the T2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Logout from the Main Menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Step 2 The Save coordinates dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
NOTE

This step is to executed when the view deploy is changed.

Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the Login dialog box.

Step 4 Click Login. ----End

2.4 Configuring NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE. There are two ways of configuring the NE data: copy NE data and upload.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

2-8

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

2 Creating Network

The NE must be created successfully.

Context
In the case of NE data copy, copy the configured NE data to the unconfigured NE so that the NE enters the configuration status. Then, you can manage the configuration of the NE by using the T2000. In the case of data upload, upload the user-side NE data to the T2000 so that you can manage the configuration of the NE by using the T2000.

Procedure
l To copy the NE data, do as follows:
NOTE

The NE type, NE software version and hardware configuration of the source NE must be consistent with those of the copied NE.

1. 2. 3.

Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Choose Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed. Select the NE in the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the copy operation copies all the data of the source NE.

4.

Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the copy operation results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.

5. 6. l 1. 2. 3. 4. ----End

Click OK to start the copy. Wait for a few seconds. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. The NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed. Choose Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the upload may take a long time. Click OK to start the upload. Wait for a few seconds. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Upload:

2.5 Adding Boards

When configuring the NE dataAfter the NE data is configured, if physical boards are added, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-9

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The NE must be created. There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.

Context
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. A logical board refers to a board that is created on the T2000. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.
NOTE

The NE panel is able to indicate the mapping relation between slots that house processing boards and interface boards. When you click a processing board that is paired with an interface board in the NE panel, the ID of the slot that houses the mapping interface board is displayed in orange.

Procedure
Step 1 Open the NE Panel. For the PTN equipment, double-click the icon of the NE. Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list. ----End

2.6 Adding Sub-Boards

The equipment can realize different functions after you add different sub-boards to a processing board.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. Applies to only MP1 board.

Context
Hot swappable service sub-board interfaces are provided on the MP1 board. When different service sub-boards are inserted, the TDM E1, IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, ATM STM-N and channelized STM-N signals can be assessed and processed.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE on the Main Topology and the NE Panel is displayed in the user interface. Step 2 Select the desired processing board, right-click in the blank area that displays sub-boards, and select the desired sub-board.

2-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

----End

2.7 Configuring the Equipment-Level Protection

The equipment-level protection includes the subcard TPS protection and board 1+1 protection. 2.7.1 Creating a TPS Protection Group of Sub-Boards The working board and protection board form a TPS protection group. If the working board becomes faulty after the creation of a TPS protection group is completed, the service is automatically switched to the protection board. 2.7.2 Querying the Board 1+1 Protection Group You can create 1+1 protection for the SCC and cross-connect boards. When the working board fails, the services are automatically switched to the protection board.

2.7.1 Creating a TPS Protection Group of Sub-Boards

The working board and protection board form a TPS protection group. If the working board becomes faulty after the creation of a TPS protection group is completed, the service is automatically switched to the protection board.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Creation of the working and protection service sub-boards must be completed.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > TPS Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create and the Create TPS Protection Group dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the protection board and the working board, and set priorities in the working board list. For details on the parameters for TPS protection group of sub-boards, seeParameter Description of "TPS Protection" in the Feature Description. Step 4 Set the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. Step 5 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-11

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2.7.2 Querying the Board 1+1 Protection Group

You can create 1+1 protection for the SCC and cross-connect boards. When the working board fails, the services are automatically switched to the protection board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the current primary and secondary status from the NE. ----End

2.8 Creating Fibers for PTN Equipment Manually

NEs communicate with each other through fibers. After creating boards for each NE, you need to create fibers for further configuration of services. In this situation, you can manually create fibers one by one.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. The boards to be connected with fibers or cables must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > Link. The Add Object dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Choose Link > Fiber/Cable from the left pane. Step 3 Click the button in Source NE. Select the source board and port in the Select the source end of the link dialog box. Step 4 Click OK and the cursor changes to a + sign. Step 5 Click the sink NE of the fiber or cable on the Main Topology. Step 6 Click the button in Sink NE. Select the sink board and port in the Select the sink end of the link dialog box.
TIP

When selecting a wrong source or sink NE, right-click and click OK in the Object Selection dialog box to exit.

Step 7 Click OK. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box.

2-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Step 8 Click OK. The created fiber or cable appears between the source and sink NEs on the Main Topology. Step 9 Select the fiber you create, right-click and choose Detect Link from the shortcut menu. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the fiber connection information. ----End

2.9 Creating a Topology Subnet

The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them in one topology subnet.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
A topology subnet is created only to simplify the user interface and has no impact on the NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click the Properties tab in the Add Object dialog box. Enter the attributes of the subnet. Step 3 Click the Select Objects tab. Select the created NEs or subnet from the Available Objects pane. . Click
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-13

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NOTE

In the case of a similar dialog box for selecting objects,

l l

indicates that to select the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right. indicates that to select all the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.

Step 4 Click OK. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology, the where you clicked. ----End

icon appears in the position

2.10 Configuring Inband DCN

The inband DCN refers to a DCN solution in which the service channels provided by the managed equipment are used to complete the network equipment management. When inband DCN is applied, the T2000 information is transported through service channels of the equipment. When the inband DCN is used for networking, no exclusive DCN channels are required. Hence, much network construction cost is saved.

Context
The PTN equipment can distinguish service channels and network management channels according to the MPLS labels or VLAN IDs. When the channels are distinguished by the VLAN IDs, see Operation Tasks of Configuring an Inband DCN to configure inband DCN in Feature Description.

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

2.11 Configuring Clocks

The stable clock is the basis to normal functioning of an NE. You must configure clocks for all NEs prior to configuring services. In addition, you need to configure clock protection for complex networks. 2.11.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode The OptiX PTN equipment supports two synchronization modes, that is, physical synchronization mode and PTP synchronization mode. The frequency source selection mode is used to set the clock synchronization mode of the NE. Before configuring the IEEE 1588 clock, you should set the frequency source selection mode to the PTP synchronization mode. 2.11.2 Setting the PTP Clock IEEE 1588 V2 is a standard for a precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and control systems. Each slave clock exchanges synchronization packets with the master clock and thus maintains network-wide time/clock synchronization. 2.11.3 Configuring the NE Clock Source Before configuring services, you must configure the NE clock source and specify the priority level to ensure that correct clock trace relations are created for all the NEs in the network. 2.11.4 Configuring the Clock Source Protection In a complicated clock network, you need to configure the clock protection for all NEs. After you set the clock source and specify the clock priority level for the NEs, you can enable the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent the NEs from tracing an incorrect clock source. This is how the clocks are protected. 2.11.5 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources If the traceable clock source of an NE is line clock, you can customize switching conditions for the clock source, so that the NE switches to other clocks when the clock source fails. In this manner, services are less affected. 2.11.6 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion When there are multiple clock sources for an NE, set the clock sources to automatic reversion mode, so that the deteriorated clock source automatically becomes the traceable timing reference after it recovers. 2.11.7 Configuring the Phase-Locked Source for External Clock Output When a clock signal passes through 14 or more NEs, frequency offset and drift may occur. As a result, the clock signal transmitted to the downstream NE is degraded. To avoid clock signal degrade, you need to set a 2M phase-locked source to optimize the clock signal. 2.11.8 Setting the Clock Source Quality In a complex clock network, there may be some unknown clock sources. You can uniformly define these clock sources as unavailable clocks so that NEs do not trace wrong clock sources. The NE obtains their quality information automatically for clock sources that are allocated to an NE. You should define the quality level of clock sources only during test and maintenance. 2.11.9 Configuring the SSM Output If the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock signals carry SSM messages automatically. You can prevent clock sources from sending SSM messages to other clock subnets. This helps you to ensure that the equipment of different clock subnets do not affect each other at the edge of clock networks. 2.11.10 Switching a Clock Source
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-15

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When the traceable clock source in a network deteriorates, NEs may not be able to execute a switch on the clock source. You need to manually switch the clock source to prevent clock deterioration from affecting the normal running of NEs.

2.11.1 Setting the Frequency Selection Mode

The OptiX PTN equipment supports two synchronization modes, that is, physical synchronization mode and PTP synchronization mode. The frequency source selection mode is used to set the clock synchronization mode of the NE. Before configuring the IEEE 1588 clock, you should set the frequency source selection mode to the PTP synchronization mode.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Clock > Frequency Selection Mode from the Function Tree. Step 2 In Frequency Selection Mode, you can select one of the clock synchronization mode.

CAUTION
l

When the external time interface is set to the external time input interface, the NE can run in only the physical synchronization mode. That is, the frequency selection mode of the equipment that accesses the external clock must be set to the physical synchronization mode. When the NE is running in the PTP synchronization mode, the external interface cannot be set to the external time input interface.

Step 3 Click Apply. ----End

2.11.2 Setting the PTP Clock

IEEE 1588 V2 is a standard for a precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and control systems. Each slave clock exchanges synchronization packets with the master clock and thus maintains network-wide time/clock synchronization.

Context
For details of configuring the PTP clock , refer to PTP Clock in the Feature Description.

2.11.3 Configuring the NE Clock Source

Before configuring services, you must configure the NE clock source and specify the priority level to ensure that correct clock trace relations are created for all the NEs in the network.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Context
To implement clock protection, you must configure at least two traceable clock sources for the equipment. Usually, the tributary clock is not used as the clock source for the equipment. After you set the clock sources for all the NEs, query the networkwide clock trace status again. For details, see Viewing the Clock Trace Search.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing clock source. Step 3 Click Create. In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a new clock source and click OK. Step 4 Optional: If an external clock source is selected, select External Clock Source Mode according to the type of external clock signals. For 2 Mbit/s clocks, specify the Synchronous Status Byte to deliver SSM message. Step 5 Select a clock source, and click or to adjust its priority level. The clock sources are arranged in the descending order. The clock source on top is the preferred one for the NE.
NOTE

Internal clock sources have the lowest priority because of their low precision.

Step 6 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
NOTE

If the clock trace relation changes because of the clock source change, the Prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to refresh the clock trace relation. Usually you can click OK. If you select Disable Prompting Next Time, the Prompt dialog box is not displayed even when the clock trace relation changes.

----End

2.11.4 Configuring the Clock Source Protection

In a complicated clock network, you need to configure the clock protection for all NEs. After you set the clock source and specify the clock priority level for the NEs, you can enable the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent the NEs from tracing an incorrect clock source. This is how the clocks are protected.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Clock Subnet tab. Click Query to query the existing parameter settings.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 3 Select Start Standard SSM Protocol or Start Extended SSM Protocol.
NOTE

The same SSM protection protocol must be used within the same clock protection subnet.

Step 4 Set the subnet number of the clock subnet to which the NE is associated.
NOTE

Allocate the same subnet number to NEs tracing the same clock source.

Step 5 Optional: If the extended SSM protocol starts, set the clock ID of the clock source. Step 6 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 7 Optional: If the clock ID is specified for the line clock of an NE, click the Clock ID Status tab, and set the Enabled Status to Enabled. Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End

2.11.5 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources

If the traceable clock source of an NE is line clock, you can customize switching conditions for the clock source, so that the NE switches to other clocks when the clock source fails. In this manner, services are less affected.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Switching Condition tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing parameter settings. Step 3 Double-click the parameter column and set the alarms and performance events that are to be used as the clock source switching conditions to Yes.

Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End
2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

2.11.6 Configuring the Clock Source Reversion

When there are multiple clock sources for an NE, set the clock sources to automatic reversion mode, so that the deteriorated clock source automatically becomes the traceable timing reference after it recovers.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab. Step 2 Double-click and set the reversion mode and the WTR time.

NOTE

Do not set Clock Source WTR Time(min) to 0 to avoid repeated switching when the clock is unstable.

Step 3 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End

2.11.7 Configuring the Phase-Locked Source for External Clock Output

When a clock signal passes through 14 or more NEs, frequency offset and drift may occur. As a result, the clock signal transmitted to the downstream NE is degraded. To avoid clock signal degrade, you need to set a 2M phase-locked source to optimize the clock signal.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > PhaseLocked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing parameter settings. Step 3 Set the external clock attributes of the 2M phase-locked source. Set the parameters manually such as External Clock Output Mode, External Clock Output Timeslot and so on. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

Example
As shown in Figure 2-1, n NEs comprise a long transmission chain and the external BITS1 equipment is used as the clock synchronization source. After the transmission over several NEs,
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-19

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

the BITS1 clock signals are degraded to a certain degree. In this case, you can output the BITS1 signals from NEm that requires clock quality compensation to the local BITS2 equipment for compensating the signals. Then, after the compensation, the clock signals are transmitted from the BITS2 equipment to NEm, to function as the clock synchronization source of the downstream equipment. The 2M phase-locked source of NEm should be the input clock source of the west line board, and the clock synchronization source should be the BITS2 PRC input externally. Figure 2-1 Typical application
BITS1 BITS2

NE1

west

west

NEm

east

west

NEn

Clock Signal Flow

To make sure that the BITS2 equipment receives clock signals from NEm correctly, you need to set the output external clock of NEm. Perform the settings according to parameters of the BITS2 equipment and make sure that the settings on NEm are consistent with the settings on the BITS2 equipment.

2.11.8 Setting the Clock Source Quality

In a complex clock network, there may be some unknown clock sources. You can uniformly define these clock sources as unavailable clocks so that NEs do not trace wrong clock sources. The NE obtains their quality information automatically for clock sources that are allocated to an NE. You should define the quality level of clock sources only during test and maintenance.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Quality tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the existing parameter settings. Step 3 Click the Clock Source Quality tab and set Configuration Quality to a desired level.

2-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

2 Creating Network

Generally, use the default Automatic Extraction.

Step 4 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. Step 5 If the quality level of a clock source is zero, you can specify the level manually. Click the Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level tab and set Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level to a desired level. Step 6 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End

2.11.9 Configuring the SSM Output

If the standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock signals carry SSM messages automatically. You can prevent clock sources from sending SSM messages to other clock subnets. This helps you to ensure that the equipment of different clock subnets do not affect each other at the edge of clock networks.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the SSM Output Control tab. Step 2 Set the Control Status of the clock source.

Step 3 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close. ----End

2.11.10 Switching a Clock Source

When the traceable clock source in a network deteriorates, NEs may not be able to execute a switch on the clock source. You need to manually switch the clock source to prevent clock deterioration from affecting the normal running of NEs.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The clock source has been created.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-21

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Context

CAUTION
Performing clock source switching may cause service interruption.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree. Click the Clock Source Switching tab. Step 2 Click Query to query the current switching status of a clock source. Step 3 Optional: If the Lock Status is Lock, right-click and choose Release Lockout. Step 4 Right-click the clock source that you want to switch and choose a switching operation.
NOTE

Before switching the clock source, make sure that the new clock source that is not locked and that is of a good quality is created in the priority table.

Step 5 Optional: To restore the automatic clock source selection mode, right-click the switched clock source and choose Clear Switching. ----End

2.12 Configuring Linear MSP

In a chain network, you can configure a linear multiplex section protection (MSP) to protect services in the link. 2.12.1 Linear MSP Linear multiplex section (MS) is an SDH protection mechanism to protect services in an SDH chain network. 2.12.2 Configuring Linear MSP For a link network, you can configure a linear MSP to protect services in the link.

2.12.1 Linear MSP

Linear multiplex section (MS) is an SDH protection mechanism to protect services in an SDH chain network.

Implementation Principle
Linear multiplex section protection (MSP) includes 1+1 linear MSP and 1:1 linear MSP, which use the protection channel to protect services transmitted in the working channel. When a fault of the working channel occurs, services are switched to the protection channel. The linear MSP applies to POS interface and structured STM-N interface. The APS protocol of the MSP is transmitted by using the protection channel, and the two NEs at the two ends of an MS transmit the protocol status and switching status to each other. The NEs perform a switching of services according to the protocol status and switching status.
2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

SDH 1+1 Linear MSP

See Figure 2-2. When the SDH 1+1 linear MSP is used, services are dual fed and selectively received. If a fault of the working channel occurs, the receive end of services uses the protection channel to receive the services, and thus a service switching is performed. Figure 2-2 SDH 1+1 linear MSP
Service detection point Working path Line board Line board Service detection point

Access

Cross-connect

Cross-connect

Access

Line board Protection path

Line board

SDH 1:1 Linear MSP

See Figure 2-3. When the SDH 1:1 linear MSP is used, services are transmitted in the working channel. When a fault of the working channel occurs, services are switched to the protection channel and are single-fed and single-received. The APS protocol is transmitted by using the protection channel, and the two NEs at the two ends of an MS transmit the protocol status and switching status to each other. The NEs perform a switching of services and selectively receive the services according to the protocol status and switching status. Figure 2-3 SDH 1:1 linear MSP
Service detection point Working path Line board Line board Service detection point

Access

Cross-connect

Cross-connect

Access

Line board Protection path

Line board

NOTE

In the case of the linear MSP, do not configure any extra service on the protection path.

2.12.2 Configuring Linear MSP

For a link network, you can configure a linear MSP to protect services in the link.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-23

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. When the CD1 or POD41 is used to configure the linear MSP, disable the DCN for the port where the protection channel resides.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create. The Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set parameters, such as Protection Type, Switching Mode and Revertive Mode for the newly created linear MSP. For details on the parameters for linear MSP groups, see Table 2-3. Step 4 In Slot Mapping Relation, click West Working Unit and select the board with the working unit from the list of mapping modes. Then, click to finish the mapping of West Working Unit. Similarly, set the mapping of the west protection unit. Step 5 Optional: Click Active check box. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Select a created protection group and click Start Protocol. Then, the protection group takes effect. Step 8 Optional: Select a created protection group and click Stop Protocol. The protection protocol stops running. ----End

2.13 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the network configuration.

Descriptions of the parameters for NEs

Table 2-1 Attributes of NEs Field Type ID Extended ID Name Value OptiX PTN 3900 For example: 3900 For example: 9 For example: NE1 Description The system searches the type automatically. Input the NE ID according to the networking planning. Input the extended ID of the NE. Enter the NE name, which contains a maximum of 64 characters. It is recommended that the name is set in a format of "site name serial Number". If the site name is very long, you can use an acronym.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

2-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Field Remarks Gateway Type

Value Non-gateway, Gateway Default: Nongateway

Description Set extra notes of the NE if desired. The maximum length is 32 characters. The gateway type of an NE decides the mode of communication between the NE and the NM. A gateway NE can communicate with the NM directly, but a non-gateway NE can only communicate with the NM through a gateway NE. The gateway type is set on the basis of physical connection. Displays the protocol used for communication between the Gateway NE and the NM. This parameter is available only when the protocol of the gateway NE is the IP protocol. Input the IP address of the gateway NE according to the networking planning. This parameter is available only when the gateway is an IP gateway. Displays the port of the gateway NE. When you are creating a Non-Gateway NE, you can select a created gateway NE as its affiliated GNE here. Displays the protocol used for communication between the affiliated Gateway NE and the NM. The NE name is used when logging in to the NE. Before the NE is configured, use the internally reserved user name root for login. Corresponds to the above NE user password. The corresponding password for the reserved user root is password.

Protocol IP Address

IP, OSI For example: 129.9.191.240

Port

Default: 1400

Affiliated Gateway

For example: NE2

Affiliated Gateway Protocol NE User

IP, OSI For example: root

Password

For example: password

Descriptions of the parameters for NE user

Table 2-2 NE user parameters Field NE User Value For example: USER Description The name of the NE user. The name consists of 4-16 characters. It can be a combination of letters, digits, spaces and underlines. Note that at least one letter must be included.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field User Level

Value Monitor level, Operation level, Maintenance level, System level, Debug level.

Description The operations carried out by the NE user are classified into five levels, namely monitor level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, debug level from the lowest level to the highest. Each user of higher level can perform all the functions that a lower level user can do. The detailed right settings for each level are:
l

Monitor level: all query commands, log in/out, and modification of its own password. Operation level: all settings for fault and performance, partial security settings, and partial configuration. Maintenance level: partial security settings, partial configuration, communication settings, and log management. System level: all security settings, all configuration. Debug level: all security settings, all configuration, and all debug commands. Debug level is the highest level.

NE User Flag

LCT NE User, EMS NE User, CMD NE User, General NE User

Different NM systems log in to the NE using different NE users. LCT NE User: The LCT is the local craft terminal of the T2000. This user is the one that the LCT uses for managing the NE. EMS NE User: The EMS is the T2000. This user is the one that the T2000 uses for managing the NE. CMD NE User: CMD is the command line NMS. This user is the one that is used for managing the NE by command line. General NE User: NE user without partition NM.

Detailed Description New Password

Displays the user description. Up to 32 characters can be Description entered. New password of the user. The password consists of 6-16 characters. It can be a combination of English characters, digits, space and underlines. Note that the password cannot be composed all by digits or all by letters. It cannot contain special characters. The new password of the user that you need to enter again.

Confirm Password

2-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Field Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately

Value Yes, No

Description Sets whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately.

Descriptions of the parameters for Linear Multiplex Section Protection (LMSP) group
Table 2-3 Descriptions of the parameters for Linear Multiplex Section Protection (LMSP) group Field Protection Group ID Protection Group Type Switching Mode Revertive Mode Value For example: 1 1+1 Protection, 1:N Protection Single-Ended Switching, Dual-Ended Switching Non-Revertive, Revertive Description The ID of the Linear MS protection group. The protection type of a linear MSP group. The switching mode of a linear MSP group. Sets whether the services protected automatically switches back to the working channel after the working channel recovers. The WTR time of a linear MSP group. Whether to enable SD to serve as the MSP switching condition.

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720 Default: 600

SD enable

Enabled, Disabled

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

2 Creating Network

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Protocol Type

Value New Protocol, Restructure Protocol Default: New Protocol

Description The type of MSP protocol. New Protocol: The protocol that is previously supported and is applicable to new equipment. Currently it is a widely used protocol. Restructure Protocol: Optimized based on the new protocol and provides better protocol protection measures to make the protocol stabler. A combination of the new protocol and the restructure protocol leads to an NE interconnection failure. Hence, ensure the same protocol type is used by the interconnected NEs.

Protocol Status SD/SF PRI Switching Tag Switching Mode Indication Activation Status Protection Unit West Line

Unknown, Already Started High priority, Low priority Indicated, Not indicated Active, Inactive Working Unit, Protection Unit For example: 21-POD41-1 (PORT-1) Unknown, Force to Standby, Manual to Standby, Exercise, Switch upon signal degradation, Switch upon signal failure, Lockout, NonRevertive Request, Force to Active, Manual to Active, Signal Fail-Protection, Signal Degrade-Protection, Wait-To-Restore, Wait-ToSwitch, Idle, Switching, Not Locked out For example: 21-POD41-2 (PORT-2)

Displays the status of MS protocol. The priority of the SD/SF as a switching condition. Whether the switching mode is indicated. Sets the activation status. Protection unit or working unit. West protection unit and west working unit of a linear MS protection group. The switching status of the west line.

West Switching Status

Protected Unit

Displays the board that is under protection.

2-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2 Creating Network

Field Remote/Local End Indication

Value Remote, Local

Description When the protection group is in Dual-Ended Switching mode, displays whether the switching request is from the remote end or the local end.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-29

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

3 Configuring the QoS Policy

3
Context

Configuring the QoS Policy

The PTN equipment supports the HQoS. For the PTN equipment, the configurable QoS polices include the port policy, V-UNI ingress policy, V-UNI egress policy, PW policy, QinQ policy, scheduling policy and discarding policy.

For details on how to configure the port policy, refer to Creating the Port Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the V-UNI ingress policy, refer to Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the V-UNI egress policy, refer to Creating the V-UNI Egress Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the PW policy, refer to Creating the PW Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the QinQ policy, refer to Creating the QinQ Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the ATM policy, refer to Creating the ATM Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the WFQ scheduling policy, refer to Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy in the Feature Description. For details on how to configure the service WRED policy, refer to Creating the Service WRED Policy in the Feature Description.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4
About This Chapter
Context

Configuring Interfaces

This section describes how to set the interface attributes of the boards. In the case of the PTN equipment, the attributes of SDH interfaces, PDH interfaces, Ethernet interfaces, Ethernet virtual interfaces, Serial interfaces and MP Group can be set.

The settings of the interface attributes of an interface depends on the application scenario. For details, refer to Table 4-1. Table 4-1 Types of PTN service interfaces Service Interface Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type General attributes Port Type MP Group Supported or Not Not supported Function

SDH interface

Physical port

Sets together with the Layer 3 attributes or connects to the equipment as the channelized STM service interface. This interface can carry the ATM services. This interface can carry tunnels after the PPP is enabled.

Layer 2 attributes Layer 3 attributes

Physical port

Not supported

Physical port

Not supported

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Service Interface

Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type General attributes Layer 2 attributes Layer 3 attributes

Port Type

MP Group Supported or Not Not supported

Function

PDH interface

Physical port

This interface can carry the TDM services. Carries the IMA signals. This interface can be added into a multilink PPP (MP) group after the PPP is enabled. Sets together with the Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes. Carries the userside or networkside Ethernet services. Carries tunnels. Sets together with the Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes. Carries the Ethernet services for VLAN Sub Interface.
l

Physical port Physical port

Not supported Supported

Ethernet interface

General attributes

None

None

Layer 2 attributes

Physical port

Not supported

Layer 3 attributes Ethernet Virtual interface General attributes

Physical port Logical port

Not supported Not supported

Layer 2 attributes

Logical port

Not supported

Layer 3 attributes

Logical port

Not supported

EOA Virtual Interface: carries the IP or GRE tunnels. VLAN Sub Interface: applies to the BFD, L3VPN or Tunnel

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Service Interface

Supported Port Mode/ Encapsulation Type General attributes Layer 3 attributes

Port Type

MP Group Supported or Not None

Function

Serial interface

None

Sets together with the Layer 3 attributes. This interface can be added to an MP group after the PPP is enabled. Sets together with the IP attributes. Carries tunnels.

Logical port

Supported

MP Group

General attributes IP attributes

None

None

Logical port

None

4.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of SDH interfaces. In a packet switching network (PSN), set the attributes of the SDH interfaces for them to work in the channelized STM mode, ATM mode or POS mode. In a PSN network, the ATM interface can be used to connect to the user-side equipment, and the POS interface can be used to carry the tunnel. The attributes of SDH interfaces include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. 4.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of PDH interfaces. In a PSN network, the PDH interfaces can be used to carry TDM signals, IMA signals, or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of a PDH interface include the general attributes, layer 2 attributes, layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. 4.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces This section describes how to set the attributes of Ethernet interfaces. In a PSN network, the Ethernet interfaces can be used to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. 4.4 Configuring Serial Interfaces This topic describes how to set the attributes of serial interfaces. 4.5 Configuring ML-PPP This section describes how to configure Multilink PPP (MP) group. MP is a technology used to bind multiple PPP links to increase the bandwidth. MP is applied to the interface that supports PPP. MP supports fragmented packets. The fragmented packets are transmitted on multiple PPP links in the MP group to the same destination. 4.6 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface This section describes how to configure an Ethernet virtual interface. After you configure the Ethernet virtual interface, the NE can process ATM AAL5-encapsulated or VLAN-encapsulated

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Ethernet packets. The Ethernet virtual interface attributes include general attributes and layer 3 attributes. 4.7 Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Group The link aggregation makes the output and input load shared by the members of an LAG to increase the bandwidth. In the meantime, the members of the LAG can dynamically back up each other to enhance the connection reliability. 4.8 Configuring the IMA The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to break up the stream of ATM cells and transport them over multiple lower-rate links, and to reconstruct these lower-rate links at the destination to recover the stream of ATM cells. In this way, the multiple lower-rate links are multiplexed in a flexible and convenient manner. 4.9 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the interface configuration.

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4.1 Configuring SDH Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of SDH interfaces. In a packet switching network (PSN), set the attributes of the SDH interfaces for them to work in the channelized STM mode, ATM mode or POS mode. In a PSN network, the ATM interface can be used to connect to the user-side equipment, and the POS interface can be used to carry the tunnel. The attributes of SDH interfaces include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes.

Context
The attributes vary with the application scenarios of SDH interfaces. Table 4-2 lists the application scenarios. Table 4-2 Application scenario of SDH interfaces Application Scenario Carrying the CES service Carrying the ATM service Carrying the tunnel Interface Type Channelized STM-1 interface ATM interface POS interface Required Interface Attribute General attributes General attributes, Layer 2 attributes General attributes, Layer 3 attributes

Follow the procedure shown in Figure 4-1 to configure an SDH interface.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 4-1 Procedure for configuring an SDH interface

Configure cSTM interface Start Configure ATM interface Start Configure POS interface Start

Configure general attributes

Configure general attributes

Configure general attributes

Configure advanced attributes

Configure layer 2 attributes

Configure layer 3 attributes

End

Configure advanced attributes

Configure advanced attributes

End

End

Required

Optional

4.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces The general attributes of an SDH interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum data packet length. An SDH interface can be configured as a channelized STM interface, ATM interface, or POS interface. Before you configure an SDH interface into a POS interface, set the general attributes of the SDH interface. 4.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of SDH Interfaces Before you create an ATM service, you need to set the layer 2 attributes of the corresponding SDH interface. The layer 2 attributes of a SDH interface define the related information of the data link layer. 4.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of SDH Interfaces Before you run PPP on an SDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the SDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of an SDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces The routine maintenance parameters can be set by setting the advanced attributes of SDH interfaces.

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of SDH Interfaces

The general attributes of an SDH interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum data packet length. An SDH interface can be configured as a channelized STM interface, ATM interface, or POS interface. Before you configure an SDH interface into a POS interface, set the general attributes of the SDH interface.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Context
Packet over SDH (POS) is a technology that is used to transport packet data in MAN and WAN networks. POS adopts SDH and SONET as the physical layer protocols and directly maps the variable-length data packets into SDH payload, thus providing a type of high-speed, reliable, and point-to-point data connection.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired board. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.

For details on the parameters for general attributes of an SDH interface, see Table 4-6.
NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l l l

When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type does not support the settings. In this case, channelized STM-N services can be accessed. When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type supports ATM only. In this case, ATM services can be accessed. If you set Port Mode to Layer 3, select Null or PPP for Encapsulation Type. If you select Null, the interface does not enable the PPP, and thus the equipment bears less load. If you select PPP, the interface can access the MPLS or IP service. In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-7

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4.1.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of SDH Interfaces

Before you create an ATM service, you need to set the layer 2 attributes of the corresponding SDH interface. The layer 2 attributes of a SDH interface define the related information of the data link layer.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 2 attributes of the corresponding SDH interface,see Table 4-7.

NOTE

AD1 sub-board: VPI ranges from 0 to 4095 and VCI ranges from 32 to 65535. The VPI range and VCI range can be set for each port on the AD1. Each VP uses two items in the VP switch table and each VC uses one item in the VC switch table. For the AD1, the number of total items in the VP switch table and VC switch table is 88324.

CAUTION
If any service is configured on the port, modifying the VPI or VCI range for the port causes transient interruption of the service. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.1.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of SDH Interfaces

Before you run PPP on an SDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the SDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of an SDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Encapsulation Type must be set to PPP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

4-8

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Context
In a PSN network, the SDH interface is used to transport the PPP-encapsulated packet data.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 3 attributes of the SDH interface, see Table 4-8.
NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l

Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total of the maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnels carried by port should be not more than the physical bandwidth of the port. When changing Specify IP from Manually to Unnumbered IP, manually specify the invalid IP address (255.255.255.255) and invalid IP mask (255.255.255.255) to release the IP address manually specified. When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of SDH Interfaces

The routine maintenance parameters can be set by setting the advanced attributes of SDH interfaces.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes of the SDH interface, see Table 4-9.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.2 Configuring PDH Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of PDH interfaces. In a PSN network, the PDH interfaces can be used to carry TDM signals, IMA signals, or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of a PDH interface include the general attributes, layer 2 attributes, layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes.

Context
The application scenario of a PDH interface depends on the setting of the interface attributes. For details, refer to Table 4-3. Table 4-3 Application scenario of PDH interfaces Application Scenario Carrying the CES service Carrying the ATM service Carrying the tunnel Interface Type E1 interface E1 interface E1 interface Required Interface Attribute General attributes, Advanced attributes General attributes, Layer 2 attributes General attributes, Layer 3 attributes

4-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

4 Configuring Interfaces

When the E1 interface is used to carry the CES service, set the general attributes and an advanced attribute, that is, frame format, to ensure that the frame format is the same as the service encapsulation format. When the emulation mode of a CES service is CESoPSN, it is recommended that you set the frame format at the interface to CRC-4 multiframe. When the emulation mode of a CES service is SAToP, the frame format at the interface should be set to non-framing. When the E1 interface is used to carry the ATM service, the Layer 2 attributes should be set. In addition, the IMA group should be created. When setting the layer 2 attributes of the E1 interface, set Port Mode to Layer 2 in 4.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces. When the E1 interface is used to carry the tunnels, the Layer 3 attributes should be set. In addition, create the ML-PPP group, and configure the interface as an ML-PPP member.

Follow the procedure shown in Figure 4-2 to configure a PDH interface. Figure 4-2 Procedure for configuring a PDH interface
Carry CES service Carry ATM service Carry Tunnel

Start

Start

Start

Configure general attributes

Configure general attributes

Configure general attributes

Configure advanced attributes

Configure advanced attributes

Configure layer 3 attributes

End

End

Configure advanced attributes

End

Required

Optional

4.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces Before you create services, you need to set the general attributes of the corresponding PDH interfaces. The general attributes of a PDH interface define the related information of the physical layer. 4.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces Before you run PPP on a PDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the PDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of a PDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces The advanced attributes of PDH interfaces include frame format, line encoding format and loopback mode.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-11

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4.2.1 Setting General Attributes of PDH Interfaces

Before you create services, you need to set the general attributes of the corresponding PDH interfaces. The general attributes of a PDH interface define the related information of the physical layer.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select the desired board. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.

For details on the parameters for general attributes of the PDH interface, see Table 4-10.
NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l l l l

When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type does not support the settings. In this case, TDM services can be accessed. When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type supports ATM only. In this case, ATM services can be accessed. If the PDH interface is used for the inband DCN, the Port Mode cannot be set to Layer 1 or Layer 2. If you set Port Mode to Layer 3, select Null or PPP for Encapsulation Type. If you select Null, the interface does not enable the PPP protocol, and thus the equipment bears less load. If you select PPP, the interface can carry the MPLS. In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.2.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of PDH Interfaces

Before you run PPP on a PDH interface, you need to set the layer 3 attributes of the PDH interface. The layer 3 attributes of a PDH interface define the related attributes of the network layer.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

4-12

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l

4 Configuring Interfaces

In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3. In General Attributes, Encapsulation Type must be set to PPP.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 3 attributes of the PDH interface, see Table 4-11.
NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l

Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnel carried by port should be not more than the physical bandwidth of the port.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of PDH Interfaces

The advanced attributes of PDH interfaces include frame format, line encoding format and loopback mode.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes of the PDH interface, see Table 4-12.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

4 Configuring Interfaces
NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

If the E1 interface carries the CES service whose emulation mode is CESoPSN, Frame Format of the interfaces can be set to Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe. It is recommended that you set Frame Format to CRC-4 Multiframe. If the emulation mode of the CES service is SAToP, Frame Format of the interface must be set to Unframe. If the E1 interface carries the ATM service, Frame Format of the interface can be set to Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe. In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900, OptiX PTN 1900, OptiX PTN 950, or OptiX PTN 910, Frame Mode of the packets at the PDH interface can be set to 30 or 31. In the case of the OptiX PTN 912, Frame Mode of the packets at the PDH interface can be set only to 30. In hybrid networking, make sure that the frame modes of the local port and opposite port should be the same.
l l

30: In the E1 frame format, timeslots 1-15 and 17-31 are used to transport service data. 31: In the E1 frame format, timeslots 1-31 are used to transport service data.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces

This section describes how to set the attributes of Ethernet interfaces. In a PSN network, the Ethernet interfaces can be used to carry Ethernet packets or tunnels, depending on different settings of the interface attributes. The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control.

Context
The application scenario of an Ethernet interface depends on the setting of the interface attributes. For details, refer to Table 4-4. Table 4-4 Application scenario of Ethernet interfaces Application Scenario Accessing the Ethernet service Carrying the QinQ Link Carrying the tunnel Interface Type Ethernet interface Ethernet interface Ethernet interface Required Interface Attribute General attributes, Layer 2 attributes General attributes, Layer 2 attributes General attributes, Layer 3 attributes

NOTE

When the Ethernet interface is used to carry the QinQ Link, the configuration procedure is similar to the configuration procedure when the Ethernet interface is used to carry the Ethernet service. In this case, however, the encapsulation types are different. For details, see 4.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces.

4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Follow the procedure shown in Figure 4-3 to configure an Ethernet interface. Figure 4-3 Procedure for configuring an Ethernet interface
Carry Ethernet Packets Carry Tunnel

Start

Start

Configure general attributes

Configure general attributes

Configure layer 2 attributes

Configure layer 3 attributes

Configure advanced attributes

Configure advanced attributes

Configure flow control

Configure flow control

End

End

Required

Optional

4.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces Before you configure the layer 2 and layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet interface. The general attributes of an Ethernet interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length. 4.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces After the layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related information of the data link layer. 4.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When an Ethernet interface is used to carry a tunnel, you need to configure the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet interface. The layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related attributes of the network layer. 4.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet interfaces. 4.3.5 Configuring Flow Control In the case that the flow control function is enabled, if congestion occurs on the link, the Ethernet interface sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end, and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets. As a result, congestion is avoided.

4.3.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

Before you configure the layer 2 and layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the corresponding Ethernet interface. The general attributes of an Ethernet interface define the physical-layer information, such as the port mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the Ethernet interface, seeTable 4-13.

NOTE

l l l

When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, the Encapsulation Type support Null, 802.1Q and QinQ. When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, the Encapsulation Type support 802.1Q, and then the interface can be used by tunnel. In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size(byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size(byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

After the layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface are set, the interface can be used for connecting to the client-side equipment at the edge of a PSN network or for forwarding Ethernet packets within the PSN network. The Layer 2 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related information of the data link layer.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 2.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 2 attributes of the Ethernet interface, seeTable 4-14.

NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l l l

QinQ Type Domain can be set only when Encapsulation Type is QinQ. TAG can be set only when Encapsulation Type is 802.1Q. Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are valid when TAG is access or hybrid.

Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK, The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of an Ethernet Interface

When an Ethernet interface is used to carry a tunnel, you need to configure the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet interface. The layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet interface define the related attributes of the network layer.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Port Mode must be set to Layer 3.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet interface, see Table 4-15.
NOTE

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l l

Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnels carried by port cannot exceed the physical bandwidth of the port. When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces

The routine maintenance parameters can be set through setting the advanced attributes of Ethernet interfaces.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Select the board to be configured and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes of the Ethernet interface, see Table 4-16. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.3.5 Configuring Flow Control

In the case that the flow control function is enabled, if congestion occurs on the link, the Ethernet interface sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end, and then the opposite end stops transmitting Ethernet packets. As a result, congestion is avoided.
4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab. Step 3 Select the desired board and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for flow control, see Table 4-17. Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.4 Configuring Serial Interfaces

This topic describes how to set the attributes of serial interfaces.

Context
Table 4-5 lists the application scenario of serial interfaces. Table 4-5 Application scenario of serial interfaces Application Scenario Carrying the tunnel Carrying the CES service, ATM service Required Interface Attribute Basic attributes, Layer 3 attributes Basic attributes

Follow the procedure shown in Figure 4-4 to configure the serial interface attributes.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 4-4 Procedure for configuring a serial interface

Start

Create Serial interface

Configure general attributes

Configure layer 3 attributes

End

Required

Optional

4.4.1 Creating Serial Interfaces You can create a serial interface at the VC12 level level. 4.4.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface Before you set the layer 3 attributes of a serial interface, you need to set the general attributes of the serial interface. The general attributes of a serial interface define the related information of the physical layer. 4.4.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces In a PSN network, the serial interfaces are used to transport the PPP-encapsulated packet data. The layer 3 attributes of a serial interface define the related attributes of the network layer.

4.4.1 Creating Serial Interfaces

You can create a serial interface at the VC12 level level.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree.
4-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Step 2 Click New in the General Attributes tab and the New Serial Interface dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for the serial interface, seeTable 4-18.

NOTE

In the case of the serial interface at the VC12 level, currently a serial interface can be bound to only one timeslot.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End

4.4.2 Setting the General Attributes of a Serial Interface

Before you set the layer 3 attributes of a serial interface, you need to set the general attributes of the serial interface. The general attributes of a serial interface define the related information of the physical layer.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. A serial interface must be created.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters as required.For details on the parameters for general attributes of the serial interface, seeTable 4-18.

NOTE

When you set Port Mode to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type is ATM. The serial interface supports IMA binding. When you set Port Mode to Layer 3, you can set Encapsulation Type to PPP or Null. When you set Encapsulation Type to PPP, you can add the serial interface to an MP group. The serial interfaces that are bound to the same MP group have the same E1 frame mode. When Encapsulation Type is Null, Port Mode can be changed to Layer 2. In the case an NNI interface,Max Data Packet Size (byte) must be larger than 960. A DCN packet contains a maximum of 960 bytes. If Max Data Packet Size (byte) is smaller than 960, the DCN packets in the receive direction may be lost.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End

4.4.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Serial Interfaces

In a PSN network, the serial interfaces are used to transport the PPP-encapsulated packet data. The layer 3 attributes of a serial interface define the related attributes of the network layer.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. In General Attributes, Encapsulation Type must be set to PPP.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab and set the parameters as required.For details on the parameters for layer 3 attributes of the serial interface, see Table 4-19.

4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

4 Configuring Interfaces

Note the following issues during parameter settings:

l l l

Max Reserved Bandwidth indicates the bandwidth used by tunnels. The total maximum reserved bandwidth of the tunnels carried by port should be not more than the physical bandwidth of the port. Modifying the IP address can cause the equipment to re-establish the link. As a result, the services are interrupted. When changing Specify IP from Manually to Unnumbered IP, manually specify the invalid IP address (255.255.255.255) and invalid IP mask (255.255.255.255) to release the IP address manually specified. When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 4 Click Close. ----End

4.5 Configuring ML-PPP

This section describes how to configure Multilink PPP (MP) group. MP is a technology used to bind multiple PPP links to increase the bandwidth. MP is applied to the interface that supports PPP. MP supports fragmented packets. The fragmented packets are transmitted on multiple PPP links in the MP group to the same destination.

Context
Follow the procedure shown in Figure 4-5 to configure an MP group.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 4-5 Procedure for configuring an MP group

Start

Enable the PPP at the interface

Create MP group

Configure members to an MP group

End

Required

Optional

4.5.1 Creating MP Groups You can bind multiple serial interfaces or E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled by creating an MP group, so that the bound serial interfaces or E1 interfaces are used as a logical port to carry tunnels. 4.5.2 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups To modify the bandwidth of the MP group, add or delete the member interfaces into or from the MP group.

4.5.1 Creating MP Groups

You can bind multiple serial interfaces or E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled by creating an MP group, so that the bound serial interfaces or E1 interfaces are used as a logical port to carry tunnels.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. Multiple serial interfaces or E1 interfaces on which PPP is enabled must be created. The E1 Frame Format or VC12 Frame Format of the local MP group and the opposite MP group should be consistent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

4-24

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Context
NOTE

The MP group can be bound only with the E1 interfaces of the same processing board, or the serial interfaces of the same physical interface.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > MP Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New in the General Attributes tab and the New MP Group dialogue box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the MP group, see Table 1.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Step 5 Click Close. ----End
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-25

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4.5.2 Configuring Member Interfaces of MP Groups

To modify the bandwidth of the MP group, add or delete the member interfaces into or from the MP group.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. An MP group must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > MP Group Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select an MP group and click Configuration. The Config Member Interface dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the parameters as required.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation may interrupt the services.
NOTE

Deleting the member interface of the MP group may damage the service. The member interface in the same MP group must have the same frame mode. That is, the values of Frame Mode are all 30 or 31. for the parameters of Frame Mode, to see E1 Frame Format or VC12 Frame Format.

Step 5 Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 6 Click Close. ----End
4-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4.6 Configuring an Ethernet Virtual Interface

This section describes how to configure an Ethernet virtual interface. After you configure the Ethernet virtual interface, the NE can process ATM AAL5-encapsulated or VLAN-encapsulated Ethernet packets. The Ethernet virtual interface attributes include general attributes and layer 3 attributes. 4.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface define the related information of the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) or VLAN. Before you configure an Ethernet virtual interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface. 4.6.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces You can set the Tunnel attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface by setting the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface.

4.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface define the related information of the ATM adaptation layer (AAL) or VLAN. Before you configure an Ethernet virtual interface, you need to configure the general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 3 Click Close. The general attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface are displayed in the field. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface, seeTable 4-20. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End

4.6.2 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

You can set the Tunnel attributes of an Ethernet virtual interface by setting the layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The general attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface must be set.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab and set the parameters as required. For details on the parameters for layer 3 attributes of the Ethernet virtual interface, seeTable 4-21.

CAUTION
When modifying the IP address of the interface, make sure that the IP address of this interface and the IP addresses of other interfaces configured with services are not in the same subnet. Step 3 Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End

4.7 Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Group

The link aggregation makes the output and input load shared by the members of an LAG to increase the bandwidth. In the meantime, the members of the LAG can dynamically back up each other to enhance the connection reliability.

Procedure
For details of configuring Ethernet LAG, refer to Creating an LAG in the Feature Description. ----End

4.8 Configuring the IMA

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to break up the stream of ATM cells and transport them over multiple lower-rate links, and to reconstruct these lower-rate links at the destination to recover the stream of ATM cells. In this way, the multiple lower-rate links are multiplexed in a flexible and convenient manner.

Procedure
Step 1 For details of configuring bound channels in an ATM IMA group, refer to Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. Step 2 For details of configuring attributes of an ATM IMA group, refer to Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description.
NOTE

After the IMA group is configured, the IMA protocol must be enabled.

Step 3 For details of configuring ATM interface attributes, refer to Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the Feature Description. ----End
4-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

4.9 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the interface configuration. Table 4-6 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface General Attributes Field Port Name Port Mode Value For example: 4-MP1-1CD1-1(Port-1) For example: Port1 Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3 Description Display the port name. Enter the self-defined port name. Display the working mode of the SDH interface according to the type of the housed board. Layer 1 indicates the current channelized STM interface. Layer 2 indicates the current ATM STM interface. Layer 3 indicates the current POS interface. Encapsulation Type Null, ATM, PPP Select the encapsulation type. When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type defaults to Null, and cannot be modified. When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type defaults to ATM, and cannot be modified. When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set Encapsulation Type to Null or PPP. Click C.89 Encapsulation Type for more information. Channelize Laser Interface Enabling Status Yes, No Enabled, Shut Down Default: Enabled Display whether the interface is channelized. Enable or disable the laser. Click C.96 Laser Interface Enabling Status for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Max Data Packet Size (byte)

Value 46 to 9000 Default: 1620

Description Set the maximum packet length. This parameter cannot be set when Port Mode is set to Layer 1 or Layer 2. Click C.165 Max Data Packet Size(byte) for more information.

Table 4-7 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface Layer 2 Attributes Field Port Port Type Value For example: 4-MP1-1AD1-1(Port-1) UNI, NNI Description Display the port name. Select the port type. UNI indicates the usernetwork interface, which connects to the client-side equipment. NNI indicates the networknetwork interface, which connects to the ATM equipment in the core network. Click C.6 ATM Port Type for more information. ATM Cell Payload Scrambling Disabled, Enabled When the ATM cell payload scrambling is enabled, several "0"s and "1"s in the data are suppressed. Click C.7 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling for more information.

4-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Max. VPI Bits

Value UNI: 1 to 8 NNI: 1 to 12

Description In the case of interconnection, if the VPI value of the opposite equipment exceeds the default VPI value of the local equipment, manually set the VPI value range. Set Max. VPI Bits to set the VPI value range. For example, if Max. VPI Bits is set to 8, the VPI value ranges from 0 to 255. Click C.162 Max. VPI Bits for more information.

Max. VCI Bits

6 to 16

In the case of interconnection, if the VCI value of the opposite equipment exceeds the default VPI value of the local equipment, manually set the VPI value range. Set Max. VCI Bits to set the VCI value range. For example, if Max. VCI Bits is set to 8, the VCI value ranges from 0 to 255. Click C.161 Max. VCI Bits for more information.

VCC-Supported VPI Count

0 to 4096

Set the count of VPIs that support the VC switching. Click C.154 VC-SwitchingSupported VPIs for more information.

Table 4-8 Descriptions of the parameters for SDH interface Layer 3 Attributes Field Port Value Example: 21-POD41-1 (Port-1) Description Display the port name.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-31

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Enable Tunnel

Value Disabled, Enabled

Description After the Tunnel is enabled, the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and thus supports the dynamic signaling and route. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP. Click C.40 Enable Tunnel for more information.

Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s)

0 to 516096 Default: 516096

Set the maximum bandwidth used by the tunnel. The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

TE Measurement

0 to 16777215

Sets the TE measurement. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. Thus, the traffic congestion of the shortest path that occurs in the traditional route selection can be avoided.

4-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Admin Group

Value 0 to 4294967295

Description Set the admin group. The admin group can specify the link attributes. After the affinity attributes of a dynamic tunnel is configured, when the dynamic tunnel selects links, the dynamic tunnel compares its affinity attributes with the admin attributes of links and determines which links to be avoided. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

Specify IP

Manually, Unnumbered NE IP, Unnumbered Interface IP, Unspecified

Select the means of setting the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP. Set the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

IP Address

Example: 192.168.0.1

IP Mask

Example: 255.255.255.0

Set the subnet mask of the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

Board for Unnumbered IP

Example: 3-ETFC

Select the board for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Unnumbered Interface IP.

Port for Unnumbered IP

Example: 3-ETFC-3(Port-3)

Select the port for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Unnumbered Interface IP.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 4-9 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of the SDH interface Field Port Value For example: 4-MP1-1CD1-1(Port-1) Description Display the port name. Display the transmission distance of the laser. Click C.97 Laser Transmission Distance (m) for more information. Scrambling Capability Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled When the ATM cell payload scrambling is enabled, several "0"s and "1"s in the data are suppressed. Click C.99 Scrambling Capability (POS Port) for more information. CRC Check Length 16, 32 Select the CRC check length. Click C.14 CRC Check Length for more information. Clock Mode Master Mode, Slave Mode Select the clock mode. Master Mode indicates that the internal clock signals are adopted. Slave Mode indicates that the line clock signals are adopted. Click C.121 Clock Mode (PDH/SDH Port) for more information. Loopback Mode Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Set the loopback status of the port.

Laser Transmission Distance For example: 1000 (m)

Table 4-10 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface General Attributes Field Port Name Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) For example: Port1 Description Display the port name. Enter the self-defined port name.

4-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Port Mode

Value Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3

Description Select the working mode of the PDH port. Layer 1: The port can carry TDM signals. Layer 2: The port can carry IMA signals. Layer 3: The port can carry PPP protocol packets. Click C.80 Port Mode for more information.

Encapsulation Type

Null, ATM, PPP

Select the encapsulation type. When Port Mode is set to Layer 1, Encapsulation Type defaults to Null, and cannot be modified. When Port Mode is set to Layer 2, Encapsulation Type defaults to ATM, and cannot be modified. When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, set Encapsulation Type to Null or PPP. Click C.89 Encapsulation Type for more information.

Channelize Max Data Packet Size (byte)

Yes, No 960 to 1900 Default: 1620

Set whether the interface is channelized. Set the maximum data packet length. This parameter can be set only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3, and Encapsulation Type to PPP.

Table 4-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface Layer 3 Attributes Field Port Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Description Display the port name.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Enable Tunnel

Value Default: Disabled

Description The PDH interface does not support setting the Enable Tunnel parameter. Set the maximum bandwidth used by the tunnel. The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s)

0 to 2048 Default: 2048

TE Measurement

0 to 16777215

Sets the TE measurement. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. Thus, the traffic congestion of the shortest path that occurs in the traditional route selection can be avoided.

Admin Group

0 to 4294967295

Sets the admin group. The admin group can specify the link attributes. After the affinity attributes of a dynamic tunnel is configured, when the dynamic tunnel selects links, the dynamic tunnel compares its affinity attributes with the admin attributes of links and determines which links to be avoided. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

Specify IP

Unspecified

The PDH interface does not support setting the IP attributes.

4-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field IP Address

Value -

Description The PDH interface does not support setting the IP attributes. The PDH interface does not support setting the IP attributes. The PDH interface does not support setting the IP attributes. The PDH interface does not support setting the IP attributes.

IP Mask

Board for Unnumbered IP

Port for Unnumbered IP

Table 4-12 Descriptions of the parameters for PDH interface Advanced Attributes Field Port Frame Format Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Unframe, Double Frame, CRC-4 Multiframe Description Display the port name. Select the frame format. When the emulation mode of a CES service is CESoPSN, the frame format at the interface should be set to CRC-4 Multiframe. When the emulation mode of a CES service is SAToP, the frame format at the interface should be set to Unframe.
NOTE When you set Port Mode to Layer 2, you cannot set Frame Format to Unframe for the OptiX PTN 1900 or OptiX PTN 3900.

Click C.152 Frame Format for more information. Line Encoding Format Clock Mode HDB3 Master Mode, Slave Mode Display the line encoding format. Select the clock mode. Click C.121 Clock Mode (PDH/SDH Port) for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Loopback Mode Impedance

Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop 75 ohm, 120 ohm

Description Set the loopback status of the port. Display the impedance of the interface. Click C.159 Impedance for more information.

Frame Mode

30, 31

Set the value of the frame mode. The frame modes of the local port and opposite port should be the same.

Table 4-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface General Attributes Field Port Name Enable Port Value For example: 1-EG16-1 (Port-1) For example: Port1 Disabled, Enabled Description Display the port name. Enter the self-defined port name. When the port is enabled, it indicates that the user uses the port and the port has services. When the port is disabled, it indicates that the port does not process services. When configuring services, enable the involved ports. Click C.81 Enable Port for more information. Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer Mix Select the working mode of the Ethernet port. Layer 2: The port can access the user-side equipment or carry Ethernet services that are based on the ports and use the port exclusively. Layer 3: The port can carry tunnels. Layer Mix: The port can carry layer 2 services and layer 3 services.

4-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Encapsulation Type

Value Null, 802.1Q, QinQ

Description Select the means of processing the accessed packets. Null: The port transparently transmits the accessed packets. 802.1Q: The port identifies the 802.1Q standard packets. QinQ: The port identifies the QinQ standard packets. The Encapsulation Type is always 802.1Q when you set Port Mode to Layer 3. Click C.89 Encapsulation Type for more information.

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10G Full-Duplex LAN, 10G Full-Duplex WAN

Select the working mode of the Ethernet port. The autonegotiation mode is recommended, because it can automatically find out the best working mode to combine a port and its interconnected port and thus is convenient for maintenance. Be careful to configure the same working mode for the port and its interconnected port. Otherwise, service will fail. Click C.93 Working Mode for more information.

Max Frame Length (byte)

OptiX PTN 3900: 46 to 9000 Default: 1620

The maximum frame length is also the maximum transport unit (MTU). Click C.167 Max Frame Length(byte)-Ethernet interface for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 4-14 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Layer 2 Attributes Field Port QinQ Type Domain Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) 0x0600 to 0xFFFF Description Display the port name. Set the QinQ type domain. This parameter is available only when you set Encapsulation Type in General Attributes to QinQ. Tag Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid The tag indicates which packets can be processed. Tag Aware: The port transparently transmits the data packet with a VLAN ID (tag). If a data packet does not have a VLAN ID (untag), the port discards this data packet. In this case, the Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority are meaningless. Access: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (untag). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (tag), the port discards this data packet. Hybrid: The port adds the default VLAN ID to the data packet without any VLAN ID (untag). If the data packet has a VLAN ID (tag), the port transparently transmits the data packet. This parameter is unavailable when you set Encapsulation Type in General Attributes to QinQ.

4-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Default VLAN ID

Value 1 to 4094

Description Set the default VLAN ID of packets that passes through the port. When you set Tag to Access, packets that have the same VLAN ID as the default VLAN ID are discarded, and packets without a VLAN are added with the default VLAN ID and then pass the port. When you set Tag to Hybrid, tagged packets are allowed to pass, and packets without a tag are added with the default VLAN ID and then pass the port.

VLAN Priority

0 to 7

Set the QoS level. When the network is busy, data packets of higher VLAN priority are processed first and those of lower VLAN priority may be discarded. 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 the highest. This parameter is available only when you set Tag to Access or Hybrid.

Table 4-15 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Layer 3 attributes Field Port Enable Tunnel Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Enabled, Disabled Description Displays the port name. After the Tunnel is enabled, the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and thus supports the dynamic signaling and route. Click C.40 Enable Tunnel for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s)

Value For example: 102400

Description Sets the maximum bandwidth used by the tunnel. The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.

TE Measurement

0 to 16777215

Sets the TE measurement. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. Thus, the traffic congestion of the shortest path that occurs in the traditional route selection can be avoided.

Admin Group

0 to 4294967295

Sets the admin group. The admin group can specify the link attributes. After the affinity attributes of a dynamic tunnel is configured, when the dynamic tunnel selects links, the dynamic tunnel compares its affinity attributes with the admin attributes of links and determines which links to be avoided.

Specify IP

Manually, Unspecified

Selects the means of setting the IP address for the port. Click C.17 Specify IP for more information.

IP Address

For example: 192.168.0.1

Sets the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

IP Mask

For example: 255.255.255.0

Sets the subnet mask of the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

4-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Board for Unnumbered IP Port for Unnumbered IP

Value -

Description The parameter is not supported. The parameter is not supported.

Table 4-16 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Advanced Attributes Field Port Port Physical parameters Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) For example: Port Enable: Enabled, Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation, NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode: Disabled, MAC Loopback: NonLoopback, PHY Loopback: Non-Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Description Displays the port name. Displays physical parameters of the port.

MAC Loopback PHY Loopback

Sets the loopback state of the MAC layer. Sets the loopback state of the PHY layer. Click C.27 PHY Loopback for more information.

MAC Address Transmitting Rate(kbit/s) Receiving Rate(kbit/s) Loopback Check

For example: 00-5A-3D-03-4C-1B For example: 1024 For example: 1024 Enabled, Disabled

Displays the MAC address of the port. Displays the rate at which the data packets are transmitted. Displays the rate at which the data packets are received. Sets the loop detection. When this function is enabled, the equipment automatically checks whether a loop is generated on the link. If a loop is generated, the relevant alarm is reported.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-43

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Loopback Port Shutdown

Value Enabled, Disabled

Description Sets the automatic shutdown of the port. When Loopback Check is set to Enabled and Loopback Port Shutdown is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically checks whether a loop is generated on the link. If a loop is generated, the port is automatically shut down to release the loop.

Egress PIR Bandwidth(kbit/ s)

For example: 10000

Sets the egress PIR bandwidth. Only OptiX PTN 912 supports the egress PIR bandwidth.

Table 4-17 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet interface Flow Control Field Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Description Display the port name. If the working mode of the port is non-autosensing, you can only choose the nonautonegotiation flow control mode. Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port can both transmit and receive PAUSE frames. Send Only: The port can only send PAUSE frames. Receive Only: The port can only receive PAUSE frames. Click C.88 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port) for more information.

4-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode

Value Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control

Description If the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, you can only choose the autonegotiation flow control mode.
NOTE

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control: The port send PAUSE frames only, not receive. Enable Symmetric Flow Control: The port send and receive PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control: The port determine a flow control mode (symmetric or dissymmetric). Click C.157 AutoNegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port) for more information.

Table 4-18 Descriptions of the parameters for Serial interface General Attributes Field Port Port Number Name Value Example: 5-MP1-1-CD1-1 (Serial-1) Example: 1 Example: Site A Description Displays a port name. Sets the port number. Specifies a port name. Click C.112 Name for more information. Level VC12, 64K Timeslot Specifies the level of a serial interface.
l

VC12: The VC12s in a channelized STM-1 frame can be bound to a serial interface. 64 kbit/s timeslot: The timeslots of an E1 interface can be bound to a serial interface.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-45

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Used Board Used Port

Value Example: 5-MP1 Example: 5-MP1-1-CD1-1 (Port-1)

Description Selects the board carrying the serial interface. Selects the physical port carrying the serial interface. Click C.128 Used Port for more information.

High Channel Used Timeslot

VC4-1 1-63

Displays a higher order channel. Sets the timeslots used by the serial interface. You cannot set the used timeslot for an E1 interface. Click C.151 Used Timeslot for more information.

64K Timeslot

1-31

Sets the 64 kbit/s timeslot on a serial interface. You cannot set the used timeslot for an STM-1 interface. Sets the port mode. If you set Port Mode to Layer 2, you can set Encapsulation Type to ATM. If you set Port Mode to Layer 3, you can set Encapsulation Type to PPP or Null. Selects the encapsulation type. Select PPP to add the serial interface in the MP group. Click C.89 Encapsulation Type for more information.

Port Mode

Layer 2, Layer 3

Encapsulation Type

ATM, Null, PPP

Max Data Packet Size (byte)

46-1900 Default: 1620

Sets the maximum data packet length.

Table 4-19 Descriptions of the parameters for Serial interface Layer 3 Attributes Field Port Value Example: 5-MP1-1-CD1-1 (Serial-1) Description Display the port name.

4-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Enable Tunnel

Value Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

Description After the Tunnel is enabled, the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and thus supports the dynamic signaling and route. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP. Click C.40 Enable Tunnel for more information.

Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s)

Example: 2048 Default: 2048

Set the maximum bandwidth used by the tunnel. The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

TE Measurement

0 to 16777215

Sets the TE measurement. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. Thus, the traffic congestion of the shortest path that occurs in the traditional route selection can be avoided. This parameter is available only when you set the Encapsulation Type to PPPin the General Attributes.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-47

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Admin Group

Value 0 to 4294967295

Description Sets the admin group. The admin group can specify the link attributes. After the affinity attributes of a dynamic tunnel is configured, when the dynamic tunnel selects links, the dynamic tunnel compares its affinity attributes with the admin attributes of links and determines which links to be avoided. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP.

Specify IP

Manually, Unnumbered NE IP, Unnumbered Interface IP, Unspecified

Select the means of setting the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Encapsulation Type in General Attributes is set to PPP. Set the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

IP Address

Example: 192.168.0.1

IP Mask

Example: 255.255.255.0

Set the subnet mask of the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

Board for Unnumbered IP

Example: 3-ETFC

Select the board for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Unnumbered Interface IP.

Port for Unnumbered IP

Example: 3-ETFC-3(Port-3)

Display the port for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Unnumbered Interface IP.

4-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Table 4-20 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet virtual interface General Attributes Field Port Number Name Port Mode Value 1 to 2047 For example: Port1 Layer 2, Layer 3 Description Enters a port number. Enters the self-defined port name. When Port Type is set to EOA Virtual Interface, you can select the layer at which the port works. When Port Type is set to VLAN Sub Interface, Port Mode can only be set to Layer 3. Port Type EOA Virtual Interface, VLAN Sub Interface, Selects the type of the port. EOA Virtual Interface: The port can carry the IP tunnel and GRE tunnel. VLAN Sub Interface: The port can carry the MPLS Tunnel, IP tunnel and GRE tunnel. Associated Board For example: Slot-Board Name For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) 0 to 4095 Selects the board where the Ethernet virtual interface is located. Selects the port where the Ethernet virtual interface is located. Sets the VPI used by the Ethernet virtual interface. This parameter is valid only for the EOA virtual interface. VCI 0 to 65535 Sets the VCI used by the Ethernet virtual interface. This parameter is valid only for the EOA virtual interface. AAL5 Encapsulation Type LLC BRIDGE, LLC ROUTE, VCMUX BRIDGE, VCMUX ROUTE Selects the AAL5 encapsulation type. This parameter is valid only for the EOA virtual interface. Sets the VLAN used by the Ethernet virtual interface. This parameter is valid only for the VLAN sub-interface.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-49

Associated Port

VPI

VLAN

1 to 4094

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Specify IP

Value Manually, Unspecified

Description Selects the means of setting the IP address for the port. Click C.17 Specify IP for more information.

IP Address

For example: 10.70.70.11

Set the IP address of the port. When Port Mode in General Attributes is set to Layer 3, you can set this parameter.

IP Mask

For example: 255.255.255.0

Set the IP address mask of the port. When Port Mode in General Attributes is set to Layer 3, you can set this parameter.

MAC Address

For example: 00E0-4C-76-20-68

Displays the MAC address of the port.

Table 4-21 Descriptions of the parameters for Ethernet virtual interface Layer 3 Attributes Field Port Number Enable Tunnel Value For example: 1 Enabled, Disabled Description Display the port number. After the tunnel is enabled, the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and thus supports the dynamic signaling and route. In this case, the port can also carry the IP tunnels and GRE tunnels. When Port Mode in General Attributes is set to Layer 3, you can set this parameter. Click C.40 Enable Tunnel for more information. Specify IP Manually, Unspecified Selects the means of setting the IP address for the port. Click C.17 Specify IP for more information. IP Address For example: 10.70.70.11 Set the IP address of the port. When Port Mode in General Attributes is set to Layer 3, you can set this parameter.

4-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field IP Mask

Value For example: 255.255.255.0

Description Set the IP address mask of the port. When Port Mode in General Attributes is set to Layer 3, you can set this parameter.

Table 4-22 Descriptions of the parameters for Link Aggregation Group Management Field LAG No. Value Example: 1 Description Set the number of the LAG. You can also select the automatic allocation. Set the name of the LAG. Manual: The user manually creates a LAG, adds or deletes member ports, and disables the LACP protocol. Static: The user manually creates a LAG, adds or deletes member ports, and enables the LACP protocol. Click C.102 LAG Type for more information. Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive Select the revertive mode. Click C.95 Revertive Mode for more information.

LAG Name LAG Type

Example: LAG_1 Static, Manual

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-51

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Load Sharing

Value Non-Sharing, Sharing

Description Sharing: All member links in the LAG bear traffic, and share the load. The load is shared to increase the bandwidth of the links. When the member links change or some member links fail, the system automatically reallocate the traffic. Non-Sharing: Only one member link in the LAG bears traffic. The other member link is in the standby state. In this way, a mechanism similar to hot backup is available. When the active link in the LAG fail, the system automatically selects the other link for protection against the link failure. Hence, the interruption of the upperlayer protocols is avoided. Click C.92 Load Sharing for more information.

Load Sharing Hash Algorithm

Automatic, Source MAC, Destination MAC, Source and Destination MAC, Source IP, Destination IP, Source and Destination IP, Source Port Number, Destination Port Number, Source and Destination Port Numbers, MPLS Label

Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm properly to ensure that the service flows in compliance with the algorithm are transported over the same link. In this way, the received data packets are in the correct frame sequence. This parameter can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Sharing. Click C.91 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm for more information.

4-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field System Priority

Value 0 to 65535

Description The system priority and system MAC address indicate the system ID, which is used for negotiation with the opposite equipment. The equipment with a higher system priority has the priority for selection. Click C.136 System Priority (LAG) for more information.

Main Port

Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Port No.)

Select the main port of the LAG. Click C.155 Main Port for more information.

Main Port Status

In Service, Out of Service

Display the working state of the main port. Click C.156 Main Port Status for more information.

Slave Port Slave Port Status

Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Port No.) In Service, Out of Service

Select the salve port of the LAG. Display the working state of the slave port.

Table 4-23 Descriptions of the parameters for MP Group General Attributes Field MP Group Number Name Link Status Min Activated Link Count Value For example: 1 For example: MP_1 Up, Down 1 to 16 Description Set the MP group number. Set the name of the MP. Display the link status. Configure the minimum activated link count for each MP group. The MP group can be activated only when the count of activated links in the MP group reaches the minimum activated link count. Click C.168 Min. Activated Link Count for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-53

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Enable Differential Delay

Value Enabled, Disabled

Description Enable or disable detection of the differential delay. Click C.108 Enable Differential Delay for more information.

Max Differential Delay (100 us)

25 to 500

Set the maximum delay variation between links in an MP group. This parameter can be set only when Enable Differential Delay is set to Enabled. Click C.163 Max. Differential Delay (100 us) for more information.

Enable Tunnel

Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled

After the Tunnel is enabled, the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and thus supports the dynamic signaling and route. Click C.40 Enable Tunnel for more information.

Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s)

For example: 4096

Set the maximum bandwidth used by the tunnel. The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.

TE Measurement

0 to 16777215

Sets the TE measurement. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. Thus, the traffic congestion of the shortest path that occurs in the traditional route selection can be avoided.

4-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4 Configuring Interfaces

Field Admin Group

Value 0 to 4294967295

Description Sets the admin group. The admin group can specify the link attributes. After the affinity attributes of a dynamic tunnel is configured, when the dynamic tunnel selects links, the dynamic tunnel compares its affinity attributes with the admin attributes of links and determines which links to be avoided.

IP Address Negotiation Result

For example: 192.168.0.1

Display the negotiated IP address. Click C.15 IP Address Negotiation Result for more information.

IP Mask Negotiation Result

For example: 255.255.255.0

Display the negotiated IP mask. Click C.16 IP Mask Negotiation Result for more information.

Member Interface

For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.)

Select the members in the MP group. Click C.56 Member Interface for more information.

PPP Link Status Differential Delay Check Status

Up, Down Unknown, Valid, Invalid

Display the link status. Display the status of checking the differential delay.
NOTE

Specify IP

Manually, Unnumbered NE IP, Unnumbered Interface IP, Unspecified For example: 192.168.0.1

Select the means of setting the IP address for the port. Set the IP address for the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

IP Address

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-55

4 Configuring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field IP Mask

Value For example: 255.255.255.0

Description Set the subnet mask of the port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

Board for Unnumbered IP

For example: Slot-Board Name

Select the board for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

Port for Unnumbered IP

For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.)

Select the port for the unnumbered IP address. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP is set to Manually.

Fragmentation Size(byte)

64, 128, 256, 512

Select the fragmentation size.

4-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

5
About This Chapter

Configuring the Control Plane

The control plane, responsible for the call control and connection control, consists of a group of communication entities. The control plane creates, releases, monitors and maintains the connection through signaling, and it automatically recovers the connection upon failure. 5.1 Basic Concepts This section describes the related protocols of the control plane and application scenarios of these protocols when the control plane is configured. 5.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol If the dynamic MPLS tunnel is required, the IGP-ISIS protocol must be configured. The IGPISIS protocol is used to discover the network topology. Through the IGP-ISIS protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the IGP-ISIS protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The IGP-ISIS protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 5.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol If the dynamic PW need be configured, the MPLS-LDP protocol must be configured. The MPLSLDP is used to create the dynamic PW and to distribute the PW label. The NE can only obtain the information of the adjacent NE through the IGP-ISIS protocol. In the case of a single service, the NEs at the two ends can known each other by configuring the MPLS-LDP peer entity of the MPLS-LDP protocol. On the T2000, the MPLS-LDP peer entities can be created and the MPLSLDP protocol can be configured. 5.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol The MPLS-RSVP protocol is used to create dynamic MPLS tunnel and to distribute the tunnel label. On the T2000, the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol can be queried. This protocol does not need special configuration, and thus the user can configure each parameter according to requirements. 5.5 Configuring Static Routes The static routes are selected according to the preset route options in the network. On the T2000, the static routes can be queried and created. 5.6 Configuring the Address Parse
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

On the T2000, the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items can be created and queried. 5.7 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the control plane configuration.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

5.1 Basic Concepts

This section describes the related protocols of the control plane and application scenarios of these protocols when the control plane is configured. 5.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol, belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the internal of the autonomous system. The equipment uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the label distribution protocols RSVP-TE and LDP to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP. 5.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol The multi-protocol label switch label distribution protocol (MPLS-LDP) is used for the label switched routers (LSR) to distribute labels in the network. 5.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol Multi-protocol label switch resource reservation protocol (MPLS-RSVP) supports the distribution of MPLS labels. In addition, when transmitting the label binding message, it carries the resource reservation information, used as a signaling protocol to create, delete or modify the tunnel in the MPLS network. 5.1.4 ARP Protocol Address resolution protocol (ARP) is used to map the IP address (alias: logical address) at the network layer into the MAC address (alias: physical address) at the data link layer.

5.1.1 IGP-ISIS Protocol

The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol, belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the internal of the autonomous system. The equipment uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the label distribution protocols RSVP-TE and LDP to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP. The IS-IS routing protocol used by the equipment creates and synchronizes the link state database (LSD) through routing protocol packets, such as link state PDUs. Based on the LSDB and path cost, the equipment uses the optimized shortest path first (SPF) algorithm to generate the routing table, and uses the IS-IS TE of the IS-IS routing protocol to generate the traffic engineering database (TEDB). The TEDB and routing table are the bases of creating the MPLS LSP. The TEDB computes the route that the MPLS LSP travels through. The routing table forwards the RSVP-TE and LDP protocol packets to realize label distribution. In this way, the MPLS LSP is dynamically created. Three features of the IS-IS routing protocol are supported by the equipment, that is, three types of IS-IS routing protocol packets, optimized SPF algorithm, path cost, and IS-IS traffic engineering (IS-IS TE).

Three Types of IS-IS Routing Protocol Packets

The IS-IS routing protocol belongs to the network player of the OSI protocol model. The IS-IS routing protocol runs directly at the data link layer. When the IS-IS routing protocol is processed, the decapsulation of the network layer is absent. With the preceding feature, the IS-IS routing protocol is more applicable to the PTN transport network using the MPLS packet switching technology.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The IS-IS routing protocol packets use the uniform encapsulation format. The length of the packets is changeable and the extensibility is strong. The complexity of the protocol is decreased, because the types of the protocol packets are few. Thus, the running is more reliable and efficient. The equipment realizes the following three types of IS-IS routing protocol packets:
l

Hello packets Hello packets are used to construct and maintain neighbor relation between network nodes. Hence, Hello packets are also called IS-to-IS hello (IIH) PDUs.

Link state PDUs Link state PDUs are used to exchange the link state information. In a network running the IS-IS routing protocol, each network node generates a link state PDU, which contains all the link state information of this network node. To generate its own LSDB, each network node collects all the link state PDUs within the local domain and between domains.

SNP packets Sequence number PDUs (SNP) describe the link state PDUs in all or part of the LSDB. The SNP is used to synchronize and maintain the LSDB of each network node in the PTN network.

Optimized SPF Algorithm

The IS-IS routing protocol realized by the equipment uses the optimized SPF algorithm for route computation and update. When the topology is changed, the resources (network bandwidth, processing capability of network nodes, and memory) for updating the new route are few, and thus the convergence rate of the entire network is improved.

Path Cost
The equipment supports the manual setting of path cost, and controls the route that the MPLS LSP travels through when it is dynamically created.

IS-IS TE
When the MPLS constructs the LSP, the traffic engineering information of all the links in the local domain should be known. The IS-IS TE realized by the equipment supports the construction of the MPLS LSP. The equipment obtains the traffic engineering information (link utilization and path cost) of all the links in the network through the IS-IS routing protocol. It constructs and synchronizes the TEDB, and uses the constrained shortest path first (CSPF) algorithm used by the TEDB to compute the route that the MPLS LSP travels through.

5.1.2 MPLS-LDP Protocol

The multi-protocol label switch label distribution protocol (MPLS-LDP) is used for the label switched routers (LSR) to distribute labels in the network.

MPLS-LDP Peer Entities

The MPLS-LDP peer entities refer to two NEs, where LDP session exists, use the MPLS-LDP to exchange labels mapping relation.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

MPLS-LDP Session
The MPLS-LDP session is used to exchange label mapping and releasing messages between different equipment. The MPLS-LDP session consists the following two types:
l

Local MPLS-LDP session, in which the two NEs used to set up the session is directly connected. Remote MPLS-LDP session, in which the two NEs used to set up the session is not directly connected.

MPLS-LDP Message Types

The MPLS-LDP protocol mainly uses the following four types of messages:
l

Discovery message, which is used to notify and maintain the existence of the equipment in the network. Session message, which is used to set up, maintain and end the session between MPLSLDP peer entities. Advertisement message, which is used to create, change and delete the label mapping. Notification message, which is used to provide the constructive message and error notification.

l l

Working Mode of the MPLS-LDP

The label distribution process has two modes. The main difference between the two modes is whether the label mapping is released in the upstream request mode or downstream unsolicited distribution mode. The two label releasing modes are as follows:
l

Upstream request mode, in which the equipment in the upstream sends the label request message to the equipment in the downstream. The equipment in the downstream returns the bound labels to the equipment in the upstream through label mapping message. When the equipment in the downstream returns the label mapping message is determined by the label control mode used by the equipment.

If the ordered mode is used, only when the equipment receives the label mapping message returned by the equipment in the downstream, it sends the label mapping information to the upstream. If the independent mode is used, the equipment immediately sends the label mapping message to the upstream, regardless of whether it receives the label mapping message returned by the equipment in the downstream.

Downstream unsolicited distribution mode, in which the equipment in the downstream take the initiative to release the label mapping message to the equipment in the upstream after the MPLS-LDP session is successfully set up. The equipment in the upstream saves the label mapping information, and manages the received label mapping information according to the route table information.

Basic Operation of the MPLS-LDP

In sequence, the MPLS-LDP operation consists of the following four phases:
l

Development phase: In this phase, the equipment that expects to set up a session periodically sends Hello message to the adjacent equipment to notify the adjacent node of the local peer relation. In this process, the equipment can automatically discover its LDP peer entity without manual configuration.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-5

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

5 Configuring the Control Plane

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Session set-up and maintenance: After the peer relation is set up, the equipment begins to set up the session. PW set-up and maintenance: The set-up of the PW is based on the MPLS-LDP protocol. Session cancellation: A life state timer is set up for each session. When each LDP PDU is received, this timer is refreshed. If the timer times out before a new LDP PDU is received, the equipment takes that the session is interrupted and the peer relation is invalid. The equipment shuts down the corresponding connection at the transmission layer to end the session.

l l

5.1.3 MPLS-RSVP Protocol

Multi-protocol label switch resource reservation protocol (MPLS-RSVP) supports the distribution of MPLS labels. In addition, when transmitting the label binding message, it carries the resource reservation information, used as a signaling protocol to create, delete or modify the tunnel in the MPLS network.

Basic Concepts of the MPLS-RSVP

The MPLS-RSVP is a notification mechanism of the resource reservation in the network, which realizes the bandwidth reservation on the control plane. As a label distribution protocol, it is used to set up the LSP in the MPLS network. For details of the MPLS-RSVP extension, refer to RFC3209.

Resource Reservation Style

The LSP set up by using the MPLS-RSVP is of a certain reservation style. When the RSVP session is set up, the receive end determines which reservation style to be used, and thus determines which LSP to be used.
l

Fixed-filter (FF) style: When this style is used, resources are reserved for each transmit end individually. Thus, transmit ends in the same session cannot share the resources with each other. Shared-explicit (SE) style: When this style is used, resources are reserved for all transmit ends in the same session. Thus, transmit ends can share the resources.

MPLS-RSVP Message Type

The MPLS-RSVP uses the following message types:
l

Path message: The transmit end sends this type of message in the transmission direction of data packets. In addition, the path state is saved on all the nodes along the trail. Resv message: The receive end sends this type of message in the reverse transmission direction of data packets. In addition, the resource reservation is requested, and the reservation state is created and maintained on all the nodes along the trail.

Tunnel Created by Using the MPLS-RSVP

As shown in Figure 5-1, the creation process of the LSP tunnel by using the MPLS-RSVP is listed as follows:
l

The ingress equipment generates the Path message, which is transmitted in the direction of the egress equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

5-6

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

5 Configuring the Control Plane

After the egress equipment receives the Path message, the Resv message is generated and then is returned to the ingress equipment. In addition, the Resv message reserves resources on the equipment along the trail. When the ingress equipment receives the Resv message, the LSP is successfully created. The LSP created by using the MPLS-RSVP has the resource reservation function. The equipment along the trail can distribute some resources to the LSP to ensure the services on the LSP.

Figure 5-1 LSP tunnel created by using the MPLS-RSVP

Ingress
Path Resv Path Resv

Egress

Sender

Receiver

Parameters of the MPLS-RSVP State Timer

The parameters of the MPLS-RSVP state timer include the refreshing period of the Path or Resv message, multiple of the path state block (PSB) timeout and reservation state block (RSB) timeout. In the case of the creation of the LSP, the transmit end adds the LABEL_REQUEST object to the Path message. When the receive end receives the Path message with the LABEL_REQUEST object, it distributes one label and adds the label to the LABEL object of the Resv message. The LABEL_REQUEST object is saved in the PSB of the upstream node, and the LABEL object is saved in the RSB of the downstream node. When the message indicating that the number of message refreshing times exceeds the multiple of the PSB or RSB timeout is not continuously received, the corresponding state in the PSB or RSB is deleted. Assume that there is a resource reservation request, which does not pass the access control on some nodes. In some cases, this request is not supposed to be immediately deleted, but it cannot stop other requests from using its reserved resources. In this case, the node enters the blockade state, and the blockade state block (BSB) is generated on the node of the downstream. When the message indicating that the number of the message refreshing times exceeds the multiple of the PSB or RSB timeout is continuously received, the corresponding state in the BSB is deleted.

5.1.4 ARP Protocol

Address resolution protocol (ARP) is used to map the IP address (alias: logical address) at the network layer into the MAC address (alias: physical address) at the data link layer.

ARP Frame Format

Figure 5-2 shows the ARP frame format.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 5-2 ARP frame format

Destination MAC address Source MAC address Frame type ARP request/answer

2
IP address at the transmit end

MAC address type

IP MAC protocol addres type s length

IP address length

OP

MAC address at the transmit end

Destination MAC address

Destination IP address

Destination MAC address: six bytes. When an ARP request is sent, the destination MAC address is the broadcast MAC address, that is, 0xFF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF. Source MAC address: six bytes. Frame type: two bytes. The value of this field is 0x0806. MAC address type: two bytes. It defines the address type in the network that runs the ARP. Value 1 indicates the Ethernet address. IP protocol type: two bytes. It defines the protocol type. Value 0x0800 indicates the IP address. MAC address length: one byte. It defines the length of the physical address expressed in bytes. In the case of an ARP request or answer, the value of this field is 6. IP address length: one byte. It defines the length of the logical address expressed in bytes. In the case of an ARP request or answer, the value of this field is 4. OP: two bytes. It defines the ARP packet type. Value 1 indicates the ARP request and value 2 indicates the ARP answer. MAC address at the transmit end: six bytes. It defines the MAC address of the transmit station. IP address at the transmit end: four bytes. It defines the IP address of the transmit station. Destination MAC address: six bytes. It defines the destination MAC address. In the case of an ARP request packet, the value of this field is all-zero. Destination IP address: four bytes. It defines the destination IP address.

l l l

l l

Static ARP
Static ARP means that there is a fixed mapping relation between the IP address and the MAC address, and thus you cannot adjust this relation dynamically on the equipment or the router. For the static ARP, you need to manually create a table that is stored on each equipment in the network. The static ARP table is used in the following scenarios:
l

When a packet is transmitted to a destination address beyond the local network segment, this packet is bound with a specific network interface card (NIC) in order to be forwarded through this gateway.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

5-8

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

5 Configuring the Control Plane

To filter out certain illegal IP addresses, you can bind these addresses with an MAC address that does not exist to realize the filtering.

Dynamic ARP
Dynamic ARP means that the mapping relation between the IP address and the MAC address is constantly refreshed and adjusted through address learning. Changing the NIC or moving the host to another network usually changes the physical address. The corresponding MAC address can be obtained in a timely manner based on the dynamic ARP address resolution.

ARP Principle
When a host or other network equipment needs to transmit data to another host or equipment, IP data packets must be encapsulated into frames to be transmitted in the physical network. During the transmission, the destination MAC address must be available. When the equipment on the transmit station wants to obtain the MAC address of another equipment in the network, the transmit station searches for the MAC address corresponding to the IP address in the ARP table. If the ARP table is available, the transmit station obtains the MAC address from the ARP table directly. Otherwise, the ARP function is enabled. As shown in Figure 5-3, host A sends data to host B to obtain the MAC address of host B. To obtain the MAC address of the station whose IP address is 10.1.1.2, host A broadcasts an ARP request packet in the network. The packet carries the information about the MAC address and IP address of the transmit station, and the IP address of the destination station. All the equipment in the network receives and handles the ARP request packet. Only host B on the destination station, however, can identify the IP address and return an ARP answer packet. According to the MAC address of the transmit station in the request packet, host B sends the ARP answer packet to the request station in unicast mode. After receiving the ARP answer packet, host A obtains the MAC address of host B. Figure 5-3 ARP address resolution
Host A IP: 10.1.1.1 MAC: A-A-A
Transmit station: A-A-B;10.1.1.2 Destination station: A-A-A;10.1.1.1

Host B IP: 10.1.1.2 MAC: A-A-B

ARP answer packet

ARP request packet

Transmit station: A-A-A;10.1.1.1 Destination station: 10.1.1.2

Host C IP: 10.1.1.3 MAC:A-A-C

Host D IP: 10.1.1.4 MAC:A-A-D

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5.2 Configuring the IGP-ISIS Protocol

If the dynamic MPLS tunnel is required, the IGP-ISIS protocol must be configured. The IGPISIS protocol is used to discover the network topology. Through the IGP-ISIS protocol, each NE can obtain the information of the adjacent NE. When the IGP-ISIS protocol is used with the RSVP-TE protocol, the creation of the MPLS tunnel is complete. The IGP-ISIS protocol configuration includes the configuration of node and port attributes, query and configuration of route importing information, and query of the TE link information. 5.2.1 Setting Node Attributes On the T2000, the parameters of nodes managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set. 5.2.2 Setting Port Attributes On the T2000, the parameters of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set. 5.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing On the T2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set. 5.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information On the T2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.

5.2.1 Setting Node Attributes

On the T2000, the parameters of nodes managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Setting the Route Color

Set Route Color to divide a large autonomous domain into multiple logical sub-domains. The sub-domains with different Route Color values cannot interconnect through the IS-IS routing protocol. In this manner, the sub-domains are isolated for easy link management and maintenance. The network shown in Figure 5-4 is considered as an example. All the NEs are within the same autonomous domain. The autonomous domain is divided into three logical domains by setting to different colors. Within logical domains 1, 2, and 3, services are available between stations. Services are also available between domain 1 and domain 2, and between domain 1 and domain 3. In domain 1, services are available between NE 1 and NE2, and between NE2 and NE3. Route Color of NE1 is set to 1, 2, and 3, and Route Color of other NEs in domain 1 is set to 1. In domain 2, services are available between NE2 and NE1. Route Color of NE2 is set to 1 and 2, and Route Color of other NEs in domain 2 is 3 set to 1. In domain 3, services are available between NE1 and NE3. Route Color of NE3 is set to 1 and 3, and Route Color of other NEs in domain 3 is set to 3. In this manner, the IS-IS protocol packets are transmitted in each logical domain, between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE3.
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Figure 5-4 Example of setting the route color

Route color: 1 Route color: 1, 2, and 3 Domain 1 NE4 NE1 Route color: 1 and 2 Domain 2 NE2

Route color: 1 and 3

Domain 3 NE3

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Node Configuration tab.
NOTE

Currently, the equipment supports only one IS-IS instance.

Step 3 Optional: Select the ISIS Instance, you can modify the parameter of nodes managed by the IGPISIS protocol.
NOTE

Set Route Color to divide a large autonomous domain into multiple logical sub-domains. The sub-domains with different Route Color values cannot interconnect through the IS-IS routing protocol. In this manner, the sub-domains are isolated for easy link management and maintenance.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of parameters. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of a node. ----End

5.2.2 Setting Port Attributes

On the T2000, the parameters of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol can be queried and set.

Prerequisite
l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-11

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

5 Configuring the Control Plane

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Enable Tunnel of the layer 3 attributes must be set to Enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Port Configuration tab. Step 3 Optional: Select the port, you can modify the parameter of ports managed by the IGP-ISIS protocol.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of port parameters. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of each port. ----End

5.2.3 Configuring Parameters of Route Importing

On the T2000, the parameters of route importing can be queried and set.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Route Import tab. Step 3 Click Import to display the Route Import dialog box, and then set parameters of the imported routes.For details on the parameters for route import of IGP-ISIS protocol, see Table 5-1.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setting of parameters of the imported routes. Then, click OK. Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of the imported routes.
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

CAUTION
When modifying the parameters of the imported routes, click Delete to delete the original settings, and then click Import to re-set. This operation, however, interrupts the services. Thus, exercise caution when performing this operation. ----End

5.2.4 Querying the Link TE Information

On the T2000, the parameters of the link TE can be queried.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Link TE Information tab. Step 3 Click Query to query the information on the parameters of the link TE.For details on the parameters for link TE information of IGP-ISIS protocol, see Table 5-1. ----End

5.3 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol

If the dynamic PW need be configured, the MPLS-LDP protocol must be configured. The MPLSLDP is used to create the dynamic PW and to distribute the PW label. The NE can only obtain the information of the adjacent NE through the IGP-ISIS protocol. In the case of a single service, the NEs at the two ends can known each other by configuring the MPLS-LDP peer entity of the MPLS-LDP protocol. On the T2000, the MPLS-LDP peer entities can be created and the MPLSLDP protocol can be configured. 5.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities On the T2000, the LDP peer entities can be created. Thus, the MPLS-LDP session is available between NEs, and the NEs can obtain the label mapping messages of each other. 5.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol On the T2000, the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol can be set.

5.3.1 Creating MPLS-LDP Peer Entities

On the T2000, the LDP peer entities can be created. Thus, the MPLS-LDP session is available between NEs, and the NEs can obtain the label mapping messages of each other.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-13

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Context
For the local session and remote session, you only need to create bidirectional LDP peers between the source equipment and sink equipment. That is, you need to create peers from the source to the sink, and from the sink to source.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create to display the Create LDP Peer Entity dialog box. Step 3 For the Local LSR ID and Opposite LSR ID fields, enter LSR ID of the opposite NE. Then, click Apply. For details on the parameters for MPLS-LDP peer entities, see Table 5-2. Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.

Step 5 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-LDP peer entities.
NOTE

Click Delete to delete the MPLS-LDP peer entities.

----End

5.3.2 Configuring the MPLS-LDP Protocol

On the T2000, the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol can be set.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. For details on the parameters for MPLS-LDP protocol, see Table 5-2. Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setting of the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-LDP protocol. ----End

5.4 Configuring the MPLS-RSVP Protocol

The MPLS-RSVP protocol is used to create dynamic MPLS tunnel and to distribute the tunnel label. On the T2000, the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol can be queried. This protocol
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

does not need special configuration, and thus the user can configure each parameter according to requirements.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-RSVP Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. For details on the parameters for MPLS-RSVP protocol, see Table 5-3. Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setting of the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the MPLS-RSVP protocol. ----End

5.5 Configuring Static Routes

The static routes are selected according to the preset route options in the network. On the T2000, the static routes can be queried and created.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the setting of the basic attributes and Layer 3 attributes of the port.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Static Route Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create to create the static routes, and then click Apply. For details on the parameters for static routes, see Table 5-4.
NOTE

l l l l

When selecting boards or ports, select those that have Layer 3 attributes. When the static route is configured, the port IP address and the next hop IP address must be in the same network section. When the last digit of the IP address of the destination is not 0, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.255. For example, if the IP address is 193.168.3.2, the mask of the destination node is 255.255.255.255. When the last digit of the IP address of the destination is 0, the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 or 255.255.255.255. For example, if the IP address is 193.168.3.0, the mask of the destination node is 255.255.255.255 or 255.255.255.0.

Step 3 After the setting is complete, click OK. Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the static routes.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-15

5 Configuring the Control Plane

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Click Delete to delete the original static routes.

----End

5.6 Configuring the Address Parse

On the T2000, the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items can be created and queried.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE, and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Address Parse from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Create and the Add Address Parse dialogue box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the IP address and MAC address of the ARP table items separately, and then click Apply. For details on the parameters for the address parse, see Table 5-5.

WARNING
When configuring the MAC address of the ARP table items, the first digit of the address must be of an even number. Step 4 After the setting is complete, click OK.

WARNING
The configuration of the address resolution refers to the creation of the static ARP table items. To delete the dynamic ARP table items, click Clear. This operation, however, clears all the contents in the ARP table items, and interrupts the services. Thus, exercise caution when performing this operation.
NOTE

Click Delete to delete the contents of the ARP table items.

5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

----End

5.7 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the control plane configuration. Table 5-1 Descriptions of the parameters for IGP-ISIS Configuration Tab Node Configuration Parameter ISIS Instance ID Node Level Value 1-65535 level-1-2 Description Specify the ID of an ISIS instance. Displays the level for the node on the route in the IS-IS protocol network. If the node level is level-1-2, the node takes part in the route computation of L1 and L2, and also maintains the link state databases (LSDBs) of L1 and L2. Set the area ID. The area ID is also the network entity title (NET), which includes the AREA ID and SYSTEM ID of the node.
NOTE The area ID of the node can be a maximum of 26 bytes. Each byte is a hexadecimal integer with the high byte placed first and the low byte placed last. On the T2000, the length of the character string should be an even number.

Area ID

Character string

LSP Refresh Time (s)

30-65235

Set the time of refreshing the link state packet (LSP). To keep all LSPs in the area synchronous, the router periodically transmits all the current LSPs. The period of transmitting LSPs is the LSP refresh time.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tab

Parameter Maximum LSP Validity (s)

Value 350-65535

Description Set the maximum period when the LSP is valid. When generating the system LSP, the LSP router writes the life time in the LSP. When any other router receives the LSP, the life time decreases as the time goes. If the router does not receive the updated LSP when the life time of the LSP decreases to 0s, the router directly deletes the LSP from the LSDB. The life time is the maximum LSP validity.

Management Status Operating Status Route Color

Up, Down Up, Down 1-16

Displays the management status. Displays the operation status. Set the route color. you can set a maximum of 16 types of route color. Display the ID of an ISIS instance. Display the port where the IS-IS parameters need be set. The port includes Ethernet interface and Ethernet virtual interface. Displays the link level of a port. If the link level is level-1-2, the port can establish both the level-1 neighbor relation and level-2 neighbor relation.

Port Configuration

ISIS Instance ID Port

1-65535 Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.)

Link Level

level-1-2

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Tab

Parameter LSP Retransmission Interval(s)

Value 1-300

Description Set the interval for retransmission of the LSP. In the case of a point-to-point link, if the local router fails to receive any response in a period after transmitting the LSP, the local router considers that the LSP is lost or discarded. To ensure the transmission reliability, the local router transmits the LSP again.

Minimum LSP Transmission Interval (ms)

1-65535

Set the minimum interval for transmission of the LSP. To set the interval is to set the minimum delay between two consecutive LSPs. Set the link overhead. Set the authentication mode. Authentication configured on the port is used in the Hello packet to confirm the validity and correctness of neighbors.

Link Overhead Authentication Mode

1-16777215 OSI, IP

Authentication Type Authentication Key

the Mode of MD5 Encryption, No Authentication Example: m3%A

Select the authentication type. Set the authentication key.

NOTE The authentication key can be set only when the authentication type is the Mode of MD5 Encryption.

Hello Send Interval (ms)

100-255000

Set the interval for transmitting the hello packets. The IS-IS protocol periodically transmits the hello packets from the port. The router maintains the neighbor relations by transmitting and receiving the hello packets. The interval of transmitting the hello packets can be changed.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tab

Parameter Hello Loss Count

Value 2-100

Description Set the count of the lost hello packets. The IS-IS protocol maintains the neighbor relations with the neighbor routers by transmitting and receiving the hello packets. If the IS-IS protocol fails to receive the specified count of the consecutive hello packets, the IS-IS protocol considers that the neighbor router fails. The specified count is the hello loss count.

Route Import

ISIS Instance ID Source Route Protocol Type Overhead

1-65535 Static Route 1-255

Display the ID of an ISIS instance. Display the type of the route protocol that imports routes. Set the overhead, also the route weight, for the imported route. Display the import level of the imported route. Display the ID of an ISIS instance. Display the link level. Display the LSR ID of the local node. Display the IP address of the local link. Display the LSR ID of the opposite node. Display the IP address of the opposite link. Display the maximum bandwidth that can be reserved. Display the TE measurement value. Display the management group attribute.

Level Link TE Information ISIS Instance ID Level Local Node ID Local Link IP Opposite Node ID Opposite Link IP Maximum Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s) TE Measurement Management Group Attribute

level-1-2 1-65535 level-1-2 Example: 10.70.73.22 Example: 10.70.73.12 Example: 10.70.73.20 Example: 10.70.73.10 Example: 160000

0-0xFFFFFFFF 0-0xFFFFFFFF

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Tab

Parameter Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 0 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 1 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 2 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 3 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 4 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 5 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 6 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 7 (kbit/s)

Value Example: 16000

Description Display the available bandwidth for link priority 0. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 1. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 2. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 3. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 4. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 5. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 6. Display the available bandwidth for link priority 7.

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Example: 16000

Table 5-2 Descriptions of the parameters for MPLS-LDP Configuration Parameter Local LSR ID Opposite LSR ID Local Label Space Value Example: 1.1.1.3 Example: 1.1.1.3 Node Label Space, Port Label Space Description Display the LSR ID of the local end. Set the LSR ID of the opposite end. Display the type of the local label space, which indicates the local label range.
l

Node Label Space: The labels are distributed per NE. On one NE, one label should not repeat another. Port Label Space: The labels are distributed per port. On one port, one label should not repeat another.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameter Opposite Label Space Status

Value Node Label Space, Port Label Space Example: OPENSENT

Description Display the type of the opposite label space. Display the session status information between label distribution protocol (LDP) peers. Display the role that the label switching router (LSR) plays in session with the LDP peers. Display whether the local end supports the LDP graceful restart (GR). In the case of a fault in one router, the LDP GR function still maintains the neighbor relations and session information between routers, and recovers the session connection and label information.

Role

Active Port, Passive Port

GR Supporting Capacity

Supported, Not Supported

GR Reconnection Timing Interval (s) GR Forward Status Restoration Timing Interval (s) Negotiated Send Interval of KeepAlive Packets (s) Hello Send Interval(s)

Example: 3000 Example: 3000

Display the timing interval of the GR reconnection timer. Display the restoration timing interval of the GR forward status. Display the negotiated interval for transmitting the KeepAlive packets. Set the interval for transmitting the hello packets. The LDP entity discovers the LDP peer by periodically transmitting the hello packets. In this way, the LDP entities establish session connections.

Example: 10 3-65535

KeepAlive Send Interval (s)

3-65535

Set the interval for transmitting the KeepAlive packets. The established LDP session should also be maintained by the KeepAlive packets periodically transmitted.

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Table 5-3 Descriptions of the parameters for MPLS-RSVP Configuration Parameter Port Value Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Port No.) Description Display the port where the MPLS-RSVP can be configured. The port includes Ethernet interface and Ethernet virtual interface. Set the timing interval for retrying creating the standby path. Set the increment percentage of retransmission. Set the timeout multiples of the RSVP congestion status of the port. A request for reserving resources may fail to pass the entry control at a node. Sometimes such a request is still necessary and is not deleted. In this case, the request should not block other requests for reserving resources. As a result, the node enters the blockade state. Status Timer Refresh Period (ms) Status Timer Timeout Multiple 5000-2147483647 3-255 Set the period for refreshing the status timer. Set the timeout multiples of the status timer. When consecutive times of not receiving the refresh messages exceed the timeout multiples of the status, the status is deleted. Set the RSVP authentication type. Set the authentication key.
NOTE The authentication key can be set only when the authentication type is the Mode of MD5 Encryption.

Retransmission Timer Interval (ms) Retransmission Increment (%) Congestion Status Timeout Multiple

500-3000

0-100 3-255

Authentication Type Authentication Key

No Authentication, the Mode of MD5 Encryption Example: A9j*

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameter Hello Send Interval(s)

Value 1-60

Description Set the interval for transmitting the hello packets. The hello packets are used for detecting loss of the neighbor nodes or re-setting the RSVP status information of the neighbors.

Hello Loss Count FRR Retransmission Timer Interval(ms)

3-255 1-2147483647

Set the count of the lost hello packets. Set the timing interval for retrying the FRR. Set the timing interval for the PLR node to periodically select the bypass tunnel in the FRR protection.

Table 5-4 Descriptions of the parameters for Static Route Management Parameter Route List ID Board Value Example: 3 Example: Slot-Board Name Description Set the ID of the route list. Select a board.
NOTE Select the board that supports Layer 3 ports.

Port

Example: Port(Port No.)

Select a port.
NOTE Select the port whose general attributes and Layer 3 attributes are configured.

Next Hop IP Address Destination IP Destination IP Subnet Mask

Example: 10.70.1.3 Example: 1.0.1.5 Example: 255.255.255.0

Set the IP address of the next hop. Set the LSR ID of the destination. Set the mask of the destination IP address.

5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Table 5-5 Descriptions of the parameters for Address Parse Parameter ARP List IP ARP List MAC Value Example: 129.9.1.23 Example: 1C-C4-31-88-1CC4 Static, Dynamic Description Configure the IP address in the ARP list. Configure the MAC address corresponding to the IP address in the ARP list. Display the type of the ARP list.

ARP List Type

Table 5-6 Parameters of the node configuration Field IGP-OSPF Instance ID Value 1-65535 Description Specifies the ID of the IGP-OSPF instance. You can also set the automatic allocation of IDs. Displays the management status of the IGP-OSPF instance. Displays the operation status of the IGP-OSPF instance. Sets whether to enable GR. GR: graceful restart After you enable the OSPF GR function, if the equipment restarts because of an exception, the equipment can still ensure that data are forwarded in normal state in the period during which the protocol is restarted and route flapping is not caused because of the equipment restart in a short time. Therefore, key services are not interrupted. GR Time 3-3600 Sets the GR time. When a GR router detects that the opposite router is down, the topology or route information sent by the opposite router is not deleted within the GR time.

Management Status Operating Status GR Enable

Up, Down Up, Down, Going Up, Going Down, Failed Enabled, Disabled

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

5 Configuring the Control Plane

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 5-7 Parameters of the port configuration Field IGP-OSPF Instance ID Port Value 1 to 65535 For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Description Specifies the ID of the IGP-OSPF instance. Displays the port whose IGP-OSPF parameters are required to be set. A port can be added to the instances of different route protocols. A port, however, can be added to only one instance of each route protocol. Hello Timer(s) 1 to 65535 Sets the timer of hello packets. The IGP-OSPF protocol periodically transmits hello packets from the port. The PTN equipment maintains the neighbor relations by transmitting and receiving the hello packets.

Table 5-8 Parameters of the route importing Field IGP-OSPF Instance ID Source Route Protocol Type Value 1 to 65535 Static Route, IGP-OSPF Protocol, ISIS Protocol, RIP Protocol, BGP Protocol 1 to 255 Description Specifies the ID of the IGP-OSPF instance. Sets the source route protocol type. Currently, only the static route can be fully imported to the IGP-OSPF. Sets the overheads, that is, route metric, for the imported route.

Overhead

Table 5-9 Parameters of the link TE information Field IGP-OSPF Instance ID Local Node ID Local Link IP Opposite Node ID Value 1 to 65535 For example: 10.70.73.22 For example: 10.70.73.12 For example: 10.70.73.20 Description Displays the ID of the IGP-OSPF instance. Displays the LSR ID of the local node. Displays the IP address of the local link. Displays the LSR ID of the opposite node.

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

5 Configuring the Control Plane

Field Opposite Link IP Maximum Reserved Bandwidth(kbit/s) TE Measurement Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 0 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 1 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 2 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 3 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 4 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 5 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 6 (kbit/s) Available Bandwidth of Link Priority 7 (kbit/s)

Value For example: 10.70.73.10 For example: 160000 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000 For example: 16000

Description Displays the IP address of the opposite link. Displays the maximum reserved bandwidth. Displays the TE measurement value. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 0. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 1. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 2. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 3. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 4. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 5. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 6. Displays the available bandwidth of the link of priority 7.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

6
About This Chapter

Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

In a PSN network, the MPLS tunnel carries PWs where various services are encapsulated. In this way, data packets can be transparently transmitted among NEs. One MPLS tunnel can carry several PWs. Before configuring a service, first configure a MPLS tunnel that carries the service. On the T2000, you can use the trail function or per-NE configuration scheme to configure an MPLS tunnel. 6.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring the MPLS tunnel, familiar yourself with the MPLS and MPLS tunnel, and application scenarios of the MPLS tunnel. 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function To fast create a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, just specify the Ingress and Egress nodes of the MPLS tunnel. During creation of the MPLS tunnel, fast rerouting can be configured. 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function To create a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, specify the NEs involved in the MPLS tunnel. 6.4 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis You can create an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. To create such a tunnel, create a tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel. 6.6 Querying the Tunnel Label Information On the NE, the label for each tunnel is unique. By querying the tunnel label information, you can learn the usage of tunnel labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a static tunnel. 6.7 Configuring MPLS OAM Configure the MPLS OAM to enable the CV/FFD detection of a tunnel. In this way, the connectivity of the MPLS tunnel can be monitored in a real-time manner and the MPLS tunnel switching can be triggered.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-1

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6.8 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group You can create an MPLS tunnel protection group to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection in an MPLS tunnel protection group. To create an MPLS tunnel protection group, the MPLS tunnel protection group must be configured at the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel. 6.9 Configuration Case of the Dynamic MPLS Tunnel This section describes how to configure a dynamic MPLS tunnel. The configuration case and configuration flowchart help you better understand the process of configuring a dynamic MPLS tunnel. The configuration case includes tunnel planning and tunnel configuration. 6.10 Configuration Case of the Static MPLS Tunnel This section describes how to configure a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function and on a per-NE basis. The configuration case and configuration flowchart help you better understand the service configuration process. The configuration includes networking, service planning, and configuration process. 6.11 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS Tunnel configuration.

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

6.1 Basic Concepts

Before configuring the MPLS tunnel, familiar yourself with the MPLS and MPLS tunnel, and application scenarios of the MPLS tunnel. 6.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel As a transmission technology, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) can realize transparent transmission of data packets among users. The MPLS tunnel is the tunnel defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes the end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs related to the service. 6.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel As the carrier of PWs in the network, the MPLS Tunnel provides the service tunnel to transmit service packets. The MPLS Tunnel can carry various services, such as IP packets, C-VLAN and S-VLAN packets, MPLS packets, and ATM packets. The MPLS Tunnel is mainly used for transparent transmission of point-to-point data service packets and Tunnel protection group.

6.1.1 MPLS and MPLS Tunnel

As a transmission technology, the multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) can realize transparent transmission of data packets among users. The MPLS tunnel is the tunnel defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes the end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs related to the service. Figure 6-1 shows how the MPLS tunnel is used as the service transmission channel. Figure 6-1 MPLS tunnel in the MPLS network

IMA E1 FE ATM STM-1

Ingress node

Transit node MPLS tunnel

Egress node

IMA E1 FE ATM STM-1

PW

The MPLS tunnel only provides an end-to-end channel, and does not care which service is encapsulated in the PW it carries. Data packets are first encapsulated in the PW, which is stuck with an MPLS label and sent to the MPLS tunnel for transmission. At the sink end, data packets are recovered and retain the original service features. In the tunnel, the intermediate nodes are called Transit nodes. Hence, a tunnel contains the Ingress node, Egress node and Transit nodes.

6.1.2 Application of the MPLS Tunnel

As the carrier of PWs in the network, the MPLS Tunnel provides the service tunnel to transmit service packets. The MPLS Tunnel can carry various services, such as IP packets, C-VLAN and S-VLAN packets, MPLS packets, and ATM packets. The MPLS Tunnel is mainly used for transparent transmission of point-to-point data service packets and Tunnel protection group.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Transparent Transmission of Point-to-Point Data Packets

Commonly, the MPLS tunnel is used to provide a point-to-point service channel for services such as the E-Line service. In this way, provider edges (PEs) in a PSN network can transparently transmit services. Figure 6-2 shows how point-to-point data packets are transparently transmitted. Figure 6-2 Transparent transmission of point-to-point data packets
Node B

PE

MPLS tunnel Node B PE MPLS tunnel PE RNC

MPLS tunnel

PE

Node B

An edge node in one network accesses the services from Node B, and transports the services to the RNC connected to another PE. For such transport, one point-to-point MPLS tunnel can be used. On the T2000, two schemes can be used to create such a unicast tunnel.
l

Configuration on a per-NE basis: Configure the ingress port and the IP address of the next hop at each NE involved in the MPLS tunnel. In this way, one unicast MPLS tunnel is created. Configuration by trail: This configuration is classified into static configuration and dynamic configuration.

Static configuration: Specify the source and sink NEs for the MPLS tunnel, and each NE involved in the tunnel. In this way, one unicast MPLS tunnel is created. Dynamic configuration: Only specify the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel. The equipment then creates a unicast MPLS tunnel through signaling.

Tunnel Protection Group

The MPLS tunnels of the same type are created in one tunnel protection group. In this way, 1 +1 or 1:1 protection is provided to these MPLS tunnels. If the working MPLS tunnel fails, the Tunnel protection group ensures that services can still normally run.
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

By using the T2000, the user can configure 1+1 or 1:1 protection for MPLS tunnels that carry important services. Figure 6-3 shows the protection principle for unicast tunnels. Figure 6-3 Protection principle for unicast tunnels
CE CE Working tunnel

Ingress node

Protection tunnel

Egress node

Configuration of source protection group

Configuration of sink protection group

6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function
To fast create a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, just specify the Ingress and Egress nodes of the MPLS tunnel. During creation of the MPLS tunnel, fast rerouting can be configured.

Prerequisite
l l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE. You must complete the correct configuration of the control plan for each NE.

Context
For details of FRR protection, refer to FRR in the Feature Description.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel > Tunnel Creation . The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Create Reverse Tunnel to configure the parameters for the forward and reverse dynamic tunnels. When creating a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-5 for details on the parameters for general attributes.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-5

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NOTE

Take the following precautions when setting each parameter.

l

Tunnel ID: You can manually set this parameter, or select automatic allocation from the drop-down menu to allocate a tunnel ID. When manually setting this parameter, enter the Tunnel ID manually. The value of the ID ranges from 1 to 65535. Signal type: Select dynamic. The signal type indicates that the MPLS Tunnel of this type is created.

Step 3 Click Next. In the Select Node dialog box, select Source Node and Sink Node. When creating a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-6 for details on the parameters for selecting nodes. Step 4 Optional: Click Add to add the route restriction conditions of the forward route and reverse route. For route restrictions, set Route Constraint Port IP Address and Rerouting Mode.When creating a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-7 for details on the parameters for route constraint.

6-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NOTE

For Route Constraint Port IP Address, set the IP address of the port involved in the MPLS tunnel. For Rerouting Mode, set the excluded node, loose explicit node or strict explicit node.
l l

Exclude indicates that the created MPLS tunnel does not involve the Route Constraint Port IP Address. Include Loose indicates that the tunnel must traverse the ports with Route Constraint Port IP Address and must traverse the constraint ports in the same sequence in which the ports are added into the constraint list. There can be multiple hops between Include Loose constraint ports. That is, the number of hops along the tunnel can be larger than the number of constraint ports added in the constraint list for the tunnel. Include Strict indicates that the tunnel must traverse the ports with Route Constraint Port IP Address and must traverse the constraint ports in the same sequence in which the ports are added into the constraint list. There can be only one hop between Include Strict ports. That is, the Include Strict constraint port must be directly connected to the existing constraint port.

Step 5 Click Next. Set Setup Priority, Hold Priority, Color(0x), Mask(0x), Tunnel Type and ReRoute.For details on the parameters for priority when creating a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-8.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 6 Optional: If the tunnel is the bypass tunnel for fast rerouting, set Tunnel Type to Bypass Tunnel.

6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Step 7 Optional: If the tunnel is the working tunnel for fast rerouting, set Tunnel Type to Primary Tunnel first. Then select Fast Re-Route to activate the grey area and configure the parameters. When creating a dynamic MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-9 for details on the parameters for FRR.

NOTE

In this case, you can set FRR Protection Type and FRR Bandwidth(kbit/s).

Step 8 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed to show information on the created tunnel. Step 9 Click Finish. The progress bar is displayed to show the creation progress. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the dynamic tunnel is successfully created. Then, click Close. Step 10 Optional: Set the protection port of the bypass tunnel. 1. 2. In the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel > Dynamic Tunnel Management. The Set Dynamic Tunnel Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed. Click Filter. Select a bypass tunnel in the tunnel list.
NOTE

If Tunnel Type is set to Bypass Tunnel for a tunnel, the tunnel is a bypass tunnel.

3.

Click the Protected Port tab and click Modify. The Modify Protected Port dialog box is displayed. Select the bypass tunnel protected port, and click . Then, click OK.

4.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When the protection port of the bypass tunnel is configured, all the working tunnels that pass through this port and intersect with the sink node (MP node) of the bypass tunnel are protected by the bypass tunnel. To be protected by the bypass tunnel, the setup priority, hold priority, and color of the working tunnel must be consistent with the setup priority, hold priority, and color of the bypass tunnel. If these parameters of the working tunnel are inconsistent with that of the bypass tunnel, the working tunnel is not protected.

----End

6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function

To create a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, specify the NEs involved in the MPLS tunnel.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel > Tunnel Creation . The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select Create Reverse Tunnel to configure the parameters for the forward and reverse static tunnels. When creating a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-10 for details on the parameters.

6-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NOTE

Take the following precautions when setting each parameter.

l

Tunnel ID: You can manually set this parameter, or select automatic allocation from the drop-down menu to allocate a tunnel ID. When manually setting this parameter, enter the Tunnel ID manually. The value of the ID ranges from 1 to 65535. Signal Type: Select static. The signal type indicates that the MPLS Tunnel of this type is created.

Step 3 Click Next. Select nodes from the Available NE. Click to add each node as an Ingress node, Egress node or Transit node. When creating a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-11 for details on the parameters.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When adding the transit node, follow the sequence of NEs that the link traverses in the networking.

Step 4 Click Next. Set parameters for nodes selected in the previous step. When creating a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-12 for details on the parameters for route information. 1. 2. 3. Ingress node: Set Out Port, Out Label and Next Hop Address. Egress node: Set In Port and In Label. Transit node: Set Out Port, Out Label, In Port, In Label and Next Hop Address.
NOTE

For Next Hop Address, set the IP address of the interface of the next node, or set the LSR ID for the next node. The label value of the ingress node may be same as or different from the label value of the egress node. The label value of the egress node is signalled by the upstream node.

Step 5 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed to show information on the created tunnel. When creating a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function, see Table 6-13 for details on the parameters for tunnel information. Step 6 Click Finish. A progress bar is displayed to show the creation progress. When the creation is complete, the Operation Result is displayed, indicating that the MPLS tunnel is successfully created. Then, click Close. ----End

6.4 Configuring Basic Attributes of the MPLS

In the Basic Configuration interface, you can set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. For details on the parameters for general attributes of MPLS, see Table 6-14.

CAUTION
If there are services on the NE, modifying LSR ID may result in NE reset and service interruption. ----End
6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis

You can create an end-to-end unicast MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis. To create such a tunnel, create a tunnel at each node involved in the tunnel.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. You must complete the correct setting of the LSR ID for each NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Static Tunnel tab and click New. The New Unicast Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select Create Reverse Tunnel to set parameters for the forward and reverse tunnels. When creating an MPLS tunnel on a per-NE basis, see Table 6-15 for details on the related parameters.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When Node Type is set to Egress, Bandwidth(kbit/s) must be consistent with the tunnel bandwidth in the Ingress direction and cannot be set. For Next Hop Address, select the IP address of the interface of the next node, or the LSR ID of the next node.

Step 4 Click OK to finish creation of the static tunnel. Step 5 Follow Steps 1 - 4 to create static tunnels for Transit nodes and the Egress node. Step 6 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID. ----End

6.6 Querying the Tunnel Label Information

On the NE, the label for each tunnel is unique. By querying the tunnel label information, you can learn the usage of tunnel labels. Thus, you can avoid the conflict of labels when creating a static tunnel.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of an MPLS tunnel.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > MPLS Label Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Tunnel Label tab, click Query to view the tunnel label information. ----End

6.7 Configuring MPLS OAM

Configure the MPLS OAM to enable the CV/FFD detection of a tunnel. In this way, the connectivity of the MPLS tunnel can be monitored in a real-time manner and the MPLS tunnel switching can be triggered.

Prerequisite
l l

You must complete the creation of an MPLS tunnel. You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the NE in the NE Explorer interface. Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the OAM Parameters tab and set the parameters.For details on the parameters for OAM of MPLS, see Table 6-17.
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Take the following precautions when setting each parameter.

l

Detection Packet Period: If CV is selected for Detection Packet Type, the Detection Packet Period is fixed as 1000 ms. If FFD is selected for Detection Packet Type, the Detection Packet Period can be set. Reverse Tunnel: The BDI packets that carry information on defects are sent to the ingress node, which then knows the defect states in time.

Step 3 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation succeeds. Step 4 Click Close. ----End

6.8 Creating an MPLS Tunnel Protection Group

You can create an MPLS tunnel protection group to protect MPLS tunnels. You can configure 1+1 protection and 1:1 protection in an MPLS tunnel protection group. To create an MPLS tunnel protection group, the MPLS tunnel protection group must be configured at the source and sink NEs of the MPLS tunnel.

Prerequisite
l l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The working and protection tunnels of an MPLS tunnel must be created. You must have enabled the MPLS OAM state of each MPLS tunnel in the protection group. The OAM packet type must be set to FFD and transmission period to 3.3 ms.

WARNING
l

In the case of a network-side port configured with the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, the linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) should not configured for the port. The node that is configured with the MPLS APS protection cannot be configured with the FRR protection. The protection tunnel should not carry any extra service.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New Tunnel Protection Group dialog box is displayed.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 3 Set parameters for the tunnel protection group.For details on the parameters for MPLS tunnel protection group, seeTable 6-16.
l l

Protection Type: You can select 1+1 or 1:1. Switching Mode: You can select Single-Ended or Dual-Ended. When the protection type is 1:1, the switching mode must be dual-ended. Revertive Mode: You can select Non-revertive or Revertive. Hold-off Time(100ms): The unit is 100 millisecond. You can enter an integer from 0 to 100, that is, 0 to 10 seconds.

l l

CAUTION
When creating an APS protection group, disable Protocol Status. Start the protocol only when the configuration of the APS protection group is complete at both nodes. Step 4 Click OK. The MPLS tunnel protection group is successfully configured.

6-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

The bandwidth of the protection tunnel should exceed that of the working tunnel. To increase the bandwidth of the working tunnel after the protection group is created, increase the bandwidth of the protection tunnel first.

Step 5 Refer to Steps 1 through 4 to configure the protection group on the sink NE of the tunnel. Step 6 Start the protocol state of the MPLS APS protection group. 1. 2. 3. Select the source NE of the Tunnel in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Right-click a created APS protection group, and select Start Protocol. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Protocol Status of the APS protection group turns to Enabled.

----End

6.9 Configuration Case of the Dynamic MPLS Tunnel

This section describes how to configure a dynamic MPLS tunnel. The configuration case and configuration flowchart help you better understand the process of configuring a dynamic MPLS tunnel. The configuration case includes tunnel planning and tunnel configuration. 6.9.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram for the example of configuring an MPLS tunnel. 6.9.2 Service Planning The services between the branches of Company A are carried by the primary tunnel. Bypass tunnel 1 and bypass tunnel 2 provide FRR protection for the primary tunnel. 6.9.3 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel This section describes how to configure the dynamic MPLS Tunnel in the example.

6.9.1 Networking Diagram

This section describes the networking diagram for the example of configuring an MPLS tunnel. As shown in Figure 6-4, Company A has branches in City 1 and City 2. Real-time service transmission is required between the branches. In this case, an MPLS tunnel can be created to carry the real-time services. Real-time services require high network security. Hence, FRR protection should also be configured for the MPLS tunnel between NE1 and NE3.
l l

The NE1-to-NE3 primary tunnel is along the NE1-NE2-NE3 trail. NE2 is the transit node. The NE1-to-NE3 bypass tunnel 1 is along the NE1-NE4-NE3 trail. When the NE1-NE2 link fails or the NE2 has a fault, bypass tunnel 1 protects the primary tunnel. The NE1-to-NE3 bypass tunnel 2 is along the NE2-NE4-NE3 trail. When the NE2-NE3 link fails, bypass tunnel 2 protects the primary tunnel.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 6-4 Networking diagram of an MPLS tunnel

NE4

NE1
A Company City1

NE3
A Company City2

NE2 Primary Tunnel

Bypass Tunnel 1 Bypass Tunnel 2

Figure 6-5 shows the NE planning. NE1 is an OptiX PTN 1900 NE. NE2, NE3 and NE4 are OptiX PTN 3900 NEs. Figure 6-5 NE planning
10.1.3.1 1-EG16-1 10.1.3.2 4-EFG2-2 10.1.4.1 1EG16-3

NE4

10.1.5.2 1-EG16-2 10.1.5.1 1-EG16-2

NE1
A Company 4-EFG2-1 City1 10.1.1.2 1-EG16-1 10.1.1.1 1EG16-3

NE3
10.1.2.1 10.1.4.2 1-EG16-2 1-EG16-1 A Company City2

NE2

10.1.2.2

Primary Tunnel Bypass Tunnel 1 Bypass Tunnel 2

6.9.2 Service Planning

The services between the branches of Company A are carried by the primary tunnel. Bypass tunnel 1 and bypass tunnel 2 provide FRR protection for the primary tunnel. On the NNI side of the NEs, the GE boards are used and a GE ring is built on the boards. Table 6-1 lists the planning details of NE parameters.

6-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Table 6-1 Configuration parameters of NEs NEs LSR ID Interface 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 1-EG16-1(Port-1) NE2 1.0.0.2 1-EG16-2(Port-2) 1-EG16-3(Port-3) NE3 1.0.0.3 1-EG16-1(Port-1) 1-EG16-2(Port-2) 1-EG16-1(Port-1) NE4 1.0.0.4 1-EG16-2(Port-2) 1-EG16-3(Port-3) IP Address of the Interface 10.1.1.2 10.1.3.2 10.1.1.1 10.1.2.2 10.1.4.2 10.1.2.1 10.1.5.1 10.1.5.2 10.1.3.1 10.1.4.1 Subnet Mask of the Interface 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252

NE1

1.0.0.1

Since the service bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s, the bypass tunnel should have bandwidth more than 10 Mbit/s. In addition, the service travels through several NEs. Hence, several bypass tunnels are required to completely protect the tunnel for the service. According to the actual condition, two bypass tunnels are planned for the FRR. Table 6-2 lists the planned parameters of the primary tunnel and the two bypass tunnels. Table 6-2 Configuration parameters of Tunnels Parameter Tunnel ID Primary Tunnel Positive: 1 Reverse: 2 Name Positive: Tunnel-0001 Reverse: Tunnel-0002 Signal Type Scheduling Type Bandwidth (kbit/s) Tunnel Source Node Tunnel Sink Node Dynamic E-LSP 10240 NE1 NE3 Bypass Tunnel 1 Positive: 3 Reverse: 4 Positive: Tunnel-0003 Reverse: Tunnel-0004 Dynamic E-LSP 10240 NE1 NE3 Bypass Tunnel 2 Positive: 5 Reverse: 6 Positive: Tunnel-0005 Reverse: Tunnel-0006 Dynamic E-LSP 10240 NE2 NE3

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameter Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address

Primary Tunnel IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 1-EG16-1: 10.1.1.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 1-EG16-1: 10.1.2.1

Bypass Tunnel 1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EG16-1: 10.1.3.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 1-EG16-2: 10.1.5.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EG16-2: 10.1.5.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE1: 4-EFG2-2: 10.1.3.2 Include Strict

Bypass Tunnel 2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EG16-3: 10.1.4.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 1-EG16-2: 10.1.5.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EG16-2: 10.1.5.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 1-EG16-3: 10.1.4.2 Include Strict

Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address

IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 1-EG16-2: 10.1.2.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE1: 4-EFG2-1: 10.1.1.2

Rerouting Mode

Include Strict

Note: In this case, the subnet mask at each NNI is 255.255.255.252.

6.9.3 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel

This section describes how to configure the dynamic MPLS Tunnel in the example.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Set the parameters such as LSR ID of each NE by following the previous two steps. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-20

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.1.3.2 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.1.1.2 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2 and set different IP addresses for them.
l l l l l

NE2-1-EG16-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.1.1.1 NE2-1-EG16-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.1.2.2 NE2-1-EG16-3(Port-3) IP Address: 10.1.4.2 NE3-1-EG16-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.1.2.1 NE3-1-EG16-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.1.5.1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-21

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE4-1-EG16-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.1.5.2 NE4-1-EG16-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.1.3.1 NE4-1-EG16-3(Port-3) IP Address: 10.1.4.1

Step 3 Configure the control plane. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Select 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Port Configuration tab. Right click IS-IS Enable field, and select Enabled. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

IS-IS Enable: Enabled (After the IS-IS routing protocol is enabled, an MPLS LSP can be dynamically created and PW labels can also be distributed dynamically.) Link Level: level-1-2 LSP Retransmission Interval(s): 5 (In the case of a point-to-point link, if the local equipment fails to receive any response in a period after transmitting the LSP, the local equipment considers that the LSP is lost or discarded. To ensure the transmission reliability, the local equipment transmits the LSP again.) Minimum LSP Transmission Interval (ms): 30

l l

3.

Optional: Choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree.
NOTE

When creating a dynamic PW to carry services, set the parameters related to MPLS-LDP.

4.

Optional: Click Create. Enter the ID of the opposite NE in the Create LDP Peer Entity dialog box. Click OK. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE3 in this case.) Hello Send Interval(s): 10 (The Hello packets are periodically sent to maintain the neighborship.) KeepAlive Send Interval(s): 10 (The KeepAlive packets are periodically sent to maintain the LDP session.)

5.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2 and NE3 separately. Perform Step 3.1 through Step 3.4 to set the parameters related to the control plane. Set the IS-IS parameters of NE2 and NE3 as the same as the IS-IS parameters of NE1. Set the LDP parameters as follows:
l

NE2 LDP parameters

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE3 in this case.) NE3-NE1 peers Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE1 in this case.)

NE3 LDP parameters

NE3-NE2 peers
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-22

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE2 in this case.) Step 4 Creating Primary MPLS Tunnel. 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Tunnel ID: 1 (Positive), 2 (Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0001 (Positive), Tunnel-0002 (Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

EXP: none (When the EXP value of the tunnel is set, if the packets are at the egress port, this value is filled in the EXP filed of the MPLS packets. If it is set to none, the equipment searches for the corresponding EXP value in the mapping relation in the Diffserv domain according to the scheduling priority of user packets. When the packets are at the egress port, this value is filled in the EXP filed of the MPLS packets. The downstream nodes determine the packet scheduling priority and discarding priority according to the EXP information of the MPLS packets. The EXP value is set according to the networking planning, and it is not set in this example.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10240 (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Source Node and Sink Node. Click Add to add route restrictions.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l

Source Node: NE1 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.1.1, 10.1.2.1, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.2.2, 10.1.1.2, Include Strict

4.

Click Next. Set the parameters such as Setup Priority and Hold Priority for the tunnel according to the planning. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Setup Priority: 7 (Setup priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel during creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case insufficiency of resources, the MPLS tunnel of a higher setup priority can preempt the bandwidth of other MPLS tunnels and thus can be created successfully.) Hold Priority: 0 (Hold priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel after creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case of insufficiency of resources, the bandwidth for the MPLS tunnel of a higher hold priority is less likely to be preempted by other tunnels. When creating a dynamic tunnel, make sure that the hold priority is higher or equal to the setup priority.) Color(0x): 0 (Set the affinity attribute of a link. When the primary tunnel is faulty, the link with the same color is preferred during rerouting. When the affinity attribute of links is not required, adopt the default value.) Mask(0x): 0 (Set the number of bits of the mask. Match the number of bits of a mask with the link color. Select the route of a matching link color.) Tunnel Type: Primary Tunnel (You can set the tunnel type to primary tunnel or bypass tunnel. According to the planning, the tunnel is a primary tunnel in this case.) Fast Re-Route: Selected
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-24

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

FRR Type: Facility Mode (In the facility mode, one LSP tunnel protects multiple LSP tunnels. Currently, the OptiX PTN equipment supports only the facility backup mode.) FRR Protection Type: Protection Node Mode

In the case of the protection node mode, the bypass tunnel selected by the PLR must protect the downstream node adjacent to the PLR, and the links between them. If any other link is faulty, the FRR protection switching is triggered through the control plane. This process takes a relatively long time. In the case of the protection link mode, the bypass tunnel selected by the PLR must protect the link between the PLR and downstream adjacent node.

FRR Bandwidth(kbit/s): No Limit (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

Step 5 Creating Primary MPLS Tunnel. 1. Configure the General Attributes of Bypass Tunnel1 by following Step 4.1 to Step 4.2. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l

Tunnel ID: 3 (Positive), 4 (Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0003 (Positive), Tunnel-0004 (Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic Scheduling Type: E-LSP EXP:- (tunnel priority) Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10240 (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

2.

Click Next, and select Source Node and Sink Node. Click Add to add route restrictions. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Source Node: NE1 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.3.1, 10.1.5.1, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.5.2, 10.1.3.2, Include Strict

3.

Click Next. Set the parameters such as Setup Priority and Hold Priority for the tunnel according to the planning. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Setup Priority: 7 (The setup priority of the bypass tunnel must be the same as the setup priority of the primary tunnel.) Hold Priority: 0 (The hold priority of the bypass tunnel must be the same as the hold priority of the primary tunnel.) Color(0x): 0 (The link color of the bypass tunnel must be the same as the link color of the primary tunnel.) Mask(0x): 0 (Set this parameter the same as the primary tunnel.) Tunnel Type: Bypass Tunnel (According to the planning, the tunnel is a bypass tunnel in this case.) Re-Route: selected

l l

4.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Create Bypass Tunnel2 by following Step 5.1 to Step 5.3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-25

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

General Attributes

Tunnel ID: 5(Positive), 6(Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0005(Positive), Tunnel-0006(Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic Scheduling Type: E-LSP EXP: Bandwidth(kbit/s): 10240 Source Node: NE2 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.4.1, 10.1.5.1, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.1.5.2, 10.1.4.2, Include Strict Setup Priority: 7 Hold Priority: 0 Color(0x): 0 Mask(0x): 0 Tunnel Type: Bypass Tunnel (According to the planning, the tunnel is a bypass tunnel in this case.) Re-Route: selected

Route Constraint

Tunnel Management Attributes

----End

6.10 Configuration Case of the Static MPLS Tunnel

This section describes how to configure a static MPLS tunnel by using the trail function and on a per-NE basis. The configuration case and configuration flowchart help you better understand the service configuration process. The configuration includes networking, service planning, and configuration process. 6.10.1 Networking Diagram This section shows the networking diagram for the example of configuring a static MPLS tunnel. 6.10.2 Service Planning There are services between NodeB and RNC. Two static MPLS tunnels are to be created. One is the working tunnel and the other is the protection tunnel. Then, the services can be securely transmitted on the network. 6.10.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function This section describes how to configure the static MPLS Tunnel in the example by using the trail function. 6.10.4 Configuring a Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis This section describes how to configure the static MPLS Tunnel in the example on a per-NE basis.
6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

6.10.1 Networking Diagram

This section shows the networking diagram for the example of configuring a static MPLS tunnel. As shown in Figure 6-6, the service between NodeB and RNC is to be carried by a static MPLS tunnel. NE1 accesses the service from NodeB. Then, the service is transmitted to the 10GE ring on the convergence layer through the GE ring on the access layer. Finally, the service is converged at NE3 and transmitted to RNC. If the service requires high network security, configure the MPLS APS protection to ensure service transmission. For details on how to configure the MPLS APS protection, refer to MPLS APS in the Feature Description.
l l

Working tunnel: NE1-NE2-NE3. NE2 is a transit node. Protection tunnel: NE1-NE6-NE5-NE4-NE3. NE6, NE5, NE4, and NE3 are transit nodes. When the working tunnel becomes faulty, the service on it is switched to the protection tunnel for protection.

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of an MPLS tunnel

NE4 NE5 NE6 GE ring on access layer NE1 10GE ring on convergence layer

NE2

NE3

RNC
Working Tunnel

NodeB
OptiX PTN 3900

Protection Tunnel

OptiX PTN 1900

NE1 and NE6 are OptiX PTN 1900 NEs. NE2, NE3, NE4 and NE5 are OptiX PTN 3900 NEs. Figure 6-7 shows the planning details of boards on the NE and interfaces on the boards.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 6-7 NE planning

3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.4.2 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.3.2 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.3.1 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.2.2

NE5
4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 10.0.4.1

NE6

GE ring on access layer NE1

3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.2

NE4 10GE ring on convergence layer

1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.2 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.2.1

4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 10.0.5.2

NE2
4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.1

1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.1

NE3

4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 10.0.5.1

RNC
Protected tunnel

NodeB
OptiX PTN 3900

Bypass tunnel

OptiX PTN 1900

6.10.2 Service Planning

There are services between NodeB and RNC. Two static MPLS tunnels are to be created. One is the working tunnel and the other is the protection tunnel. Then, the services can be securely transmitted on the network. Table 6-3 lists the configuration parameters of NEs. Table 6-3 Configuration parameters of NEs NE NE1 LSR ID 1.0.0.1 Port 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Port IP Address 10.0.0.1 10.0.5.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.1.1 10.0.1.2 10.0.2.1 10.0.2.2 10.0.3.1 10.0.3.2 10.0.4.2 10.0.5.2 10.0.4.1 IP Mask 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

NE2

1.0.0.2

NE3

1.0.0.3

NE4

1.0.0.4

NE5

1.0.0.5

NE6

1.0.0.6

6-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Table 6-4 lists the configuration parameters of Tunnels. Table 6-4 Planning of Tunnel parameters Parameters Tunnel ID Name 100 Working TunnelPositive Static E-LSP No Limit NE1 NE2 NE3 NE1
l

Working Tunnel 101 Working TunnelReverse Static E-LSP No Limit NE3 NE2 NE1 NE3
l

Protection Tunnel 120 Protection Tunnel-Positive Static E-LSP No Limit NE1 NE6, NE5, NE4 NE3 NE1
l

121 Protection Tunnel-Reverse Static E-LSP No Limit NE3 NE4, NE5, NE6 NE1 NE3
l

Signal Type Scheduling Type Bandwidth (kbit/s) Ingress Node Transit Node Egress Node Ingress Node Route Information

Out Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 20

Out Port: 1EX2-1(Port-1) Out Label: 21

Out Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 22

Out Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 23

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-29

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameters Transit Node Route Information NE2

l

Working Tunnel NE2

l

Protection Tunnel NE6

l

NE4
l

In Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) In Label: 20 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 30

In Port: 1EX2-1(Port-1) In Label: 21 Out Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 31

l l

In Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 22 Out Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 32 In Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) In Label: 32 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 42 In Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 42 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 52

In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 23 Out Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 33 In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 33 Out Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 43 In Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 43 Out Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 53

l l

l l

l l

NE5
l

NE5
l

l l

l l

NE4
l

NE6
l

l l

l l

Egress Node Route Information

NE3
l

NE1
l

NE3
l

NE1
l

In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 30

In Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 31

In Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 52

In Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 53

6.10.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function

This section describes how to configure the static MPLS Tunnel in the example by using the trail function.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.
6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-31

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:
l

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000

6-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

IP Address: 10.0.5.2
l

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Creating Working MPLS Tunnels 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Tunnel ID: 100(Positive), 101(Reverse) Name: Working Tunnel-Positive, Working Tunnel-Reverse Signal Type: Static (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

l l

EXP:- (Set the tunnel priority according to networking planning.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Ingress Node, Egress Node and Transit Node to set route restrictions.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-33

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Ingress Node: NE1 (The source node on a tunnel is referred to as ingress node, that is, the node where the tunnel enters the network.) Egress Node: NE3 (The sink node on a tunnel is referred to as egress node, that is, the node where the tunnel exists the network.) Transit Node: NE2 (The pass-through node on a tunnel is referred to as transmit node.)

4.

Click Next. Set tunnel-related parameters and route constraints. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Positive Route Information

NE1 Ingress Node

Out Port: 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) (the source port on the tunnel) Out Label: 20 (The local out label is the same as the downstream in label. Labels are used to forward packets.) Next Hop Address: 10.0.0.2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-34

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

NE2 Transit Node

In Port: 3-EG16-1(Port-1) In Label: 20 Out Port: 1-EX2-1(Port-1) Out Label: 30 Next Hop Address: 10.0.1.2 In Port: 1-EX2-1(Port-1) In Label: 30

NE3 Egress Node

Reverse Route Information

NE3 Ingress Node

Out Label: 21 In Label: 21 Out Label: 31 In Label: 31

NE2 Transit Node

NE1 Egress Node

Step 4 Creating Protection Tunnel. 1. Create protection Tunnel by following Step 3.1 toStep 3.4. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

General Attributes

Tunnel ID: 120 (Positive), 121 (Reverse) Name: Protection Tunnel-Positive, Protection Tunnel-Reverse Signal Type: Static Scheduling Type: E-LSP EXP:Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit Ingress Node: NE1 Egress Node: NE3 Transit Node: NE6, NE5, NE4

Node Information

For the route information, see Table 6-4.

----End

6.10.4 Configuring a Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes how to configure the static MPLS Tunnel in the example on a per-NE basis.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-35

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-36

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:
l

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-37

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.5.2

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Creating Working MPLS Tunnels. 1. Select NE1 in the NE Explorer . Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Click New and the New Unicast Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel such as Tunnel ID, Tunnel name, port and labels. Click OKto finish creating the ingress node.

2.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l

Tunnel ID: 100(Positive), 101(Reverse) Tunnel Name: Working Tunnel-Positive, Working Tunnel-Reverse Node Type: Ingress(Positive), Egress(Reverse) Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.) Out Board/Logic Interface Type: 4-EFG2 (The source board of the Tunnel.) Out Port: 1(Port-1) (The source port of the Tunnel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6-38

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Next Hop Address: 10.0.0.2 (The IP address of the interface on the next node on the tunnel.) Sink Node: 1.0.0.3 (The LSR ID of the interface on the sink node on the tunnel.) Tunnel Type: E-LSP

l l

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

EXP: none (Set the tunnel priority according to networking planning.)

3.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2. Then, configure the Tunnel parameters of the transit node by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2.

Set related parameters and ensure that the general information of the tunnel is the same as that on NE1. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l

Node Type: Transit (NE2 is a transit node on the tunnel.) In Board/Logic Interface Type: 3-EG16 In Port: 1(Port-1) In Label: 20 (Positive), 21 (Reverse) Out Board/Logic Interface Type: 1-EX2 Out Port: 1(Port-1) Out Label: 30 (Positive), 31 (Reverse) Next Hop Address: 10.0.1.2 (Positive), 10.0.0.1 (Reverse) Source Node: 1.0.0.1 (Positive), 10.0.1.2 (Reverse) (The LSR ID of the source node on the tunnel.) Sink Node: 1.0.0.2. (The LSR ID of the sink node on the tunnel.)

4.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, configure the Tunnel parameters of the egress node by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-39

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Set related parameters and ensure that the general information of the tunnel is the same as that on NE1. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l

Node Type: Egress (NE3 is a terminal node on the tunnel.) In Board/Logic Interface Type: 1-EX2 In Port: 1(Port-1) In Label: 30(Positive), Out Label: 31 (Reverse) Next Hop Address: -(Positive), 10.0.1.1 (Reverse) Source Node: 1.0.0.1 (Positive) (The LSR ID of the source node on the tunnel.)

Step 4 Creating Protection Tunnel. 1. Display the NE Explorer for NE1, NE6, NE5, NE4, and NE3 separately. Perform Step 3.1 through Step 3.4 to create the ingress node, transit node, and egress node on the bypass tunnel. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l

Tunnel ID: 120 (Positive), 121 (Reverse) Tunnel Name: Protection Tunnel-Positive, Protection Tunnel-Reverse Bandwidth(kbit/s): No Limit Tunnel Type: E-LSP EXP: none For the route information, see Table 6-4.

----End

6.11 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the MPLS Tunnel configuration.
6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Table 6-5 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the General Attributes tab Field Tunnel ID Name Direction Value Example: 5 Character string Unidirectional Description Set an ID for the tunnel. Set a name for the tunnel. The direction of the tunnel. The unidirectional tunnel indicates the tunnel from the ingress node to the egress node. Signal Type Scheduling Type EXP Static, Dynamic E-LSP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None Set the signal type of the tunnel to Dynamic. Set the scheduling type. The E-LSP supports the EXP priority. 7 indicates the highest priority. Set the bandwidth of the tunnel. Specify the customer. Make remarks.

Bandwidth (kbit/s) Customer Remarks

Example: 1024 Character string Character string

Table 6-6 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Select Node tab Field Source Node Sink Node Value Example: NE2 Example: NE3 Description Set the source node of the tunnel. Set the sink node of the tunnel. When Specify IP Address is selected, you can set the IP address for the sink node.
NOTE When you create a reverse tunnel, Specify IP Address cannot be selected.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-41

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 6-7 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Positive Route Constraint (Reverse Route Constraint)tab Field Serial NO. Route Constraint Port IP Address Value Example: 1 Example: 192.168.2.1 Description Display the sequence for creating the route constraint. Set the IP address of the route constraint port.

6-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field Rerouting Mode

Value Excluded, Include Loose, Include Strict Default: Excluded

Description Set the rerouting mode.

l

Excluded: The tunnel does not involve the route constraint port. Include Loose indicates that the tunnel must traverse the ports with Route Constraint Port IP Address and must traverse the constraint ports in the same sequence in which the ports are added into the constraint list. There can be multiple hops between Include Loose constraint ports. That is, the number of hops along the tunnel can be larger than the number of constraint ports added in the constraint list for the tunnel. Include Strict indicates that the tunnel must traverse the ports with Route Constraint Port IP Address and must traverse the constraint ports in the same sequence in which the ports are added into the constraint list. There can be only one hop between Include Strict ports. That is, the Include Strict constraint port must be directly connected to the existing constraint port.

NOTE If the rerouting mode is set to Include Strict or Include Loose, the route constraint port IP address should be in sequence.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-43

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 6-8 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Priority tab Field Setup Priority Value 0-7 Default: 7 Description Set the setup priority. The number 0 indicates the highest priority. The setup priority indicates the sequence for setting up dynamic tunnels in one link. Hold Priority 0-7 Default: 0 Set the hold priority. The number 0 indicates the highest priority.
NOTE For a dynamic tunnel, the hold priority should not be higher than the setup priority. Otherwise, a priority error is reported.

Color (0x) Mask (0x) Tunnel Type

Example: 4 Example: 1 Primary Tunnel, Bypass Tunnel

Set the color of the dynamic tunnel. Set the mask of the dynamic tunnel. Set the tunnel type. Meanwhile, if bypass tunnel is enabled, other parameters in the Fast Re-Route area cannot be set. Set whether to enable the protection function of the rerouting.

Re-Route

Checked, Unchecked

Table 6-9 Descriptions of the parameters for the Dynamic Tunnel in the Fast Re-Route tab Field Fast Re-Route Value Checked, Unchecked Description If this function is enabled, the service can be rerouted to the bypass tunnel when the current tunnel fails. If this function is not enabled, FRR Type, FRR Protection Type, and FRR Bandwidth cannot be set. FRR Type facility Mode Set the type of the FRR.

6-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field FRR Protection Type FRR Bandwidth (kbit/s)

Value Protection Link Mode, Protection Node Mode Example: 1024

Description Set the protection type of the FRR. Set the bandwidth of the FRR.

Table 6-10 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the General Attributes tab Field Tunnel ID Value Example: 5 1-65535 Name Character string 64 bytes Direction Unidirectional Displays the direction of the tunnel. The unidirectional tunnel indicates the tunnel from the ingress node to the egress node. Signal Type Scheduling Type EXP Static, Dynamic E-LSP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None Sets the signal type of the tunnel to Static. Sets the scheduling type. The E-LSP supports the EXP priority. 7 indicates the highest priority. Sets the bandwidth of the tunnel. Specifies the customer. Makes remarks. Description Sets an ID for the tunnel. The tunnel ID can be allocated automatically. Sets a name for the tunnel.

Bandwidth (kbit/s) Customer Remarks

128 to 4294967295 Character string Character string

Table 6-11 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the Select Nodes tab Field Available NE Ingress Value Example: NE2 Example: NE3 Description Displays the NEs available for creating the tunnel. Sets the ingress node of the tunnel.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-45

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Egress Transit

Value Example: NE4 Example: NE5

Description Sets the egress node of the tunnel. Sets the transit node of the tunnel.

Table 6-12 Descriptions of the parameters for the static tunnel in the Route Information tab Field Node Location Value Example: NE2 Ingress, Egress, Transit Description Displays the nodes where the tunnel is created. Displays position of the node.
l

Ingress indicates the ingress node. Egress indicates the egress node. Transit indicates the passthrough node.

In Port

Example: 3-EG16-10 (PORT-10)

Sets the ingress port.

NOTE The ingress node does not support the setting of the ingress port.

In Label

16-1048575 Default: 16

Sets the ingress label of the tunnel. An ingress label is unique on an NE.

Out Port

Example: 3-EG16-10 (PORT-10)

Sets the egress port.

NOTE The egress node does not support the setting of the egress port.

Out Label

16-1048575 Default: 16

Sets the egress label of the tunnel. An egress label is unique on an NE.

Next Hop Address

Example: 192.168.1.2

Sets the IP address of the next hop.

NOTE The egress node does not support the setting of the next hop address.

6-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field Filter Ports by Port Type

Value Checked, Unchecked

Description Sets whether ports are filtered by port type. When Filter Ports by Port Type is checked, ports are filtered on the next hop and only the ports of the specified type are displayed. When Filter Ports by Port Type is unchecked, all ports are displayed and this setting is applied to the pass-through of NEs. After you select Auto assign label, the system automatically assigns the In Label and Out Label for the static Tunnel.

Auto assign label

Checked, Unchecked

Table 6-13 Descriptions of the parameters for the Static Tunnel in the Tunnel Information tab Field Positive Tunnel Information Value Tunnel ID, Name, Signal Type, Scheduling Type, Bandwidth (kbit/s), Ingress Node, Egress Node, Transit Node Tunnel ID, Name, Signal Type, Scheduling Type, Bandwidth (kbit/s), Ingress Node, Egress Node, Transit Node Description Display information on the created positive tunnel.

Reverse Tunnel Information

Display information on the created reverse tunnel.

Table 6-14 Descriptions of the parameters for Basic Configuration Field LSR ID Value Example: 10.70.73.156 Description In a PSN network, each NE is allocated with a unique LSR ID.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-47

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Start of Global Label Space

Value PTN 3900: 0 to 1015808 Increment: 32768

Description Set and display the start of the global label space. The start of the global label space is the minimum value of the ingress and egress labels of the unicast tunnel.

Global Label Space Size

PTN 3900: 32768

Display the size of the global label space. The global label space size is the number of unicast tunnel labels.

Start of Multicast Label Space

PTN 3900: 0 to 32767 Increment: 1

Set and display the start of the multicast label space. The start of the multicast label space is the minimum value of the ingress and egress labels of the multicast tunnel.

Table 6-15 Descriptions of the parameters for Static Tunnel Field ID Name Value For example: 5 For example: name1 64 bytes Enable State Enabled, Disabled Description Display and set the tunnel ID. Display and set the name of the static tunnel. Display and set the enable status of the static tunnel. Only Ingress Tunnel supports to set the enable status. Display the node type.
l l l

Node Type

Ingress, Egress, Transit

Ingress: ingress node Egress: egress node Transit: pass-through node

Direction

Unidirectional

Display the direction of the tunnel. Currently, only the unidirectional tunnel is supported.

6-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field Bandwidth (kbit/s)

Value 128 to 4294967295

Description Display and set the bandwidth of the static tunnel. Display and set the in board or logic interface type. Display and set the remaining bandwidth of the static tunnel. Display and set the ingress port of the static tunnel. The egress node and transmit node support the setting of the ingress port, but the ingress node does not.

In Board/Logic Interface Type Bandwidth Remaining (kbit/ s) In Port

For example: Slot-Board Name For example: 10240

For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.)

In Label

16 to 1048575

Display and set the ingress label of the tunnel. The egress node and transmit node support the setting of the ingress label, but the ingress node does not.

Out Board/Logic Interface Type Out Port

For example: Slot-Board Name For example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.)

Display and set the out board or logic interface type. Display and set the egress port of the static tunnel. The ingress node and transmit node support the setting of the egress port, but the egress node does not.

Out Label

16 to 1048575

Display and set the egress label of the tunnel. The ingress node and transmit node support the setting of the egress label, but the egress node does not.

Next Hop Address

For example: 192.168.0.2

Display and set the IP address of the egress next hop of the tunnel. The ingress node and transmit node support the setting of the egress next hop address, but the egress node does not.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-49

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Source Node

Value For example: 192.168.0.1

Description Display and set the source node of the tunnel. The egress node and transmit node support the setting of the source node, but the ingress node does not.

Sink Node

For example: 192.168.0.2

Display and set the sink node of the tunnel. The ingress node and transmit node support the setting of the sink node, but the egress node does not.

Tunnel Type EXP

E-LSP 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, None

Display the type of the static tunnel. The E-LSP supports the EXP priority. 7 indicates the highest priority. Display the protection group that the tunnel belongs to. Display the VLAN ID. In the case of an ingress tunnel, the VLAN ID can be set Select New Reverse Tunnel to set parameters of the forward and reverse tunnels. When this parameter is selected, the actual effective bandwidth is queried. When this parameter is not selected, the configured bandwidth is queried.

Protection Group Vlan ID

For example: 5 For example: 3

New Reverse Tunnel

Checked, Unchecked

Query Actual Bandwidth

Checked, Unchecked

Table 6-16 Descriptions of the parameters for APS Protection Field Protection Group ID Value For example: 1 Description Displays the ID of the protection group. The system automatically allocates IDs to protection groups according to the sequence for creating them.

6-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field Protection Type Switching Mode

Value 1+1, 1:1 Single-Ended, Dual-Ended

Description Selects a protection type. Sets the switching mode, which is adopted in the case of a fault on the tunnel. Sets whether the service reverts to the original working tunnel after the fault is rectified. In the case of the Revertive mode, the service reverts to the original working tunnel. In the case of the Non-Revertive mode, the service does not revert to the original working tunnel. Sets the wait-to-restore (WTR) time for the protection group. Sets the hold-off time of the protection group. Enables or disables the protocol. Displays the switching status of the protection group. Displays whether a tunnel is the working or protection tunnel. Displays the tunnel that is currently used. Displays the status of the working or protection tunnel. Sets the type of the working tunnel. The working tunnel can be an MPLS tunnel, an IP tunnel, or a GRE tunnel. The protection tunnel can be an MPLS tunnel. Selects the working and protection ingress tunnels.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive, Revertive

WTR Time (m)

1 to 12 Default: 5

Hold-off Time (100 ms)

0 to 100 Default: 0

Protocol Status Switching Status Unit

Enabled, Disabled For example: Up Working, Protection

Active Tunnel Tunnel Status Tunnel Type

Active, Standby Available, Unavailable MPLS Tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel

Ingress Tunnel

For example: IP Tunnel-1 (Source Node:1.0.0.3,Sink Node:1.1.0.3)

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-51

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Egress Tunnel

Value For example: Tunnel005MPLS Tunnel-5(Source Node:1.0.0.14,Sink Node: 1.1.1.2)

Description Selects the working and protection egress tunnels.

Table 6-17 Descriptions of the parameters for OAM Field Tunnel ID Tunnel Name Node Type Value Example: 3 Character string Ingress, Egress Description Display the tunnel ID. Display the tunnel name. Display the node type.
l l

Ingress: ingress node Egress: egress node

OAM Status

Enabled, Disabled

Set and display the OAM status.

l

Enabled: OAM-related operations can be performed. Disabled: OAM-related operations cannot be performed.

Detection Mode

Auto-Sending, Manual

Set and display the detection mode.

l

Manual: The frequency set by the user is used to test the connectivity of the tunnel. Auto-Sending: The frequency of the received packets is used to test the connectivity of the tunnel.

Detection Packet Type

CV, FFD

Set the detection packet type on the ingress node.

l

CV: The detection frequency is always the same and cannot be set. FFD: The detection frequency can be set.

6-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Field Detection Packet Period (ms)

Value 3.3, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500

Description Set and display the detection packet period. If Detection Packet Period is set to FFD, the detection packet period can be set. If Detection Packet Period is set to CV, the detection packet period is always 1000.

Reverse Tunnel CV/FFD Status LSP Status

Example: 3 Stop, Start Near-End Available, NearEnd Defect Available, NearEnd Defect Unavailable, Near-End Unavailable, Remote Available, Remote Defect Available, Remote Defect Unavailable, Remote Unavailable dServer, dLOCV, dTTSI_Mismatch, dTTSI_Mismerge, dExcess, dUnknown, SD, SF, BDI, FDI 0-300000

Select the reverse tunnel ID. Display the CV/FFD status. Display the LSP status.

LSP Defect Type

Display the LSP defect type.

Disable LSP Duration (ms)

Display the duration of the disable status of the LSP. Disable LSP Duration indicates the duration when the tunnel is unavailable.

LSP Defect Location

Example: 192.168.11.1

Display the LSP defect location. LSP Defect Location identifies the location of the defect in the network by using the IP address.

SD Threshold

0-100

Set and display the SD threshold. This parameter can be set only for the egress node of the tunnel.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-53

6 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field SF Threshold

Value 0-100

Description Set and display the SF threshold. This parameter can be set only for the egress node of the tunnel. SD SF

Source Node Sink Node

Example: 192.168.11.2 Example: 192.168.11.3

Display the Source Node of the tunnel. Display the Sink Node of the tunnel.

6-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

7 Configuring an IP Tunnel

7
About This Chapter

Configuring an IP Tunnel

When the services that cross an IP network need to be created, the OptiX PTN equipment supports carrying PWs over the IP tunnel. In this way, services can be transparently transmitted in an IP network. 7.1 IP Tunnel IP tunnel can be used to carry the ATM PWE3 service or the CES service. 7.2 Creating IP Tunnels In the offload scenario of a mobile communication system, you can transmit the client services by connecting an IP tunnel to the DSLAM. 7.3 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the IP Tunnel configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

7 Configuring an IP Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

7.1 IP Tunnel
IP tunnel can be used to carry the ATM PWE3 service or the CES service. If ATM or CES emulation service that travels through an IP network is required, the PTN equipment can use the IP tunnel to carry the service. This complies with RFC 4023 as shown in Figure 7-1. In the case of the IP tunnel, the situation is similar to that where "IP header" replaces the MPLS external label (MPLS tunnel label) to establish a tunnel in the IP network. An ATM emulation service can be provided between NE A and NE B, even though the IP network between NE A and NE B does not support the MPLS. Figure 7-1 ATM PWE3 over IP tunnel
ATM switch PTN Router Router PTN ATM switch

IP network NE A ATM E1/STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet NE B ATM E1/STM-1

7.2 Creating IP Tunnels

In the offload scenario of a mobile communication system, you can transmit the client services by connecting an IP tunnel to the DSLAM.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The static route must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > IP/GRE Tunnel Management > IP Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New and the Create IP Tunnel dialog box is displayed.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

7 Configuring an IP Tunnel

NOTE

Sink Port IP Address must be consistent with Sink Node IP in Static Route Management.

Step 3 Set parameters. For details on the parameters for IP tunnel, see Table 7-1. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. Step 5 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID. Step 6 Click Apply. ----End

7.3 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the IP Tunnel configuration. Table 7-1 Descriptions of the parameters for IP Tunnel Management Field Tunnel ID Value Example: 5 Description Set and display the tunnel ID. You can also select the automatic allocation. Set and display the source board. Set and display the source port. Set and display the LSR ID of the sink NE. Set and display the VLAN ID. Display the protection group.

Source Board Source Port Destination IP Vlan ID Protection Group

Example: Slot-Board Name Example: Port(Port No.) Example: 1.16.0.3 Example: 5 Examle: 1

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

8 Configuring a GRE Tunnel

8
About This Chapter

Configuring a GRE Tunnel

When the services that cross an IP network need to be created, the OptiX PTN equipment supports carrying ATM PWE3 services over generic routing encapsulation (GRE) tunnels. In this way, services can be transparently transmitted in an IP network. 8.1 GRE Tunnel GRE tunnel can be used to carry the PWE3 service or the CES service. 8.2 Creating GRE Tunnels In the offload scenario of a mobile communication system, you can transmit the client services by connecting an GRE tunnel to the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM). 8.3 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the GRE Tunnel configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 Configuring a GRE Tunnel

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

8.1 GRE Tunnel

GRE tunnel can be used to carry the PWE3 service or the CES service. If ATM or CES emulation service that travels through an IP network is required, the PTN equipment can use the GRE tunnel to carry the service. This complies with RFC 4023 as shown in Figure 8-1. In the case of the GRE tunnel, the situation is similar to that where "GRE encapsulation + IP header" replaces the MPLS external label (MPLS tunnel label) to establish a tunnel in the IP network. An ATM emulation service can be provided between NE A and NE B, even though the IP network between NE A and NE B does not support the MPLS. Figure 8-1 ATM PWE3 over GRE tunnel
ATM switch PTN Router Router PTN ATM switch

IP network NE A ATM E1/STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet NE B ATM E1/STM-1

8.2 Creating GRE Tunnels

In the offload scenario of a mobile communication system, you can transmit the client services by connecting an GRE tunnel to the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM).

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The static route must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE. Choose Configuration > IP/GRE Tunnel Management > GRE Tunnel Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New and the Create GRE Tunnel dialog box is displayed.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

8 Configuring a GRE Tunnel

NOTE

Sink Port IP Address must be consistent with Sink Node IP in Static Route Management.

Step 3 Set parameters.For details on the parameters for GRE tunnel, seeTable 8-1. Step 4 Click OK. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 5 Optional: Select the created tunnel. Double-click the Vlan ID filed, and differentiate different tunnels by adding a VLAN ID. Step 6 Click Apply. ----End

8.3 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the GRE Tunnel configuration. Table 8-1 Descriptions of the parameters for GRE Tunnel Management Field Tunnel ID Value Example: 5 Description Display and set the tunnel ID. You can also select the automatic allocation. Display and set the source board. Display and set the source port. Display and set the LSR ID of the sink NE. Display and set the VLAN ID. Display the protection group.

Source Board Source Port Destination IP Vlan ID Protection Group

Example: Slot-Board Name Example: Port(Port No.) Example: 1.16.0.3 Example: 5 Example: 1

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

9
About This Chapter

Configuring a CES Service

This section describes the basic information about the CES service and illustrates how to configure the CES service. 9.1 CES Service Type Circuit emulation service (CES) applies the PWE3 emulation technology. For a CES service, the PWE3 packet headers contain the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronous timing information of the TDM service flow. After encapsulated by the protocol, the PW packets are transported over the MPLS tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel in the PSN network. When reaching the PW egress, the PW packets are decapsulated to rebuild the TDM circuit-switching service flow. 9.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services This section describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services, and relations among these tasks. When configuring or managing CES services, follow the configuration flows. 9.3 CES Service Operation Tasks The main operation tasks of configuring CES services include fast creating point-to-point CES services and creating point-to-point CES services on a per-NE basis. 9.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI CES Service This section describes the configuration case of the UNI-UNI CES service. 9.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI CES Service This section describes the configuration case of the UNI-NNI CES service. 9.6 Checking the Correctness of the Service Configuration After the CES service is configured, you need to check the correctness of the service configuration. You can check the correctness of the CES service configuration as follows: attach a 2M BER tester at the CES port and then perform loopbacks at the remote end. 9.7 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the CES service configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9.1 CES Service Type

Circuit emulation service (CES) applies the PWE3 emulation technology. For a CES service, the PWE3 packet headers contain the frame format information, alarm information, signaling information, and synchronous timing information of the TDM service flow. After encapsulated by the protocol, the PW packets are transported over the MPLS tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel in the PSN network. When reaching the PW egress, the PW packets are decapsulated to rebuild the TDM circuit-switching service flow.

Application Mode
The CES service allows a metropolitan Ethernet network (MEN) carrier to provide TDM services to customers that have only the TDM equipment. This enlarges the service range and the number of users of the MEN carriers, and provides a way to transform the traditional circuit network to the wideband data network. The CES service mainly applies to the wireless service and the enterprise private line service. The application scenarios include UNI-NNI and UNI-UNI, as shown in Figure 9-1.
l

UNI-NNI CES service: The PTN equipment accesses the TDM services of customers by using the TDM or channelized STM interface. The CES PW can be created between the PTN equipments to emulate the end-to-end TDM service. To customers, the CES services are similar to actual TDM services. UNI-UNI CES service: The PTN equipment accesses the TDM services by using a single point.
NOTE

Now only the point-to-point service is supported. That is, the service of one E1 interface mapping to one PW is supported. But converged services of several TDM interfaces mapping to one PW are not supported.

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Figure 9-1 CES service networking sample

UNI-UNI

BTS UNI-NNI BSC PE

PE BTS TDM Link cSTM Link PW Tunnel PE

BTS

Emulation Mode
The PTN equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). In the CESoPSN mode:
l

The PTN equipment senses frame structures, frame alignment modes and timeslots in the TDM circuit. The PTN equipment processes the overhead and extracts the payload in TDM frames. Then, the PTN equipment delivers the timeslot of each channel to the packet payload according to certain sequence. As a result, the service in each channel in the packet is fixed and visible. Each Ethernet frame that carries the CES service loads TDM frames of a fixed number. Usually the loading time is 0.125 to 5 ms.

In the SAToP mode:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-3

9 Configuring a CES Service

l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The equipment regards TDM signals as constant rate bit flows, instead of sensing structures in the TDM signals. The entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated. The overhead and payload in the TDM signal are transparently transmitted. The Ethernet frame carries the CES service. Usually the loading time is 1 ms.

In the CESoPSN mode, for the free 64 kbit/s timeslot in TDM E1 signal, the PTN equipment provides the compression function to save the transmission bandwidth. The timeslot number ranges from 0 to 31. The timeslot number of 0 indicates a reserved timeslot for transmitting signaling.

Service Clock
The TDM service has high requirements for the clock synchronization. The PTN equipment provides solution to the CES service clock synchronization. See Table 9-1. Table 9-1 CES service clock type Synchroni zation Solution External Clock Synchroniza tion PRC Access Position PE equipment Whether the Clock is Transmitted in Carrying Ethernet No Description

Introduces the PRC/GPS clock to the PE equipment, and uses this clock as the transmit clock of the CES port service (retiming). The CE system clock synchronizes the PE service clock. This realizes the synchronization of all PEs and CEs, and ensures that transmit clocks of TDM services on all CEs and PEs are synchronous, and indirectly realizes the transfer of the TDM service clock. See Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 External Clock synchronization of CES service clock

PRC/GPS

PRC/GPS

CES CE TDM+Clock PE PE TDM+Clock CE

9-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

9.2 Configuration Flow of CES Services

This section describes the operation tasks for configuring CES services, and relations among these tasks. When configuring or managing CES services, follow the configuration flows. Configure and manage UNI-UNI CES services by following the configuration flow shown in Figure 9-3. Configure and manage UNI-NNI CES services by following the configuration flow shown in Figure 9-4. Figure 9-3 UNI-UNI CES service configuration flow

Required Start Optional Creating a Network

Configure inferface

Configure UNI-UNI CES Service End

Table 9-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI CES service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configuring the Interface 3. Configuring the UNI-UNI CES Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. Use the E1 board or the channelized STM-1 board to access the CES service from the BTS. To configure the UNI-UNI CES service, you need to specify the service ID and service name, select the source board and the sink board.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 9-4 UNI-NNI CES service configuration flow

Required Optional

Start

Creating a Network

Configure inferface

Configure Control Plan

Configure Tunnel

Configure UNI-NNI CES Service End

Table 9-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configuring the LSR ID 3. Configuring the NetworkSide Interface Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space. Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying.

9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Task 4. Configuring the Control Plane

Remarks Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel.
l

To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the MPLS-LDP protocol.

To create an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to Configuring Static Routes.

5. Configuring the Tunnel

A tunnel transmits the service.

l

If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the per-NE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel. If an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel is required, select the source board, source port, and IP address of the sink port.

6. Configuring the Service Interface 7. Configuring the UNIs-NNI CES service

Use the E1 board or the channelized STM-1 board to access the CES service from the BTS. 1. Create a CES service: Set the service ID and specify a service name. 2. Setting the source: Select the board and the specific channel. 3. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, PW label, and tunnel type. 4. Set advanced attributes: Set the jitter buffer time, packet loading time, and clock mode.

9.3 CES Service Operation Tasks

The main operation tasks of configuring CES services include fast creating point-to-point CES services and creating point-to-point CES services on a per-NE basis. 9.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function In an operation interface of the T2000, you can directly configure the attributes of the source and sink nodes and the PW of a CES service by using the T2000 trail function. In this way, a CES service can be fast created. 9.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

In an operation interface of the T2000, you can directly configure the attributes of the source and sink nodes and the PW of a CES service by using the T2000 trail function. In this way, a CES service can be fast created. 9.3.3 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. 9.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the corresponding PW is automatically created.

9.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function

In an operation interface of the T2000, you can directly configure the attributes of the source and sink nodes and the PW of a CES service by using the T2000 trail function. In this way, a CES service can be fast created.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The ports must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > PTN Service > CES Service Creation from the Main Menu. The Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In the Create CES Service dialog box, create the UNI-UNI service.

9-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

NOTE

For the UNI-UNI service, you need not specify a PW and set parameters of the PW.

Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-UNI service. 1. In Basic Information, set the basic attributes of the CES service. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the CES service, see Table 9-9.
NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: Service ID(e.g.1,3-6): After you select Automatically Assigned, the system automatically assigns the service ID. If not, you need to manually assign the service ID.

2.

In Source, click Browse. Then select source board, source port and lower order path of the service in the Please select the source timeslot dialog box. In Sink, click Browse and select the sink NE, sink port, higher order path and lower order path of the service. For details on the parameters for source/sink port attributes of the CES service, see Table 9-9.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: The source and sink NEs of the UNI-UNI service need to be the same.

3.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service by Using the Trail Function

In an operation interface of the T2000, you can directly configure the attributes of the source and sink nodes and the PW of a CES service by using the T2000 trail function. In this way, a CES service can be fast created.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The DCN of the port with the CES service must be disabled. A tunnel must be created. For configuration method, see 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > PTN Service > CES Service Creation from the Main Menu. The Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In the Create CES Service dialog box, create the UNI-NNI service.
9-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

NOTE

For the UNI-NNI service, you need specify a PW and set parameters of the PW.

Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-NNI service. 1. In Basic Information, set the basic attributes of the CES service. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the CES service, see Table 9-9.
NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: Service ID(e.g.1,3-6): After you select Automatically Assigned, the system automatically assigns the service ID. If not, you need to manually assign the service ID.

2.

In Source, click Browse and select the source NE, source port, higher path and lower path of the service. In Sink, click Browse and select the sink NE, sink port, high path and low path of the service. For details on the parameters for source/sink port attributes of CES service, see Table 9-9.
NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: When you create a UNI-NNI CES service, the source and sink NEs cannot be the same.

3.

In PW, set the attributes of the PW. For details on the parameters for PW attributes of CES service, see Table 9-11.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

9 Configuring a CES Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Note the following when setting the parameters:

l l l

ID(e.g.1,3-6): After you select Automatically Assigned, the system automatically assigns the ID for the PW that carries the services. If not, you need to manually assign the ID for the PW. When Protocol Type is set to Static, you need to set the uplink and downlink labels. When it is set to Dynamic, the system automatically assigns the uplink and downlink labels. The Emulation Mode includes structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP). You can configure the 64K Timeslot function for the CESoPSN but not for the SAToP. Uplink Label/Source Port(e.g.16,33-36): The label that indicates a service is encapsulated into a PW. Downlink Label/Sink Port(e.g.16,33-36): The label that indicates the service is decapsulated from the PW. After you select Auto assign label, the system automatically assigns the Uplink Label/Source Port(e.g.16,33-36) and Downlink Label/Sink Port(e.g.16,33-36) for the PW.

l l l

4.

Click Advanced and the Advanced Attribute dialog box is displayed. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes of CES service, see Table 9-10.

NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: Generally, Packet Loading Time(us) for carrying the CES service packets is 1 ms. The value of Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) must be greater than the value of Packet Loading Time(us) on the opposite end.

5. 6.

Click OK. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.3.3 Creating a UNI-UNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis

If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The ports must be configured.
9-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New, and the Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, configure the UNI-UNI service.
NOTE

In the case of the UNI-UNI service, QoS and Advanced Attributes do not need to be set.

Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-UNI service. For details on the parameters for UNI-UNI service of CES, see Table 9-11. 1. Configure the parameters of the service.

NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: Mode: UNI-UNI.

2.

Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.3.4 Creating a UNI-NNI CES Service on a Per-NE Basis

If you create a CES service on a per-NE basis, you need to create relevant attributes of the service separately on the source and sink nodes of the service. After the CES service is created, the corresponding PW is automatically created.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The tunnel must be created. For configuration method, see 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New, and the Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, configure the UNI-NNI CES services.
NOTE

In the case of the UNI-NNI service, set QoS and Advanced Attributes.

Step 3 Set attributes related to the UNI-NNI service. 1. Configure the parameters of the service. For details on the parameters for UNI-NNI service of CES, see Table 9-11.

9-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

9 Configuring a CES Service

Note the following when setting the parameters:

l l

Mode: UNI-NNI. In the case of PW Signaling Type, if you select Static, you need to set PW Ingress Label/ Source Port(e.g.16,33-36) and PW Engress Label/Sink Port(e.g.16,33-36). If you select Dynamic, the system automatically allocates PW Ingress Label/Source Port(e.g.16,33-36) and PW Engress Label/Sink Port(e.g.16,33-36). PW Ingress Label/Source Port(e.g.16,33-36): the label that indicates a service is encapsulated into a PW. PW Engress Label/Sink Port(e.g.16,33-36): the label that indicates the service is decapsulated from the PW. Tunnel: Select the tunnel to carry the services.

l l l

2.

Click QoS and the QoS dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set the parameters of QoS. For details on the parameters for QoS, see Table 9-12.
NOTE

Note the following when setting the parameters: EXP: Set the Ingress value only. 7 indicates the highest priority.

4. 5.

Click OK. Click Advanced Attributes, and the Advanced Attributes dialog box is displayed.

6.

Configure parameters in the Advanced Attributes dialog box. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes, see Table 9-13.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

9 Configuring a CES Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Note the following when setting the parameters: Generally, Packet Loading Time(us) for carrying the CES service packets is 1 ms. The value of Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) must be greater than the value of Packet Loading Time(us) on the opposite end.

7. 8.

Click OK. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

9.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI CES Service

This section describes the configuration case of the UNI-UNI CES service. 9.4.1 Case Description This section describes the application scenario of the UNI-UNI CES service, including the networking diagram and service planning. 9.4.2 Service Planning To transport the CES services between BTS and BSC, two CES services should be created. 9.4.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function This section describes how to configure the two CES services in the example by using the trail function. 9.4.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis This section describes how to configure the two CES services in the example on a per-NE basis.

9.4.1 Case Description

This section describes the application scenario of the UNI-UNI CES service, including the networking diagram and service planning. Figure 9-5 shows the networking diagram of the UNI-UNI CES service. shows the networking diagram of the UNI-UNI CES service. A CES service is present between each BTS and BSC. On NE1, the OptiX PTN 1900 accesses the services from the base station. Figure 9-5 Networking of the CES service

BTS

NE1

BSC

BTS

9-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Figure 9-6 shows the NE planning diagram. Figure 9-6 NE planning diagram

BTS

NE1

BSC

BTS
1-CXP-MD1-3-L12 1-CXP-MD1-5-L12

9.4.2 Service Planning

To transport the CES services between BTS and BSC, two CES services should be created. The UNI-UNI is used to access the local service, and then the UNI-UNI transmits the accessed service to BSC. A CES service is present between each BTS and BSC. Two E1 timeslots of the CES service are fully used. The service shown in Figure 9-5 is taken as an example. Table 9-4 lists the configuration parameters of NE1. Table 9-4 Configuration parameters of NE1 Attribute NE Level Service ID Service Name Mode Source Board Source High Channel Source Low Channel Sink Board Sink High Channel
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Value NE1 E1 7 CES Local Service 1 UNI-UNI 3-L12 1 5-L12 -

Value NE1 E1 8 CES Local Service 2 UNI-UNI 3-L12 2 5-L12 9-17

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Attribute Sink Low Channel

Value 1

Value 2

9.4.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function

This section describes how to configure the two CES services in the example by using the trail function.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure E1 interface: BTS-side E1 interface and BSC-side E1 interface. 1. Configure the BTS-side E1 interface. a. b. c. d. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab. Click E1. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2), and set the Enabled Status to Disabled. Click Apply. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the BTSside interface. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Port Mode to Layer1. Set the parameters as required.

e.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2) Name: port1, port2 (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 1 (The port transmits E1 signals.) Encapsulation: Null Channelize: No

l l l

f. g.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Frame Format to Unframe.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-18

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

h. 2.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab. Click E1. Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2), and set the Enabled Status to Disabled. Click Apply. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the BSCside interface. Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Port Mode to Layer1. Set the parameters as required. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Configure the BSC-side E1 interface. a. b. c. d.

e.

Port: 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2) Name: port11, port22 (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 1 (The port transmits E1 signals.) Encapsulation: Null Channelize: No

l l l

f. g. h.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Frame Format to Unframe. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Creating UNI-UNI CES Local service 1. 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Emulation Service Creation > CES Service Creation, The Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of CES service.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Basic Information

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Local Service 1 Service ID: 7 NE: NE1 Port: 3-L12 High Path: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Low Path: 1(In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) NE: NE1 Port: 5-L12 High Path: Low Path: 1

Source

sink

3.

Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Creating UNI-UNI CES Local service 1. Set the parameters related to the CES service by following Step 2.1 to Step 2.3. The configuration parameters are as follows:
9-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

9 Configuring a CES Service

Basic Information

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Local Service 2 Service ID: 8 NE: NE1 Port: 3-L12 High Path: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Low Path: 2 (In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) NE: NE1 Port: 5-L12 High Path: Low Path: 2

Source

sink

----End

9.4.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes how to configure the two CES services in the example on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure E1 interface: BTS-side E1 interface and BSC-side E1 interface. 1. Configure the BTS-side E1 interface. a. b. c. d. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab. Click E1. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2), and set the Enabled Status to Disabled. Click Apply. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the BTSside interface. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Port Mode to Layer1. Set the parameters as required.

e.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2) Name: port1, port2 (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 1 (The port transmits E1 signals.) Encapsulation: Null Channelize: No

l l l

f. g. h. 2.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) and 3-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Frame Format to Unframe. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Configure the BSC-side E1 interface. a. b. c. d. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab. Click E1. Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2), and set the Enabled Status to Disabled. Click Apply. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the BSCside interface. Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Port Mode to Layer1. Set the parameters as required. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

e.

Port: 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2) Name: port11, port22 (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 1 (The port transmits E1 signals.) Encapsulation: Null Channelize: No

l l l

f. g. h.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 5-L12-1(Port-1) and 5-L12-2(Port-2). Set the Frame Format to Unframe. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 2 Creating UNI-UNI CES Local service 1. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, Choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Click New, Set the parameters of CES service.

9-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l

Service Level: 7 Service Name: CES Local Service 1 Level: E1 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 3-L12 Source High Channel: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Source Low Channel: 1 (In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) Sink Board: 5-L12 Sink High Channel: Sink Low Channel: 1

l l l

3.

Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 3 Creating UNI-UNI CES Local service 2. Set the parameters related to the CES service by following Step 2.1 to Step 2.3. The configuration parameters are as follows:
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-23

9 Configuring a CES Service

l l l l l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Service Level: 8 Service Name: CES Local Service 2 Level: E1 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 3-L12 Source High Channel: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Source Low Channel: 2 (In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) Sink Board: 5-L12 Sink High Channel: Sink Low Channel: 2

l l l

----End

9.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI CES Service

This section describes the configuration case of the UNI-NNI CES service. 9.5.1 Case Description This section describes the UNI-NNI application scenarios of the CES service, including the networking diagram and service planning.UNI-NNI CES 9.5.2 Service Planning There are CES services between BTS and BSC. Two static MPLS tunnels are to be created. One is the working tunnel and the other is the protection tunnel. Then, the CES services can be securely transmitted on the network. 9.5.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function This section describes how to configure the three CES services in the example by using the trail function. 9.5.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis This section describes how to configure the three CES services in the example on a per-NE basis.

9.5.1 Case Description

This section describes the UNI-NNI application scenarios of the CES service, including the networking diagram and service planning.UNI-NNI CES

Networking and Requirement

Between BTS and BSC, the CES service is transported through the PTN equipment, as shown in Figure 9-7. Two CES services are available between BTS and BSC that are connected to NE1. NE1 uses the OptiX PTN 1900 to access the services from the base stations, and NE2 and NE3 uses the OptiX PTN 3900. Tunnels should be configured between NE1 and NE3. If the service requires high network security, configure the MPLS APS protection to ensure service transmission.
l

Working tunnel: NE1-NE2-NE3. NE2 is a transit node.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-24

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

9 Configuring a CES Service

Protection tunnel: NE1-NE6-NE5-NE4-NE3. NE6, NE5, NE4, and NE3 are transit nodes. When the working tunnel becomes faulty, the service on it is switched to the protection tunnel for protection.

Figure 9-7 Networking diagram of the CES service

NE4 NE5

GE ring on access layer

NE1 NE2

10GE ring on convergence layer

NE3

BSC Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel OptiX PTN 3900 OptiX PTN 1900

BTS

Figure 9-8 shows the planning details of boards on the NE and interfaces on the boards. Figure 9-8 NE planning
1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.3.1 NE4 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.2.2

4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 10.0.4.1 NE6 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 10.0.5.2

3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.4.2

1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.3.2 NE5

GE ring on access layer

3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.2 NE1

10GE ring on convergence layer

1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.2

NE3

1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.2.1

4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 10.0.5.1 10.0.0.1 6-L12

NE2 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.1

6-MP1-1-CD1-1Port-1 10.0.6.1 BSC

BTS

Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel OptiX PTN 3900 OptiX PTN 1900

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9.5.2 Service Planning

There are CES services between BTS and BSC. Two static MPLS tunnels are to be created. One is the working tunnel and the other is the protection tunnel. Then, the CES services can be securely transmitted on the network. Table 9-5 lists the configuration parameters of NEs. Table 9-5 Configuration parameters of NEs NE NE1 LSR ID 1.0.0.1 Port 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Port IP Address 10.0.0.1 10.0.5.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.1.1 10.0.1.2 10.0.2.1 10.0.2.2 10.0.3.1 10.0.3.2 10.0.4.2 10.0.5.2 10.0.4.1 IP Mask 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252

NE2

1.0.0.2

NE3

1.0.0.3

NE4

1.0.0.4

NE5

1.0.0.5

NE6

1.0.0.6

Table 9-6 lists the configuration parameters of Tunnels. Table 9-6 Planning of Tunnel parameters Parameters Tunnel ID Name 100 Working TunnelPositive Static E-LSP No Limit Working Tunnel 101 Working TunnelReverse Static E-LSP No Limit 120 Protection Tunnel-Positive Static E-LSP No Limit Protection Tunnel 121 Protection Tunnel-Reverse Static E-LSP No Limit

Signal Type Scheduling Type Bandwidth (kbit/s)

9-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Parameters Ingress Node Transit Node Egress Node Ingress Node Route Information NE1 NE2 NE3 NE1
l

Working Tunnel NE3 NE2 NE1 NE3

l

Protection Tunnel NE1 NE6, NE5, NE4 NE3 NE1

l

NE3 NE4, NE5, NE6 NE1 NE3

l

Out Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 20

Out Port: 1EX2-1(Port-1) Out Label: 21

Out Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 22

Out Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 23

Transit Node Route Information

NE2
l

NE2
l

NE6
l

NE4
l

In Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) In Label: 20 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 30

In Port: 1EX2-1(Port-1) In Label: 21 Out Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 31

l l

In Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 22 Out Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 32 In Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) In Label: 32 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 42 In Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 42 Out Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 52

In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 23 Out Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) Out Label: 33 In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 33 Out Port: 3EG16-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 43 In Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 43 Out Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) Out Label: 53

l l

l l

l l

NE5
l

NE5
l

l l

l l

NE4
l

NE6
l

l l

l l

Egress Node Route Information

NE3
l

NE1
l

NE3
l

NE1
l

In Port: 1EX2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 30

In Port: 4EFG2-1 (Port-1) In Label: 31

In Port: 1EX2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 52

In Port: 4EFG2-2 (Port-2) In Label: 53

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-27

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 9-7 lists the configuration parameters of CES services. Table 9-7 Configuration parameters of the CES service: NE1-NE3 (E1 timeslots partially used) Attribute NE Level Service ID Service Name Mode Source Board Source High Channel Source Low Channel PW ID Tunnel Sink Board Sink High Channel Sink Low Channel Source 64K Timeslot PW Signaling Type PW Type PW Ingress Label/Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Peer IP RTP Head Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) Packet Loading Time(us) Clock Mode EXP Value NE1 E1 4 CES Remote Service 1 UNI-NNI 6-L12 2 8 Working Tunnel-Positive (Tunnel-0100) 1-14,20 Static CESoPSN 36 36 10.0.1.2 Disabled 8000 1000 External Clock Mode 4 Value NE3 E1 4 CES Remote Service 1 UNI-NNI 8 Working Tunnel-Reverse (Tunnel-0101) 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) VC4-1 2 1-14,20 Static CESoPSN 36 36 10.0.0.1 Disabled 8000 1000 External Clock Mode 4

9-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Table 9-8 Configuration parameters of the CES service: NE1-NE3 (E1 timeslots fully used) Attribute NE Level Service ID Service Name Mode Source Board Source High Channel Source Low Channel PW ID Tunnel Sink Board Sink High Channel Sink Low Channel Source 64K Timeslot PW Signaling Type PW Type PW Ingress Label/Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Peer IP RTP Head Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) Packet Loading Time(us) Clock Mode EXP Value NE1 E1 5 CES Remote Service 2 UNI-NNI 6-L12 3 9 Working Tunnel-Positive (Tunnel-0100) 1-31 Static SAToP 37 37 10.0.1.2 Disabled 8000 1000 External Clock Mode 4 Value NE3 E1 5 CES Remote Service 2 UNI-NNI 9 Working Tunnel-Reverse (Tunnel-0101) 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) VC4-1 3 1-31 Static SAToP 37 37 10.0.0.1 Disabled 8000 1000 External Clock Mode 4

9.5.3 Configuring CES Services by Using the Trail Function

This section describes how to configure the three CES services in the example by using the trail function.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-29

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-30

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:
l

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-31

9 Configuring a CES Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.5.2

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Creating Working MPLS Tunnels 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Tunnel ID: 100(Positive), 101(Reverse) Name: Working Tunnel-Positive, Working Tunnel-Reverse Signal Type: Static (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

l l

EXP:- (Set the tunnel priority according to networking planning.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Ingress Node, Egress Node and Transit Node to set route restrictions.

9-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Ingress Node: NE1 (The source node on a tunnel is referred to as ingress node, that is, the node where the tunnel enters the network.) Egress Node: NE3 (The sink node on a tunnel is referred to as egress node, that is, the node where the tunnel exists the network.) Transit Node: NE2 (The pass-through node on a tunnel is referred to as transmit node.)

4.

Click Next. Set tunnel-related parameters and route constraints. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Positive Route Information

NE1 Ingress Node

Out Port: 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) (the source port on the tunnel) Out Label: 20 (The local out label is the same as the downstream in label. Labels are used to forward packets.) Next Hop Address: 10.0.0.2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-33

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE2 Transit Node

In Port: 3-EG16-1(Port-1) In Label: 20 Out Port: 1-EX2-1(Port-1) Out Label: 30 Next Hop Address: 10.0.1.2 In Port: 1-EX2-1(Port-1) In Label: 30

NE3 Egress Node

Reverse Route Information

NE3 Ingress Node

Out Label: 21 In Label: 21 Out Label: 31 In Label: 31

NE2 Transit Node

NE1 Egress Node

Step 4 Creating Protection Tunnel. 1. Create protection Tunnel by following Step 3.1 toStep 3.4. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

General Attributes

Tunnel ID: 120 (Positive), 121 (Reverse) Name: Protection Tunnel-Positive, Protection Tunnel-Reverse Signal Type: Static Scheduling Type: E-LSP EXP:Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit Ingress Node: NE1 Egress Node: NE3 Transit Node: NE6, NE5, NE4

Node Information

For the route information, see Table 6-4.

Step 5 Configure BTS-side E1 interface. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface. Click General Attributes tab, Select 6-L12-2(Port-2) and 6-L12-3(Port-3). Set the Port Mode to Layer 1.
NOTE

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

9-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

3. 4.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 6-L12-2(Port-2) and 6-L12-3(Port-3). Set the Frame Format to Unframe.
NOTE

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

5.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 6 Configure BSC-side STM-1 interface. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the board 6-MP1 of NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Path Configuration . Select NE3-6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1)-VC4:1-VC12:2 and NE3-6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1)VC4:1-VC12:3. Set VC12 Frame Format to Unframe. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 7 Creating CES Remote Service 1. 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Emulation Service Creation > CES Service Creation, The Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of CES service. Select Auto Assign Label,the system automatically assigns the Uplink Label and Downlink Label for the PW.

Basic Information
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-35

9 Configuring a CES Service

l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Remote Service 1 Service ID: 4

Source
l l l l

NE: NE1 Port: 6-L12 High Path: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Low Path: 2 (In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) 64K Timeslot: 1-14,20 (The 64K Timeslot parameter indicates the timeslot compression list during the configuration of the structured emulation CES services. The selected timeslots are loaded to the PW packets, and then are transmitted to the opposite end through the Ethernet. The timeslot lists at the two ends can be inconsistent, but the number of timeslots must be consistent. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.) NE: NE3 Port: 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) High Path: VC4-1 Low Path: 2 64K Timeslot: 1-14,20

sink
l l l l l

PW
l l

ID: 8 Emulation Mode: CESoPSN (The CESoPSN is of structuralized emulation, and you can set the timeslot compression for it. The SAToP is of non-structuralized emulation, and you cannot set the timeslot compression for it.) Signaling Type: Static (The PW signaling type indicates whether the PW is static or dynamic. In the case of the dynamic PW, the services are available after the signaling negotiation is successful. In the case of the static PW, the signaling negotiation is not needed.) Encapsulation Type: MPLS Uplink Label/Source Port: 36 (The uplink label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW.) Downlink Label/Sink Port: 36 (The downlink label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW.) Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel Tunnel Name: Working Tunnel-Positive(Tunnel-0100)

l l

l l

3.

Click Advanced and the Advanced Attribute dialog box is displayed. Configure parameters for advanced attribute, Click OK to finish configuring the advanced attributes..

9-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

RTP Head: Disabled (The RTP head carries the clock signals.) Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000(The Jitter Compensation Buffering Time indicates the buffer size in the receive direction. The PSN is delayed, while the TDM network is plesiochronous. The packet needs to be saved temporarily so that it can be transmitted to the PDH port smoothly. The buffer size is measured in time. This parameter can be set when the pseudo wire (PW) is used for the circuit emulation service (CES).) Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 (The Packet Loading Time parameter indicates the time that the PW packet requires to load the TDM frames. That is, the parameter is used to specify the number of the TDM frames that are loaded in the PW packet. The period of the TDM frame is 125 us. If Packet Loading Time is 1 ms, then eight TDM frames can be loaded in a PW packet.) Uplink Clock Mode: External Clock Mode (The Clock Mode parameter indicates whether the clocks of the PDH/SDH services accessed at both ends are synchronous.) Downlink Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

4.

Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 8 Creating CES Remote Service 2. Set the parameters related to the CES service by following Step 7.1 to Step 7.4. Basic Information
l l l

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Remote Service 2 Service ID: 5

Source
l l l l

NE: NE1 Port: 6-L12 High Path: Low Path: 3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-37

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

64K Timeslot: 1-31

sink
l l l l l

NE: NE3 Port: 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) High Path: VC4-1 Low Path: 3 64K Timeslot: 1-31

PW
l l l l l l l l

ID: 9 Emulation Mode: CESoPSN Signaling Type: Static Encapsulation Type: MPLS Uplink Label/Source Port: 37 Downlink Label/Sink Port: 37 Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel Tunnel Name: Working Tunnel-Positive(Tunnel-0100)

Advanced
l l l l l

RTP Head: Disabled Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000 Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 Uplink Clock Mode: External Clock Mode Downlink Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

----End

9.5.4 Configuring CES Services on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes how to configure the three CES services in the example on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-38

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-39

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:
l

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.5.2

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Creating Working MPLS Tunnels.

9-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

1.

Select NE1 in the NE Explorer . Choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from Function Tree. Click New and the New Unicast Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel such as Tunnel ID, Tunnel name, port and labels. Click OKto finish creating the ingress node.

2.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l l

Tunnel ID: 100(Positive), 101(Reverse) Tunnel Name: Working Tunnel-Positive, Working Tunnel-Reverse Node Type: Ingress(Positive), Egress(Reverse) Bandwidth (kbit/s): No Limit (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.) Out Board/Logic Interface Type: 4-EFG2 (The source board of the Tunnel.) Out Port: 1(Port-1) (The source port of the Tunnel. Next Hop Address: 10.0.0.2 (The IP address of the interface on the next node on the tunnel.) Sink Node: 1.0.0.3 (The LSR ID of the interface on the sink node on the tunnel.) Tunnel Type: E-LSP

l l

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

EXP: none (Set the tunnel priority according to networking planning.)

3.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2. Then, configure the Tunnel parameters of the transit node by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-41

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Set related parameters and ensure that the general information of the tunnel is the same as that on NE1. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l

Node Type: Transit (NE2 is a transit node on the tunnel.) In Board/Logic Interface Type: 3-EG16 In Port: 1(Port-1) In Label: 20 (Positive), 21 (Reverse) Out Board/Logic Interface Type: 1-EX2 Out Port: 1(Port-1) Out Label: 30 (Positive), 31 (Reverse) Next Hop Address: 10.0.1.2 (Positive), 10.0.0.1 (Reverse) Source Node: 1.0.0.1 (Positive), 10.0.1.2 (Reverse) (The LSR ID of the source node on the tunnel.) Sink Node: 1.0.0.2. (The LSR ID of the sink node on the tunnel.)

4.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, configure the Tunnel parameters of the egress node by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2.

9-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Set related parameters and ensure that the general information of the tunnel is the same as that on NE1. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l

Node Type: Egress (NE3 is a terminal node on the tunnel.) In Board/Logic Interface Type: 1-EX2 In Port: 1(Port-1) In Label: 30(Positive), Out Label: 31 (Reverse) Next Hop Address: -(Positive), 10.0.1.1 (Reverse) Source Node: 1.0.0.1 (Positive) (The LSR ID of the source node on the tunnel.)

Step 4 Creating Protection Tunnel. 1. Display the NE Explorer for NE1, NE6, NE5, NE4, and NE3 separately. Perform Step 3.1 through Step 3.4 to create the ingress node, transit node, and egress node on the bypass tunnel. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l

Tunnel ID: 120 (Positive), 121 (Reverse) Tunnel Name: Protection Tunnel-Positive, Protection Tunnel-Reverse Bandwidth(kbit/s): No Limit Tunnel Type: E-LSP EXP: none For the route information, see Table 6-4.

Step 5 Configure BTS-side E1 interface. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface. Click General Attributes tab, Select 6-L12-2(Port-2) and 6-L12-3(Port-3). Set the Port Mode to Layer 1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-43

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

3. 4.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Click Advanced Attributes tab, Select 6-L12-2(Port-2) and 6-L12-3(Port-3). Set the Frame Format to Unframe.
NOTE

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

5.

Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, select the board 6-MP1 of NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Path Configuration . Select NE3-6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1)-VC4:1-VC12:2 and NE3-6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1)VC4:1-VC12:3. Set VC12 Frame Format to Unframe. Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Click New and the Create CES Service dialog box is displayed. Configure parameters for CES Remote Service 1.

Step 6 Configure BSC-side STM-1 interface. 1. 2. 3.

Step 7 Creating CES Remote Service 1. 1. 2.

9-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l

Service ID: 4 Service Name: CES Remote Service 1 Level: E1 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 6-L12 Source High Channel: - (In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.) Source Low Channel: 2 (In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.) Source 64K Timeslot: 1-14,20 (The 64K Timeslot parameter indicates the timeslot compression list during the configuration of the structured emulation CES services. The
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-45

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

selected timeslots are loaded to the PW packets, and then are transmitted to the opposite end through the Ethernet. The timeslot lists at the two ends can be inconsistent, but the number of timeslots must be consistent. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.)
l l l

PW ID: 8 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: CESoPSN (The CESoPSN is of structuralized emulation, and you can set the timeslot compression for it. The SAToP is of non-structuralized emulation, and you cannot set the timeslot compression for it.) PW Encapsulation Type: MPLS PW Ingress Label/Source Port: 36 (The ingress label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW.) PW Egress Label/Sink Port: 36 (The egress label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW.) Peer IP: 10.0.1.2 Tunnel: Working Tunnel-Positive(Tunnel-0100)

l l l l l

3.

Click QoS. Set the EXP to 4. Click OK to finish configuring the QoS.

4.

Click Advanced Attributes. Then, configure the advanced attributes parameters of the CES service. Click OK to finish configuring the advanced attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

RTP Head: Disabled (The RTP head carries the clock signals.) Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000 (The Jitter Compensation Buffering Time indicates the buffer size in the receive direction. The PSN is delayed, while the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-46

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

TDM network is plesiochronous. The packet needs to be saved temporarily so that it can be transmitted to the PDH port smoothly. The buffer size is measured in time. This parameter can be set when the pseudo wire (PW) is used for the circuit emulation service (CES).)
l

Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 (The Packet Loading Time parameter indicates the time that the PW packet requires to load the TDM frames. That is, the parameter is used to specify the number of the TDM frames that are loaded in the PW packet. The period of the TDM frame is 125 us. If Packet Loading Time is 1 ms, then eight TDM frames can be loaded in a PW packet.) Ingress Clock Mode: - (The Clock Mode parameter indicates whether the clocks of the PDH/SDH services accessed at both ends are synchronous.) Ingress Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

5. 1.

Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, configure the CES Remote Service 1 parameters of NE3 by following Step 7.2 to Step 7.5. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Remote Service 1 Service ID: 4 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) Source High Channel: VC4-1 Source Low Channel: 2 Source 64K Timeslot: 1-14,20 PW ID: 8 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: CESoPSN PW Ingress Label/Source Port: 36 PW Egress Label/Sink Port: 36 Peer IP; 10.0.0.1 Tunnel: Working Tunnel-Positive(Tunnel-0101) EXP: 4 RTP Head: Disabled Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000 Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 Ingress Clock Mode: Egress Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

Step 8 Creating CES Remote Service 2. 1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-47

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2.

Configure the CES Remote Service 2 parameters of the NE1 by following Step 7.2 to Step 7.5. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Remote Service 2 Service ID: 5 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 6-L12 Source High Channel: Source Low Channel: 3 Source 64K Timeslot: 1-31 PW ID: 9 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: SAToP PW Ingress Label/Source Port: 37 PW Egress Label/Sink Port: 37 Peer IP: 10.0.1.2 Tunnel: Working Tunnel-Positive(Tunnel-0100) EXP: 4 RTP Head: Disabled Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000 Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 Ingress Clock Mode: Egress Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

3. 4.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree. Configure the CES Remote Service 2 parameters of the NE3 by following Step 7.2 to Step 7.5. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l l

Service Level: E1 Service Name: CES Remote Service 2 Service ID: 5 Mode: UNI-NNI Source Board: 6-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) Source High Channel: VC4-1 Source Low Channel: 3 Source 64K Timeslot: 1-31 PW ID: 9 PW Signaling Type: Static
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9-48

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l l l l l l l l l l

9 Configuring a CES Service

PW Type: SAToP PW Ingress Label/Source Port: 37 PW Egress Label/Sink Port: 37 Peer IP; 10.0.0.1 Tunnel: Working Tunnel-Reverse(Tunnel-0101) EXP: 4 RTP Head: Disabled Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us): 8000 Packet Loading Time(us): 1000 Ingress Clock Mode: Egress Clock Mode: External Clock Mode

----End

9.6 Checking the Correctness of the Service Configuration

After the CES service is configured, you need to check the correctness of the service configuration. You can check the correctness of the CES service configuration as follows: attach a 2M BER tester at the CES port and then perform loopbacks at the remote end.

Context
See Figure 9-9. A CES service exists between NE1 and NE2. Attach a 2M BER tester at the 1MP1-1-CD1-1 port on NE1. On the T2000, set the inloop of the 1-MP1-1-CD1-1 port on NE2. Check the correctness of the CES service. Figure 9-9 Checking the CES service
1-MP1-1-CD1-1 1-MP1-1-CD1-1

NE1 2M BER tester

NE2

Tunnel PW

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the 2M cable to the 1-MP1-1-CD1-1 port on NE1 and the other end to inservice test interface of the 2M BER tester.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-49

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 2 In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface , and set the Loopback Mode of 1-MP1-1-CD1-1(Port-1) to Inloop. On the T2000, configure the outloop of the 1-MP1-1-CD1-1 port on NE2. Step 3 Start the test. Normally, there should be no bit error in 24 hours. ----End

9.7 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the CES service configuration. Table 9-9 Descriptions of the parameters for CES Service Management Field Service Level Service Name Value E1 64 bytes Default: CESService-0001 Service ID Example: 5 Description Indicate the level of the accessed TDM frame. Indicate the name of the service. Set the ID of the service, or set to automatically allocate the ID of the service. Indicate the customer of the service. Indicate the description of the service. Set the source NE and sink NE.
l

Customer Remarks NE

String String Example: NE1

When configuring a UNINNI service, select different NEs as the source and sink. When configuring a UNIUNI service, select the same NE as the source and sink.

Port High Path

Example: 6-MP-1 (PORT-1) VC-4 supported by the board

Set the source port and sink port. Set the high path. In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number.

9-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Field Low Path

Value Lower order timeslot number or tributary port number supported by the board

Description Set the low path. In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number. Set to compress the 64K timeslot. Timeslot compression can be set only when Protocol Type is set to CESoPSN.

64K Timeslot

Example: 1, 5

ID

Example: 5

Set the ID of the PW. You can also select the automatic allocation. Set the PW signal type. If the PW signal type is Static, set the PW ingress label and PW egress label. If the PW signal type is Dynamic, the system automatically sets the PW ingress label and PW egress label.

Signaling Type

Static, dynamic

Encapsulation Type

MPLS, UDP

Sets the PW encapsulation type. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to MPLS, the MPLS, IP, and GRE tunnels are supported; When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, only the IP tunnel is supported. Set the PW emulation mode. CESoPSN is the structural emulation, for which the timeslot compression can be set. SAToP is the nonstructural emulation, for which the timeslot compression cannot be set.

Emulation Mode

CESoPSN, SAToP

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-51

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Uplink Label/Source Port

Value 16 to 1048575

Description Set the uplink label. When the TDM frame is encapsulated into the PW, labels are attached on the packet header. The uplink label indicates that the service enters the PW. The uplink label and downlink label are different. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the uplink label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535.

Downlink Label/Sink Port

16 to 1048575

Set the downlink label. When the TDM frame is encapsulated into the PW, labels are attached on the packet header. The downlink label indicates that the service exits the PW. The uplink label and downlink label are different. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the downlink label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535.

Tunnel Type

MPLS Tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel

Select the tunnel that carries the service. The uplink LSP is the ingress direction of the tunnel that carries the service.

Tunnel Name

For example, shenzhen (Tunnel-0001)

Select the tunnel that carries the service. The downlink LSP is the egress direction of the tunnel that carries the service.

9-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Table 9-10 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of CES Service Management Field RTP Head Value Enabled, Disabled Description Set the RTP head. The RTP head carries the clock signals. Click C.36 RTP Head for more information. Packet Loading Time (us) PTN 3900: 125 to 3000 Set the packet loading time. Set the packet loading time to increase the efficiency in encapsulation. Click C.49 Packet Loading Time for more information. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) PTN 3900: 375 to 64000 Set the jitter compensation buffering time. The jitter compensation buffering time is set to ensure that the CES service is realtime.
NOTE Different PTN devices support the different ranges of jitter compensation buffering time. When the value exceeds the range, an error message is displayed. The value of Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) must be greater than the value of Packet Loading Time(us) on the opposite end.

Click C.77 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time for more information. Uplink Clock Mode External Clock Mode, Null Set the uplink clock mode. The clock mode is set to ensure correct restoration of the CES service at the sink. Downlink Clock Mode External Clock Mode, Null Set the downlink clock mode. The clock mode is set to ensure correct restoration of the CES service at the sink.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-53

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 9-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PW General Attributes of CES service management Field Service ID Service Name Level Mode Source Board Source High Channel Value Example: 5 64 bytes E1 UNI-UNI, UNI-NNI Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: VC4-1 Description Sets the ID of the service. Sets the name of the service. Sets the level of the TDM frame. Displays the mode of the CES service. Sets the source board of the CES service. Sets the source high channel. In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number. Source Low Channel Example: VC12-1 Sets the source low channel. In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number. PW ID Enable State Example: 5 Enabled, Disabled Sets the ID of the PW. Sets and display the enable status of the PW. You can right-click a PW and set the enable status of the PW with the shortcut menu. Tunnel Type Tunnel MPLS, GRE, IP Tunnel ID Example: 55 Sets the type of Tunnel. Sets the tunnel that carries the PW. The tunnel should be configured in advance. Click C.39 Tunnel for more information. Sink Board Sink High Channel Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: VC4-1 Sets the sink board of the CES service. Sets the sink high channel. In the case of the line port, set the VC-4 higher order path number. Sink Low Channel Example: VC12-1 Sets the sink low channel. In the case of the E1 port, set the E1 port number. In the case of the line port, set the VC-12 lower order path number.

9-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Field 64K Timeslot

Value Example: 1-31

Description Displays the compressed 64K timeslot. Click C.1 64KTs for more information.

Source 64K Timeslot PW Signaling Type

Example: 1-31 Static, Dynamic

Displays the compressed source 64K timeslot. Sets the PW signal type. If PW Signal Type is set to Static, manually set the PW ingress label and PW egress label. If PW Signal Type is set to Dynamic, the system automatically sets the PW ingress label and PW egress label. Click C.34 PW Signaling Type for more information.

PW Type

CESoPSN, SAToP

Sets the PW type. The CESoPSN is of structuralized emulation, and you can set the timeslot compression for it. The SAToP is of non-structuralized emulation, and you cannot set the timeslot compression for it.

PW Encapsulation Type

MPLS, UDP

Sets the PW encapsulation type. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to MPLS, the MPLS, IP, and GRE tunnels are supported; When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, only the IP tunnel is supported. Sets the PW ingress label. The PW ingress label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW. The PW ingress label indicates that the service enters the PW. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, the value of the ingress label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535.

PW Ingress Label

16 to 1048675

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-55

9 Configuring a CES Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field PW Egress Label

Value 16 to 1048675

Description Sets the PW egress label. The PW egress label is the label attached on the packet header when the TDM frames are encapsulated in the PW. The PW egress label indicates that the service exits the PW. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, the value of the egress label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535. Click C.31 PW Egress Label for more information.

Peer IP Local Working Status Remote Working Status Compositive Working Status

Example: 192.168.0.1 Example: Up Example: Up Example: Up

Sets the peer IP. Displays the local working status. Displays the remote working status. Displays the compositive working status. When Local Working Status and Remote Working Status are set to Up, Compositive Working Status is Up. When Local Working Status or Remote Working Status is set to Down, Compositive Working Status is Down.

Table 9-12 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS of CES Service Management Field PW ID Direction Value Example: 5 Egress, Ingress Description Sets the ID of the PW. Sets the direction of the PW. Egress indicates the PW out-going direction. Ingress indicates the PW in-coming direction. EXP None, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Example: 2048 Sets and displays the EXP priority. 7 indicates the highest priority. Displays the committed bandwidth of the QoS. The committed bandwidth of the QoS indicates the minimum bandwidth available to the service.

CIR (kbit/s)

9-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

9 Configuring a CES Service

Table 9-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Advanced Attributes of CES Service Management Field RTP Head Value Enabled, Disabled Description Set the RTP head. The RTP head carries the clock signals. Click C.36 RTP Head for more information. Packet Loading Time(us) PTN 3900: 125 to 3000 Set the packet loading time. Set the packet loading time to increase the efficiency in encapsulation. Click C.49 Packet Loading Time for more information. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us) 375 to 16000 PTN 910: 375 to 16000 PTN 950: 375 to 16000 PTN 3900: 375 to 64000 Set the jitter compensation buffer time. The jitter compensation buffer time is set to ensure that the CES service is real-time.
NOTE Different PTN devices support the different ranges of jitter compensation buffering time. When the value exceeds the range, an error message is displayed. The value of Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) must be greater than the value of Packetisation Buffering Time(us) on the opposite end.

Click C.77 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time for more information. Ingress Clock Mode External Clock Mode, Null Set the ingress clock mode. The clock mode is set to ensure correct recovery of the CES service at the sink. Set the egress clock mode. The clock mode is set to ensure correct recovery of the CES service at the sink.

Egress Clock Mode

External Clock Mode, Null

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-57

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

10
About This Chapter

Configuring an ATM Service

This section describes basic information on the ATM service, and illustrates how to configure an ATM service with an example. 10.1 Basic Information This section describes the basic information about the ATM service and ATM traffic. 10.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow This section describes the operation tasks for configuring the ATM service, and relations among these tasks. When configuring and managing the ATM services, follow the configuration flow. The application scenarios of the ATM service include the UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI services. 10.3 Operation Tasks Related to ATM Services The operation tasks related to ATM services include the configuration of bound channels in an ATM IMA group, setting of ATM IMA group attributes, fast configuration of an ATM service and configuration of an ATM service at a single station. 10.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI ATM Service This section describes a configuration case of the UNI-UNI ATM service. The configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the configuration process. The configuration case includes service planning and ATM service configuration. 10.5 Configuration Case of the UNIs-NNI ATM Service This section describes a configuration case of the UNIs-NNI ATM service. The configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the configuration process. The configuration case includes service planning and ATM service configuration. 10.6 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration After the ATM service is configured, the correctness of service configuration should be verified. The ATM OAM is used for verifying the correctness of the ATM service configuration. 10.7 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the ATM service configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10.1 Basic Information

This section describes the basic information about the ATM service and ATM traffic. 10.1.1 ATM Service Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a technology used to transport packets in cells with ensured QoS. ATM meets the requirements of real-time services and non-real-time services. The OptiX PTN equipment supports both the UNIs-NNI ATM service and UNI-UNI ATM service. 10.1.2 ATM Traffic The ATM communicates through virtual connections, which are uniquely identified by the VPI/ VCI in the cell header. During data transmission, you need to control the traffic of each virtual connection to ensure the quality of service (QoS).

10.1.1 ATM Service

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a technology used to transport packets in cells with ensured QoS. ATM meets the requirements of real-time services and non-real-time services. The OptiX PTN equipment supports both the UNIs-NNI ATM service and UNI-UNI ATM service. ATM emulation services mainly apply to wireless services. The application scenarios include UNIs-NNI and UNI-UNI, as shown in Figure 10-1.
l

UNIs-NNI ATM service: The PTN equipment accesses the ATM services of customers by using the IMA link or STM link respectively. You can create the ATM PW between the PTN equipment to emulate end-to-end ATM services. At the source end, the ATM cells are encapsulated in the PW. Then, data packets are transparently transmitted in the MPLS network. At the sink end, the ATM services are decapsulated and forwarded to the connected customer network. To customers, the UNIs-NNI ATM services are similar to actual ATM services. UNI-UNI ATM services: The PTN equipment switches and transmits the ATM services at a single point.

10-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Figure 10-1 ATM service networking sample

UNI-UNI

Node B UNI-NNI RNC PE

PE Node B
IMA Link STM-1 ATM Link PW Tunnel

PE

Node B

The ATM UNIs-NNI emulation service supports the convergence of multiple ATM connections into a PW for transmission. As shown in Figure 10-2, three ATM connections are encapsulated into a PW. Figure 10-2 ATM connection convergence sample

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10.1.2 ATM Traffic

The ATM communicates through virtual connections, which are uniquely identified by the VPI/ VCI in the cell header. During data transmission, you need to control the traffic of each virtual connection to ensure the quality of service (QoS).

ATM Traffic Modes

As shown in Table 10-1, the PTN equipment supports four traffic modes. During traffic control, you need to set different traffic parameters according to different service types. Table 10-1 ATM service type and traffic Application Type Constant bit rate (CBR) service Application Instance Voice services, video services of a constant bit rate, and circuit emulation services Traffic Parameter PCR, CDVT Remarks The CBR supports the strict requirements for CTD and CDV, but does not support services with variable delay. The UBR does not require a strict delay and the delay variation. Besides, it does not provide a special QoS or ensure the output. There are UBR+ services on many NodeBs. The UBR+ services are configured with the MCR. When the service rate does not exceed the configured MCR, the normal service transmission is ensured. The features of the UBR+ service other than the MCR are the same as the features of the UBR service.

Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service

LAN emulation, IP over ATM, and nonspecial traffic services

PCR, CDVT

UBR+

LAN emulation, IP over ATM, and nonspecial traffic services

PCR, CDVT

10-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Application Type Real time variable bit rate (rtVBR) service

Application Instance Audio services, and video services of a variable bit rate

Traffic Parameter PCR, SCR, CDVT, MBS

Remarks The rtVBR supports time-sensitive service applications and have restrictions on the delay and delay variation. The nrtVBR does not have restrictions on the delay and delay variation but supports application of services with the variable rate and burst traffic features.

Non real time variable bit rate (nrtVBR) service

Data packet transmission, terminal meeting, and file transmission

PCR, SCR, MBS

The meanings of the traffic parameters in the table are as follows:

l

Peak cell rate (PCR): It defines the maximum cell rate at which cells are transmitted to a network. Sustainable cell rate (SCR): It defines the maximum sustainable average cell rate at which cells are transmitted to a network. Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT): When multiple connected cells are converged, at the convergence egress, the transmission of a connected cell may be delayed because of the insertion of other connected cells. Similarly, the transmission delay may also be caused by the insertion of physical layer overheads and OAM cells. In other words. the cells do not evenly arrive at the receive station. The arrival intervals of consecutive cells are different in different periods. The maximum tolerance of this difference is called CDVT. Maximum burst size (MBS): It limits the maximum cell burst amount within the maximum rate permitted.

Users require each service type to provide a certain QoS and comply with a certain traffic protocol, which is realized by traffic control. During transmission, only user cells complying with the protocol can be successfully transmitted. Cells that do not comply with the protocol are labelled or discarded according to different situations.

Basic Principle of Traffic Control

In general, the control of ATM services combines the preventive control and reactive control methods. Preventive control is the main method, but when congestion occurs, the network can take measures to clear the congestion. In point of effect, the ATM traffic control can be classified into two parts as follows:
l l

Traffic parameter control: preventive control Congestion control: reactive control

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Traffic Parameter Control

The function of traffic parameter control is used to set up proper connections and to control the connected cell flow according to the traffic parameters. If the control of these parameters fails, traffic congestion may occur. The traffic parameter control includes the following methods:
l l

Usage parameter control (UPC)/network parameter control (NPC) Traffic shaping

UPC/NPC UPC/NPC monitors and controls the traffic to judge whether cell violation occurs according to the negotiated parameters. If cell violation occurs, corresponding measures will be taken to prevent network resources from being invaded viciously or unintentionally. This ensures that one link never violates the traffic control. UPC is an act of connection monitoring at the UNI (dedicated or public), and NPC is an act of connection monitoring at the NNI (dedicated or public). According to different traffic types. the UPC includes the following measures:
l l

Allow cells to pass through: The cells are considered protocol-abiding by the UPC. Label cells: This operation is performed on the cell loss priority (CLP). The UPC labels only cells whose CLP values are 0 by changing the CLP values to 1. In this case, these cells are in conflict with the traffic convention. If the bandwidth is sufficient, these cells are allowed to pass through. If the bandwidth is insufficient, however, these labeled cells are discarded. Discard cells: The cells violate the protocol and thus cannot be transmitted continuously.

Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping is a method of changing the traffic feature of a cell flow to realize a higher network efficiency and ensure the QoS index. Traffic shaping helps the cell flow to be transmitted more evenly, maximize the efficiency, and eases the network burden.

Congestion Control
Traffic parameter control is based on the connection and cells, but congestion control relates to different service types. If a network requires discarding cells, a better solution of congestion is to discard packets rather than cells. When an NE discards cells, it also discards a part of the packet. As a result, the upper layer protocol, such as the TCP/IP protocol, is retransmitted, and thus congestion or even collapse occurs.

10.2 ATM Service Configuration Flow

This section describes the operation tasks for configuring the ATM service, and relations among these tasks. When configuring and managing the ATM services, follow the configuration flow. The application scenarios of the ATM service include the UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI services.

UNI-UNI ATM service

Figure 10-3 shows the configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service. For details of each step, see the related section.
10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Figure 10-3 Configuration flow of the UNI-UNI ATM service

Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configure the ATM Policy

Configure the ATM Interface Configure the UNIUNI ATM Service End

Table 10-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI ATM service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the ATM Policy 3. Configure the ATM Interface 4. Configure the UNI-UNI ATM Service Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. The ATM policy is used for traffic management of the ATM service. The ATM interface accesses services from NodeB. To configure the UNI-UNI ATM service, you need to specify the service ID and service name, select the connection type, and configure the connection.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

10 Configuring an ATM Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The process of configuring an ATM interface varies with the board types.
l

An ATM STM-1 board accesses ATM signals: 1. In General attributes for the SDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. In Layer 2 attributes for the SDH interface, set the port type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI.

An ATM STM-1 board accesses IMA signals: 1. In General attributes for the SDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. Create tunnels bound to the ATM IMA group. For details, see Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 3. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, enable the IMA protocol, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, and set the IMA Symmetry Mode. For details, see Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 4. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the Feature Description.

An ATM E1 board accesses IMA signals: 1. In General attributes for the PDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. Create channels bound to the ATM IMA group. For details, see Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 3. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, enable the IMA protocol, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, and set the IMA Symmetry Mode. For details, see Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 4. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the Feature Description.

UNIs-NNI ATM service

Figure 10-4 shows the configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service. For details of each step, see the related section.

10-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Figure 10-4 Configuration flow of the UNIs-NNI ATM service

Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configure the network-side interface

Configure the LSR ID

Configure the control plane

Configure the Tunnel

Configure the ATM Policy

Configure the ATM Interface

Configure the UNIsNNI ATM service

End

Table 10-3 Tasks for configuring the UNIs-NNI ATM service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the LSR ID Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Task 3. Configure the network-side interface 4. Configure the control plane

Remarks Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying. Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel.
l

To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the MPLS-LDP protocol.

To create an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel to transmit the ATM service, you need to Configuring Static Routes.

5. Configure the Tunnel

A tunnel transmits the service.

l

If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the per-NE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel. If an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel is required, select the source board, source port, and IP address of the sink port.

6. Configure the ATM Policy 7. Configure the ATM Interface 8. Configure the UNIs-NNI ATM service

The ATM policy is used for traffic management of the ATM service. The ATM interface accesses services from NodeB. 1. Create an ATM service: Specify the service ID, name the service, and select the service type and connection type. 2. Configure the connection: Set the source information, PW ID, sink information, and policy. 3. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, label, and tunnel type. 4. Configure CoS mapping: Set the CoS policy for the PW.

10-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

10 Configuring an ATM Service

The process of configuring an ATM interface varies with the board types.
l

An ATM STM-1 board accesses ATM signals: 1. In General attributes for the SDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. In Layer 2 attributes for the SDH interface, set the port type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI.

An ATM STM-1 board accesses IMA signals: 1. In General attributes for the SDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. Create tunnels bound to the ATM IMA group. For details, see Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 3. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, enable the IMA protocol, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, and set the IMA Symmetry Mode. For details, see Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 4. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the Feature Description.

An ATM E1 board accesses IMA signals: 1. In General attributes for the PDH interface, set the port mode to Layer 2 and encapsulation type to ATM. 2. Create channels bound to the ATM IMA group. For details, see Configuring Bound Channels in an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 3. Set attributes of the ATM IMA group. In particular, enable the IMA protocol, specify the IMA Transmit Frame Length, and set the IMA Symmetry Mode. For details, see Configuring Attributes of an ATM IMA Group in the Feature Description. 4. Set attributes of the ATM interface. In particular, set the interface type, maximum VPI, and maximum VCI. For details, see Configuring ATM Interface Attributes in the Feature Description.

10.3 Operation Tasks Related to ATM Services

The operation tasks related to ATM services include the configuration of bound channels in an ATM IMA group, setting of ATM IMA group attributes, fast configuration of an ATM service and configuration of an ATM service at a single station. 10.3.1 Creating ATM Services by Using the Trail Function You can create an ATM PWE3 service path for transmitting ATM signals by using the trail function. By using the trail function, you can directly configure the source and sink nodes of an ATM service and the PW attributes in a user interface of the T2000. In this way, the ATM service can be fast created. 10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means that, to configure a complete ATM service, you need to separately configure the service attributes at the source and sink ends of the service first.

10.3.1 Creating ATM Services by Using the Trail Function

You can create an ATM PWE3 service path for transmitting ATM signals by using the trail function. By using the trail function, you can directly configure the source and sink nodes of an
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-11

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

ATM service and the PW attributes in a user interface of the T2000. In this way, the ATM service can be fast created.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of the control plane. For configuration method, see 5 Configuring the Control Plane. If IMA services are accessed, you must complete the configuration of an IMA group. For configuration method, see Configuring the IMA in Feature Description. You must complete the configuration of the ATM policy. For configuration method, see Creating the ATM Policy in Feature Description. You must complete the creation of a tunnel. For configuration method, see 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > PTN Service > ATM Service Creation from the Main Menu. Step 2 Create a UNI-UNI or UNIs-NNI service in the Create ATM Service window.

10-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

10 Configuring an ATM Service

For the UNI-UNI service, you need not specify a PW and set parameters of the PW. For the UNIs-NNI service, you need specify a PW and set parameters of the PW.

Step 3 To create a UNI-UNI service, go to Step 4. To create a UNIs-NNI service, go to Step 5. Step 4 Optional: Create a UNI-UNI service. 1. Set basic attributes of the ATM service in General Attributes.For details on the parameters for general attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-10.
NOTE

For the ATM Service type, you can select the following.
l l

PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.

2.

In Source, click Browse and select the source NE and source port of the service. In Sink, click Browse and select the sink NE and sink port of the service. For details on the parameters for the source/sink port of the ATM service, see Table 10-10.
NOTE

For a UNI-UNI service, select the same source and sink NEs. Select one source port and one sink port.

3.

In ATM Connection, click Add to add an ATM connection. For details on the parameters for ATM connection, see Table 10-10.
NOTE

l l

Modify the VPI and VCI or not, according to the ATM Service type. You can proceed with the next operation only after selecting the uplink and downlink ATM policies of the ATM connection.

Step 5 Optional: Create a UNIs-NNI service. 1. Set basic attributes of the ATM service in General Attributes. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-10.
NOTE

For the ATM Service type, you can select the following.
l l

PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.

2.

In Source, click Browse and select the source NE and source port of the service. In Sink, click Browse and select the sink source and sink port of the service. For details on the parameters for the source/sink port of the ATM services, see Table 10-10.
NOTE

For a UNIs-NNI service, select different source and sink NEs.

3.

In ATM Connection, click Add to add an ATM connection. For details on the parameters for ATM connection, see Table 10-10.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

10 Configuring an ATM Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

l l

Modify the VPI and VCI or not, according to the ATM Service type. The Sink VPI value ranges from 0 to (2MaxVPIbits-1). The Sink VCI value ranges from 32 to (2MaxVCIbits-1). For example, the value of Max. VPI Bits for the ATM interface is 8 and the value of Max. VCI Bits is 7, the value of the sink VPI ranges from 0 to (28-1) (that is, 0 to 255) and the value of the sink VCI ranges from 32 to (27-1) (that is, 32 to 127). If Encapsulation Type is set n-to-one, you can add several ATM connections. You can proceed with the next operation only after selecting the uplink and downlink ATM policies of the ATM connection.

l l

4.

Click Next. The Create ATM Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the PW and set the parameters. For details on the parameters for PW attributes, see Table 10-11.

NOTE

In the ATM service management interface, select QoS Policy and configure the QoS policy for the PW. If the QoS policy is not otherwise set, the default policy is adopted.

Step 6 Click Finish. The Operation Result window is displayed. Click Close. ----End

10-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes how to create an ATM PWE3 service channel that transports ATM signals on a per-NE basis. The per-NE basis means that, to configure a complete ATM service, you need to separately configure the service attributes at the source and sink ends of the service first.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the configuration of the control plane. For configuration method, see 5 Configuring the Control Plane. If IMA services are accessed, you must complete the configuration of an IMA group. For configuration method, see Configuring the IMA. You must complete the configuration of the ATM policy. For configuration method, see Creating the ATM Policy. You must complete the creation of a tunnel. For configuration method, see 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the Connection tab. Click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. In the window, configure a UNIs-NNI or UNI-UNI service.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NOTE

l l

For the UNIs-NNI service, set the attributes in the Connection, PW and CoS Mapping tabs. For the UNI-UNI service, set only the attributes in the Connection tab.

Step 3 To create a UNI-UNI service, go to Step 4. To create a UNIs-NNI service, go to Step 5. Step 4 Optional: Create a UNI-UNI service. 1. Set ATM-related general attributes. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-12.
NOTE

Select UNI-UNI for the service type. For the connection type, select the following.
l l

PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.

2.

Click the Connection tab and click Add. The Configure Connection window is displayed. In the window, set connection attributes. For details on the parameters for connection attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-13.

10-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

NOTE

The Sink VPI value ranges from 0 to (2MaxVPIbits-1). The Sink VCI value ranges from 32 to (2MaxVCIbits-1).

3. 1.

Click OK. Set ATM-related general attributes. For details on the parameters for general attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-12.
NOTE

Step 5 Optional: Create a UNIs-NNI service.

Select UNIs-NNI for the service type. For the connection type, select the following.
l l

PVP: Only the VPI value of the ATM connection can be modified. PVC: The VPI and VCI values of the ATM connection can be modified.

2.

Click the Connection tab and click Add. The Configure Connection window is displayed. In the window, set connection attributes. For details on the parameters for connection attributes of the ATM service, see Table 10-13.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

3.

Click the PW tab and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window, set attributes of the PW.

4.

Click the General Attributes tab and set the general attributes of PW. For details on the parameters for general attributes of PW, see Table 10-14.

10-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

5. 6. 7.

Optional: Click the QoS tab and set the QoS attribute of PW. For details on the parameters for QoS attributes of PW, see Table 10-14. Optional: Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the advanced attributes of PW. For details on the parameters for advanced attributes of PW, see Table 10-14. Click the CoS Mapping tab and click Add to configure the CoS mapping table. For details on the parameters for the CoS mapping table, see Table 10-15 andTable 10-16.
NOTE

You can configure the CoS mapping only after configuring the parameters in the PW tab.

8.

Click OK.

Step 6 In the New ATM Service window, click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. ----End

10.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI ATM Service

This section describes a configuration case of the UNI-UNI ATM service. The configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the configuration process. The configuration case includes service planning and ATM service configuration. 10.4.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram for the case where the R99 service, Signalling service and HSDPA service are transported between Node B and RNC. 10.4.2 Service Planning To transport the R99 and HSDPA services between NodeB and RNC, three ATM connections should be created. 10.4.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a route basis. 10.4.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.

10.4.1 Networking Diagram

This section describes the networking diagram for the case where the R99 service, Signalling service and HSDPA service are transported between Node B and RNC. Figure 10-5 shows the networking diagram of the UNI-UNI ATM service. The ATM service is required between Node B and RNC. Connection 1 is used for transmitting R99 services, Connection 2 is used for transmitting HSDPA services, and Connection 3 is used for transmitting Signalling services. Node B transmits services to RNC through NE1. NE1 uses the OptiX PTN 3900 to access the services from the base station, and NE1 transmits services to RNC through STM-1.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 10-5 Networking of the ATM service

UNI
Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 R99 HSDPA
Signalling

UNI
VPI 70 71 72 VCI 32 32 32

VPI 1 1 1 IMA 1

VCI 100 101 102

STM-1

Node B

NE 1

RNC

Figure 10-6 shows the NE planning diagram. Figure 10-6 NE planning diagram
UNI UNI

1-MP1-MD1-19-D75

2-MP1-AD1 STM-1 NE 1 RNC

Node B

IMA 1

10.4.2 Service Planning

To transport the R99 and HSDPA services between NodeB and RNC, three ATM connections should be created. Node B accesses the ATM service through IMA1, and then transmits the service to RNC. three services that are connected to the N:1 VCC service should be created. Figure 10-5 shows the VPI/VCI switching. The service shown in Figure 10-5 is taken as an example. Table 10-4 lists the configuration parameters of NE1. Table 10-4 Configuration parameters of NE1 Attribute Base Station of Service IMA Group
10-20

Remarks NodeB IMA1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Attribute Port Accessing the IMA Group at NodeB Port Connected to RNC Connectio n1 Connectio n2 Connectio n3 Source VPI/VCI Sink VPI/VCI Source VPI/VCI Sink VPI/VCI Source VPI/VCI Sink VPI/VCI

Remarks NE1-1-MP1-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) NE1-2-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) 1/100 70/32 1/101 71/32 1/102 72/32

Table 10-5 lists the configuration parameters of Qos. Table 10-5 Service types and QoS requirements Application Scenario Audio service, which is carried by the RT-VBR type. ATM Policy PW Bandwidth Tunnel Bandwidt h 30M bit/s

l l l l

Policy ID: 1 Policy name: RT-VBR Service type: RT-VBR Traffic type: ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 4000 Clp0Scr(cell/s): 1000 MBS(cell): 100 CDVT(us): 10000 Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag: No UPC/NPC: Enabled

Bandwidth: 4 Mbit/s

l l l l l

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-21

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Application Scenario Signal service, which is carried by the CBR type.

ATM Policy

PW Bandwidth

Tunnel Bandwidt h

l l l l l l

Policy ID: 2 Policy name: CBR Service type: CBR Traffic type: NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 800 Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag: No UPC/NPC: Enabled

Bandwidth: 1 Mbit/s

Data service, which is carried by the UBR type.

Policy name: Policy3 Service type: UBR Traffic type: NoClpNoScr PCR: 9000 cell/s
l l l l

Bandwidth: 15 Mbit/s

Policy ID: 3 Policy name: UBR Service type: UBR Traffic type: NoTrafficDescriptor Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag: No UPC/NPC: Disabled

10.4.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis

This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a route basis.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, UBR. 1. 2. Configure the CBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the RT-VBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-22

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

3.

Configure the UBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the NodeB-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the NodeBside interface. Select 19-D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4). Right click the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.
NOTE

Step 2 Configure ATM interface: NodeB-side ATM interface and RNC-side ATM interface. 1.

b.

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 19-D75-3(Port-3), 19-D75-4(Port-4) Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.) Encapsulation: ATM

l l

c.

In the Advanced Attributes tab, set the Frame Format, Frame Mode of the 19D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4). Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 19-D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4) Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set the Frame Format as the same as the parameter of NodeB.) Frame Mode: 31

d. e.

Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree, and click the Binding tab. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the parameters such as Available Boards, Configuration Ports. Then, click OK.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Available Boards: 1-MP1 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-23

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Ports: 1-MP1-1-MD1-1(Trunk-1) (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Available Bound Paths Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1 board. Herein, the board is an ATM E1 board.) Direction: Bidirectional (Default) Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv. Herein, the path level is E1.) Available Resources: 19-D75-3(Port-3), 19-D75-4(Port-4) Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv.)

l l

l l

f.

In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters as the same as these parameters of NodeB. g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port Type: UNI (A UNI interface is connected to the client equipment and an NNI interface is connected to ATM equipment in the core network.) ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max. VPI Bits: 8 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VPI Bits to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Max. VCI Bits: 7 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VCI Bits to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Loopback: Non-Loopback

l l

2.

Configure the RNC-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the RNC-side interface. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 2-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1), and set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:

b.

10-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l l l l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Port Type: UNI ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max.VPI Bits: 8 Max.VCI Bits: 7 VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32

Step 3 Create a UNI-UNI ATM service, add three connections. 1. 2. Choose Trail > PTN Service > ATM Service Creation from the Main Menu. In the displayed Create ATM Service dialog box, set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Connection Type, Source NE, and Sink NE. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l

Service ID: 10 Service Name: ATMService-10 Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection can be modified; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be modified.) Source NE: NE1 Source Port: 1-MP1-1-MD1-Trunk1 Sink NE: NE1 Sink Port: 2-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1)

l l l l

3.

In the Create ATM Service, click Add to add connections. Set the parameters as needed, and click Finish to complete the service configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-25

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Connection 1

Name: Connection 1 Source Port: NE1-1-MP1-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 (the VPI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Source VCI: 100 (the VCI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Sink Port: NE1-2-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 70 (The VPI information transmitted with the service after VPI switching. The Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Sink VCI: 32 (The VCI information transmitted with the service after VCI switching. The Sink VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) Uplink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Downlink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: -

Connection 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-26

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Name: Connection 2 Source Port: NE1-1-MP1-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 101 Sink Port: NE1-2-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 71 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name(ID): UBR (policy) (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA service.) Downlink ATM Policy Name(ID): UBR (policy)(Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA service.) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: Source Port: NE1-1-MP1-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 102 Sink Port: NE1-2-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 72 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name(ID): CBR (policy) (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signalling service.) Downlink ATM Policy Name(ID): CBR (policy) (Select the CBR policy, because connection 3 is a signalling service.) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: -

Connection 3

----End

10.4.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes the process of configuring a UNI-UNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, UBR. 1. Configure the CBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-27

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

2. 3.

Configure the RT-VBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the UBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the NodeB-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the NodeBside interface. Select 19-D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4). Right click the Port Mode field, and select Layer 2. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.
NOTE

Step 2 Configure ATM interface: NodeB-side ATM interface and RNC-side ATM interface. 1.

b.

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 19-D75-3(Port-3), 19-D75-4(Port-4) Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.) Encapsulation: ATM

l l

c.

In the Advanced Attributes tab, set the Frame Format, Frame Mode of the 19D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4). Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 19-D75-3(Port-3) and 19-D75-4(Port-4) Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set the Frame Format as the same as the parameter of NodeB.) Frame Mode: 31

d. e.

Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree, and click the Binding tab. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the parameters such as Available Boards, Configuration Ports. Then, click OK.

10-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Available Boards: 1-MP1 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Configuration Ports: 1-MP1-1-MD1-1(Trunk-1) (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Available Bound Paths Level: E1 (Select E1 for an ATM E1 board and VC12-xv for an ATM STM-1 board. Herein, the board is an ATM E1 board.) Direction: Bidirectional (Default) Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv. Herein, the path level is E1.) Available Resources: 19-D75-3(Port-3), 19-D75-4(Port-4) Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv.)

l l

l l

f.

In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters as the same as these parameters of NodeB. g. In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port Type: UNI (A UNI interface is connected to the client equipment and an NNI interface is connected to ATM equipment in the core network.) ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max. VPI Bits: 8 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VPI Bits to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Max. VCI Bits: 7 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VCI Bits to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Loopback: Non-Loopback

l l

2.

Configure the RNC-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the RNC-side interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-29

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

b.

In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 2-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1), and set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

Port Type: UNI ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max.VPI Bits: 8 Max.VCI Bits: 7 VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32

Step 3 Configure a UNI-UNI ATM service. 1. 2. Choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. In the Connection tab, click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. In the window, configure a UNI-UNI service. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Service ID: 10 Service Name: ATMService-10 Service Type: UNI-UNI Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection can be modified; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be modified.)

3.

Click the Connection tab and click Add to add connection 1 and connection 2. Then, click OK.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

10-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Connection 1

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 1-MP1 Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 (the VPI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Source VCI: 100 (the VCI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) PW ID: Sink Board: 2-MP1 Sink Port: 1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 70 (The VPI information transmitted with the service after VPI switching. The Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Sink VCI: 32 (The VCI information transmitted with the service after VCI switching. The Sink VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 1-MP1 Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 101 PW ID: Sink Board: 2-MP1 Sink Port: 1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 71 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: UBR (policy) (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA service.) Downlink Policy: UBR (policy) (Select the UBR policy, because connection 2 is an HSDPA service.) Source Board: 1-MP1 Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 102 PW ID: Sink Board: 2-MP1 Sink Port: 1-AD1-1(Port-1)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-31

Connection 2

Connection 3

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Sink VPI: 72 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 2 is a signalling service.) Downlink Policy: CBR (Select the CBR policy, because connection 2 is a signalling service.)

----End

10.5 Configuration Case of the UNIs-NNI ATM Service

This section describes a configuration case of the UNIs-NNI ATM service. The configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the configuration process. The configuration case includes service planning and ATM service configuration. 10.5.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram for the case where the R99 service, Signalling service and HSDPA service are transported between NodeB1 and RNC, NodeB2 and RNC. 10.5.2 Service Planning To transport the R99, Signalling and HSDPA services between NodeB1 and RNC, NodeB2 and RNC respectively, three ATM services must be created. 10.5.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a route basis. 10.5.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.

10.5.1 Networking Diagram

This section describes the networking diagram for the case where the R99 service, Signalling service and HSDPA service are transported between NodeB1 and RNC, NodeB2 and RNC. Figure 10-7 shows the networking diagram of the UNIs-NNI ATM service. The 3G R99, signalling and HSDPA services are required between the two base stations and RNC. NE1 accesses the MPLS network formed by the PTN equipment. Node B1 is connected to NE1 through IMA1, and Node B2 is connected to NE1 through IMA2. The VPI/VCI switching is performed on NE1, and the VPI/VCI transparent transmission is performed on NE2 and NE3. Between NE1 and NE3, three PWs are used to carry the R99, signalling and HSDPA services respectively. At the remote end, to transparently transmit the ATM service in the MPLS network, NE3 is connected to RNC through STM-1. NE1 is an OptiX PTN 1900 NE, and NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5 are OptiX PTN 3900s, and NE6 is an OptiX PTN 950. The ATM services are carried by the working tunnel. The protection tunnel can be created to protect the services that have high real-time requirement. The working tunnel is NE1-NE2-NE3, and the protection tunnel is NE1-NE6-NE5-NE4-NE3.

10-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Figure 10-7 Networking of the ATM service

NE4 NE5 10GE ring on NE6

GE ring on access layer

NE1 IMA1 pw1 pw2 pw3 IMA2 NE2

convergence layer

NE3 ATM STM-1

RNC
Working Tunnel

NodeB 1

NodeB 2

PW Protection Tunnel

UNI
IMA1:
Connection1 Connection2 Connection3 R99 HSDPA Signalling VPI 1 1 1 VCI 100 101 102

NNI
VPI 50 51 52 VCI 32 32 32

NNI
VPI 50 51 52 VCI 32 32 32

UNI
VPI 50 51 52 VCI 32 32 32

UNI
Connection1

NNI
VCI 100 101 102 VPI 60 61 62 VCI 32 32 32

NNI
VPI 60 61 62 VCI 32 32 32

UNI
VPI 60 61 62 VCI 32 32 32

IMA2:

Connection2 Connection3

R99 HSDPA Signalling

VPI 1 1 1

Figure 10-8 shows the NE planning diagram. Figure 10-8 NE planning diagram
3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.4.2 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.3.2 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.3.1 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.2.2

NE5
2-EG2-2(Port-2) 10.0.4.1

NE6

GE ring on access layer NE1

3-EG16-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.2

NE4 10GE ring on convergence layer

1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.2 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 10.0.2.1

NE2
4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.1

1-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.1

NE3

3-MP1-AD1

4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 10.0.5.1

1-CXP-MD1-3-L12

RNC
Working tunnel Protection tunnel

NodeB 1 NodeB 2

10.5.2 Service Planning

To transport the R99, Signalling and HSDPA services between NodeB1 and RNC, NodeB2 and RNC respectively, three ATM services must be created. Between NE1 and NE3, the R99 service is carried by PW1, the HSDPA service is carried by PW2, and the Signalling service is carried by PW3. Thus, three ATM services should be created.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-33

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

At the two base stations, the R99 service is aggregated and the Signalling service and HSDPA service is accessed. Thus, two ATM services connected to the N:1 VCC should be created. The service shown in Figure 10-7 is taken as an example. Table 10-6 lists the configuration parameters of NE1. Table 10-6 Configuration parameters of NEs NE NE1 LSR ID 1.0.0.1 Port 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 1-EX2-2(Port-2) 1-EX2-1(Port-1) 3-EG16-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Port IP Address 10.0.0.1 10.0.5.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.1.1 10.0.1.2 10.0.2.1 10.0.2.2 10.0.3.1 10.0.3.2 10.0.4.2 10.0.5.2 10.0.4.1 IP Mask 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252 255.255.255.252

NE2

1.0.0.2

NE3

1.0.0.3

NE4

1.0.0.4

NE5

1.0.0.5

NE6

1.0.0.6

Table 10-7 Planning of Tunnel parameters Parameters Tunnel ID Name 100 Working TunnelPositive Dynamic E-LSP No Limit NE1 NE3 Working Tunnel 101 Working TunnelReverse Dynamic E-LSP No Limit 120 Protection Tunnel-Positive Dynamic E-LSP No Limit NE1 NE3 Protection Tunnel 121 Protection Tunnel-Reverse Dynamic E-LSP No Limit

Signal Type Scheduling Type Bandwith (kbit/s) Source Node Sink Node

10-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Parameters Route Constraint Port IP Address

Working Tunnel IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 3-EG16-1 (Port-1) 10.0.0.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 1-EX2-1 (Port-1) 10.0.1.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 1-EX2-2 (Port-2) 10.1.2.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE1: 4-EFG2-1 (Port-1) 10.1.1.2

Protection Tunnel IP addresses of ingress port of NE6: 2-EG2-1 (Port-1) 10.0.5.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE5: 3-EG16-1 (Port-1) 10.0.4.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EX2-2 (Port-2) 10.0.3.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 1-EX2-2 (Port-2) 10.0.2.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE4: 1-EX2-1 (Port-1) 10.0.2.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE5: 1-EX2-2 (Port-2) 10.0.3.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE6: 2-EG2-2 (Port-2) 10.0.4.1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE1: 4-EFG2-2 (Port-2) 10.0.5.1

Table 10-8 Configuration parameters of NE1 Attribute Base Station of Service IMA Group Source Port Service Source VPI/VCI Sink VPI/ VCI PW of Service PW ID Remarks NodeB1 NodeB2

IMA1 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) R99 1/100 50/32 PW1 35 HSDPA 1/101 51/32 PW2 36 Signalling 1/102 52/32 PW3 37

IMA2 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) R99 1/100 60/32 PW1 35 HSDPA 1/101 61/32 PW2 36 Signalling 1/102 62/32 PW3 37

Table 10-9 lists the configuration parameters of NE3.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-35

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 10-9 Configuration parameters of NE3 Attribut e Service Source (VPI/ VCI) Sink (VPI/ VCI) PW of Service PW ID Sink Port Remarks R99 50/32 HSDPA 51/32 Signalling 52/32 Remarks R99 60/32 HSDPA 61/32 Signalling 52/32

50/32

51/32

52/32

60/33

61/33

52/32

PW1 35

PW2 36

PW3 37

PW1 35

PW2 36

PW3 37

3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1)

10.5.3 Configuring an ATM Service on a Route Basis

This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a route basis.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-36

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l l l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-37

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.5.2

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Configure the control plane. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Select 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Port Configuration tab. Right click IS-IS Enable field, and select Enabled. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

IS-IS Enable: Enabled (After the IS-IS routing protocol is enabled, PW labels can be distributed dynamically.) Link Level: level-1-2 LSP Retransmission Interval(s): 5 (In the case of a point-to-point link, if the local equipment fails to receive any response in a period after transmitting the LSP, the local
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

l l

10-38

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

equipment considers that the LSP is lost or discarded. To ensure the transmission reliability, the local equipment transmits the LSP again.)
l

Minimum LSP Transmission Interval (ms): 30

3.

Optional: Choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree.
NOTE

When creating a dynamic PW to carry services, set the parameters related to MPLS-LDP.

4.

Optional: Click Create. Enter the ID of the opposite NE in the Create LDP Peer Entity dialog box. Click OK. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE3 in this case.) Hello Send Interval(s): 10 (The Hello packets are periodically sent to maintain the neighborship.) KeepAlive Send Interval(s): 10 (The KeepAlive packets are periodically sent to maintain the LDP session.)

5.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Set the parameters related to the control plane by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.4. Set the IS-IS parameters of NE3 as the same as the IS-IS parameters of NE1. Set the LDP parameters as follows:
l

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE1 in this case.)

Step 4 Creating Working MPLS Tunnel. 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-39

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tunnel ID: 1 (Positive), 2 (Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0001 (Positive), Tunnel-0002 (Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

l l

EXP:- (tunnel priority.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): 30000 (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Source Node and Sink Node. Click Add to add route restrictions. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Source Node: NE1 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.0.2, 10.0.1.2, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.1.1, 10.0.0.1, Include Strict

4.

Click Next. Set the parameters such as Setup Priority and Hold Priority for the tunnel according to the planning. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Setup Priority: 7 (Setup priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel during creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case insufficiency of resources, the MPLS tunnel of a higher setup priority can preempt the bandwidth of other MPLS tunnels and thus can be created successfully.) Hold Priority: 0 (Hold priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel after creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case of insufficiency of resources, the bandwidth for the MPLS tunnel of a higher hold priority is less likely to be preempted by other tunnels. When creating a dynamic tunnel, make sure that the hold priority is higher or equal to the setup priority.) Color(0x): 0 (Set the affinity attribute of a link. When the primary tunnel is faulty, the link with the same color is preferred during rerouting. When the affinity attribute of links is not required, adopt the default value.) Mask(0x): 0 (Set the number of bits of the mask. Match the number of bits of a mask with the link color. Select the route of a matching link color.) Tunnel Type: Primary Tunnel (You can set the tunnel type to primary tunnel or bypass tunnel. According to the planning, the tunnel is a primary tunnel in this case.)

Step 5 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, UBR. 1. 2. 3. Configure the CBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the RT-VBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the UBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-40

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Step 6 Configure interfaces: NodeB-side ATM interface and RNC-side ATM interface. 1. Configure the NodeB-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the NodeBside interface. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Right-click the Port Mode field and choose Layer 2. Then, click Apply.
NOTE

b.

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.) Encapsulation: ATM

l l

c.

In the Advanced Attributes tab, set the Frame Format, Frame Mode of the 3L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 3-L12(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set the Frame Format as the same as the parameter of NodeB.) Frame Mode: 31

d. e.

Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree, and click the Binding tab. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the ports to be bound with 1-CXP-1MD1-1(Trunk1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2). Then, click OK. Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) as follows:
l l l

Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Available Bound Paths Level: E1

E1: In the case of the E1 boards, when the E1 level is selected, the entire E1 channel is used to transport ATM IMA signals. VC12-xv: In the case of the ATM STM-1 boards, the STM-1 VC-4 path contains 63xVC-12 lower order paths. When the VC12-xv level is selected, certain VC-12 lower order paths of the VC-4 path are used to transport ATM IMA signals.

l l

Direction: Bidirectional (Default) Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv. Herein, the path level is E1.) Available Resources: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-4(Port-4) Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv.)

l l

Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-41

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l l l l l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Available Bound Paths Level: E1 Direction: Bidirectional Optical Interface: Available Resources: 3-L12-5(Port-5) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Available Timeslots: -

f.

In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters as the same as these parameters of NodeB.

g.

In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port Type: UNI (A UNI interface is connected to the client equipment and an NNI interface is connected to ATM equipment in the core network.) ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max. VPI Bits: 8 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VPI Bits to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Max. VCI Bits: 7 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VCI Bits to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Loopback: Non-Loopback

l l

2.

Configure the RNC-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the RNC-side interface. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 3-MP1-1-AD1-(1-AD1.PORT-1) and set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply.

b.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port Type: UNI ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-42

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Max.VPI Bits: 8 Max. VCI Bits: 7 VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32

Step 7 Create three UNIs-NNI ATM services. 1. 2. Choose Trail > PTN Service > ATM Service Creation from the Main Menu. Create an R99 service from NE1 to NE3. In the displayed Create ATM Service dialog box, set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Connection Type, Source NE, and Sink NE. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: ATMService-R99 Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection can be modified; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be modified.) Source NE: NE1 Source Port: 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Sink NE: NE3 Sink Port: 3-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1)

l l l l

3.

In the Create ATM Service, click Add to add connections. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Connection 1

Name: Connection 1 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 (the VPI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Source VCI: 100 (the VCI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 50 (The VPI information transmitted with the service after VPI switching. The Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Sink VCI: 32 (The VCI information transmitted with the service after VCI switching. The Sink VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) Uplink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Downlink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: Name: Connection 2 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Source VPI: 1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-43

Connection 2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Source VCI: 100 Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(Port-1) Sink VPI: 60 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an R99 service.) Downlink ATM Policy Name(ID): RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an R99 service.) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: -

4.

Click Next and set PW-related parameters. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

PW ID: 35 Protocol Type: Dynamic (Dynamic indicates that the LDP protocol distributes the PW labels; Static indicates that the ingress and egress labels are manually added.) Encapsulation Type: ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport (Select ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport if multiple ATM connections are mapped to one PW; select ATM oneto-one VCC Cell Mode if one ATM connection is mapped to one PW. Herein, two ATM connections are mapped to one PW.) Direction: Bidirectional Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel Tunnel Name (ID): Tunnel-001(Uplink), Tunnel-002(Downlink) Control Word Use Policy: Must use Control Channel Type: CW (CW realizes connectivity check of the PW.) VCCV Verification Mode: Ping ( PW Ping realizes connectivity check of the PW.) Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet) Packet Loading Time (us): 1000 Bandwidth Enabled: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 4096 (Set the bandwidth according to the service traffic.) CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 10240 PBS (byte): EXP: 1 NE: NE1 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1) NE: NE3 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1)

l l l l l l l

l l l l l l l l l l l

5. 6.
10-44

Click Finish. The ATMService-R99 service is successfully created. Repeat the previous steps to create an ATMService-HSDPA service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 2 Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA Connection Type: PVC Source NE: NE1 Source Port: 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1), 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Sink NE: NE3 Sink Port: 3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Name: Connection 1 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 101 Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Sink VPI: 51 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): UBR (policy) Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): UBR (policy) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: Name: Connection 2 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI:101 Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Sink VPI: 61 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): UBR (policy) Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): UBR (policy) Transit VPI: Transit VCI: -

Connection 2

Set the PW-related parameters as follows:

PW ID: 36 Protocol Type: Dynamic Encapsulation Type: ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-45

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel Tunnel Name (ID): Tunnel-001 Control Word Use Policy: Must use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 20 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000 Bandwidth Enabled: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 4096 CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 10240 PBS (byte): EXP: 3 NE: NE1 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1) NE: NE3 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1)

7.

Repeat the previous steps to create an ATMService-Sinalling service.

l

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 23 Service Name: ATMService-Sinalling Connection Type: PVC Source NE: NE1 Source Port: 1-1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1), 1-1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Sink NE: NE3 Sink Port: 3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Name: Connection 1 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 102 Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Sink VPI: 52 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): CBR Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): CBR Transit VPI: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-46

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Transit VCI: Name: Connection 2 Source Port: NE1-1-CXP-1-MD1-Trunk1 Source VPI: 1 Source VCI:102 Sink Port: NE3-3-MP1-1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Sink VPI: 62 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): CBR Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): CBR Transit VPI: Transit VCI: -

Connection 2

Set the PW-related parameters as follows:

PW ID: 37 Protocol Type: Dynamic Encapsulation Type: ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel Tunnel Name (ID): Tunnel-001 Control Word Use Policy: Must use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 20 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000 Bandwidth Enabled: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 4096 CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 10240 PBS (byte): EXP: 0 NE: NE1 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1) NE: NE3 CoS Mapping Name(ID): 1(mapping1)

----End

10.5.4 Configuring an ATM Service on a Per-NE Basis

This section describes the process of configuring a UNIs-NNI ATM service on a per-NE basis.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-47

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. A network must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5, and NE6 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 NE4 LSR ID: 1.0.0.4 NE5 LSR ID: 1.0.0.5 NE6 LSR ID: 1.0.0.6

Step 2 Configure NNI interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2). Right click the Port Mode filed, and select Layer 3. Set the parameters as required, and click Apply.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (The port carries a tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame Length (byte): 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets. All the received data packets that contain more bytes than the maximum frame length are discarded.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-48

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

3.

Select the 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 (The maximum reserved bandwidth should not exceed the physical bandwidth of the bearer port.) TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) IP Address: 10.0.5.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, NE3, and NE4 separately. Perform Step 2.1 through Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. Set the parameters of each interface the same as NE1-4-EFG2-1(Port-1). The layer 3 attributes of each ports are as follows:
l

NE2-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.1

NE2-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.0.2

NE3-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.1.2

NE3-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.1

NE4-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.2.2

NE4-1-EX2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.1

NE5-1-EX2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 10000000 IP Address: 10.0.3.2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-49

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

NE5-3-EG16-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.2

NE6-4-EFG2-1(Port-1) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.5.2

NE6-4-EFG2-2(Port-2) Max Reserved Bandwidth (kbit/s): 1000000 IP Address: 10.0.4.1

Step 3 Configure the control plane. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Select 4-EFG2-1(Port-1) and 4-EFG2-2(Port-2) in the Port Configuration tab. Right click IS-IS Enable field, and select Enabled. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

IS-IS Enable: Enabled (After the IS-IS routing protocol is enabled, PW labels can be distributed dynamically.) Link Level: level-1-2 LSP Retransmission Interval(s): 5 (In the case of a point-to-point link, if the local equipment fails to receive any response in a period after transmitting the LSP, the local equipment considers that the LSP is lost or discarded. To ensure the transmission reliability, the local equipment transmits the LSP again.) Minimum LSP Transmission Interval (ms): 30

l l

3.

Optional: Choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > MPLS-LDP Configuration from the Function Tree.
NOTE

When creating a dynamic PW to carry services, set the parameters related to MPLS-LDP.

4.

Optional: Click Create. Enter the ID of the opposite NE in the Create LDP Peer Entity dialog box. Click OK. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.3 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE3 in this case.) Hello Send Interval(s): 10 (The Hello packets are periodically sent to maintain the neighborship.) KeepAlive Send Interval(s): 10 (The KeepAlive packets are periodically sent to maintain the LDP session.)

5.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Set the parameters related to the control plane by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.4. Set the IS-IS parameters of NE3 as the same as the IS-IS parameters of NE1. Set the LDP parameters as follows:
l

Opposite LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The opposite LSR ID indicates the LSR ID of the terminal NE on the PW, that is, NE1 in this case.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-50

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Step 4 Creating Working MPLS Tunnel. 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l

Tunnel ID: 1 (Positive), 2 (Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0001 (Positive), Tunnel-0002 (Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs.

l l

EXP:- (tunnel priority.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): 30000 (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Source Node and Sink Node. Click Add to add route restrictions. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Source Node: NE1 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.0.2, 10.0.1.2, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.1.1, 10.0.0.1, Include Strict

4.

Click Next. Set the parameters such as Setup Priority and Hold Priority for the tunnel according to the planning. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish. The configuration parameters are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-51

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Setup Priority: 7 (Setup priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel during creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case insufficiency of resources, the MPLS tunnel of a higher setup priority can preempt the bandwidth of other MPLS tunnels and thus can be created successfully.) Hold Priority: 0 (Hold priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel after creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case of insufficiency of resources, the bandwidth for the MPLS tunnel of a higher hold priority is less likely to be preempted by other tunnels. When creating a dynamic tunnel, make sure that the hold priority is higher or equal to the setup priority.) Color(0x): 0 (Set the affinity attribute of a link. When the primary tunnel is faulty, the link with the same color is preferred during rerouting. When the affinity attribute of links is not required, adopt the default value.) Mask(0x): 0 (Set the number of bits of the mask. Match the number of bits of a mask with the link color. Select the route of a matching link color.) Tunnel Type: Primary Tunnel (You can set the tunnel type to primary tunnel or bypass tunnel. According to the planning, the tunnel is a primary tunnel in this case.)

Step 5 Configure three ATM policies: CBR, RT-VBR, UBR. 1. 2. 3. Configure the CBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the RT-VBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description. Configure the UBR policy, refer to QoS Configuration Case of the ATM Service in Feature Description.

Step 6 Configure interfaces: NodeB-side ATM interface and RNC-side ATM interface. 1. Configure the NodeB-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the NodeBside interface. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Right-click the Port Mode field and choose Layer 2. Then, click Apply.
NOTE

b.

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.) Encapsulation: ATM

l l

c.

In the Advanced Attributes tab, set the Frame Format, Frame Mode of the 3L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 3-L12(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set the Frame Format as the same as the parameter of NodeB.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-52

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Frame Mode: 31

d. e.

Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree, and click the Binding tab. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the ports to be bound with 1-CXP-1MD1-1(Trunk1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2). Then, click OK. Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) as follows:
l l l

Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Available Bound Paths Level: E1

E1: In the case of the E1 boards, when the E1 level is selected, the entire E1 channel is used to transport ATM IMA signals. VC12-xv: In the case of the ATM STM-1 boards, the STM-1 VC-4 path contains 63xVC-12 lower order paths. When the VC12-xv level is selected, certain VC-12 lower order paths of the VC-4 path are used to transport ATM IMA signals.

l l

Direction: Bidirectional (Default) Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv. Herein, the path level is E1.) Available Resources: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-4(Port-4) Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv.) Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Available Bound Paths Level: E1 Direction: Bidirectional Optical Interface: Available Resources: 3-L12-5(Port-5) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Available Timeslots: -

l l

Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) as follows:

l l l l l l l

f.

In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters as the same as these parameters of NodeB.

g.

In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port Type: UNI (A UNI interface is connected to the client equipment and an NNI interface is connected to ATM equipment in the core network.) ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-53

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Max. VPI Bits: 8 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VPI Bits to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Max. VCI Bits: 7 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VCI Bits to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Loopback: Non-Loopback

2.

Configure the RNC-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the RNC-side interface. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 3-MP1-1-AD1-(1-AD1.PORT-1) and set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply.

b.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l

Port Type: UNI ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max.VPI Bits: 8 Max. VCI Bits: 7 VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32

Step 7 Configure interfaces: NodeB-side ATM interface and RNC-side ATM interface. 1. Configure the NodeB-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Then, configure the NodeBside interface. Select 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Right-click the Port Mode field and choose Layer 2. Then, click Apply.
NOTE

b.

Before setting the port mode, make sure that the port DCN is disabled.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Name: NodeB ATM (Set the port name as required. The port name distinguishes the port from other ports and helps to query the port.) Port Mode: Layer 2 (The port transmits IMA signals.) Encapsulation: ATM

l l

c.

In the Advanced Attributes tab, set the Frame Format, Frame Mode of the 3L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8). Click Apply.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-54

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l

Port: 3-L12(Port-1) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Frame Format: CRC-4 Multiframe (Set the Frame Format as the same as the parameter of NodeB.) Frame Mode: 31

d. e.

Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from Function Tree, and click the Binding tab. In the Binding tab, click Configuration and set the ports to be bound with 1-CXP-1MD1-1(Trunk1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2). Then, click OK. Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) as follows:
l l l

Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Available Bound Paths Level: E1

E1: In the case of the E1 boards, when the E1 level is selected, the entire E1 channel is used to transport ATM IMA signals. VC12-xv: In the case of the ATM STM-1 boards, the STM-1 VC-4 path contains 63xVC-12 lower order paths. When the VC12-xv level is selected, certain VC-12 lower order paths of the VC-4 path are used to transport ATM IMA signals.

l l

Direction: Bidirectional (Default) Optical Interface: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv. Herein, the path level is E1.) Available Resources: 3-L12-1(Port-1) to 3-L12-4(Port-4) Available Timeslots: - (This parameter need not be set for E1, but need be set for VC12-xv.) Available Boards: 1-CXP Configuration Ports: 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Available Bound Paths Level: E1 Direction: Bidirectional Optical Interface: Available Resources: 3-L12-5(Port-5) to 3-L12-8(Port-8) Available Timeslots: -

l l

Set the parameters related to 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk2) as follows:

l l l l l l l

f.

In the IMA Group Management tab, double-click the IMA Protocol Enable Status field and select Enabled. Set the other parameters as required. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows: Set the IMA Protocol Version, IMA Transmit Frame Length, IMA Symmetry Mode, Maximum Delay Between Links, Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links, and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links parameters as the same as these parameters of NodeB.

g.

In the ATM Interface Management tab, set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-55

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Port Type: UNI (A UNI interface is connected to the client equipment and an NNI interface is connected to ATM equipment in the core network.) ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max. VPI Bits: 8 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VPI Bits to specify the value range of VPI. The VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Max. VCI Bits: 7 (Set this parameter according to networking planning. Set Max. VCI Bits to specify the value range of VCI. The VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32 (Set this parameter according to networking planning.) Loopback: Non-Loopback

l l

2.

Configure the RNC-side ATM interface. a. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Configure the RNC-side interface. In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select 3-MP1-1-AD1-(1-AD1.PORT-1) and set the parameters such as Max. VPI Bits and Max. VCI Bits for the interface. Then, click Apply.

b.

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l l l l l

Port Type: UNI ATM Cell Payload Scrambling: Enabled Max.VPI Bits: 8 Max. VCI Bits: 7 VCC-Supported VPI Count: 32

Step 8 Configure three UNIs-NNI ATM services. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree. Then, create an R99 service from NE1 to NE3. In the Connection tab, click New. The New ATM Service window is displayed. Then, set Service ID, Service Name, Service Type, and Connection Type. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: ATMService-R99 Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC (PVC indicates that the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection can be modified; PVP indicates that only the VPI of the ATM connection can be modified.)

3.

Click the Connection tab and click Add. The Configure Connection window is displayed. Add connection 1 and connection 2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-56

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

The configuration parameters are as follows:

l

Connection 1

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 (the VPI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) Source VCI: 100 (the VCI information transmitted with the service from NodeB) PW ID: 35 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 50 (The VPI information transmitted with the service after VPI switching. The Sink VPI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits-1.) Sink VCI: 32 (The VCI information transmitted with the service after VCI switching. The Sink VCI ranges from 0 to 2MaxVCIbits-1.) Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 1 is an R99 service.) Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-2(Trunk2) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 100 PW ID: 35 Sink Board: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-57

Connection 2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Sink Port: Sink VPI: 60 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an R99 service.) Downlink Policy: RT-VBR (Select the RT-VBR policy, because connection 2 is an R99 service.)

4.

Click the PW tab and click Add. The Configure PW window is displayed. In the window, set attributes of the PW. Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:
l

General Attributes

PW ID: 35 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic (Dynamic indicates that the LDP protocol distributes the PW labels; Static indicates that the ingress and egress labels are manually added.) PW Type: ATM n to one VCC cell transport (Select ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport if multiple ATM connections are mapped to one PW; select ATM oneto-one VCC Cell Mode if one ATM connection is mapped to one PW. Herein, two ATM connections are mapped to one PW.) Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: PW Egress Label: Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel: 1(Tunnel-00001) Peer IP: 1.0.0.3 Control Word: Must use Control Channel Type: CW (CW realizes connectivity check of the PW.) VCCV Verification Mode: Ping ( PW Ping realizes connectivity check of the PW.) Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet) Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 1

5.

Click the CoS Mapping tab and set the QoS attribute of PW1. Set the QoS mapping for PW1 as follows:
l l

PW ID: 35 CoS Mapping: mapping1(1)

6.

In the NE Explorer, select NE3. Then, create an ATMService-R99 service by following 1 to 5. The configuration parameters are as follows:

10-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 1 Service Name: ATMService-R99 Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC Connection 1

Configure ATM Connection:

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 50 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 35 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 50 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): RT-VBR Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): RT-VBR Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 60 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 35 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 60 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID): RT-VBR Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID): RT-VBR

Connection 2

Set the parameters related to PW1 as follows:

General Attributes

PW ID: 35 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic PW Type: ATM n to 1 VCC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-59

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

PW Egress Label: Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel: 2(Tunnel-0002) Peer IP: 1.0.0.1 Control Word: Must Use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 1

The CoS mapping of PW1 should be configured:

PW ID: 35 CoS Mapping: 1(mapping1)

7.

Create an ATMService-HSDPA service by following 1 to 6. Set the parameters related to NE1 as follows:
l

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 2 Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 101 PW ID: 36 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 51 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: UBR Downlink Policy: UBR

Connection 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-60

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-2(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 101 PW ID: 36 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 61 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: UBR Downlink Policy: UBR

Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:

General Attributes

PW ID: 36 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic PW Type: ATM n to 1 VCC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: PW Egress Label: Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel: 1(Tunnel-0001) Peer IP: 1.0.0.3 Control Word: Must Use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 3

The CoS mapping of PW2 should be configured:

PW ID: 36 CoS Mapping: 1(mapping1)

Set the parameters related to NE3 as follows:

l

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-61

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Service Name: ATMService-HSDPA Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 51 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 36 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 51 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: UBR Downlink Policy: UBR Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 61 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 36 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 61 Sink VCI: 332 Uplink Policy: UBR Downlink Policy: UBR

Connection 2

Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:

General Attributes

PW ID: 36 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic PW Type: ATM n to 1 VCC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: PW Egress Label: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-62

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel: 2(Tunnel-0002) Peer IP: 1.0.0.1 Control Word: Must Use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 3

The CoS mapping of PW2 should be configured:

PW ID: 36 CoS Mapping: 1(mapping1)

8.

Create an ATMService-Signalling service by following 1 to 6. Set the parameters related to NE1 as follows:
l

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 3 Service Name: ATMService-Signalling Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-1(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 102 PW ID: 37 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 52 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: UBR Downlink Policy: UBR Connection Name: Connection 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-63

Connection 2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Source Board: 1-CXP Source Port: 1-MD1-2(Trunk1) Source VPI: 1 Source VCI: 102 PW ID: 37 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 62 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: CBR Downlink Policy: CBR

Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:

General Attributes

PW ID: 37 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic PW Type: ATM n to 1 VCC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: PW Egress Label: Tunnel Type: MPLS Tunnel: 1(Tunnel-0001) Peer IP: 1.0.0.3 Control Word: Must Use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 0

The CoS mapping of PW2 should be configured:

PW ID: 37 CoS Mapping: 1(mapping1)

Set the parameters related to NE3 as follows:

l

Set the general attributes of the ATM service as follows:

Service ID: 3 Service Name: ATMService-Signalling

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-64

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Service Type: UNIs-NNI Connection Type: PVC Connection 1

Configure ATM connections:

Connection Name: Connection 1 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 52 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 37 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 52 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: CBR Downlink Policy: CBR Connection Name: Connection 2 Source Board: 3-MP1 Source Port: 1-AD1-1(1-AD1.PORT-1) Source VPI: 62 Source VCI: 32 PW ID: 37 Sink Board: Sink Port: Sink VPI: 62 Sink VCI: 32 Uplink Policy: CBR Downlink Policy: CBR

Connection 2

Set the parameters related to PW2 as follows:

General Attributes

PW ID: 37 PW Signaling Type: Dynamic PW Type: ATM n to 1 VCC cell transport Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: PW Egress Label: Tunnel Type: MPLS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-65

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tunnel: 2(Tunnel-0002) Peer IP: 1.0.0.1 Control Word: Must Use Control Channel Type: CW VCCV Verification Mode: Ping Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

Advanced Attributes

QoS Ingress

EXP: 0

The CoS mapping of PW2 should be configured:

PW ID: 37 CoS Mapping: 1(mapping1)

----End

10.6 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration

After the ATM service is configured, the correctness of service configuration should be verified. The ATM OAM is used for verifying the correctness of the ATM service configuration.

Case Description
This case describes the ATM service carried by PWs. To verify the correctness of the service, the working state of the PW should be queried and the ATM OAM should be configured. For details, see Figure 10-9. A UNIs-NNI ATM service from the base station to RNC is created. The service type is the N:1 VC switching. The source VPI/VCI is 32/33, and the sink VPI/VCI is 52/53. The correctness of the service should be verified. Figure 10-9 Connection diagram for ATM service connectivity test

Inloop PSN PE1 PE2

Inloop

Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback automatic disabling function to Disabled for the UNI interfaces accessing the tested ATM service on the PE1 and PE2 equipment. 1. Choose Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu to display the Automatic Disabling of NE Function dialog box.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

10-66

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

2. 3.

Select the PE1 and PE2 in the left-hand object tree and click . The selected NEs are displayed in Automatic Disabling of NE Function on the right. Set Auto Disabling to Disabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback of the PE1 and PE2.
NOTE

When the automatic disabling function of SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on the NE is set to Disabled, the loopback automatic disabling function for all of the SDH optical interfaces (unavailable on the OptiX PTN 912), PDH electrical interfaces and ATM IMA groups on the NE is disabled.

Step 2 Set inloop for the UNI interface (to be tested) accessing the ATM service on PE1 by using the T2000.
l

The UNI interface accessing the ATM service is IMA group. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. On the Main Topology, select and right-click the PE1 NE. In the shortcut menu, choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE, and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Select the ATM Interface Management tab and then select the IMA group carrying the tested ATM service. Double-click the Loopback of the IMA group, and then select Inloop in the shortcut menu. Click Apply. On the Main Topology, select and right-click the PE1 NE. In the shortcut menu, choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window. In the NE Explorer window, select the AD1 carrying the tested ATM service, and choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select the Advanced Attributes tab and then select the AD1 interface carrying the ATM service. Double-click the Loopback of AD1 interface, and then select Inloop in the shortcut menu. Click Apply.

The UNI interface accessing the ATM service is AD1 interface. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Step 3 Set inloop for the UNI interface (to be tested) accessing the ATM service on PE2 with reference to Step 2. Step 4 In the NE Explorer window, select the PE1 NE, and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Step 5 Select the Remote Loopback Test tab, and then select the tested ATM service. Step 6 Set the Segment End Attribute of the ATM service to Segment point or Endpoint.
NOTE

Segment End Attribute of ATM service specifies the type of the transmitted OAM cells during the LB test.
l l

If Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point, seg_LB cells is transmitted. If Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint, e-t-e_LB cells is transmitted.

Step 7 Set the Loopback Point NE of the tested ATM service to PE2 NE.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-67

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 8 Click Test to start LB test. Step 9 After the test is finished, check the Test Result of the tested ATM service. Normally, the Test Result should be Test succeeded. If not, handle the fault with reference to the OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Alarms and Performance Events Reference and OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Troubleshooting. Step 10 Release the inloop of the UNI interface accessing the ATM service on PE1 and PE2 with reference to Step 2. Step 11 Follow Step 2 - Step 10 to test the connectivity of all the other ATM services on PE1 and PE2. Step 12 Set Automatic Disabling to Enabled for SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback on PE1 and PE2 with reference to Step 1. Step 13 Test the connectivity of the ATM services on all the other NEs with reference to Step 1 - Step 12. ----End

10.7 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the ATM service configuration. Table 10-10 Descriptions of the parameters for Creating ATM Services Field Service ID Value Example: 5 Description Set the ID of the service, or set to automatically assigned the ID of the service. Set the name of the service. Select the switching type of the ATM service.
l

Service Name Connection Type

64 bytes PVP, PVC

PVP indicates that only the VPI values of the source and sink are exchanged. PVC indicates that both the VPI and VCI values of the source and sink are exchanged.

Customer Remarks NE

String String Example: NE3

Display the customer of the service. Indicate the description of the service. Display the source NE or sink NE of the service.
NOTE
l When configuring a UNIs-NNI service,

select different NEs as the source and sink.

l When configuring a UNI-UNI service,

select the same NE as the source and sink.

10-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Field Port Name Source Port Source VPI

Value Example: 1-MP1-1-MQ1 (Trunk1) String Example: NE3-1-MP1-1MQ1(Trunk1) 0-(2MaxVPIbits-1) For example, if the value of Max. VPI Bits is 8, the VPI value ranges from 0 to (28-1), that is, 0 to 255.

Description Display the source port or sink port of the service. Set the name of the ATM connection. Display the source port connected to the ATM. Set the VPI value of the source port.

Source VCI

32-(2MaxVCIbits-1 For example, if the value of Max. VCI Bits 7, the VCI value ranges from 32 to (27-1), that is 32 to 127.

Set the VCI value of the source port.

Sink Port Sink VPI

Example: NE3-1-MP1-1MQ1(Trunk1) 0-(2MaxVPIbits-1) Example: 25

Display the sink port connected to the ATM. Set the VPI value of the sink port.

Sink VCI

32-(2MaxVCIbits-1 Example: 40

Set the VCI value of the sink port.

Uplink ATM Policy Name (ID) Downlink ATM Policy Name (ID) Transit VPI Transit VCI

Example: Policy (NE2:12NE3:12) Example: Policy (NE2:12NE3:12) Example: 53 Example: 53

Select the QoS policy for the uplink ATM connection. For details, see ATM Policy Select the QoS policy for the downlink ATM connection. For details, see ATM Policy Set VPI at the network side. Set VCI at the network side.

Table 10-11 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Attributes Field PW ID Value Example: 5 Description Set the ID of the PW, or set to automatically allocate the ID of the service.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-69

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Signaling Type

Value Static, Dynamic

Description Set the means for creating a PW and distributing the PW label.
l

Dynamic: The LDP protocol is used to distribute the PW label. If you select Dynamic, Uplink Label and Downlink Label cannot be set. Static: The PW label is distributed manually.

Working Status Type

Example: Up Example: ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport, ATM one-to-one VCC

Display the working status of the PW. Set the PW type. The PW type corresponds to the service type. In the case of the VPC and VPC services, two encapsulation types are available, that is, 1:1 and N:1. Sets the PW encapsulation type. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to MPLS, the MPLS, IP, and GRE tunnels are supported; When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, only the IP tunnel is supported. Display the direction of the PW. Set the uplink label. When the TDM frame is encapsulated into the PW, labels are attached on the packet header. The uplink label indicates that the service enters the PW. The uplink label and downlink label are different. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the uplink label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535.

Encapsulation Type

MPLS, UDP

Direction Uplink Label/Source Port

Bidirectional 16 to 1048575

10-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Field Downlink Label/Sink Port

Value 16 to 1048575

Description Set the downlink label. When the TDM frame is encapsulated into the PW, labels are attached on the packet header. The downlink label indicates that the service exits the PW. The uplink label and downlink label are different. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the downlink label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535.

Tunnel Type Tunnel Name (ID)

MPLS Tunnel, IP Tunnel, GRE Tunnel Example: Uplink:Tunnel-10001 (10001),Downlink:Tunnel-100 02(10002) Nonuse, Must Use

Set the tunnel type. Select the tunnel that carries the PW. Select whether to use the control word. In an MPLS PSN network, the control word carries the packet information.

Control Word Use Policy

Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Max. Concatenated Cell Count Packet Loading Time (us) Direction

CW, None Ping, None

Set the type of the control channel. Set the verification of the VCCV. You can verify the connectivity of the PW. Set the maximum number of concatenation cells. Set the packet loading time. Display the direction of the PW whose bandwidth should be set, including the uplink direction and downlink direction. Enable or disable the bandwidth limit. Set the committed bandwidth of the PW. This parameter is not supported.

1 to 31 100 to 50000 Example: Uplink PW (NE2>NE3)

Bandwidth Enabled CIR (kbit/s) CBS (byte)

Enabled, Disabled Example: 100 -

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-71

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field PIR (kbit/s) PBS (byte) EXP

Value Example: 100 0-7, None

Description Set the peak bandwidth of the PW. This parameter is not supported. Set the priority flag of the PW. The priority ascends with the value. This parameter is used for priority adjustment. For details, refer to the related information of QoS parameter configuration. Display the NE which requires setting of the CoS mapping. Select the mapping relation between the ATM service level to the CoS.

NE ID (CoS Mapping Name)

Example: NE2 Example: 1(Default Atm CosMap)

Table 10-12 Descriptions of the parameters for ATM Service Management by NE Field Service ID Service Name Service Type Value Example: 5 64 bytes UNIs-NNI, UNI-UNI Description Set the ID of the service. Set the name of the service. Set the ATM service type.
l l

UNIs-NNI: multi-point service UNI-UNI: single-point service

Click C.142 Service Type (ATM Service) for more information. Active Connection Type Active Example: PVP, PVC Display the activation status of the service. Select the connection type of the ATM service.
l

PVP indicates that only the VPI values of the source and sink are exchanged. PVC indicates that both the VPI and VCI values of the source and sink are exchanged.

Click C.107 Connection Type for more information.

10-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Table 10-13 Descriptions of the parameters for ATM Connection Configuration by NE Field Connection Name Connection ID Source Board Source Port Source VPI Source VCI PW ID Sink Board Value Character string Example: 1 Example: Slot-Board Name Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Trunk No.) 0 to 4095 32 to 65535 Example: 5 Example: Slot-Board Name Description Display the name of the ATM connection. Display the ID of the ATM connection. Set the source board of the ATM service. Set the source port of the ATM service. Set the VPI value of the source port. Set the VCI value of the source port. Select an ID for the PW that carries the service. Set the sink board of the ATM service.
NOTE In the case of the UNIs-NNI service, the sink board need not be set. In the case of the NNI-NNI service, set the sink board, which should not be the source board.

Sink Port

Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Trunk No.)

Set the sink port of the ATM service.

NOTE In the case of the UNIs-NNI service, the sink board need not be set. In the case of the NNI-NNI service, set the sink board, which should not be the source board.

Sink VPI Sink VCI Uplink Policy

0 to 4095 32 to 65535 Example: 3(Synchronize)

Set the VPI value of the sink port. Set the VCI value of the sink port. Select the QoS policy for the upstream ATM connection. For details, see ATM Policy Click C.119 Uplink Policy for more information.

Down link Policy

Example: 3(Synchronize)

Select the QoS policy for the downstream ATM connection. For details, see ATM Policy Click C.137 Downlink Policy for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-73

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 10-14 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Configuration by NE Tab General Attributes Field PW ID Enable State PW Signaling Type Value Example: 5 Example: Enabled Static, Dynamic Description Sets the ID of the PW. Display the enable state. Sets the methods of creating a PW and distributing the PW label.
l

Dynamic: The LDP protocol is used to distribute the PW label. If you select Dynamic, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label cannot be set. Static: The PW label is distributed manually.

PW Type

ATM n to one VCC cell transport, ATM one-toone VCC Cell Mode, ATM n to one VPC cell transport, ATM one-toone VPC Cell Mode

Sets the PW encapsulation type. The PW type corresponds to the connection type. In the case of the PVP and PVC connections, two encapsulation types are available, that is, 1:1 and N: 1. Sets the direction of the PW. Click C.87 Direction for more information.

Direction

Bidirectional

PW Encapsulation Type

MPLS, UDP

Sets the PW encapsulation type. When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to MPLS, the MPLS, IP, and GRE tunnels are supported; When the PW Encapsulation Type is set to UDP, only the IP tunnel is supported.

10-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Tab

Field PW Ingress Label

Value 16 to 1048675

Description Sets the PW label attached on the packet header when the service is transmitted from the source to the sink, and encapsulated in the PW. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the ingress label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535. Sets the PW label attached on the packet header when the service is transmitted from the sink to the source, and encapsulated in the PW. When the PW encapsulation type is set to UDP, the value of the egress label of PW ranges from 49152 to 65535. Click C.31 PW Egress Label for more information.

PW Egress Label

16 to 1048675

Peer IP

Example: 1.1.1.2

Sets the IP address of the destination. Click C.83 Peer IP for more information.

Tunnel Type Tunnel

MPLS, IP, GRE Tunnel ID Example: 55

Sets the type of the tunnel. Selects the tunnel that carries the PW. Displays the local running status of PW after you click Query. Click C.52 Local Working Status for more information.

Local Working Status

Example: Common Fault

Remote Working Status

Example: Common Fault

Displays the remote running status of PW after you click Query. Click C.150 Remote Working Status for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-75

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Tab

Field Compositive Working Status

Value Up, Down

Description Displays the compositive running status of PW after you click Query. Click C.158 Compositive Working Status for more information.

QoS

PW ID Direction

Example: 5 Ingress, Egress

Sets the ID of the PW. Sets the direction of the PW.

l

Ingress: PW outgoing direction of the port Egress: PW incoming direction of the port

Bandwidth Limit CIR (kbit/s) CBS (byte) PIR (kbit/s)

Enabled, Disabled 64 to 10000000 64 to 10000000

Enables or disables the bandwidth limit. Sets the committed bandwidth of the PW. This parameter is not supported. Sets the peak bandwidth of the PW. Click C.90 PIR for more information.

PBS (byte) EXP Policy Query Actual Bandwidth

0 - 7, None Example: 2(Voice) Checked, Unchecked

This parameter is not supported. Sets the priority flag of the PW. Selects the QoS policy of the PW. When this parameter is selected, the actual effective bandwidth is queried. When this parameter is not selected, the configured bandwidth is queried. Sets the ID of the PW.

Advanced Attributes

PW ID

Example: 5

10-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Tab

Field Control Word

Value Must use, No use

Description Displays that the control word must be used. In an MPLS PSN network, the control word carries the packet information. Click C.104 Control Word (ATM Service) for more information.

Control Channel Type

CW, None

Sets the type of the control channel. Click C.103 Control Channel Type for more information.

VCCV Verification Mode

Ping, None

Sets the verification of the VCCV. You can verify the connectivity of the PW. Click C.42 VCCV Verification Mode for more information.

Max. Concatenated Cell Count

OptiX PTN 1900: 1 to 31

Sets the maximum number of concatenation cells. Click C.164 Max. Concatenated Cell Count for more information.

Packet Loading Time (us)

Example: 1000

Sets the packet loading time. Click C.50 Packet Loading Time (us) for more information.

Table 10-15 Descriptions of the parameters for CoS Mapping by NE Field PW ID CoS Mapping Value Example: 5 Example: 1 (DefaultAtmCosMap) Description Displays the ID of the PW. Selects the policy of mapping different ATM service classes to CoS priorities. In this way, different quality assurance is provided for different ATM services.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-77

10 Configuring an ATM Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 10-16 Descriptions of the parameters for CoS Mapping Field Mapping ID Value Example: 3 Description Displays the ID of the table of mapping the ATM service classes to the CoS priorities. Displays the name of the table of mapping the ATM service classes to the CoS priorities.

Name

Example: mapping_1

10-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

10 Configuring an ATM Service

Field Service Type

Value UBR, CBR, RT-VBR, NRTVBR

Description Displays the ATM service classes.

l

UBR is the ATM service with an unspecified bit rate. The UBR service is used in a non-real time manner, but no quality of service (QoS) assurance is available. Therefore, it is suitable for transmitting IP data packets. CBR is the ATM service with a constant bit rate. The CBR service applies to the connection that requires static bandwidth. In general, it supports real time services that require strict delay change (for example, the audio, imaging, and circuit emulation services). RT-VBR is the ATM service with a real time variable bit rate. The RTVBR service is used in a real time manner and has a strict restriction on the delay. It mainly supports the audio and video services. NRT-VBR is the ATM service with a non-real time variable bit rate. The NRT-VBR service is used in a burst and non-real time manner. It can ensure a very low ratio of cell loss but has no restriction on the delay.

CoS

Example: BE

Displays the CoS priority.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-79

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

11
About This Chapter

Configuring an E-Line Service

This section describes basic information on E-Line services, and uses an example to illustrate how to configure an E-Line service. 11.1 E-Line Service In the topology, the EPL service is a point-to-point service. The equipment transmits the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to a certain port at the user or network side, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. 11.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service The configuration flow of the E-Line service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane and configuring the E-Line service. 11.3 Operation Tasks for the E-Line Service Operation tasks for the E-Line service include creation of E-Line services and creation of VUNI groups. 11.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI E-Line Service This section uses a case to show the configuration of the UNI-UNI E-Line service, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning and configuration of the Ethernet service. 11.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports A case is provided here to show the configuration of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning, configuration and verification of the Ethernet service. 11.6 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the PW A case is provided here to show the configuration of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning, configuration and verification of the Ethernet service. 11.7 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link The configuration case illustrates how to configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link. You can understand the configuration further by viewing the configuration flow

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

diagram. The configuration case covers the service planning, service configuration and verification of the E-Line service. 11.8 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration After the E-Line service is configured, the correctness of service configuration should be verified. The Ethernet OAM is used to verify the correctness of Ethernet service configuration. 11.9 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the E-Line service configuration.

11-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

11.1 E-Line Service

In the topology, the EPL service is a point-to-point service. The equipment transmits the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to a certain port at the user or network side, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. According to the service transmission mode, the E-Line service can be classified into the following types:
l l l l

UNI-UNI E-Line service UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link

UNI-UNI E-Line Service

Figure 11-1 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-UNI E-Line service. In City 1, Company A and Company B, connected to the PTN equipment, need communication between each other. The communication requirement can be met by creating a UNI-UNI E-Line service. In this case, the equipment equals a Layer 2 switch, which only exchanges data of Company A and Company B. In the uplink direction of the user side at the two ends, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic classification. Figure 11-1 UNI-UNI E-Line service
PE UNI
PE A Company

PE Package Switching Network

B Company City1

UNI PE

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports

Figure 11-2 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports. In City 1 and City 2, Company A has branches, which need communication. The communication requirement can be met by creating a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-3

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

In this case, each branch of Company A can exclusively use the UNI. Each physical port involved in the E-Line service network can be exclusively used by the E-Line service. In City 1, if small branches in Company A need service isolation, services at the same UNI can be differentiated through "port + VLANs". For a single station, in the uplink direction of the user side, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic classification. Figure 11-2 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports

Package Switching Network

A Company A Company

City1 UNI NNI NNI UNI

City2

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW

Figure 11-3 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. In City 1 and City 2, Company A and Company B have branches. Communication between branches of the same company is needed, but services between the two companies need to be isolated. In this case, the communication between branches of Company A and Company B can be realized by creating a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. Services between the two companies are isolated because different services are carried by different PWs. Hence, the company service accessed at the user side is encapsulated into a PW, and then is carried by the Tunnel. Different E-Line services of different companies are carried by different PWs, and then are transmitted to the same NNI. As a result, the number of NNIs is saved, and the bandwidth utilization is increased. In the uplink direction of the user side, the hierarchical QoS can be performed for data packets. Figure 11-3 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW

NE 1
A Company

Package Switching Network

NE2

A Company

B Company B Company

City1

UNI

NNI

NNI

UNI

City2

Tunnel PW

11-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a QinQ Link

In the case of the QinQ link carrying, the packets with the C-VLAN in the user-side network are added with an S-VLAN header of the transport network. The packets then travel through the transport network with two VLANs. In this way, a simple L2-VPN tunnel is provided for the user. Figure 11-4 shows the networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link. Both Company A and Company B have branches in City 1 and City 2. Branches of each company need to communicate with each other. The traffic from the two companies must be isolated. The internal VLANs of Company A range from 1 to 100 and the internal VLANs of Company B range from 1 to 200. In this case, you can configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link to meet the communication requirements. As different services are carried by QinQ links of different values, traffic of different companies is isolated and the VLAN resources of the packet switch network (PSN) are also saved. In this case, different packets accessed at the user side from different companies are added with different VLANs, and then carried by the same link at the network side. As the E-Line services of different companies are added with one VLAN and transported to the same port, the network-side port resources are saved and the bandwidth utilization is increased. Also as only a small number of VLANs in the PSN are used, the VLAN resources of the network are saved. To realize the QoS for the service carried by a QinQ link, configure the QinQ policy. Figure 11-4 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a QinQ link
The internal network of A Company VLAN = 1-100 A VLAN tag (VLAN = 30) is added to the packet of A Company NE 1 Packet Switching Network NE2 The internal network of A Company VLAN = 1-100

A Company

City1

B Company

The internal network of B Company A VLAN tag (VLAN = 40) VLAN = 1-200 is added to the packet of B Company

A Company

City2

B Company

QinQ Link

The internal network of B Company VLAN = 1-200

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11.2 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Service

The configuration flow of the E-Line service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane and configuring the E-Line service.

UNI-UNI E-Line service

The complete process of configuring a UNI-UNI E-Line service is shown in Figure 11-5. Figure 11-5 Configuration flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line service
Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces

Configuring UNI-UNI ELine Service

Creating a V-UNI Group End

Table 11-1 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service.

11-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Task 3. Configure the user-side Interface 4. Configure the UNI-UNI E-Line Service 5. Creating a VUNI Group

Remarks The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB.

To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service, you need to specify the service ID, service name and service VLan. Set parameters such as the peak bandwidth, maximum burst size, and member ports of the V-UNI group. The V-UNI group can realize the bandwidth sharing and restriction of multiple Ethernet services.

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is shown in Figure 11-6. Figure 11-6 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports
Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces Configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports Configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports Creating a V-UNI Group End

(Source NE)

(Sink NE)

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-7

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 11-2 Tasks for configuring the UNI-UNI E-Line service carried by a port Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the Interface 4. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line Service 5. Creating a VUNI Group Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB. To configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service, you need to specify the service ID, service name and service VLan. Set parameters such as the peak bandwidth, maximum burst size, and member ports of the V-UNI group. The V-UNI group can realize the bandwidth sharing and restriction of multiple Ethernet services.

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by PWs

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs is shown in Figure 11-7.

11-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Figure 11-7 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs

Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the LSR ID

Configuring the networkside Interfaces Configuring the Control Plane

Configuring a Tunnel

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring the user-side Interfaces

Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the PW Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the PW Creating a V-UNI Group End

(Source NE)

(Sink NE)

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-9

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 11-3 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the LSR ID 3. Configure the network-side interface 4. Configure the control plane Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. Configure the LSR ID of the NE and start of global label space. Set the general attributes and Layer 3 attributes (tunnel enable status and IP address) for interfaces to carry the tunnel carrying. Set the protocol parameters related to the control plane to create the tunnel.
l

To create a static MPLS tunnel to transmit the E-Line service, the parameters related to the control plane need not be set. To create a dynamic MPLS tunnel to transmit the E-Line service, you need to set the following protocol parameters: 1. Set the IGP-ISIS protocol parameters. 2. Set the MPLS-RSVP protocol parameters. To create a dynamic PW to transmit the service, you need to set the parameters related to the MPLS-LDP protocol and the IGP-ISIS protocol.

To create an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel to transmit the E-Line service, you need to Configuring Static Routes.

5. Configure the Tunnel

A tunnel transmits the service.

l

If an static MPLS tunnel is required, configure an MPLS tunnel in the per-NE or per-trail mode. Specify the tunnel ID, set signaling type to static, name the service, and specify the ingress node, egress node, and transit node. If a dynamic MPLS Tunnel is required, name the service, set signaling type to dynamic, and specify the source node and sink node for the tunnel. If an IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel is required, select the source board, source port, and IP address of the sink port.

6. Configure the QoS Policy 7. Configure the user-side Interface 8. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service

The QoS policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB.

1. Create an E-Line service: Specify the service ID, name the service, and set service VLan. 2. Configure a PW: Set the PW type, label, and tunnel type. 3. Configure QoS: Set the QoS of UNI and PW.

11-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Task 6. Creating a VUNI Group

Remarks Set parameters such as the peak bandwidth, maximum burst size, and member ports of the V-UNI group. The V-UNI group can realize the bandwidth sharing and restriction of multiple Ethernet services.

UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by QinQ Link

The complete process of configuring a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link is shown in Figure 11-8. Figure 11-8 UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link
Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces Configuring QinQ Link Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by QinQ Link Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by QinQ Link Creating a V-UNI Group End

(Source NE)

(Sink NE)

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-11

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 11-4 Tasks for configuring the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by QinQ Link Task 1. Creating Network 2. Configure the QoS Policy 3. Configure the Interface 4. Configure QinQ Link Remarks To create a network, you need to create NEs, configure NE data, create fibers, and configure the clock. The E-Line policy is used for traffic management of the E-Line service. The Ethernet interface accesses services from NodeB. Create the QinQ link, and set the ID, board, port, S-Vlan, and QoS information of the QinQ link. The QinQ link encapsulates multiple VLAN packets to a VLAN on the network side for transmission. This saves the VLAN resources on the network. 5. Configure the UNI-NNI E-Line service 6. Creating a VUNI Group Set the service ID, name, VLAN, and QinQ link ID.

Set parameters such as the peak bandwidth, maximum burst size, and member ports of the V-UNI group. The V-UNI group can realize the bandwidth sharing and restriction of multiple Ethernet services.

11.3 Operation Tasks for the E-Line Service

Operation tasks for the E-Line service include creation of E-Line services and creation of VUNI groups. 11.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side. 11.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one port at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. In this way, this port is exclusively used. 11.3.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one PW at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. For such a application, create a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW. 11.3.4 Creating a QinQ Link The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side.
11-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

11.3.5 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. 11.3.6 Creating a V-UNI Group The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

11.3.1 Creating a UNI-UNI E-Line Service

A UNI-UNI E-Line service indicates that users can be interconnected through equipment. The Ethernet data packets do not pass the network side, but are transparently transmitted at the user side.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For details, see Enabling the Port DCN.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the UNI tab and click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.For details on the parameters for UNI ports of E-Line service, see Table 11-19.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-13

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. For Direction, select UNI-UNI. For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".

Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.For details on the parameters for QoS of E-Line service, see Table 11-21.
NOTE

If you select Enabled for Bandwidth Limit, you can set CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy in Policy.

Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Step 7 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and MEP Point tab to set OAM-related parameters.For details on the parameters for maintenance association of E-Line service, see Table 12-13.For details on the parameters for MEP point of E-Line service, see Table 12-14.
NOTE

Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.

----End

11.3.2 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a Port

The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one port at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. In this way, this port is exclusively used.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For details, see Enabling the Port DCN.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the UNI tab and click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.

11-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.For details on the parameters for the E-Line service, see Table 11-19.
NOTE

l l l l

When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. For Direction, select UNI-NNI. For Bearer Type, select Port. For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".

Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.For details on the parameters for QoS of the E-Line service, see Table 11-21.
NOTE

If you select Enabled for Bandwidth Limit, you can set CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s). You can also select the QoS policy in Policy.

Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Step 7 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and MEP Point tab to set OAM-related parameters.For details on the parameters for maintenance association of the E-Line service, see Table 12-13.For details on the parameters for MEP point of the E-Line service, see Table 12-14.
NOTE

Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.

----End

11.3.3 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by a PW

The service is accessed at the user side, and transported to one PW at the network side for carrying. In this way, user data can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner. For such a application, create a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a PW.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-15

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel that carries PWs. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port at the UNI side. For details, see Enabling the Port DCN.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from Function Tree. Step 2 Click the UNI tab and click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set parameters in the dialog box.For details on the parameters for UNI port of the E-Line service, see Table 12-5.
NOTE

l l l l

When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. For Direction, select UNI-NNI. For Bearer Type, select PW. For VLANs, you can set several VLANs. Separate consecutive VLANs with "-", and inconsecutive VLANs with ",". For example, "1,3,5,8-10".

Step 4 Click Configure PW. The Configure PW dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, set PWrelated parameters.For details on the parameters for PW of the E-Line service, see Table 12-7.

11-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

NOTE

For PW ID, select the PW ID set in Step 3.

Step 5 Click OK and close the Configure PW dialog box. Step 6 Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 7 In the UNItab, set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for the ingress direction. Step 8 Click the PW tab. Set EXP in the ingress direction and LSP Mode in the egress direction. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.For details on the parameters for QoS of the E-Line service, see Table 11-21.
NOTE

If you select Enabled for Bandwidth Limit, you can set CIR (kbit/s) and PIR (kbit/s) for the PW. You can also select the QoS policy in Policy.

Step 9 Click OK to finish the creation. Step 10 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and MEP Point tab to set OAM-related parameters.For details on the parameters for maintenance association of the E-Line service, see Table 12-13.For details on the parameters for MEP point of the E-Line service, see Table 12-14.
NOTE

Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.

----End

11.3.4 Creating a QinQ Link

The QinQ link indicates that a VLAN is added on the accessed packets by using the QinQ encapsulation mode. In this way, multiple VLAN packets from the user-side network are
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-17

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

encapsulated into a VLAN in the transport network for transport. The VLAN resources in the transport network are saved. Both the E-Line service and E-LAN service can be carried by the QinQ link at the network side.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The Layer 2 attributes of the port on the QinQ link must be set and the encapsulation mode must be the QinQ mode. If the QoS parameters of the QinQ link need be configured, the QinQ policy must be configured first.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New. The New QinQ Link window is displayed. Step 3 Click the General Attributes tab. Set QinQ Link ID, Board, Port and S-Vlan ID. Step 4 Click the QoS tab to set the QoS-related parameters.
NOTE

If Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, you can set CIR (kbit/s) and PIR (kbit/s) for the QinQ Link. You can also select a QinQ policy in Policy. Before selecting a policy, create a policy.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

11.3.5 Creating a UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link

The services accessed on the user side are carried by the QinQ link on the network side. Multiple VLANs of the user network are encapsulated in the QinQ mode into one VLAN in the transport network. In this way, the VLAN resources in the transport network are saved.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. The QinQ link must be created for the network-side ports.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the UNI tab and then click New. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set each parameter in the dialog box.
11-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

NOTE

l l l l

When BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted, you cannot set MTU(byte) and VLANs. The transparently transmitted service does not support configuring the alarm performance, OAM and QoS. Set Direction to UNI-NNI. Set Bearer Type to QinQ Link. Select a created QinQ link in QinQ Link ID.

Step 4 Optional: Click Configure QoS. The Configure QoS dialog box displayed. Step 5 Optional: Click the UNI tab in the Configure QoS dialog box. Set Policy, Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color for ports. Click OK. The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.For details on the parameters for QoS of E-Line service, see Table 11-21. Step 6 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 7 Click the QoS tab and click the QinQ Link tab. Step 8 Select the QinQ policy for the ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE

Before selecting the policy, the policy should be created. If Bandwidth Limit is set to enabled, CIR (kbit/ s) and Peak Bandwidth (kbit/s) can be set.

Step 9 Click Close, ----End

11.3.6 Creating a V-UNI Group

The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of multiple Ethernet services.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-19

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The PIR value of the V-UNI group should be set to a value that is higher than or equal to the total CIR value of the V-UNI members.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer . Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > V-UNI Group from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the NEW V-UNI Group window. Step 3 Set V-UNI Group ID, V-UNI Group Type, PIR(kbit/s) and PBS(byte). For details on the parameters for V-UNI group, seeTable 11-18.

Step 4 Select the interface to be added in Selecting Interface list. Click the Selected Interface list.
NOTE

to add the port to

The interfaces on the same interface board can be configured into the same V-UNI group. The former eight interfaces on the EG16 can be configured into the same V-UNI group, and the latter eight interfaces can be configured into the same V-UNI group.

Step 5 Click OK to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates the operation success. Then, click Close. ----End
11-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

11.4 Configuration Case of the UNI-UNI E-Line Service

This section uses a case to show the configuration of the UNI-UNI E-Line service, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning and configuration of the Ethernet service. 11.4.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram for the service between Company A and Company B. 11.4.2 Service Planning The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service are available between Company A and Company B. Hence, an E-Line service should be created. 11.4.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at an NE To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service is to configure the E-Line service at an NE. This section describes how to configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service.

11.4.1 Networking Diagram

This section describes the networking diagram for the service between Company A and Company B.

Requirement and Networking Diagram

As shown in Figure 11-9, in City 1, Company A and Company B need communication between each other. The switches of the two companies are connected to the local OptiX PTN 3900. The switches of Company A and Company B support VLAN. The service available between Company A and Company B include the voice service, video service, and common Internet access service. The voice service and video service use the fixed bandwidth, and the common Internet access service can use all the bandwidth at a burst. Table 11-5 lists the service requirement. Figure 11-9 Networking diagram for the UNI-UNI E-Line service
UNI:1-EG16-19ETFC-1

A Company

Packet Switching Network

B Company City1

UNI:1-EG16-19ETFC-2

PTN

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-21

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 11-5 Requirement of the E-Line service Service Type Voice service (VLAN=100) Video service (VLAN=200) Common Internet access service (VLAN=300) Total bandwidth Requirement Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10 Mbit/s Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40 Mbit/s CIR=10 Mbit/s, PIR=50 Mbit/s 80 Mbit/s

11.4.2 Service Planning

The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service are available between Company A and Company B. Hence, an E-Line service should be created. The three types of services should be differentiated through VLAN labels. In addition, different services use different QoS processing. Table 11-6 lists the configuration parameters of NE1. Table 11-6 Configuration parameters of NE1 NE Interface 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) NE1 Interface Attribute Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware

Table 11-7 lists the configuration parameters of QoS. Table 11-7 Configuration parameters of QoS Service Type Policy ID Traffic Classifi cation ID 1 2 Bandwi dth Limit Enabled Enabled CIR (kbit/s) PIR (kbit/ s) Coloration Mode

Voice service Video service

1 1

10000 40000

10000 40000

Color Blindness Color Blindness

11-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Service Type

Policy ID

Traffic Classifi cation ID 3

Bandwi dth Limit Enabled

CIR (kbit/s)

PIR (kbit/ s)

Coloration Mode

Ordinary Internet access service

10000

50000

Color Blindness

Table 11-8 lists the planning of the Ethernet service. Table 11-8 Planning of the UNI-UNI E-Line service Field Service ID Value 1 Description The service ID, ranges from 1 to 65535, can be manually input. The service created is a UNIUNI Ethernet service. 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) is connected to Company A, and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) is connected to Company B. The VLAN value of the voice service is 100; the VLAN value of the video service is 200; the VLAN value of the common Internet access service is 300. BPDU, used to transport the protocol information of the MSTP, is a bridge protocol data unit. Normally, set to Not Transparently Transmitted. MTU is the maximum transport unit. -

Service Direction UNI

UNI-UNI 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and -2 (Port-2)

VLANs

100, 200, 300

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted

MTU(byte) QoS Policy for Voice Service QoS Policy for Video Service QoS Policy for Common Internet Access Service

1526 Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 10000 kbit/s Fixed bandwidth, CIR=PIR, 40000 kbit/s CIR=10000 kbit/s, PIR=50000 kbit/s

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-23

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11.4.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at an NE

To configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service is to configure the E-Line service at an NE. This section describes how to configure the UNI-UNI E-Line service.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the QoS policy 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose > > Policy Management from the Function Tree. Configuration > QoS Management > QoS Management. Select CAR Policy tab, and click New. Set the parameters such as Policy ID, CIR(kbit/ s), PIR(kbit/s) in the Create CAR Policy dialog box displayed. Click OK. Configure three CAR policies separately. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Policy 1

Policy: 1 Policy Name: voice CIR(kbit/s): 10000 (Indicates the ensured bandwidth of the queue.) PIR(kbit/s): 10000 (Indicates the peak traffic rate.) CBS(byte): 16000 (Indicates the committed burst size. When the bandwidth is insufficient, certain packets cannot enter the queue for forwarding in time. In this case, a buffer, where these packets are stored, is required. Then, after the bandwidth is sufficient, these packets are forwarded. Hence, the CBS indicates the ensured size of the buffer space.) PBS(byte): 16000 (Indicates the peak burst size.) Coloration Mode: Color Blindness Policy: 2 Policy Name: video CIR(kbit/s): 40000 PIR(kbit/s): 40000 CBS(byte): 16000 PBS(byte): 16000 Coloration Mode: Color Blindness Policy: 3 Policy Name: data CIR(kbit/s): 10000 PIR(kbit/s): 50000
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Policy 2

Policy 3

11-24

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

CBS(byte): 16000 PBS(byte): 16000 Coloration Mode: Color Blindness

CoS Configuration: Set the CoS according to networking planning. In this example, the default value is used. 3. Select V-UNI Ingress Policy tab, and click New. Set the policy parameters in the Create V-UNI Ingress Policy dialog box displayed. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Policy ID: 1 Policy Name: E-Line

4.

Click New in Traffic Classification Configuration. Set the parameters in Create Traffic Classification dialog box displayed. Click Add to add the math rules, and then click OK. Create three different traffic classification polices. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Voice service

Traffic Classification ID: 1 Match Type: CVlan ID (The tag carried by the transmitted service packets is the CVlan tag. In this case, the mapping type is CVlan ID.) Match Value: 100 (The VLAN ID of the voice service is 100.) Wildcard: 0 (The number of digits of the wildcard is consistent with the number of digits of the match value. After the wildcard is converted to the binary format, digit 0 in the match value should be matched, but digit 1 need not be considered. When the wildcard is set to all "0"s, it indicates that the packets should strictly match the match value.) CoS: EF (The voice service is the real-time service. In this case, the CoS is set to EF to ensure the service quality.) CAR Policy: 1 Traffic Classification ID: 2 Match Type: CVlan ID Match Value: 200 Wildcard: 0 CoS: AF4 (The video service has high requirement for delay. In this case, the CoS is set to AF4.) CAR Policy: 2 Traffic Classification ID: 3 Match Type: CVlan ID Match Value: 300 Wildcard: 0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-25

Video service

Data service

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

CoS: BE (The common Internet access service is not the real-time service. In this case, the CoS is set to BE, and thus the common Internet access service is transmitted as possible.) CAR Policy: 3

Step 2 Configure interfaces: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2). Set the parameters such as Port Mode, Encapsulation Type as required, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame: 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets.)

3.

In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2). Set the TAG to Tag Aware. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Tag: Tag Aware

If a port is set to Tag Aware, this port can transparently transmits the data packet with the VLAN ID (Tag). If the data packet does not contain the VLAN ID (Untag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Access, the port adds the default VLAN ID to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal contains the VLAN ID (Tag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Hybrid, the port adds the default VLAN ID (Untag) to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal packet contains the VLAN ID (Tag), the packet is transparently transmitted.

Step 3 Create a UNI-UNI service. 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service. Click New. Set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Port, VLANs in the New E-Line Service dialog box displayed. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: CompanyA-CompanyB Direction: UNI-UNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11-26

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) (Company A is connected to 19-ETFC-1(Port-1).) VLANs: 100, 200, 300 (The voice service, video service, and common Internet access service between Company A and Company B are differentiated through different VLAN values carried by the services. This port can transmit only the services whose VLAN values are 100, 200, and 300. Otherwise, the services are discarded. Port: 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) (Company B is connected to 19-ETFC-2(Port-2).) VLANs: 100, 200, 300

l l

3.

Click Configure QoS, set the parameters for the policy in the Configure QoS dialog box displayed. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Policy: 1

----End

11.5 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by Ports

A case is provided here to show the configuration of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning, configuration and verification of the Ethernet service. 11.5.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking diagram for the service of the Company A between City 1 and City 2. 11.5.2 Service Planning To transport the service between city 1 and city 2, an E-Line service must be created. 11.5.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at the Source NE To configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is to configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE. This section describes how to configure the E-Line service at the source NE.

11.5.1 Networking Diagram

This section describes the networking diagram for the service of the Company A between City 1 and City 2.

Requirement and Networking Diagram

As shown in Figure 11-10, Company A has departments in City 1 and City 2, which need communicate with each other. The service is data service. The user requires exclusive usage of the UNI port. Each physical port that the private line passes through is exclusively occupied by this private line. This example considers the direct communication of two cities as an example. All packets transported by the switch at the user egress carry VLANs, whose value is 100.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-27

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 11-10 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports
UNI:1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 Packet Switching Network
A Company A Company

UNI:1-EG16-19-ETFC-1

NE 1

NE 2

City1 NNI:1-EG16-19-ETFC-2 NNI:1-EG16-19-ETFC-2

City2

11.5.2 Service Planning

To transport the service between city 1 and city 2, an E-Line service must be created. Table 11-9 lists the configuration parameters of NEs. Table 11-9 Configuration parameters of NEs NE Interface 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) Interface Attribute Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q NE1 Tag: Tag Aware 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Tag: Tag Aware 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q NE2 Tag: Tag Aware 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Tag: Tag Aware

Since the service is data service, and the ports are exclusively used, the QoS is not required. Table 11-10 lists details on the service planning. Table 11-10 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports Parameter Service ID Service Name
11-28

NE 1 1 E-Line-1

NE 2 1 E-Line-1
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Parameter Direction UNI NNI Bearer Type VLANs BPDU MTU(byte)

NE 1 UNI-NNI 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1(Port-1) 1-EG16-19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port 100 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526

NE 2 UNI-NNI 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1(Port-1) 1-EG16-19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port 100 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526

11.5.3 Configuring the E-Line Service at the Source NE

To configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is to configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE. This section describes how to configure the E-Line service at the source NE.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For details, see Enabling the Port DCN.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2). Set the parameters such as Port Mode, Encapsulation Type as required, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame: 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets.)

3.

In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2). Set the TAG to Tag Aware. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-29

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Tag: Tag Aware

If a port is set to Tag Aware, this port can transparently transmits the data packet with the VLAN ID (Tag). If the data packet does not contain the VLAN ID (Untag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Access, the port adds the default VLAN ID to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal contains the VLAN ID (Tag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Hybrid, the port adds the default VLAN ID (Untag) to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal packet contains the VLAN ID (Tag), the packet is transparently transmitted.

4.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2. Then, configure the interface attributes by following Step 1.1 to Step 1.3.

Step 2 Configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service. 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service. Click New. Set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Port, VLANs in the New E-Line Service dialog box displayed. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-Line-1 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) (Company A in City 1 is connected to 19-ETFC-1(Port-1).) VLANs: 100 Bear Type: Port Port: 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) (19-ETFC-2(Port-2) transmits the service to NE2.)

3.

In the NE Explorer, select NE2. Then, configure the E-Line service by following to . The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-Line-1 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) (Company A in City 2 is connected to 19-ETFC-1(Port-1).) VLANs: 100 Bear Type: Port Port: 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) (19-ETFC-2(Port-2) transmits the service to NE1.)

----End
11-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

11.6 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the PW

A case is provided here to show the configuration of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning, configuration and verification of the Ethernet service. 11.6.1 Case Description The case description covers the requirement, networking diagram and service planning. 11.6.2 Service Planning The Ethernet services between branches of a company are carried by a PW. When planning such an Ethernet service, you need to plan the NE information, tunnel information, and service information. 11.6.3 Configuring the E-Line Service of the NE To configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is to configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE. This section describes how to configure the E-Line service.

11.6.1 Case Description

The case description covers the requirement, networking diagram and service planning. As shown in Figure 11-11, Company A and Company B have departments in City 1 and City 2, which need to communicate with each other respectively. The communication of Company A should be isolated from that of Company B. NE1 is connected to Company A and Company B in City 1. NE3 is connected to Company A and Company B in City 2. NE1 accesses the services from City 1 and transmits the services to NE2. Then, NE2 transparently transmits the services to NE3. Finally, NE3 transmits the services to City 2. Similarly, NE3 accesses the services from City 2 and transmits the services to NE2. Then, NE2 transparently transmits the services to NE1. Finally, NE1 transmits the services to City 1. For such an application, the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW should be created. Two PWs carry the services of Company A and Company B respectively. The two PWs share bandwidth of one tunnel. The service between departments of Company A is the ordinary Internet access service (CIR = 10 Mbit/s, PIR = 30 Mbit/s). The service between departments of Company B is the data service (CIR = 30 Mbit/s, PIR = 50 Mbit/s).

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-31

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 11-11 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW

NE4 NE5 Access layer

20-EFF8-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.2 3-EFF8-1(Port-1) 10.0.0.1 3-EFF8-2(Port-2)

10GE ring on convergence layer

5-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.2

NE3
20-EFF8-2(Port-2)

NE1
3-EFF8-1(Port-1)

NE2

5-EX2-1(Port-1) 10.0.1.1 20-EFF8-1(Port-1)

Company B Company A Company B Company A

11.6.2 Service Planning

The Ethernet services between branches of a company are carried by a PW. When planning such an Ethernet service, you need to plan the NE information, tunnel information, and service information. Table 11-11 lists the configuration parameters of NEs. Table 11-11 Configuration parameters of NEs NE LSR ID Port 3-EFF8-1(Port-1) Port Attribute Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware NE1 1.0.0.1 3-EFF8-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware 3-EFF8-3(Port-3) 20-EFF8-1(Port-1) NE2 1.0.0.2 5-EX2-1(Port-1) 20-EFF8-1(Port-1) Port Mode: Layer 3 Port Mode: Layer 3 Port Mode: Layer 3 Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware NE3 1.0.0.3 20-EFF8-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Tag: Tag Aware 5-EX2-1(Port-1) Port Mode: Layer 3 10.0.1.2 255.255.255. 252 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.1.1 255.255.255. 252 255.255.255. 252 255.255.255. 252 Port IP Address IP Mask -

11-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Table 11-12 lists details on the planning of the tunnel carrying the PW. Table 11-12 Planning of the tunnel carrying the PW Parameter Tunnel ID Name Signal Type Scheduling Type Bandwidth (kbit/s) Source Node Sink Node Route Constraint Port IP Address Positive Tunnel 1 Tunnel-0001(Positive) Dynamic E-LSP 80 Mbit/s NE1 NE3 IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 20-EFF8-1: 10.0.0.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE3: 5-EX2-1: 10.0.1.2 Reverse Tunnel 2 Tunnel-0002(Reverse) Dynamic E-LSP 80 Mbit/s NE3 NE1 IP addresses of ingress port of NE2: 5-EX2-1: 10.1.2.2 IP addresses of ingress port of NE1: 3-EFF8-2: 10.1.1.2

Table 11-13 lists details on the planning of the E-Line service. Table 11-13 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the PW Parameter Service ID Service Name Direction UNI VLANs Bearer Type PW ID BPDU MTU(byte) Company A 1 E-Line-1 UNI-NNI 3-EFF8-1(Port-1) 100 PW 35 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526 Company B 2 E-Line-2 UNI-NNI 3-EFF8-2(Port-2) 200 PW 45 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526

Table 11-14 lists details on the planning of the PW.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-33

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 11-14 Planning of the PW Parameter PW Signaling Type PW Type Direction PW Ingress Label PW Egress Label Peer IP Tunnel Bandwidth Limit CIR(kbit/s) PIR(kbit/s) PW of Company A Static Ethernet Bidirectional 20 20 1.0.0.3 1(E-Line) Enabled 10000 30000 PW of Company B Static Ethernet Bidirectional 30 30 1.0.0.1 1(E-Line) Enabled 30000 50000

11.6.3 Configuring the E-Line Service of the NE

To configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by ports is to configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE. This section describes how to configure the E-Line service.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Procedure
Step 1 Set LSR IDs. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE1 and chooseConfiguration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. Set LSR ID, Start of Global Label Space and Start of Multicast Label Space. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

LSR ID: 1.0.0.1 (The LSR ID must be unique in the entire network.) Start of Global Label Space: 0 (The minimum values of egress and ingress labels of the unicast tunnel.)

3.

Display the NE Explorer of NE2 and NE3 separately and perform the preceding two steps to set the parameters such as LSR ID. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

NE2 LSR ID: 1.0.0.2 NE3 LSR ID: 1.0.0.3

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11-34

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Step 2 Configure interfaces. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 3-EFF8-1(Port-1) 3-EF8F-2(Port-2) and 3EFF8-3(Port-3). Set the parameters such as Port Mode, Working Mode, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port: 3-EFF8-1(Port-1), 3-EFF8-2(Port-2)

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 (User-side interface, Company A is connected to 3-EFF8-1 (Port-1), and Company B is connected to 3-EFF8-2(Port-2).) Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame: 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets.) Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 (Network interface, the port carries a Tunnel.) Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620

Port: 3-EFF8-3(Port-3)

3.

Select the 3-EFF8-3(Port-3) in the Layer 3 Attributes tab. Right click the Enable Tunnel field and select Enabled. Right-click the Specify IP field and choose Manually. Then, set the parameters such as IP Address and IP Mask. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Enable Tunnel: Enabled TE Measurement: 10 (The link with a smaller TE measurement value is preferred for route selection of a tunnel. You can intervene in the route selection by adjusting the TE measurement of the link. The smaller the value of the TE measurement, the higher the priority of the link. ) Specify IP: Manually (Manually indicates that you can set the IP address of the port.) IP Address: 10.0.0.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

l l l

4.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, and NE3 separately. Perform Step 2.1 to Step 2.3 to set parameters of each related interface. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

NE2

General Attribute

Port: 20-EFF8-3(Port-3), 5-EX2-1(Port-1) Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-35

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Max Frame: 1620 Enable Tunnel: Enabled TE Measurement: 10 Specify IP: Manually 20-EFF8-3(Port-3) IP Address: 10.0.0.2 5-EX2-1(Port-1) IP Address: 10.0.1.1 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

Layer 3 Attribute

NE3

General Attribute

Port: 20-EFF8-1(Port-1), 20-EFF8-2(Port-2)

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620 Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 3 Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620

Port: 5-EX2-1(Port-1)

Layer 3 Attribute

Enable Tunnel: Enabled TE Measurement: 10 Specify IP: Manually IP Address: 10.0.1.2 IP Mask: 255.255.255.252

Step 3 Configure the control plane. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE1 and choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > IGP-ISIS Configuration from the Function Tree. Select 3-EFF8-3(Port-3) in the Port Configuration tab. Right click IS-IS Enable field, and select Enabled. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

IS-IS Enable: Enabled (After the IS-IS routing protocol is enabled, an MPLS LSP can be dynamically created and PW labels can also be distributed dynamically.) Link Level: level-1-2 LSP Retransmission Interval(s): 5 (In the case of a point-to-point link, if the local equipment fails to receive any response in a period after transmitting the LSP, the local equipment considers that the LSP is lost or discarded. To ensure the transmission reliability, the local equipment transmits the LSP again.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

l l

11-36

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Minimum LSP Transmission Interval (ms): 30

3.

Display the NE Explorer for NE2, and NE3 separately. Set the parameters related to the control plane by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2. Set the IS-IS parameters of NE2 and NE3 as the same as the IS-IS parameters of NE1.

Step 4 Creating MPLS Tunnels 1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Trail > Tunnel Creation. The Create Tunnel dialog box is displayed. Select Create Reverse Tunnel, and configure parameters for the positive tunnel and reverse tunnel in the General Attributes. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l

Tunnel ID: 1 (Positive), 2 (Reverse) Name: Tunnel-0001 (Positive), Tunnel-0002 (Reverse) Signal Type: Dynamic (If you set signal type to dynamic, the LDP distributes labels and the tunnel is a dynamic tunnel; if you set signal type to static, labels are manually added and the tunnel is a static tunnel.) Scheduling Type: E-LSP

E-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling priority and discard priority of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the E-LSP type, there can be a maximum of eight types of PWs. L-LSP indicates that the tunnel determines the scheduling policy of packets according to the MPLS labels and determines the discard policy of packets according to the EXP information. On one MPLS tunnel of the L-LSP type, there can be a maximum of one type of PWs. Currently, the OptiX PTN equipment does not support the L-LSP type.

l l

EXP:- (tunnel priority.) Bandwidth (kbit/s): 30000 (Set the bandwidth according to networking planning.)

3.

Click Next, and select Source Node and Sink Node. Click Add to add route restrictions. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l

Source Node: NE1 Sink Node: NE3 Positive Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.0.2, 10.0.1.2, Include Strict Reverse Route Constraint Port IP Address: 10.0.1.1, 10.0.0.1, Include Strict

4.

Click Next. Set the parameters such as Setup Priority and Hold Priority for the tunnel according to the planning. Then, click Next. Confirm the tunnel information and then click Finish. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Setup Priority: 7 (Setup priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel during creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case insufficiency of resources, the MPLS tunnel of a higher setup priority can preempt the bandwidth of other MPLS tunnels and thus can be created successfully.) Hold Priority: 0 (Hold priority is specified for an MPLS tunnel after creation. "0" indicates the highest priority. In the case of insufficiency of resources, the bandwidth for the MPLS tunnel of a higher hold priority is less likely to be preempted by other
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-37

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

tunnels. When creating a dynamic tunnel, make sure that the hold priority is higher or equal to the setup priority.)
l

Color(0x): 0 (Set the affinity attribute of a link. When the primary tunnel is faulty, the link with the same color is preferred during rerouting. When the affinity attribute of links is not required, adopt the default value.) Mask(0x): 0 (Set the number of bits of the mask. Match the number of bits of a mask with the link color. Select the route of a matching link color.) Tunnel Type: Primary Tunnel (You can set the tunnel type to primary tunnel or bypass tunnel. According to the planning, the tunnel is a primary tunnel in this case.)

Step 5 Configure two UNI-NNI E-Line service. 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service. Click New. Set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Port, VLANs in the New E-Line Service dialog box displayed. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-Line-1 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 3-EFF8-1(Port-1) (Company A is connected to 3-EFF8-1(Port-1).) VLANs: 100 Bearer Type: PW PW ID: 35

3.

Click Configure PW. Set the attributes of PW in Configure PW dialog box displayed, and click OK. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

General Attributes

PW ID: 35 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Encapsulation Type: MPLS PW Ingress Label: 20 PW Egress Label: 20 Peer IP: 1.0.0.3 Tunnel: 1

4.

Click Configure QoS. Set QoS attributes of the PW in Configure QoS dialog box displayed, and click OK. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

EXP: 4 (7 indicates the highest priority.)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11-38

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

LSP Mode: Uniform (The CoS of user packets should be recovered when the tunnel label is stripped.)

5.

Create the E-Line service of Company B at the source NE by following Step 5.1 to Step 5.4. For details of E-Line2 service, see Table 11-13. In the NE Explore select NE3, create the E-Line service from NE3 to NE1, by following Step 5.1 to Step 5.5.

6.

----End

11.7 Configuration Case of the UNI-NNI E-Line Service Carried by the QinQ Link
The configuration case illustrates how to configure a UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link. You can understand the configuration further by viewing the configuration flow diagram. The configuration case covers the service planning, service configuration and verification of the E-Line service. 11.7.1 Case Description This section describes the networking diagram for transmission of isolated services between companies. 11.7.2 Service Planning The Ethernet services between branches of a company are carried by the QinQ. When planning such an Ethernet service, you need to plan the NE information, QinQ information, and service information. 11.7.3 Configuring the E-Line Service Configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE to realize the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link.

11.7.1 Case Description

This section describes the networking diagram for transmission of isolated services between companies. As shown in Figure 11-12, both Company A and Company B have branches in City 1 and City 2. Branches of each company need to communicate with each other. The traffic from the two companies must be isolated. The internal VLANs of Company A range from 1 to 100 and the internal VLANs of Company B range from 1 to 200. To isolate the traffic of the two companies, different S-VLANs are added to packets from different companies at the network side. The branches of Company A require the common Internet access service (CIR = 10 Mbit/s, PIR = 30 Mbit/s). The branches of Company B require the data service (CIR = 30 Mbit/s, PIR = 50 Mbit/s).

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-39

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 11-12 Networking diagram for the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link
The internal network of Company A VLAN = 1-100 V-UNI for A Company : 19-ETFC-1 V-UNI for B Company : 19-ETFC-2 NNI : 1-EG16-1 A VLAN tag (VLAN = 30) is added to the packet of Company A The internal network of Company A VLAN = 1-100 NE2 City2
A Company

A Company

NE 1

City1 PSN
B Company

The internal network of Company B VLAN = 1-200 A VLAN tag (VLAN = 40) is added to the packet of Company B NNI : 1-EG16-1

City2

B Company

V-UNI for A Company : 19-ETFC-1 V-UNI for B Company : 19-ETFC-2

The internal network of Company B VLAN = 1-200

11.7.2 Service Planning

The Ethernet services between branches of a company are carried by the QinQ. When planning such an Ethernet service, you need to plan the NE information, QinQ information, and service information. Table 11-15 lists the configuration parameters of NEs. Table 11-15 Configuration parameters of NEs NE Interface 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) Interface Attribute Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q NE1 Tag: Tag Aware 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Tag: Tag Aware

11-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

NE

Interface 1-EG16-1(Port-1)

Interface Attribute Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: QinQ Tag: Tag Aware

19-ETFC-1(Port-1)

Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Tag: Tag Aware

19-ETFC-2(Port-2) NE2

Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Tag: Tag Aware

1-EG16-1(Port-1)

Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: QinQ Tag: Tag Aware

Table 11-16 lists the planning details on the QinQ link that carries the service. Table 11-16 Planning of the QinQ link carrying the service Parameter QinQ Link ID Board Port S-Vlan ID Enable Bandwidth CIR (kbit/s) PIR (kbit/s) Service of Company A 1 1-EG16 1(Port-1) 30 Enable 10000 30000 Service of Company B 2 1-EG16 1(Port-1) 40 Enable 30000 50000

Table 11-17 shows the planning details on the E-Line service. Table 11-17 Planning of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link Parameter Service ID Service Name Direction
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Company A 1 E-Line-1 UNI-NNI

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Company B 1 E-Line-2 UNI-NNI

11-41

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameter UNI VLANs Bearer Type QinQ Link ID BPDU MTU(byte)

Company A 19-ETFC-1 1-100 QinQ Link 1 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526

Company B 19-ETFC-2 1-200 QinQ Link 2 Not Transparently Transmitted 1526

11.7.3 Configuring the E-Line Service

Configure the E-Line service at the source NE and sink NE to realize the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by the QinQ link.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure interfaces: 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree to configure the network-side interface. In the General Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) and 1EG16-1(Port-1). Set the parameters such as Port Mode, Encapsulation Type as required, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2)

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation (Set the working modes of the local port and opposite port as the same.) Max Frame: 1620 (Set this parameter according to the length of data packets.) Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: QinQ Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Port: 1-EG16-1(Port-1)

11-42

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

3.

In the Layer 2 Attributes tab, select the 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2). Set the TAG to Tag Aware. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l l

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) Tag: Tag Aware

If a port is set to Tag Aware, this port can transparently transmits the data packet with the VLAN ID (Tag). If the data packet does not contain the VLAN ID (Untag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Access, the port adds the default VLAN ID to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal contains the VLAN ID (Tag), this packet is discarded. If the port is set to Hybrid, the port adds the default VLAN ID (Untag) to the signal packet without the VLAN ID (Untag). If the signal packet contains the VLAN ID (Tag), the packet is transparently transmitted.

4.

In the NE Explorer select NE2, set the parameters of 1-EG16-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) and 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) by following Step 1.1 to Step 1.3. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

General Attributes

Port: 1-EG16-1(Port-1)

Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: QinQ Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620 Enable Port: Enabled Port Mode: Layer 2 Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation Max Frame: 1620

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2)

Layer 2 Attributes

Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1), 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) TAG: Tag Aware

Step 2 Create QinQ Links. 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link. Click New. Set the parameters of the link from NE1 to NE2 in Create QinQ Link dialog box displayed, and click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

QinQ Link between branches of Company A

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-43

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

QinQ Link ID: 1 Board: 1-EG16 Port: 1-(Port-1) S-Vlan ID: 30 QinQ Link ID: 2 Board: 1-EG16 Port: 1-(Port-1) S-Vlan ID: 40

QinQ Link between branches of Company B

3.

In the NE Explorer select NE2. Create the link from NE2-NE1 by following the previous two steps. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

QinQ Link between branches of Company A

QinQ Link ID: 1 Board: 1-EG16 Port: 1-(Port-1) S-Vlan ID: 30 (Add an S-Vlan tag with ID of 30 for the services between branches of Company A so that the services of Company A are isolated from the services of Company B.) QinQ Link ID: 2 Board: 1-EG16 Port: 1-(Port-1) S-Vlan ID: 40 (Add an S-Vlan tag with ID of 40 for the services between branches of Company B so that the services of Company B are isolated from the services of Company A.)

QinQ Link between branches of Company B

Step 3 Create two UNI-NNI E-Line services. 1. 2. In the NE explorer, select NE1 and choose Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service. Click New. Set the parameters such as Service ID, Service Name, Port, VLANs in the New E-Line Service dialog box displayed. Click Apply. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Service between branches of Company A

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-Line-1 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) VLANs: 1-100 Bearer Type: QinQ Link
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11-44

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

QinQ Link ID: 1 Service ID: 2 Service Name: E-Line-2 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) VLANs: 1-200 Bearer Type: QinQ Link QinQ Link ID: 2

Service between branches of Company B

3.

In the NE Explore select NE2. Create an E-Line service from NE2 to NE1, by following Step 3.1 to Step 3.2. The configuration parameters are as follows:
l

Service between branches of Company A

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-Line-1 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-1(Port-1) VLANs: 1-100 Bearer Type: QinQ Link QinQ Link ID: 1 Service ID: 2 Service Name: E-Line-2 Direction: UNI-NNI BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Port: 19-ETFC-2(Port-2) VLANs: 1-200 Bearer Type: QinQ Link QinQ Link ID: 2

Service between branches of Company B

----End

11.8 Verifying the Correctness of Service Configuration

After the E-Line service is configured, the correctness of service configuration should be verified. The Ethernet OAM is used to verify the correctness of Ethernet service configuration.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-45

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Context
The connectivity of the UNI-UNI E-Line service need no OAM verification. By default, the configuration is regarded as correct. In the case of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by a port, the OAM verification method is similar to that of the UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs. The UNI-NNI E-Line service carried by PWs is taken as an example. As shown in Figure 11-13, to verify the correctness of service configuration, the Ethernet OAM should be configured. Figure 11-13 OAM of the E-Line service
MD MA

MEP A Company

NE 1

NE 2

MEP

A Company

MEP

MEP B Company

B Company

City2 MA

City1

Unicast Tunnel PW

MD: Maintenance Domain MA: Maintenance Association MEP: Maintenance End Point

As shown in the previous figure, E-Line services, which are carried and isolated by PWs, are available between branches of Company A and branches of Company B. To verify the configuration correctness of the two E-Line services, the Ethernet OAM should be configured. The verification of the E-Line service of Company A is taken as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, select NE1 to create the maintenance domain. For the creation method, see Creating an MD. The parameters of the maintenance domain are as follows:
l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Domain Level: 4

Step 2 On the T2000, select NE2 to create the maintenance domain. For the creation method, see Creating an MD. The parameters of the maintenance domain are as follows:
l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Domain Level: 4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11-46

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

The maintenance domain names and levels of NE1 and NE2 should be consistent, and then NE1 and NE2 are in the same maintenance domain.

Step 3 On the T2000, select NE1 to create the maintenance association for Company A. For the creation method, see Creating an MA. The parameters of the maintenance association are as follows:
l l l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Association Name: MA Relevant Service: 1-E-Line-1 CC Test Transmit Period (ms): 3.33 ms

Step 4 On the T2000, select NE2 to create the maintenance association for Company A. For the creation method, see Creating an MA. The parameters of the maintenance association are as follows:
l l l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Association Name: MA Relevant Service: 1-E-Line-1 CC Test Transmit Period (ms): 3.33 ms

Step 5 On the T2000, select NE1 to create the MEP. For the creation method, see Creating a MEP Maintenance Point. The parameters of the MEP are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Association Name: MA Board: 19-ETFC Port: 1 (Port-1) VLAN: 100 MP ID: 1 Direction: Ingress CC Status: Active

Step 6 On the T2000, select NE2 to create the MEP. For the creation method, see Creating a MEP Maintenance Point. The parameters of the MEP are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Maintenance Domain Name: MD Maintenance Association Name: MA Board: 19-ETFC Port: 1 (Port-1) VLAN: 100 MP ID: 2 Direction: Ingress CC Status: Active
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-47

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 7 On the T2000, select NE1 to perform the CC test. For the operation method, see Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE

If the MEP of NE2 does not receive the CC packets from NE1 in a period of time (for example, 3.25 times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE1 to NE2 is normal.

Step 8 On the T2000, select NE2 to perform the CC test. For the operation method, see Performing a Continuity Check.
NOTE

If the MEP of NE1 does not receive the CC packets from NE2 in a period of time (for example, 3.25 times of the transmission period), the MEP automatically reports the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm. If the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm is not reported, the connectivity of the service from NE2 to NE1 is normal.

----End

11.9 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the E-Line service configuration. Table 11-18 Descriptions of the parameters for V-UNI Group Field V-UNI Group ID V-UNI Group Type Value Example: 123 Ingress, Egress Description Set and query the ID of the V-UNI group. Ingress indicates the in-coming network direction. Egress indicates the out-going network direction. Click C.45 V-UNI Group Type for more information. CIR (kbit/s) PIR (kbit/s) Example: 100000 Example: 500000 Commit the rate for the service. Set the guaranteed rate for the service. The peak information rate should not be less than the committed information rate. This parameter is not supported. This parameter is not supported. Set the ID of the created Ethernet service. Display the V-UNI interface selected by the service in the format of Slot number - Board name - Port number (VLAN ID). Display the available service IDs and V-UNI interfaces for the service. Display the selected service ID and V-UNI interface for the service.

CBS (byte) PBS (byte) Service ID Interface

Example: 12 Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No) -

Selecting Interface Selected Interface

11-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Field Query Actual Bandwidth

Value Checked, Unchecked

Description When this parameter is selected, the actual effective bandwidth is queried. When this parameter is not selected, the configured bandwidth is queried.

Table 11-19 Descriptions of the parameters for E-Line Service Field Service ID Service Name Source Node Value Example: 11 Example: test Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: PW-0 UNI-UNI, UNI-NNI Description Set and query the ID of the Ethernet service. Set and query the name of the Ethernet service. Display the source node of the E-Line service. The format is Slot number - Board name - Port name (VLAN ID). Display the sink node of the E-Line service. The sink node can be a port, PW or QinQ Link. In the case of the UNI-NNI direction, select the network-side bearer type as PW Port or QinQ Link. Set the service tag role of E-line service. Set and query the user-side port or network-side port. Set one or several VLAN IDs, or not set any VLAN ID. Set the bearer type when the service direction is set to UNI-NNI. Click C.57 Bearer Type for more information. PW ID Example: 123 Set and query the PW ID of the service. Click C.30 PW ID for more information. QinQ Link ID BPDU Example: 5 Not Transparently Transmitted, Transparently Transmitted Select and display the QinQ Link ID. Set whether the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets are transparently transmitted. Click C.8 BPDU (E-Line) for more information.

Sink Node Direction

Service Tag Role Port VLANs Bearer Type

User, Service Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) 1-4094 PW, Port, QinQ Link

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-49

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field MTU(byte)

Value 46 to 9000

Description Set the maximum transport unit (MTU). When receiving packets of a length more than the MTU, the port divides the packets into segments and then transport these segments. If the packets contain a flag indicating that packet division is not allowed, the port discards the packet. After the service transmitted in a PW is created, the MTU value of the service cannot be changed. After the service transmitted through a port or in the QinQ is created, however, the MTU value of the service can be changed. The reason is as follows: In the case of the service transmitted in a PW, the MTU value needs to be negotiated when the PW is created and cannot be changed after creation. Click C.21 MTU(byte) for more information.

Table 11-20 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Field ID Location PW ID Enable State PW Signaling Type Value Example: 1 Source, Sink Example: 123 Enable, Disable Static, Dynamic Description Display the sequence of the PWs. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. Set the location of the node on the PW. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. Set the ID of the PW carrying the Ethernet service. Set and display the enable status of the PW. In the case of the dynamic PW, the label is automatically allocated. In the case of the static PW, the label is manually allocated. The configuration at the two ends of a PW should be consistent. PWs of different types process the borne services differently. For example, the PW in the Ethernet tagged mode attaches the tag on the services on this PW. Set the direction of the PW. Display the encapsulation type of the PW.

PW Type

Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged Mode

Direction PW Encapsulation Type PW Ingress Label

11-50

Bidirectional MPLS, IP

16 to 1048575

Set this parameter when the PW Signaling Type is set to Static.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Field PW Egress Label Peer IP Tunnel Type

Value 16 to 1048575 Example: 10.70.71.123 MPLS, IP, GRE

Description Set this parameter when the PW Signaling Type is set to Static. Set the peer IP of the PW. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
NOTE When you set PW Encapsulation Type to UDP, you can set Tunnel Type to IP only.

Tunnel

Tunnel ID Example: 55

Select a created tunnel. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW fails. The control word is the encapsulation packet header of four bytes. The control word is used to identify the packet sequence or be stuffing bits. Set the type of the control channel used by the PW. Verify the connectivity of a PW. The VCCV verification mode is a tool used to manually verify the connectivity of a virtual circuit. Display the working status of the PW at the local end. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. Display the working status of the PW at the remote end. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. Display the compositive working status of the PW. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. When the PW is in the Ethernet tagged mode, the PW attaches the VLAN set here on the packets without any VLAN from the opposite end.

Control Word

Preferred Use, No Use

Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Local Working Status Remote Working Status

CW, None Ping, None

Up, Down

Up, Down

Compositive Working Status Request VLAN

Up, Down

1 to 4094

Table 11-21 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS Field Interface Value Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Description Set the user-side interface.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-51

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field PW ID

Value Example: 123

Description Set the ID of the PW carrying the Ethernet service. Click C.30 PW ID for more information.

QinQ Link ID Direction

Example: 5 Ingress, Egress

The ID of the QinQ Link carrying the Ethernet service. Set the direction of the interface, PW and QinQ Link. Ingress indicates the in-coming direction. Egress indicates the out-going direction. If Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, the bandwidth is limited according to the set CIR, PIR, CBS, PBS, tail drop threshold and WRED policy. Display the name of the QoS policy. Click C.55 Policy Name for more information.

Bandwidth Limit

Enabled, Disabled

Policy Name

Example: Qos-test

Policy ID CIR (kbit/s)

Example: 12 64 to 10000000

Display the ID of QoS policy. Commit the rate for the service. This field can be set after Bandwidth Limit is enabled.

CBS (byte) PIR (kbit/s)

64 to 10000000

This parameter is not supported.. Set the maximum rate for the service. The peak information rate should not be less than the committed information rate. This field can be set after Bandwidth Limit is enabled.

PBS (byte)

This parameter is not supported..

11-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

Field Default Forwarding Priority

Value CS7, CS6,EF, AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1, BE, NONE

Description The CoS varies with the values.

l

CS6-CS7: Indicates the highest service class. The CoS is applicable to transport of signaling. EF: Indicates fast forwarding. The CoS is applicable to the service of little delay and packet loss rate, such as the audio service. AF1-AF4: Indicates the guaranteed forwarding. The CoS is applicable to the service that requires a certain rate, but does not limit the delay or jitter. BE: The CoS is applicable to the service that need not be processed exceptionally.

Ingress direction is configurable. Click C.117 Default Forwarding Priority for more information. Default Packet Relabeling Color none, red, yellow, green Label packets with different colors according to the label information carried with the packets. Ingress direction is configurable. Click C.113 Default Packet Relabeling Color for more information. EXP 0-7, None Set the QoS priority labels in an MPLS network. These labels correspond to the eight classes.
l l l l l l l l

0 corresponds to BE. 1 corresponds to AF1. 2 corresponds to AF2. 3 corresponds to AF3. 4 corresponds to AF4. 5 corresponds to EF. 6 corresponds to CS6. 7 corresponds to CS7.

LSP Mode

Uniform, Pipe

Set and display the LSP mode.

l

Uniform: The CoS of user packets should be recovered when the tunnel label is stripped. Pipe: The CoS of user packets need not be recovered when the tunnel label is stripped.

Click C.18 LSP Mode for more information. Query Actual Bandwidth Checked, Unchecked When this parameter is selected, the actual effective bandwidth is queried. When this parameter is not selected, the configured bandwidth is queried.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-53

11 Configuring an E-Line Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

11-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

12
About This Chapter

Configuring an E-LAN Service

This section describes the basic information about the E-LAN service, and uses an example to describe how to configure an E-LAN service. 12.1 E-LAN Service In topology, the E-LAN service is a multipoint-to-multipoint service. The equipment forwards the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to multiple ports at the network side, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a multipoint-to-multipoint manner. 12.2 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service The configuration flow of the E-LAN service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane, configuring MPLS tunnel and configuring E-LAN service. 12.3 Operation Tasks for the E-LAN Service The operation tasks for the E-LAN service include the creation of E-LAN services and creation of V-UNI groups. 12.4 Configuration Case of the E-LAN Service This section describes a configuration example of the E-LAN service. A configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the process of service configuration. The configuration example includes the service planning and E-LAN service configuration. 12.5 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the E-LAN service configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-1

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12.1 E-LAN Service

In topology, the E-LAN service is a multipoint-to-multipoint service. The equipment forwards the packets of a specific port or of specific VLANs of a specific port at the user side to multiple ports at the network side, a PW or a QinQ Link at the network side. In this way, the user data can be transparently transmitted in a multipoint-to-multipoint manner. Figure 12-1 shows the networking diagram for the E-LAN service. The three user side networks respectively access the carrier networks through the FE. Each user side network has its own VLAN label. The user side networks require access between each other. The user side networks can communicate with each other through the configuration of the ELAN service. On each PE node, the accessed data is forwarded through the target MAC address or target MAC address + VLAN. At the network side, the data is transparently transmitted to the opposite PE equipment through the created MPLS tunnel. In this case, the entire transport network, which exchanges different data at the user sides, equals a Layer 2 switch. In other words, the transport network is transparent to the user network. In the uplink direction of user side of each PE node, complex traffic classification can be performed for data packets, and different QoS policies can be used according to the traffic classification. Figure 12-1 E-LAN service
CE 1 FE NE 1 MPLS Tunnel 2 NE 3 MPLS Tunnel 1 PSN MPLS Tunnel 3 FE CE 3

NE 2 FE CE 2

PE

At present, the equipment supports the C-VLAN packet, S-VLAN+C-VLAN packet, and Ethernet packet without VLAN. At the network side, the accessed packets can be flexibly processed through the configuration of PW attributes. For example, the dropping and addition of S-VLAN is available.
12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

According to the conditions of the accessed user side network, the port attributes, service attributes, and PW attributes of the E-LAN service can be flexibly configured to meet requirements of different application scenarios. At the network-side port, the service can be carried by ports, a PW or a QinQ link for transport. In the case of the QinQ link carrying, the packets with the C-VLAN in the user-side network are added with an S-VLAN header of the transport network. The packets then travel through the transport network with two VLANs. In this way, a simple L2-VPN tunnel is provided for the user. To realize the QoS for the service carried by a QinQ link, configure the QinQ policy.

12.2 Configuration Flow for E-LAN Service

The configuration flow of the E-LAN service include creating network, configuring the QoS policy, configuring interfaces, configuring the control plane, configuring MPLS tunnel and configuring E-LAN service. Figure 12-2 shows the flow for configuring an E-LAN service. Figure 12-2 Flow diagram for configuring the E-LAN service
Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces

Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End

Configuring the Control Plane Configuring an MPLS Tunnel Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End

Configuring QinQ Link Configuring E-LAN Service Creating a V-UNI Group End

The columns in the figure shows the three sub processes. From left to right, the sub systems indicate the NNI carried by ports, NNI carried by PWs, and NNI carried by QinQ Link respectively.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-3

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Before configuring the E-LAN service, you should complete 2 Creating Network, and 4.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces. Perform the following operations according to the NNI bearer type.
l

In the case that the operations mentioned above are completed, when the port is set to Bearer Type, the E-LAN service can be configured. When the PW is set to Bearer Type, the MPLS tunnel need be configured. See the following contents according to the MPLS tunnel type.

When the static MPLS tunnel is used, the MPLS tunnel can be configured on a per-NE basis or by using the trail function. See 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function and 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis. When the static MPLS tunnel is used, 5 Configuring the Control Plane can be skipped. When the dynamic MPLS tunnel is used, see 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function.

If the network side is carried by the QinQ Link, 11.3.4 Creating a QinQ Link need be complete.

When configuring the E-LAN service, see 12.4 Configuration Case of the E-LAN Service.

12.3 Operation Tasks for the E-LAN Service

The operation tasks for the E-LAN service include the creation of E-LAN services and creation of V-UNI groups. 12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service On the T2000, the E-LAN service can be created. Multiple types of E-LAN services can be realized by configuring the UNI and NNI ports. The NNI port can carry the service by using the port, PW or QinQ link. 12.3.2 Managing the Blacklist Managing the blacklist can prevent the illegal packets from the network side or user side from attacking the equipment. Hence, the equipment can run stably in the network. Managing the blacklist includes querying the blacklist, creating the blacklist, and deleting the blacklist. 12.3.3 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression The broadcast storm suppression function can restrain the broadcast traffic on the port that carries the ELAN service. Hence, the bandwidth resource of the equipment can be properly used. Setting the broadcast storm suppression function includes enabling the broadcast storm suppression and setting the broadcast suppression threshold. 12.3.4 Creating a V-UNI Group The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service

On the T2000, the E-LAN service can be created. Multiple types of E-LAN services can be realized by configuring the UNI and NNI ports. The NNI port can carry the service by using the port, PW or QinQ link.
12-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of the port attributes. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel that carries the PW. If the port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For the operation steps, see Enabling the Port DCN. If the service need be carried by a QinQ link, you must configure a QinQ link first. If a QoS policy is required for configuring the QoS, you must create a QoS policy first.

WARNING
l l

The ML-PPP line should not carry any E-LAN service. On the network side, the E-LAN service does not support the LMSP, FRR, MPLS APS, and LAG protection.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the New E-LAN Service dialog box. Then, set Service ID, Service Name and MTU(byte).For details on the parameters for the E-LAN service, see Table 12-15.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-5

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Self-Learning MAC Address can be set to enabled or disabled. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to enabled, the bridge supports the MAC address self-learning, the forwarding table items are generated through the MAC address self-learning. You can also manually configure the static MAC address forwarding table items. When Self-Learning MAC Address is set to disabled, the bridge does not support the MAC address self-learning and you can manually configure the static MAC address forwarding table items only. MAC Address Learning Mode can be set to SVL or IVL. SVL indicates the shared VLAN learning. All VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Any MAC address is unique in the forwarding table. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs have the same MAC address. Tag Type can be set to C-Awared, S-Awared or Tag Transparent. C-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets with one C-VLAN. S-Awared corresponds to the accessed service packets with one C-VLAN and one S-VLAN. Tag Transparent corresponds to the accessed service packets without any VLAN. Now, the S-Awared cannot be supported.

Step 3 Click OK to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close. Step 4 Click the UNI tab. Then, click Configuration to display the Configure Port dialog box.For details on the parameters for UNI ports the E-LAN service, see Table 12-5.

Step 5 In the Available Ports list, select the port. Then, click Ports list.

to add the port to the Selected

Step 6 In the Selected Ports list, set VLANs of the port, and then click OK. Step 7 Click the NNI tab. l If configuring the NNI interface carried by the port, click the Port tab. See Step 4 to Step 6 to add and configure the NNI port. Then, click OK.For details on the parameters for the NNI ports of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-6. If configuring the NNI interface carried by the PW, click the PW tab. Click New, and set the parameters related to the PW. Then, click OK.For details on the parameters for PW of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-7.

12-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

If configuring the NNI interface carried by the QinQ link, click the QinQ Link tab.For details on the parameters for QinQ Link of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-8. 1. 2. 3. Click Add. The QinQ Link Management window is displayed. Select a QinQ link ID and click OK. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-7

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

NOTE

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The services carried by the QinQ link can not support to create MP.

Step 8 Click the Split Horizon Group tab. Then, click New to display the New Split Horizon Group dialog box.For details on the parameters for split horizon group of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-9. Step 9 Configure the split horizon group id, and add the interface that need be added into the split horizon group to the Selected Interfaces pane. Click OK to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close. Step 10 Click the MAC Address Learning Parameters tab. Set Aging Ability, Aging Time(min), Address Table Specified Capacity, Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Lower Threshold(%).For details on the parameters for MAC address learning of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-10.
NOTE

Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) and Address Detection Upper Threshold(%) indicate the upper threshold and lower threshold of the self-learning capacity. If the upper threshold is crossed, the equipment reports an alarm. If the lower threshold is crossed, the alarm is cleared.

Step 11 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 12 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab. Set the processing modes for the unicast frames and multicast frames. The default value is broadcast. For details on the parameters for unknown frame processing of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-11. Step 13 Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 14 Optional: Click QoS tab. Set the parameters of the QoS.For details on the parameters for QoS of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-12. l Click the UNI tab. Set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color of the port. Click Apply to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close. Click the PW tab. Set EXP and LSP Mode. Click Apply to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates that the operation is successful. Then, click Close.
NOTE

If Bandwidth Limit is set to enabled, CIR (kbit/s) and PIR (kbit/s) can be set. The QoS policy can also be selected from Policy. Before selecting the policy, the policy should be created.

Click the QinQ Link tab. Enable the bandwidth limit and select the QinQ policy for the ingress and egress directions of the QinQ link. Click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close,
NOTE

Before selecting the policy, the policy should be created. If Bandwidth Limit is set to enabled, CIR (kbit/s) and PIR (kbit/s) can be set.

Step 15 Optional: Click the Static MAC Address tab. Manually bind the VLAN ID, MAC Address and Egress Interface.For details on the parameters for static MAC address of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-16.
NOTE

Set the VLAN ID only when MAC Address Learning Mode is set IVL.

12-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Step 16 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab. Set the OAM-related parameters.For details on the parameters for maintenance association of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-13.For details on the parameters for MEP point of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-14.
NOTE

Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.

----End

12.3.2 Managing the Blacklist

Managing the blacklist can prevent the illegal packets from the network side or user side from attacking the equipment. Hence, the equipment can run stably in the network. Managing the blacklist includes querying the blacklist, creating the blacklist, and deleting the blacklist.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of E-LAN services.

Context
After the MAC address blacklist is created on a port that carries the ELAN service, if the destination MAC or source MAC information carried by a packet enters this port is consistent with a random MAC address created in the blacklist, this packet is discarded.
NOTE

The MAC address that is added to the static route should not be added to the MAC address of the blacklist.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Disabled MAC Address tab page, select Query to query the added MAC address of the blacklist. Step 3 Click New and the Create Disabled MAC Address dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID and MAC Address.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-9

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Optional: In the interface, select the information of a MAC address, and then click Delete. Hence, the MAC address information is deleted from the blacklist. ----End

12.3.3 Setting the Broadcast Storm Suppression

The broadcast storm suppression function can restrain the broadcast traffic on the port that carries the ELAN service. Hence, the bandwidth resource of the equipment can be properly used. Setting the broadcast storm suppression function includes enabling the broadcast storm suppression and setting the broadcast suppression threshold.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of E-LAN services.

Context
The broadcast suppression is enabled on a port that carries the ELAN service. In this case, when the packets that enter this port are unknown unicast packets, unknown multicast packets, or broadcast packets, if the traffic exceeds the broadcast suppression threshold set for the port, the packets that exceeds the bandwidth are discarded.
NOTE

Currently, the equipment supports the broadcast suppression function for the UNI only. The broadcast suppression function for the NNI is not supported.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the UNI tab page, select the corresponding port. Double-click the Enabled Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter field, and then select Enabled.
12-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Step 3 Double-click the Broadcast Suppression Threshold parameter field, and then set the threshold value. Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

12.3.4 Creating a V-UNI Group

The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of multiple Ethernet services. The PIR value of the V-UNI group should be set to a value that is higher than or equal to the total CIR value of the V-UNI members.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer . Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > V-UNI Group from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the NEW V-UNI Group window. Step 3 Set V-UNI Group ID, V-UNI Group Type, PIR(kbit/s) and PBS(byte). For details on the parameters for V-UNI group, seeTable 11-18.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-11

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 4 Select the interface to be added in Selecting Interface list. Click the Selected Interface list.
NOTE

to add the port to

The interfaces on the same interface board can be configured into the same V-UNI group. The former eight interfaces on the EG16 can be configured into the same V-UNI group, and the latter eight interfaces can be configured into the same V-UNI group.

Step 5 Click OK to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates the operation success. Then, click Close. ----End

12.4 Configuration Case of the E-LAN Service

This section describes a configuration example of the E-LAN service. A configuration flow diagram is provided to describe the process of service configuration. The configuration example includes the service planning and E-LAN service configuration. 12.4.1 Case Description This section describes the functional requirement, networking diagram, and service planning. 12.4.2 Configuring E-LAN Service for the NE
12-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

This section describes how to configure the E-LAN service for the NE.

12.4.1 Case Description

This section describes the functional requirement, networking diagram, and service planning.

Requirement and Networking Diagram

As shown in Figure 12-3, the three CE networks need communication with each other. Each CE network has the same VLAN value, that is, 100. Among the CE networks, three types of services, including the voice service, data service, and common Internet access service, are available. Each CE requires a network bandwidth of 100 Mbit/s. The complex traffic classification can be performed at the access side, and different QoS policies for assured bandwidth can be configured. Figure 12-3 Networking diagram for the E-LAN service

VLAN=100

CE 1

UNI for CE1: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 NNI for CE2: 1-EG16-20-POD41-1 NNI for CE3: 1-EG16-20-POD41-2 FE UNI for CE3: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 NNI for CE1: 1-EG16-20-POD41-1 NNI for CE2: 1-EG16-20-POD41-2 MPLS Tunnel 3 NE 3

NE 1

MPLS Tunnel 1

PSN MPLS Tunnel 2

FE

VLAN=100

CE 3

NE 2 FE CE 2 UNI for CE2: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 NNI for CE3: 1-EG16-20-POD41-1 NNI for CE1: 1-EG16-20-POD41-2

VLAN=100

Service Planning
In the network, the service is carried by a PW. Thus, the parameters related to the PW and MPLS tunnel should be planned. In this example, the tunnel is created in the manner of fast creation of a dynamic tunnel. Table 12-1 lists the planning of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-13

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 12-1 Planning of the tunnel that carries the PW Field Tunnel ID Tunnel Name Signaling Type Schedulin g Type Bandwidt h Source NE Sink NE Route Constraint Port IP Address Forward Tunnel 1 1 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 1 NE 2 Reverse Tunnel 1 2 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 2 NE 1 Forward Tunnel 2 3 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 2 NE 3 Reverse Tunnel 2 4 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 3 NE 2 Forward Tunnel 3 5 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 1 NE 3 Reverse Tunnel 3 6 E-LAN Dynamic E-LSP 100 Mbit/s NE 3 NE 1 -

Table 12-2 lists the planning of the Ethernet service. Table 12-2 Planning of the E-LAN service carried by a PW Field Service ID Service Name BPDU Tag Type Self-Learning MAC Address MAC Address Learning Mode MTU (byte) NE 1 1 E-LAN Not Transparently Transmitted C-Awared Enabled SVL 1526 NE 2 1 E-LAN Not Transparently Transmitted C-Awared Enabled SVL 1526 NE 3 1 E-LAN Not Transparently Transmitted C-Awared Enabled SVL 1526

Table 12-3 lists the planning of the UNI port for each NE.

12-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Table 12-3 Planning of the UNI port Field Port VLAN Value NE 1 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 100 NE 2 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 100 NE 3 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 100

Table 12-4 lists the planning of the NNI PW for each NE. Table 12-4 Planning of the PW Field PW ID PW Signaling Type PW Type Direction PW Ingress Label PW Egress Label Peer IP Tunnel NE 1 10 Static 20 Static NE 2 20 Static 30 Static NE 3 30 Static 10 Static

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 20

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 40

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 20

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 40

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 30

Ethernet Bidirectio nal 30

30 1.1.1.3 Tunnel 3

20 1.1.1.2 Tunnel 1

40 1.1.1.1 Tunnel 1

30 1.1.1.3 Tunnel 2

40 1.1.1.2 Tunnel 2

20 1.1.1.1 Tunnel 3

In the case of the split horizon group, the interfaces at the network side of each PE NE should be configured into a split horizon group. In this way, the broadcast storm caused by the mutually forwarded data of the network side port can be prevented. In the case of unknown frame processing, broadcast is planned.

12.4.2 Configuring E-LAN Service for the NE

This section describes how to configure the E-LAN service for the NE.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-15

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, configure the E-LAN service for NE1. For the configuration method, see 12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service. The parameters related to the E-LAN service are as follows:
l l l l l l l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-LAN BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Tag Type: C-Awared Self-Learning MAC Address: Enabled MAC Address Learning Mode: SVL MTU (byte): 1526 Split Horizon Group: 20-POD41-1, 20-POD41-2 Unknown Frame Processing: Broadcast UNI:

Configure Port: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 VLANs: 100 PW ID: 10 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 20 PW Egress Label: 30 Peer IP: 1.1.1.3 Tunnel: Tunnel 3 PW ID: 20 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 40 PW Egress Label: 20 Peer IP: 1.1.1.2 Tunnel: Tunnel 1

NNI PW parameters:

Step 2 On the T2000, configure the E-LAN service for NE2. For the configuration method, see 12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service. The parameters related to the E-LAN service are as follows:
l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-LAN

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

12-16

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l l l l l l l

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Tag Type: C-Awared Self-Learning MAC Address: Enabled MAC Address Learning Mode: SVL MTU (byte): 1526 Split Horizon Group: 20-POD41-1, 20-POD41-2 Unknown Frame Processing: Broadcast UNI:

Configure Port: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 VLANs: 100 PW ID: 20 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 20 PW Egress Label: 40 Peer IP: 1.1.1.1 Tunnel: Tunnel 1 PW ID: 30 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 40 PW Egress Label: 30 Peer IP: 1.1.1.3 Tunnel: Tunnel 2

Parameters of the PW for the NNI:

Step 3 On the T2000, configure the E-LAN service for NE3. For the configuration method, see 12.3.1 Creating an E-LAN Service. The parameters related to the E-LAN service are as follows:
l l l l l l l l

Service ID: 1 Service Name: E-LAN BPDU: Not Transparently Transmitted Tag Type: C-Awared Self-Learning MAC Address: Enabled MAC Address Learning Mode: SVL MTU (byte): 1526 Split Horizon Group: 20-POD41-1, 20-POD41-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-17

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Unknown Frame Processing: Broadcast UNI:

Configure Port: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 VLANs: 100 PW ID: 10 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 30 PW Egress Label: 20 Peer IP: 1.1.1.1 Tunnel: Tunnel 3 PW ID: 30 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 30 PW Egress Label: 40 Peer IP: 1.1.1.2 Tunnel: Tunnel 2

Parameters of the PW for the NNI:

----End

12.5 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the E-LAN service configuration. Table 12-5 Descriptions of the parameters for an UNI Port Field Port VLANs Value For example, 1EG16-1 (port-1)(1-2) 1 to 4094 Description Indicates the user-side port. Queries and configures the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID can be null; or you can set one or more VLAN IDs. Sets whether to enable the broadcast packet suppression. Enabling the broadcast packet suppression efficiently prevents the broadcast storm and network congestion, and ensures the normal running of services. The E-LAN service supports this parameter.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Enabled Broadcast Packet Suppression

Enabled and Disabled

12-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Field Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

Value 0-100 Default: 30

Description Configures the threshold of the broadcast packet suppression. The E-LAN service supports this parameter. When the broadcast packet suppression is enabled, the broadcast packets are suppressed if the following requirement is met: Occupancy rate of the broadcast packet to the bandwidth of the current port > the total bandwidth of the port x the suppression threshold x 1%. A low occupancy rate indicates that the number of broadcast packets that pass through the port is small. If the occupancy rate is 100%, it indicates that the broadcast packets that pass through the port are not suppressed.

ID Location

For example, 1 Source, Sink

Displays the ID of the UNI port. The E-AGGR service supports this parameter. Displays the location of the UNI port. The EAGGR service supports this parameter.

Table 12-6 Descriptions of the parameters for NNI Port Field ID Value Example: 1 Description Display the sequence of the PWs. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. Location Source, Sink Set location of the port involved in the service. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. Port Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Set the network-side port. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service.

Table 12-7 Descriptions of the parameters for PW Field ID Value Example: 1 Description Display the sequence of the PWs. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-19

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field Location PW ID Enable State PW Signaling Type

Value Source, Sink Example: 123 Enable, Disable Static, Dynamic

Description Set the location of the node on the PW. This parameter is required for the E-AGGR service. Set the ID of the PW carrying the Ethernet service. Set and display the enable status of the PW. In the case of the dynamic PW, the label is automatically allocated. In the case of the static PW, the label is manually allocated. The configuration at the two ends of a PW should be consistent. PWs of different types process the borne services differently. For example, the PW in the Ethernet tagged mode attaches the tag on the services on this PW. Set the direction of the PW. Display the encapsulation type of the PW.

PW Type

Ethernet, Ethernet Tagged Mode

Direction PW Encapsulation Type PW Ingress Label PW Egress Label Peer IP Tunnel Type

Bidirectional MPLS, IP

16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 Example: 10.70.71.123 MPLS, IP, GRE

Set this parameter when the PW Signaling Type is set to Static. Set this parameter when the PW Signaling Type is set to Static. Set the peer IP of the PW. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
NOTE When you set PW Encapsulation Type to UDP, you can set Tunnel Type to IP only.

Tunnel

Tunnel ID Example: 55

Select a created tunnel. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW fails. The control word is the encapsulation packet header of four bytes. The control word is used to identify the packet sequence or be stuffing bits. Set the type of the control channel used by the PW. Verify the connectivity of a PW. The VCCV verification mode is a tool used to manually verify the connectivity of a virtual circuit.

Control Word

Preferred Use, No Use

Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode

CW, None Ping, None

12-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Field Local Working Status Remote Working Status

Value Up, Down

Description Display the working status of the PW at the local end. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. Display the working status of the PW at the remote end. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. Display the compositive working status of the PW. Up indicates that the PW works normally. Down indicates that the PW work abnormally. When the PW is in the Ethernet tagged mode, the PW attaches the VLAN set here on the packets without any VLAN from the opposite end.

Up, Down

Compositive Working Status Request VLAN

Up, Down

1 to 4094

Table 12-8 Descriptions of the parameters for QinQ Link Field QinQ Link ID Port S-Vlan ID Direction Bandwidth Limit Value Example: 5 Example: Slot-Board NamePort(Port No.) Example: 4 Ingress, Egress Enabled, Disabled Description Display the QinQ Link ID. Display the board and port. Display the S-VLAN ID. Display the direction of the service. Display the bandwidth limit. When Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, you can set Committed Information Rate and Peak Information Rate. CIR (kbit/s) Example: 16000 Display the committed information rate, which is the guaranteed rate that can be provided to the service. Display the committed burst size, which is the guaranteed flow size allowed for each burst.

CBS (byte)

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-21

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field PIR (kbit/s)

Value Example: 20000

Description Display the peak information rate, which is the maximum rate that can be provided for the service. Display the peak burst size, which is the maximum flow size allowed for each excessive burst. Display the QinQ policy.

PBS (byte)

Policy

Policy ID + Policy Name Example: 1(policy1)

Table 12-9 Descriptions of the parameters for Split Horizon Group Field Split Horizon Group ID Value 1 Description Display the ID of the split horizon group. Click C.123 Split Horizon Group ID for more information. Example: PW-100,3EG16-PORT1[90, 100] Set members in the split horizon group. Several members are separated by ",". You can set some UNIs or NNIs as a split horizon group. Click C.124 Split Horizon Group Member for more information.

Split Horizon Group Member

Table 12-10 Descriptions of the parameters for MAC Address Learning Parameters Field Aging Ability Value Enabled, Disabled Description If no packets of an MAC address listed in the MAC address table are received during a period, the MAC address is deleted from the MAC address table. Click C.105 Aging Ability for more information. Aging Time (min) 1-640 If the aging ability is enabled, whether an MAC address is aged is determined according to the set aging time. Click C.106 Aging Time (min) for more information. Address Table Specified Capacity 0-65534 Set the capacity of the MAC address table. Click C.71 Address Table Specified Capacity for more information.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

12-22

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Field Address Detection Upper Threshold (%)

Value 80-100

Description Set the upper threshold for address detection. The upper threshold should be higher than the lower threshold. If the number of MAC addresses actually learned is more than the upper threshold, the FDBSIZEALM_ELAN alarm is generated. Click C.72 Address Detection Upper Threshold (%) for more information.

Address Detection Lower Threshold (%)

60-100

Set the lower threshold for address detection. The lower threshold should be lower than the upper threshold. Click C.73 Address Detection Lower Threshold (%) for more information.

Table 12-11 Descriptions of the parameters for Unknown Frame Processing Field Frame Type Value Unicast Description Display the type of the received unknown frames. Click C.153 Frame Type for more information. Handing Mode Discard, Broadcast Default: Broadcast Select the mode for handling the unknown frames. Discard indicates that unknown frames are directly discarded. Broadcast indicates that unknown frames are broadcast at the forwarding port. Click C.60 Handling Mode (Ethernet Unknown Frame) for more information. Total Selected Example: 2 Example: 1 Display the count of unknown frames. Display the count of selected unknown frames.

Table 12-12 Descriptions of the parameters for QoS Field Interface PW ID Value Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: 123 Description Set the user-side interface. Set the ID of the PW carrying the Ethernet service. Click C.30 PW ID for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-23

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Field QinQ Link ID Direction

Value Example: 5 Ingress, Egress

Description The ID of the QinQ Link carrying the Ethernet service. Set the direction of the interface, PW and QinQ Link. Ingress indicates the in-coming direction. Egress indicates the out-going direction. If Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled, the bandwidth is limited according to the set CIR, PIR, CBS, PBS, tail drop threshold and WRED policy. Display the name of the QoS policy. Click C.55 Policy Name for more information.

Bandwidth Limit

Enabled, Disabled

Policy Name

Example: Qos-test

Policy ID CIR (kbit/s)

Example: 12 64 to 10000000

Display the ID of QoS policy. Commit the rate for the service. This field can be set after Bandwidth Limit is enabled.

CBS (byte) PIR (kbit/s)

64 to 10000000

This parameter is not supported.. Set the maximum rate for the service. The peak information rate should not be less than the committed information rate. This field can be set after Bandwidth Limit is enabled.

PBS (byte) Default Forwarding Priority

CS7, CS6,EF, AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1, BE, NONE

This parameter is not supported.. The CoS varies with the values.
l

CS6-CS7: Indicates the highest service class. The CoS is applicable to transport of signaling. EF: Indicates fast forwarding. The CoS is applicable to the service of little delay and packet loss rate, such as the audio service. AF1-AF4: Indicates the guaranteed forwarding. The CoS is applicable to the service that requires a certain rate, but does not limit the delay or jitter. BE: The CoS is applicable to the service that need not be processed exceptionally.

Ingress direction is configurable. Click C.117 Default Forwarding Priority for more information.

12-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Field Default Packet Relabeling Color

Value none, red, yellow, green

Description Label packets with different colors according to the label information carried with the packets. Ingress direction is configurable. Click C.113 Default Packet Relabeling Color for more information.

EXP

0-7, None

Set the QoS priority labels in an MPLS network. These labels correspond to the eight classes.
l l l l l l l l

0 corresponds to BE. 1 corresponds to AF1. 2 corresponds to AF2. 3 corresponds to AF3. 4 corresponds to AF4. 5 corresponds to EF. 6 corresponds to CS6. 7 corresponds to CS7.

LSP Mode

Uniform, Pipe

Set and display the LSP mode.

l

Uniform: The CoS of user packets should be recovered when the tunnel label is stripped. Pipe: The CoS of user packets need not be recovered when the tunnel label is stripped.

Click C.18 LSP Mode for more information. Query Actual Bandwidth Checked, Unchecked When this parameter is selected, the actual effective bandwidth is queried. When this parameter is not selected, the configured bandwidth is queried.

Table 12-13 Descriptions of the parameters for Maintenance Association Field Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name CC Test Transmit Period Value 1-8 characters 1-8 characters bytes Description Set an MD name that is unique in the entire network. Set an MA name that is unique in the same MD.

3.33 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1s, 10s, 1m, 10m

Set the period for transmitting the CC packets. Click C.10 CC Test Transmit Period for more information.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-25

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 12-14 Descriptions of the parameters for MEP Point Field Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Board Value 1-8 characters 1-8 characters Description The name of an MD should be unique in the entire network. The name of an MA should be unique in the same MD. Display the board where the MEP point is located. The format is Slot number - Board name. Display the port where the MEP point is located. Slot number - Board name - Port information Set the node as an MEP point. Set the current VLAN ID of the service. Set a unique ID for each MP. The ID is required for OAM operations. Ingress indicates the direction for packets to enter the board. Egress indicates the direction for packets to exit the board. Activate or deactivate the CC function of the MEP point.

Example: Slot-Board Name Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: Slot-Board Name-Port(Port No.) Example: 22 1-8191 Ingress, Egress

Port Node VLAN MP ID Direction

CC Status

Active, Inactive

Table 12-15 Descriptions of the parameters for E-LAN Service Field Service ID Service Name BPDU Value Example: 11 Example: test Not Transparently Transmitted Description Set and query the ID of the Ethernet service. Set and query the name of the Ethernet service. Set whether the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets are transparently transmitted. Click BPDU (E-LAN) for more information. Tag Type C-Awared, S-Awared, Tag-Transparent C-Awared indicates that the learning is based on the C-TAG (client-side VLAN tag). S-Awared indicates that the learning is based on the S-TAG (operator service-layer VLAN tag). Now, the S-Awared cannot be supported. Tag-Transparent indicates that only the Ethernet packets without VLAN tags can be accessed. Click C.38 Tag Type for more information.
12-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

Field Self-Learning MAC Address

Value Enabled, Disabled

Description Add the self-learned MAC addresses to the MAC address forwarding table. Click C.20 Self-learning MAC Address for more information.

MAC Address Learning Mode

SVL, IVL

SVL indicates the shared VLAN learning. All VLANs share a MAC address forwarding table. Any MAC address is unique in the forwarding table. IVL indicates the independent VLAN learning. The forwarding tables for different VLANs are independent from each other. It is acceptable that the MAC address forwarding tables for different VLANs have the same MAC address. When Tag Type is set to Tag-Transparent, the parameter value is SVL by default and you cannot set it manually. Click C.19 MAC Address Learning Mode for more information.

MTU (byte)

960 to 9000 Default: 1500

Set the maximum transport unit (MTU). When receiving packets of a length more than the MTU, the port divides the packets into segments and then transport these segments. If the packets contain a flag indicating that packet division is not allowed, the port discards the packet. Click C.21 MTU(byte) for more information.

Service Tag Role Available Ports

User Example: Port: 11-EG16-1 (Port-1) VLANs: 12

Display the service tag role of E-LAN service. Display the available ports for configuring the Ethernet service and the VLAN values.

Selected Ports

Example: Port: 11-EG16-1 (Port-1) VLANs: 12

Display the selected ports for configuring the Ethernet service and the VLAN values.

Available Interfaces Selected Interfaces

Display the available interfaces for configuring the split horizon group. Display the selected interfaces for configuring the split horizon group.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-27

12 Configuring an E-LAN Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 12-16 Descriptions of the parameters for Static MAC Address Field VLAN ID MAC Address Egress Interface Value Example: 12 Example: 00-e0fc-39-80-34 Example: PW-100 Description Set the ID of the service. Set the static MAC address. Set the egress interface, which can be the PW, port or QinQ Link.

12-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

13

Configuring an E-AGGR Service

About This Chapter

This section describes basic information on E-AGGR services, and uses an example to illustrate how to configure an E-AGGR service. 13.1 E-AGGR Service In topology, the E-AGGR service is a multipoint-to-point service. The OptiX PTN equipment can aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to one UNI port or aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to an NNI port. In addition, the OptiX PTN equipment can aggregate the services carried by PWs of multiple NNI ports to one UNI port. 13.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service Configuring an E-AGGR service contains creating the network, and configuring the QoS policy, interfaces, control plane, MPLS tunnel, and E-AGGR service. 13.3 Operation Tasks for the E-AGGR Service Operation tasks for the E-AGGR service include creation of E-AGGR services and creation of V-UNI groups. 13.4 Configuration Case of the E-AGGR Service A case is provided here to show the configuration of the E-AGGR service, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning and configuration of the E-AGGR service. 13.5 Parameter Description This section describes the parameters related to the E-AGGR service configuration.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-1

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13.1 E-AGGR Service

In topology, the E-AGGR service is a multipoint-to-point service. The OptiX PTN equipment can aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to one UNI port or aggregate the services accessed from multiple ports to an NNI port. In addition, the OptiX PTN equipment can aggregate the services carried by PWs of multiple NNI ports to one UNI port. Figure 13-1 shows the networking diagram for the E-AGGR service. One operator wants to construct a 3G network. Services of each Node B are aggregated and transmitted to the RNC. At each station, the service of Node B that is connected to the station is aggregated to the PW at the network side. The Tunnel that aggregates the Node B service with multiple stations is aggregated again at the station that connects the RNC, and then the service is transmitted to the RNC. Figure 13-1 E-AGGR service

FE FE NE 1

MPLS Tunnel 1

NE 3 GE

RNC

MPLS Tunnel 2

FE

NE 2 FE Node B

13.2 Configuration Flow for the E-AGGR Service

Configuring an E-AGGR service contains creating the network, and configuring the QoS policy, interfaces, control plane, MPLS tunnel, and E-AGGR service. Figure 13-2 shows the flow for configuring an E-AGGR service.
13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

Figure 13-2 Configuration flow for the E-AGGR service

Required Optional

Start

Creating Network

Configuring the QoS Policy Configuring Interfaces

Configuring a UNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

Configuring the Control Plane Configuring an MPLS Tunnel

Creating a V-UNI Group End

Configuring a NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

Creating a V-UNI Group End

Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

Configuring a NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

Creating a V-UNI Group End

The columns in the figure shows the three sub processes, which are for the configuration of a UNI-UNI E-AGGR service, the configuration of an E-AGGR service carried by ports on the NNI side, and the configuration of an E-AGGR service carried by PWs on the NNI side from the left to right. For network creation, see 2 Creating Network. For the QoS policy configuration, see QoS of Feature Description. For the interface configuration, see 4.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces. For the control plane configuration, see 5 Configuring the Control Plane. When the static MPLS tunnel is used to carry the Ethernet service, this step can be skipped, because the static MPLS tunnel does not need the configuration of the control plane. When the MPLS tunnel is configured, see the following contents according to the MPLS tunnel type.
l

When the static MPLS tunnel is used, the MPLS tunnel can be configured on a per-NE basis or by using the trail function. See 6.3 Creating a Static MPLS Tunnel by Using the Trail Function and 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-3

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When the dynamic MPLS tunnel is used, see 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function.

When configuring the E-AGGR service, see 13.4 Configuration Case of the E-AGGR Service.

13.3 Operation Tasks for the E-AGGR Service

Operation tasks for the E-AGGR service include creation of E-AGGR services and creation of V-UNI groups. 13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service On the T2000, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port. 13.3.2 Creating a V-UNI Group The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service

On the T2000, the creation of an E-AGGR service can be complete in one interface. The equipment supports the multipoint-to-point service aggregation, and supports the service aggregation from the NNI carried by multiple PWs to one UNI port.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the correct configuration of port attributes. You must complete the creation of the MPLS tunnel that carries the PW. If a port need be exclusively used, disable the DCN function of the port that carries the service. For detail, see Enabling the Port DCN.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the New E-AGGR Service dialog box. Then, configure Service ID, Service Name and MTU(byte).For details on the parameters for E-AGGR service, see Table 13-7. Step 3 Click the UNI tab. Then, click Configuration to display the Configure Port dialog box.For details on the parameters for UNI ports of E-AGGR service, see Table 12-5. Step 4 In the Available Port list, select the desired port and click Selected Port list.
13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

to add the port to the

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
NOTE

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

The port of the E-AGGR service does not support the S-Aware attribute.

Step 5 In the Selected Port list, configure Location and VLANs of the port, and then click OK.
NOTE

Location can be set to the source end or the sink end. Multiple source ends can be set, but only one sink end can be set. Otherwise, the E-AGGR service cannot be correctly configured.

Step 6 Click the NNI tab. l To configure the NNI interface carried by the port, click the Port tab. When adding and setting the port at the NNI side, see Step 3 and Step 5. Then, click OK.For details on the parameters for NNI ports of E-AGGR service, see Table 12-6. To configure the NNI interface carried by the PW, click the PW tab. Click New to set related parameters of the PW. Then, click OK.For details on the parameters for PW of EAGGR service, see Table 12-7.
NOTE

l l

For PW Signaling Type, select Dynamic or Static. Dynamic indicates that the LDP signaling is used to create a PW. For PW Type, select Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode.

Step 7 Select VLAN Forwarding Table Item. Click New to display the New VLAN Forwarding Table Item window to set the forwarding attributes. Then, click OK.For details on the parameters for VLAN forwarding tables of E-AGGR service, see Table 13-6.

NOTE

The service is forwarded based on VLAN, and thus the forwarding attributes should be set in VLAN Forwarding Table Item from each source interface to sink interface.

Step 8 Click OK to display the confirmation dialog box. Then, close the dialog box. Step 9 Optional: Click QoS tab. Set the parameters of the QoS.For details on the parameters for QoS of E-AGGR service, see Table 12-12. l l Click the UNI tab to set Default Forwarding Priority and Default Packet Relabeling Color. Click the PW tab to set EXP and LSP Mode.
NOTE

If Bandwidth Limit is set to enabled, CIR (kbit/s) and PIR (kbit/s) can be set. The QoS policy can also be selected from Policy.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-5

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Step 10 Optional: Click the Maintenance Association tab and the MEP Point tab. Set the OAM-related parameters.For details on the parameters for maintenance association of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-13.For details on the parameters for MEP point of the E-LAN service, see Table 12-14.
NOTE

Before setting OAM-related parameters, configure the MD.

----End

13.3.2 Creating a V-UNI Group

The creation of the V-UNI group includes the selection of V-UNI group members and setting of overall bandwidth of V-UNI members. The overall bandwidth in the V-UNI group can be restrained by creating the V-UNI group.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must complete the creation of multiple Ethernet services. The PIR value of the V-UNI group should be set to a value that is higher than or equal to the total CIR value of the V-UNI members.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE in the NE Explorer . Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > V-UNI Group from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click New to display the NEW V-UNI Group window. Step 3 Set V-UNI Group ID, V-UNI Group Type, PIR(kbit/s) and PBS(byte). For details on the parameters for V-UNI group, seeTable 11-18.

13-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

Step 4 Select the interface to be added in Selecting Interface list. Click the Selected Interface list.
NOTE

to add the port to

The interfaces on the same interface board can be configured into the same V-UNI group. The former eight interfaces on the EG16 can be configured into the same V-UNI group, and the latter eight interfaces can be configured into the same V-UNI group.

Step 5 Click OK to display the Operation Result dialog box, which indicates the operation success. Then, click Close. ----End

13.4 Configuration Case of the E-AGGR Service

A case is provided here to show the configuration of the E-AGGR service, and the configuration flow. The configuration case covers the service planning and configuration of the E-AGGR service. 13.4.1 Case Description The case description covers the functional requirements, networking diagram and service planning.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-7

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13.4.2 Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs The E-AGGR service is accessed to the UNIs of multiple NEs and then aggregated at the NNI. This section describes how to configure the UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service for NEs. 13.4.3 Configuring an NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs The E-AGGR service is accessed to the NNIs of multiple NEs and then aggregated at the UNI. This section describes how to configure the NNIs-UNI E-AGGR service for NEs.

13.4.1 Case Description

The case description covers the functional requirements, networking diagram and service planning.

Networking and Requirements

As shown in Figure 13-3, NE1 and Node B connected to NE2 need communicate with the RNC connected to NE3. In this case, NE1 and NE2 can aggregate the services accessed from Node B to two MPLS tunnels respectively. The two MPLS tunnel then transports the services to NE3, which then aggregates the services to the RNC. All services of Node B have VLAN, whose value is 100. Node B is connected to the equipment through the FE interface. RNC is connected to the equipment through the GE interface. The NEs are connected through the STM-4 POS interfaces for networking. Services on NodeB 1 are audio services (CIR = 15 Mbit/s, PIR = 30 Mbit/s). Services on NodeB 2 are data services (CIR = 30 Mbit/s, PIR = 50 Mbit/s). Services on NodeB 3 are audio services (CIR = 15 Mbit/s, PIR = 30 Mbit/s). Services on NodeB 4 are data services (CIR = 30 Mbit/s, PIR = 50 Mbit/s).

13-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

Figure 13-3 E-AGGR service networking diagram

Node B 1 Node B 2 UNI for NodeB 1:1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 UNI for NodeB 2:1-EG16-19-ETFC-2 NNI:1-EG16-20-POD41-1 UNI for RNC:1-EG16-1 NE 1 NNI for NE 1:1-EG16-20-POD41-1 NNI for NE 2:1-EG16-20-POD41-2 NE 3 GE RNC

MPLS Tunnel 1

MPLS Tunnel 2 Node B 3

NE 2

Node B 4 UNI for NodeB 3:1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 UNI for NodeB 4:1-EG16-19-ETFC-2 NNI:1-EG16-20-POD41-1

Node B

Service Planning
Services are carried by the PW in the network. Configure related parameters of the PW and MPLS tunnel. In this case, a dynamic tunnel is quickly created by trail. Table 13-1 lists details on planning of the tunnel that carries the PW. Table 13-1 Planning of the tunnel carrying the PW Parameter Tunnel ID Tunnel Name Signaling Type Schedule Type Bandwidth Source NE Sink NE
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Positive Tunnel 1 1 E-AGGR Dynamic E-LSP 45 Mbit/s NE1 NE3

Reverse Tunnel 1 2 E-AGGR Dynamic E-LSP 45 Mbit/s NE3 NE1

Positive Tunnel 2 3 E-AGGR Dynamic E-LSP 45 Mbit/s NE2 NE3

Reverse Tunnel 2 4 E-AGGR Dynamic E-LSP 45 Mbit/s NE3 NE2

13-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Parameter Route Constraint Port IP Address

Positive Tunnel 1 -

Reverse Tunnel 1 -

Positive Tunnel 2 -

Reverse Tunnel 2 -

Table 13-2 lists details on the planning of the Ethernet service. Table 13-2 Planning of the E-AGGR service carried by the PW Parameter Service ID Service Name MTU(byte) NE1 1 E-Aggr-1 1526 NE2 2 E-Aggr-2 1526 NE3 3 E-Aggr-3 1526

Table 13-3 lists details on planning of the PW at NNI. Table 13-3 Planning of the PW Parameter Location PW ID PW Signaling Type PW Type Direction PW Ingress Label PW Egress Label Peer IP Tunnel Bandwidth Limit CIR (kbit/s) NE1 Sink 10 Static Ethernet Mode Bidirectional 20 20 1.1.1.3 Tunnel 1 Enabled 45000 NE2 Sink 20 Static Ethernet Mode Bidirectional 30 30 1.1.1.3 Tunnel 2 Enabled 45000 NE3: NNI for NE1 Source 10 Static Ethernet Mode Bidirectional 20 20 1.1.1.1 Tunnel 1 Enabled 45000 NE3: NNI for NE2 Source 20 Static Ethernet Mode Bidirectional 30 30 1.1.1.2 Tunnel 2 Enabled 45000

13-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

Parameter PIR (kbit/s)

NE1 80000

NE2 80000

NE3: NNI for NE1 80000

NE3: NNI for NE2 80000

Table 13-4 and Table 13-5 lists details on the planning of the VLAN forwarding table of each NE. Table 13-4 Planning of the VLAN forwarding tables of NE1 and NE2 Parameter Source Interface Type Source Interface Source VLAN ID Sink Interface Type Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID NE1 V-UNI 1-EG16-19ETFC-1 100 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 1 V-UNI 1-EG16-19ETFC-2 100 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 2 NE2 V-UNI 1-EG16-19ETFC-1 100 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 3 V-UNI 1-EG16-19ETFC-2 100 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 4

Table 13-5 Planning of the VLAN forwarding table of NE3 Parameter Source Interface Type Source Interface Source VLAN ID Sink Interface Type Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID NE3: NNI for NE1 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 1 V-UNI 1-EG16-1 100 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-1 2 V-UNI 1-EG16-1 200 NE3: NNI for NE2 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-2 3 V-UNI 1-EG16-1 300 V-NNI 1-EG16-20POD41-2 4 V-UNI 1-EG16-1 400

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-11

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13.4.2 Configuring a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

The E-AGGR service is accessed to the UNIs of multiple NEs and then aggregated at the NNI. This section describes how to configure the UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service for NEs.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Procedure
Step 1 On the T2000, configure a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service for NE1. For details, see 13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service. Parameters related to the UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service are as follows.
l

UNI:

Selected Port: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 and 1-EG16-19-ETFC-2 VLANs: 100 Location: Sink PW ID: 10 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Mode Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 20 PW Egress Label: 20 Peer IP: 1.1.1.3 Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 45000 PIR (kbit/s): 80000

PW parameters of the NNI:

For details on parameters in the VLAN forwarding table, see Table 13-4.

Step 2 On the T2000, configure a UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service for NE2. For details, see 13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service. Parameters related to the UNIs-NNI E-AGGR service are as follows.
l

UNI:

Selected Port: 1-EG16-19-ETFC-1 and 1-EG16-19-ETFC-2 VLANs: 100 Location: Sink PW ID: 2 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Mode Direction: Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

PW parameters of the NNI:

13-12

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

PW Ingress Label: 3 PW Egress Label: 3 Peer IP: 1.1.1.3 Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 45000 PIR (kbit/s): 80000

For details on parameters in the VLAN forwarding table, see Table 13-4.

----End

13.4.3 Configuring an NNIs-UNI E-AGGR Service for NEs

The E-AGGR service is accessed to the NNIs of multiple NEs and then aggregated at the UNI. This section describes how to configure the NNIs-UNI E-AGGR service for NEs.

Prerequisite
You must understand the networking, requirements and service planning of the example.

Procedure
On the T2000, configure an NNIs-UNI E-AGGR service for NE3. For details, see 13.3.1 Creating an E-AGGR Service. Parameters related to the NNIs-UNI E-AGGR service are as follows:
l

UNI:

Selected Port: 1-EG16-1 VLANs: 100, 200, 300, 400 Location: Source PW ID: 10 PW Signaling Type: Static PW Type: Ethernet Mode Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 20 PW Egress Label: 20 Peer IP: 1.1.1.1 Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 45000 PIR (kbit/s): 80000 Location: Source PW ID: 20 PW Signaling Type: Static
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-13

PW1 parameters of the NNI:

PW2 parameters of the NNI:

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

PW Type: Ethernet Mode Direction: Bidirectional PW Ingress Label: 30 PW Egress Label: 30 Peer IP: 1.1.1.2 Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 45000 PIR (kbit/s): 80000

For details on parameters in the VLAN forwarding table, see Table 13-5.

----End

13.5 Parameter Description

This section describes the parameters related to the E-AGGR service configuration. Table 13-6 Descriptions of the parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item Field Source Interface Type Value V-UNI, V-NNI Description Select and query the type of the source interface. Click C.146 Source Interface Type for more information. Example: [Port]11EG16-1(Port-1) 1-4094 V-UNI, V-NNI Select and query the source interface. If Source Interface Type is set to V-NNI, the sink interface can be a port or PW. Set and query the source VLAN ID. Select and query the type of the sink interface. Click C.125 Sink Interface Type for more information. Example: [Port]11EG16-2(Port-2) 1-4094 Select and query the sink interface. If Sink Interface Type is set to V-NNI, the sink interface can be a port or PW. Set and query the sink VLAN ID.

Source Interface

Source VLAN ID Sink Interface Type

Sink Interface

Sink VLAN ID

Table 13-7 Descriptions of the parameters for E-AGGR Service Field Service ID Service Name
13-14

Value Example: 11 Example: test

Description Set and query the ID of the Ethernet service. Set and query the name of the Ethernet service.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

13 Configuring an E-AGGR Service

Field MTU (byte)

Value 46 to 9000 Default: 1500

Description Set the maximum transport unit (MTU). When receiving packets of a length more than the MTU, the port divides the packets into segments and then transport these segments. If the packets contain a flag indicating that packet division is not allowed, the port discards the packet. Click C.21 MTU(byte) for more information.

Service Tag Role

User

Display the service tag role of E-AGGR service.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-15

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

14

Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

About This Chapter

To provide high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) services in a mobile communication network, the offload solution can be used to transmit data services through a xDSL wholesale managed service (WMS) network. In this way, the transmission cost is reduced. 14.1 Basic Concepts This section describes the three offload solutions, that is, ATM-based solution, ETH-based solution, and IP-based solution. In addition, this section covers the packet encapsulation format and signal flow. 14.2 Service Configuration Flow for the Offload Solution This section describes the operational tasks for configuring services in the offload scenario and the sequence in performing these tasks. When configuring or management services in the offload scenario, see this section. 14.3 ATM-Based Service Configuration Case This section describes the offload solution for the case where ATM-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network. 14.4 ETH-Based Service Configuration Case This section describes the offload solution for the case where ETH-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network. 14.5 IP-Based Service Configuration Case This section describes the offload solution for the case where IP-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-1

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14.1 Basic Concepts

This section describes the three offload solutions, that is, ATM-based solution, ETH-based solution, and IP-based solution. In addition, this section covers the packet encapsulation format and signal flow.

Offload Solution
In the mobile backhaul domain, there is one application scenario called offload. In the case of offload, the base station shunts the accessed service flow. The traditional audio service, such as the 2G or 3G R99 CS service, is transported over the E1 private line. In this way, high QoS, low delay, and high reliability are achieved. In the case of the packet service that requires high bandwidth but no delay guarantee, such as the high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) service, the ADSL-based mode is adopted for backhaul. For example, the ADSL wholesale managed service (WMS) is applicable. The ADSL network provides high bandwidth and costs little. Hence, the ADSL network is well applicable to the packet service such as the HSDPA service. Generally, the PDH/SDH microwave is used or the TDM E1 private line is leased from the fixed network operator to transmit the backhaul service between the base station and base station controller (BSC). This is the reason why the Offload solution is adopted. With service development, the base station backhaul requires increasing bandwidth and the traditional audio service takes a decreasing proportion. In this case, it is not economical to lease more E1 links to increase the backhaul bandwidth, because the E1 links cost much. The offload solution is applicable to transmission of the ATM services, CES services, and Ethernet services. Figure 14-1 shows a typical scenario where the offload solution is applied. Node B connects to the OptiX PTN 1900 through the ATM IMA interface. The IMA E1 module of the OptiX PTN 1900 accesses the services and distinguishes various service flows according to the VPI/VCI values carried by the packets.
l

In the case of the HSDPA service flow, the OptiX PTN 1900 emulates the ATM PWE3 for the service flow on the access side and then encapsulates the emulated service into the tunnel as required by the WMS network. Finally, the OptiX PTN 1900 transports the service to the ADSL modem through the FE interface. When the encapsulated service enters the ADSL network, the service is transported to the OptiX PTN 3900. Then, the OptiX PTN 3900 decapsulates the service and transports the service to the radio network controller (RNC). The OptiX PTN 1900 at the access station transports the signaling flow and R99 service flow in the form of IMA E1 to the OptiX PTN 3900 at the convergence station.

14-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-1 Offload solution

Wholesale ADSL service HSDPA flow IMA Node B OptiX PTN 1900 ADSL modem DSLAM ATM STM-1

R99 flow Backhaul network

OptiX PTN 3900

RNC

In the Wholesale ADSL network, packets are transported in three modes, that is, ATM-based forward, ETH-based forward, and IP-based forward.

ATM-Based Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-2 shows the offload scenario for the ATM-based service. Figure 14-2 Offload scenario for the ATM-based service
ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM STM-1 ATM STM-1

ATM based

Wholesale ADSL service HSDPA flow IMA Node B OptiX PTN 1900 ADSL modem DSLAM ATM STM-1

R99 flow PTN

OptiX PTN 3900

RNC

In the application scenario for ATM-based forward services, the WMS works as an ATM switch network. The OptiX PTN 1900 encapsulates the ATM packets into Ethernet packets. Then, the ADSL modem performs the AAL5 adaptation and ATM encapsulation. Finally, the DSLAM terminates the ADSL and transports the encapsulated ATM packets into the ATM switch
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-3

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

network. The OptiX PTN 3900 terminates the AAL5 layer, recovers the Ethernet packets, and decapsulates the packets to obtain ATM packets.

ETH-Based Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-3 shows the offload scenario for the ETH-based forward service. Figure 14-3 Offload scenario for the ETH-based service
ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM STM-1

Eth based

Wholesale ADSL service HSDPA flow IMA Node B OptiX PTN 1900 ADSL modem DSLAM ATM STM-1

R99 flow PTN

OptiX PTN 3900

RNC

In the application scenario for ETH-based forward services, the WMS works as a Layer 2 ETH switch network. The OptiX PTN 1900 encapsulates the ATM packets into Ethernet packets. Then, the ADSL modem performs the AAL5 adaptation and ATM encapsulation. Finally, the DSLAM terminates the ADSL and ATM, and transports the encapsulated ATM packets into the Layer 2 ETH switch network. The OptiX PTN 3900 receives Ethernet packets and decapsulates the Ethernet packets to obtain ATM packets.

IP-Based Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-4 shows the offload scenario for the IP-based forward service.

14-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-4 Offload scenario for the IP-Based services

ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label GRE IP Ethernet ATM STM-1

IP based

Wholesale ADSL service HSDPA flow IMA Node B OptiX PTN 1900 ADSL modem DSLAM ATM STM-1

R99 flow PTN

OptiX PTN 3900

RNC

In the application scenario for IP-based forward services, the WMS works as an IP switch network. The OptiX PTN 1900 encapsulates the ATM packets into Ethernet packets. Then, the ADSL modem performs the AAL5 adaptation and ATM encapsulation. Finally, the DSLAM terminates the ADSL and ATM, and forwards (Layer 3) the packets to the OptiX PTN 3900. The OptiX PTN 3900 receives Ethernet packets and decapsulates the Ethernet packets to obtain ATM packets. In this scenario, an IP/GRE tunnel should be set up between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 to carry the PW. In this figure, IP in the packet encapsulation format indicates that the packets are carried by the IP tunnel. In the case of PW carrying over the GRE tunnel, IP is replaced with GRE.

14.2 Service Configuration Flow for the Offload Solution

This section describes the operational tasks for configuring services in the offload scenario and the sequence in performing these tasks. When configuring or management services in the offload scenario, see this section. Figure 14-5, Figure 14-6, Figure 14-7 show the configuration flow of services in the offload solution. For details of each step, see the related section.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-5

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 14-5 Configuration flow of the ATM-based service in the offload solution

Required Start Optional Creat the network

Configure the interface

Creat the IMA group

Configure the control plane Create MPLS/IP/GRE tunnel Create the ATM policy Create the ATM service Create the ATM connection End

14-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Figure 14-6 Configuration flow of the ETH-based service in the offload solution

Required Start Optional Creat the network

Configure the interface Configure the control plane Create MPLS/IP/ GRE tunnel Configure the QoS policy

Create the service

End

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-7

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 14-7 Configuration flow of the IP-based service in the offload solution

Required Optional

Start

Creat the network

Configure the interface Create the static route Create the static ARP table entry Create IP/GRE tunnel Configure the QoS policy

Create the service

End

14.3 ATM-Based Service Configuration Case

This section describes the offload solution for the case where ATM-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network. 14.3.1 Case Description This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the ATM. 14.3.2 Configuration Process This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an ATMforwarding-based network.

14-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

14.3.1 Case Description

This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the ATM.

Networking and Requirement

Two Node Bs are accessed through two IMA groups of the OptiX PTN 1900, and the two Node Bs communicate with the RNC connected to the OptiX PTN 3900 at the opposite end through the network. Services of Node B include the R99 voice service and high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) service. The voice service, which is carried by the backhaul network constructed by the OptiX PTN equipment, requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee. The HSDPA service does not require low delay, but it only requires bandwidth guarantee. Hence, the ATM network of a third party operator is leased. The OptiX PTN 1900 differentiates services according to the VPI and VCI values, and then distributes the services to two different routes for transmission.
l

HSDPA service: The HSDPA service is converged to the DSLAM equipment through the ADSL modem, and then it enters the leased ATM network of the third party operator for transmission. The HSDPA service requires only bandwidth guarantee, and thus the lease cost is low. R99 voice service: The R99 voice service is transported through the backhaul network. The equipment in the network is the OptiX PTN equipment series. The R99 voice service requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee.

Figure 14-8 shows the networking diagram.

l

HSDPA service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/101, and then transport the service to the FE interface of the ETFC. After added with a new VPI/VCI through the ADSL modem, the service is transported to the OptiX PTN 3900 through the ATM network. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC. MPLS Tunnel 1 is set up between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 for carrying the service. Figure 14-8 shows the encapsulation format of packets at the interface of each equipment. The red lines indicate the VPI/VCI values at ATM layers in the packets. R99 voice service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/100, and then transport the service to the POS interface of the POD41. The service is carried by MPLS Tunnel 2, and then is transported to the OptiX PTN 3900. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-9

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 14-8 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the ATM forwarding and packet encapsulation format
ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM STM-1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM STM-1 3-MP1-ASD1-1 4-MP1-AD1-1
20/40 1/100 1/101 46/80 46/81

ATM STM-1

CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:1-4

7-ETFC-1

Node B 1
1/100 1/101

ADSL modem HSDPA flow R99 flow

56/80 56/81

DSLAM

Wholesale ADSL service

20/40 46/80 46/81 56/80 56/81

56/80 56/81

ATM STM-1

RNC

Node B 2 4-POD41-1 CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:5-8

PTN 1-EG16-19-POD41-1

MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 2 OptiX PTN 1900 OptiX PTN 3900

The ADSL modem can work in the bridge or router mode.

l

When the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode, the ADSL modem performs the EoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The access node uses the MPLS tunnel or IP tunnel. When the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the ADSL modem performs the IPoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The access node uses the IP tunnel or GRE tunnel.

In this example, the OptiX PTN 1900 uses the MPLS tunnel, and the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode. If the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the configuration method is the same. The difference is that the IP tunnel or GRE tunnel, instead of the MPLS tunnel, is used to carry the HSDPA service.
NOTE

The ASD1 supports four AAL5 encapsulation types, that is, LLC bridge, LLC route, VCMUX bridge and VCMUX route. In the actual application, the encapsulation type should be consistent with the working mode of the ADSL Modem.

Service Planning
The offload is a solution instead of a service or feature. Hence, according to the user requirement and networking diagram of this example, this example uses the offload solution to perform the following tasks.
14-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

1.

Configure the member interfaces and create the IMA group. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two IMA groups for accessing the IMA services of two Node Bs.

2.

Create the Ethernet virtual interface. On the OptiX PTN 3900, set the interface of the ASD1 to the Ethernet virtual interface, set the port mode to Layer 3. In addition, the setting of the AAL5 encapsulation type should be consistent with the working mode of the ADSL modem. After the Ethernet virtual interface is created, the ATM interface of the ASD1 can be carried in the tunnel on the network side.

3.

Create MPLS tunnel 1. This tunnel is used for carrying the HSDPA service. Normally, the static MPLS tunnel is created on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900, because the network is a leased network of the third party operator.

4.

Create MPLS tunnel 2. This tunnel is used for carrying the R99 voice service, which resides on the POS interfaces of the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900.

5.

Create the ATM policy (CBR and UBR). Create the ATM policy before creating the ATM service. On the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM policies respectively. CBR is used for the R99 voice service, and UBR is used for the HSDPA service.

6.

Create the ATM service.

l l

On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM services, and access the services of Node B. On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM services, and access the services of RNC. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different MPLS tunnels for carrying the services. On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different MPLS tunnels for carrying the services.

7.

Create the ATM connection.

l

NOTE

In the leased network of the third party operator, the services are configured by the third party operator.

The parameter planning is as follows: Table 14-1 lists the planning of the voice service and data service in the network.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-11

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-1 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service Service Service Bandwidt h User-Side VPI/VCI Value NetworkSide VPI/ VCI Value VPI/VCI Value Added at the ATM Layer After the AAL5 Adaptatio n 20/40 20/40 VPI/VCI Value on the RNC Side

R99 voice service of Node B 1 HSDPA service of Node B 1 R99 voice service of Node B 2 HSDPA service of Node B 2

2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s

1/100 1/101 1/100 1/101

56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81

56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81

Table 14-2 lists the planning of the UNIs. The OptiX PTN 1900 needs to create two IMA groups to access two Node B services. The OptiX PTN 3900 needs to interconnect 4-MP1-AD1-1 to RNC. Table 14-2 Planning of the UNIs Equipment Interface OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) OptiX PTN 3900:4-MP1AD1-1 Binding Interface 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 Interface Attribute The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the SDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default.

3-L75-5 to 3-L75-8

Table 14-3 lists the planning of the NNIs.

14-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Table 14-3 Planning of the NNIs Equipment Interface Interface Type Port Mode IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Interface 192.168.1.5/30 192.168.1.6/30 VPI/VCI Value (Only for the EOA Virtual Interface) 20/40

OptiX PTN 1900:7-ETFC-1 OptiX PTN 3900:3-MP1ASD1-1 OptiX PTN 1900:4POD41-1

Ethernet interface EOA virtual interface SDH interface

Layer 3 Layer 3

Layer 3

192.168.2.5/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.2.6/30. ) 192.168.10.6/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.10.5/30 .)

OptiX PTN 3900:19POD41-1

SDH interface

Layer 3

NOTE

ADSL The modem performs the AAL5 adaptation on the accessed services, and then adds a VPI/VCI to the services. The VPI/VCI value for the Ethernet EOA virtual interface should be consistent with the preceding VPI/VCI value.

Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 list the planning of the MPLS tunnel and related PW.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-13

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-4 Planning of the MPLS tunnel MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel ID Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 1900 7-ETFC Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 3900 Ethernet virtual interface: 3MP1ASD1-1 19-POD41-1 MPLS Tunnel Type Tunnel Bandwidth

MPLS Tunnel 1

Forward: 50 Reverse: 51

Static

No restriction

MPLS Tunnel 2

Dynamic distribution

4-POD41-1

Dynamic

No restriction

NOTE

If the type of the MPLS tunnel 1 is static, manually specify the IP address of the next hop and the IP addresses of the source and sink nodes. If the type of the MPLS tunnel 2 is dynamic, manually specify the restriction condition. Hence, the tunnel passes through the specified interfaces.

Table 14-5 Planning of the PW P W PW Signali ng Type PW Type PW Labe l Opposite IP Address Max. Conca tenate d Cell Count Packe tisatio n Buffer ing Time (us) 1000 QoS Policy of the ATM Connection

P W 1

Static

ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t

100

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.1.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.1.5

10

Service Type: UBR Traffic Type: NoTrafficDescriptor

P W 2

Dynami c

Dyna mic distri butio n

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.10.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.2.5

Service Type: CBR. Traffic Type: NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 10000

Table 14-6 and Table 14-7 list the planning of the ATM services on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900.
14-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Table 14-6 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900 Attribute Node B of the Service Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy ATM Service 1 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) HSDPA 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) HSDPA 2 ATM Service 2 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) R99 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) R99 2

1/101 46/80 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

1/101 46/81 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

1/100 56/80 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

1/100 56/81 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

Table 14-7 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900 Attribute Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service ATM Service 1 4-MP1-AD1-1 HSDPA 1 HSDPA 2 R99 1 R99 2 ATM Service 2

46/80 46/80 PW1

46/81 46/81 PW1

56/80 56/80 PW2

56/81 56/81 PW2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-15

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Attribute Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy

ATM Service 1 MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 1

ATM Service 2 MPLS Tunnel 2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

14.3.2 Configuration Process

This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an ATMforwarding-based network.

Prerequisite
l l l

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. You must know the networking and data planning of this case. Because the Offload solution involves configuration of many operation tasks, you are supposed to learn how to configure interfaces and tunnels, how to create the QoS policy, and how to configure ATM services before the configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface. Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and Encapsulation Type to ATM for eight interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-8. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management , and click the Binding tab. Bind interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 and interfaces ranging from 3L75-5 to 3-L75-8 to Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 respectively. Step 3 Choose IMA Group Management. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled for 1CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk-1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Step 4 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 3900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface. Click New, set 3-MP1-ASD1-1 to EOA Virtual Interface in the Create Ethernet Virtual Interface dialog box. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Set AAL5 Encapsulation Type to LLC BRIDGE. Set VPI to 20. Set VCI to 40. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.6.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Layer 3 attributes

14-16

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252. Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled.

NOTE

The AAL5 encapsulation type should be consistent with the working mode of the ADSL modem.

Step 5 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface . Set 19-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters. Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.10.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Set 7-ETFC-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Use the default values for other parameters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-17

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Layer 3 attributes

Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.5. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Step 7 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface . Set 4-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters. Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 8 Create MPLS tunnel 1 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900. Because the type of the tunnel is Static, you need to create a static MPLS tunnel on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 respectively. For the method of creating the tunnel in this case, see 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis. Step 9 Create MPLS tunnel 2 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. You can dynamically create the MPLS tunnel because tunnel 2 passes the PTN equipment. Set attributes of each interface of the NEs involved properly before the creation. For the method of the tunnel in this case, see 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function. Step 10 Create two ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 respectively. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management. Then, select ATM Policy and click New.
l l

The ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900 should be consistent. In the case of the CBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Set Service Type to CBR. Set Traffic Type to NoClpNoScr. Set Clp01Pcr(cell/s) to 10000. Set Service Type to UBR. Set Traffic Type to NoTrafficDescriptor.

In the case of the UBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Step 11 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/101 to respectively 46/80 and 46/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the 7-ETFC-1 interface. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > ATM Service Management. Click the Connection tab, and click New. Set the parameters as follows:
l

Set Service Type to UNIs-NNI.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

14-18

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Set Connection Type to PVC. Set the parameters for connection 1 as follows:

Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-1(Trunk-1). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 80. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy. Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 81. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy.

Set the parameters for connection 2 as follows:

Setting the parameters of PW1 as follows: General Attributes:

Set PW ID to 1. Set PW Signaling Type to Static. Set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport. Set PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label to 100. Set Peer IP to 192.168.1.6. Set Tunnel Type to MPLS. Set Tunnel to created MPLS Tunnel 1. Set Max. Concatenated Cell Count to 10. Set Packet Loading Time(us) to 1000. Ingress

QoS

Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 10240 CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 15000 PBS (byte): Policy: EXP: 1

Advanced Attributes:

Control Word: Must use

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-19

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Control Channel Type: CW (CW realizes connectivity check of the PW.) VCCV Verification Mode: Ping ( PW Ping realizes connectivity check of the PW.) Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet) Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

NOTE

PW advanced attributes such as Control Word, Control Channel Type and VCCV Verification Mode need be set according to the user requirements. For detailed configuration steps, refer to 10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.

Step 12 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/100 to respectively 56/80 and 56/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the 4-POD41-1 interface. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 11. In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. Step 13 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 46/80 and 46/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the Ethernet virtual interface on the network side. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 11. Step 14 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 56/80 and 56/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the POS interface on the network side. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 11.In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. ----End

14.4 ETH-Based Service Configuration Case

This section describes the offload solution for the case where ETH-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network. 14.4.1 Case Description This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the ETH. 14.4.2 Configuration Process This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an ETHforwarding-based network.

14-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

14.4.1 Case Description

This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the ETH.

Networking and Requirement

Two Node Bs are accessed through two IMA groups of the OptiX PTN 1900, and the two Node Bs communicate with the RNC connected to the OptiX PTN 3900 at the opposite end through the network. Services of Node B include the R99 voice service and high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) service. The voice service, which is carried by the backhaul network constructed by the OptiX PTN equipment, requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee. The HSDPA service does not require low delay, but it only requires bandwidth guarantee. Hence, the Layer 2 switching network of a third party operator is leased. The OptiX PTN 1900 differentiates services according to the VPI and VCI values, and then distributes the services to two different routes for transmission.
l

HSDPA service: The HSDPA service is converged to the DSLAM equipment through the ADSL modem, and then it enters the leased ETH network of the third party operator for transmission. The HSDPA service requires only bandwidth guarantee, and thus the lease cost is low. R99 voice service: The R99 voice service is transported through the backhaul network. The equipment in the network is the OptiX PTN equipment series. The R99 voice service requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee.

Figure 14-9 shows the networking diagram.

l

HSDPA service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/101, and then transport the service to the FE interface of the ETFC. The ADSL modem completes the AAL5 adaptation and ATM encapsulation, and the DSLAM removes the ADSL and ATM layers. Then, the Ethernet packets are sent to the ETH switching network. The ETH switching network sends the service to the OptiX PTN 3900. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC. MPLS Tunnel 1 is set up between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 for carrying the service. Figure 14-9 shows the encapsulation format of packets at the interface of each equipment. The red lines indicate the VPI/VCI values at ATM layers in the packets. R99 voice service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/100, and then transport the service to the POS interface of the POD41. The service is carried by MPLS Tunnel 2, and then is transported to the OptiX PTN 3900. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-21

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Figure 14-9 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the ETH forwarding and packet encapsulation format
ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label LSP Label Ethernet ATM STM-1

CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:1-4

7-ETFC-1

1-EG16-1
20/30

4-MP1-AD1-1

1/100 1/101

46/80 46/81

Node B 1
1/100 1/101

ADSL modem HSDPA flow R99 flow

56/80 56/81

DSLAM

Wholesale ADSL service

46/80 46/81 56/80 56/81 56/80 56/81

ATM STM-1

RNC

Node B 2 4-POD41-1 CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:5-8

PTN 1-EG16-19-POD41-1

MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 2 OptiX PTN 1900 OptiX PTN 3900

The ADSL modem can work in the bridge or router mode.

l

When the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode, the ADSL modem performs the EoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The OptiX PTN 1900 on the access node uses the MPLS Tunnel or IP Tunnel. When the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the ADSL modem performs the IPoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The OptiX PTN 1900 at the access node uses the IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel.

In this example, the OptiX PTN 1900 uses the MPLS Tunnel, and the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode. If the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the configuration method is the same. The difference is that the IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel, instead of the MPLS Tunnel, is used to carry the HSDPA service. When the IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel is used, you should configure the static route and static ARP on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. If the equipment cannot dynamically obtain the ARP, the static ARP still needs to be configured.

Service Planning
The offload is a solution instead of a service or feature. Hence, according to the user requirement and networking diagram of this example, this example uses the offload solution to perform the following tasks.
14-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

1.

Create the IMA group and configure the member interfaces. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two IMA groups for accessing the IMA services of two Node Bs.

2.

Configure attributes of the NNI. After the NNI is configured, you can create the MPLS Tunnel on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900.

3.

Configure the control plane.

l

Before creating a dynamic tunnel, configure the IS-IS protocol and set the parameters related to the RSPF protocol. To create a dynamic tunnel, you need to configure a static ARP. After the static ARP is configured, the equipment finds the corresponding MAC address in the ARP table entry according to the destination IP address, and then writes the MAC address as the destination MAC to the ETH layer of the packet. The Layer 2 switching network forwards the packet to the destination according to this MAC address. Static MPLS Tunnel 1 should use this table entry.

4.

Create MPLS tunnel 1. This tunnel is used for carrying the HSDPA service. Normally, the static MPLS tunnel is created on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900, because the network is a leased network of the third party operator.

5.

Create MPLS Tunnel 2. This tunnel is used for carrying the R99 voice service, which resides on the POS interfaces of the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900.

6.

Create the QoS policy (CBR and UBR). Create the ATM policy before creating the ATM service. On the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM policies respectively. CBR is used for the R99 voice service, and UBR is used for the HSDPA service.

7.

Create the ATM service.

l l

On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM services, and access the services of Node B. On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM services, and access the services of RNC. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different MPLS Tunnels for carrying the services. On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different MPLS Tunnels for carrying the services.

8.

Create the ATM connection.

l

NOTE

In the leased network of the third party operator, the services are configured by the third party operator.

The parameter planning is as follows: Table 14-8 lists the planning of the voice service and data service in the network.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-23

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-8 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service Service Service Bandwidt h User-Side VPI/VCI Value NetworkSide VPI/ VCI Value VPI/VCI Value Added at the ATM Layer After the AAL5 Adaptatio n 20/30 20/30 VPI/VCI Value on the RNC Side

R99 voice service of Node B 1 HSDPA service of Node B 1 R99 voice service of Node B 2 HSDPA service of Node B 2

2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s

1/100 1/101 1/100 1/101

56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81

56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81

Table 14-9 lists the planning of the UNIs. The OptiX PTN 1900 needs to create two IMA groups to access two Node B services. The OptiX PTN 3900 needs to interconnect 4-MP1-AD1-1 to RNC. Table 14-9 Planning of the UNIs Equipment Interface OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) OptiX PTN 3900:4-MP1AD1-1 Binding Interface 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 Interface Attribute The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the SDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default.

3-L75-5 to 3-L75-8

Table 14-10 lists the planning of the NNIs.

14-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Table 14-10 Planning of the NNIs Equipment Interface Interface Type Port Mode IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Interface 192.168.1.5/30 MAC Address of the Interface 00-00-00-00-00 -01 (for creating the static ARP) 00-00-00-00-00 -02 (for creating the static ARP) -

OptiX PTN 1900:7-ETFC-1 OptiX PTN 3900:1-EG16-1 OptiX PTN 1900:4POD41-1

Ethernet interface Ethernet interface SDH interface

Layer 3

Layer 3

192.168.1.6/30

Layer 3

192.168.2.5/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.2.6/30. ) 192.168.10.6/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.10.5/30 .)

OptiX PTN 3900:19POD41-1

SDH interface

Layer 3

Table 14-11 and Table 14-12 list the planning of the MPLS Tunnel and related PW.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-25

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-11 Planning of the MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel ID Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 1900 7-ETFC Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 3900 1-EG16-1 MPLS Tunnel Type Tunnel Bandwidth

MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 2

Forward: 50 Reverse: 51 Dynamic distribution

Static

No restriction No restriction

4-POD41-1

19-POD41-1

Dynamic

NOTE

If the type of the MPLS Tunnel 1 is static, manually specify the IP address of the next hop and the IP addresses of the source and sink nodes. If the type of the MPLS Tunnel 2 is dynamic, manually specify the restriction condition. Hence, the tunnel passes through the specified interfaces.

Table 14-12 Planning of the PW P W PW Signali ng Type PW Type PW Labe l Opposite IP Address Max. Conca tenate d Cell Count Packe tisatio n Buffer ing Time (us) 1000 QoS Policy of the ATM Connection

P W 1

Static

ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t

100

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.1.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.1.5

10

Service Type: UBR Traffic Type: NoTrafficDescriptor

P W 2

Dynami c

Dyna mic distri butio n

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.10.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.2.5

Service Type: CBR. Traffic Type: NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 10000

Table 14-13 and Table 14-14 list the planning of the ATM services on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900.

14-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Table 14-13 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900 Attribute Node B of the Service Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy ATM Service 1 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) HSDPA 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) HSDPA 2 ATM Service 2 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) R99 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) R99 2

1/101 46/80 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

1/101 46/81 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

1/100 56/80 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

1/100 56/81 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

Table 14-14 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900 Attribute Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service ATM Service 1 4-MP1-AD1-1 HSDPA 1 HSDPA 2 R99 1 R99 2 ATM Service 2

46/80 46/80 PW1

46/81 46/81 PW1

56/80 56/80 PW2

56/81 56/81 PW2

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-27

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Attribute Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy

ATM Service 1 MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 1

ATM Service 2 MPLS Tunnel 2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

14.4.2 Configuration Process

This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an ETHforwarding-based network.

Prerequisite
l l

You must know the networking and data planning of this case. Because the Offload solution involves configuration of many operation tasks, you are supposed to learn how to configure interfaces and tunnels, how to create the QoS policy, and how to configure ATM services before the configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface. Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and Encapsulation Type to ATM for eight interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-8. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management, and click the Binding tab. Bind interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 and interfaces ranging from 3L75-5 to 3-L75-8 to Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 respectively. Step 3 Choose IMA Group Management. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled for 1CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk-1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Step 4 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 3900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Set 1-EG16-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Use the default values for other parameters Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 5 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface. Set 19-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
14-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.10.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Set 7-ETFC-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Use the default values for other parameters Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.5. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 7 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface. Set 4-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 8 Create static ARP on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Address Parse . Click Create.
l

OptiX PTN 1900

Set ARP List IP to 192.168.10.6. Set ARP List MAC to 00-00-00-00-00-02. Set ARP List IP to 192.168.1.5. Set ARP List MAC to 00-00-00-00-00-01.

OptiX PTN 3900

Step 9 Create MPLS tunnel 1 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900. Because the type of the tunnel is Static, you need to create a static MPLS tunnel on the OptiX PTN 1900 and
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-29

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

OptiX PTN 3900 respectively. For the method of creating the tunnel in this case, see 6.5 Creating an MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis. Step 10 Create MPLS tunnel 2 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. You can dynamically create the MPLS tunnel because tunnel 2 passes the PTN equipment. Set attributes of each interface of the NEs involved properly before the creation. For the method of the tunnel in this case, see 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function. Step 11 Create two ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 respectively. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management . Then, select ATM Policy and click New.
l l

The ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900 should be consistent. In the case of the CBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Set Service Type to CBR. Set Traffic Type to NoClpNoScr. Set Clp01Pcr(cell/s) to 10000. Set Service Type to UBR. Set Traffic Type to NoTrafficDescriptor.

In the case of the UBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Step 12 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/101 to respectively 46/80 and 46/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the 7-ETFC-1 interface. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > ATM Service Management. Click the Connection tab, and click New. Set the parameters as follows:
l l l

Set Service Type to UNIs-NNI. Set Connection Type to PVC. Set the parameters for connection 1 as follows:

Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-1(Trunk-1). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 80. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 81. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Set the parameters for connection 2 as follows:

14-30

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Setting the parameters of PW1 as follows: General Attributes:

Set PW ID to 1. Set PW Signaling Type to Static. Set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport. Set PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label to 100. Set Peer IP to 192.168.1.6. Set Tunnel Type to MPLS. Set Tunnel to created MPLS Tunnel 1. Set Max. Concatenated Cell Count to 10. Set Packet Loading Time(us) to 1000. Ingress

QoS

Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 10240 CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 15000 PBS (byte): Policy: EXP: 1

Advanced Attributes:

Control Word: Must use Control Channel Type: CW (CW realizes connectivity check of the PW.) VCCV Verification Mode: Ping ( PW Ping realizes connectivity check of the PW.) Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet) Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

NOTE

PW advanced attributes such as Control Word, Control Channel Type and VCCV Verification Mode need be set according to the user requirements. For detailed configuration steps, refer to 10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.

Step 13 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/100 to respectively 56/80 and 56/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the 4-POD41-1 interface. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 12. In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. Step 14 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 46/80 and 46/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the Ethernet virtual interface on the network side.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-31

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 12. Step 15 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 56/80 and 56/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the POS interface on the network side. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 12. In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. ----End

14.5 IP-Based Service Configuration Case

This section describes the offload solution for the case where IP-based services traverse the wholesale ADSL network. 14.5.1 Case Description This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the IP. 14.5.2 Configuration Process This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an IP-forwardingbased network.

14.5.1 Case Description

This section describes the offload solution to the wholesale ADSL network, which is forwarded according to the IP.

Networking and Requirement

Two Node Bs are accessed through two IMA groups of the OptiX PTN 1900, and the two Node Bs communicate with the RNC connected to the OptiX PTN 3900 at the opposite end through the network. Services of Node B include the R99 voice service and high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) service. The voice service, which is carried by the backhaul network constructed by the OptiX PTN equipment, requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee. The HSDPA service does not require low delay, but it only requires bandwidth guarantee. Hence, the IP network of a third party operator is leased. The OptiX PTN 1900 differentiates services according to the VPI and VCI values, and then distributes the services to two different routes for transmission.
l

HSDPA service: The HSDPA service is converged to the DSLAM equipment through the ADSL modem, and then it enters the leased IP network of the third party operator for transmission. The HSDPA service requires only bandwidth guarantee, and thus the lease cost is low. R99 voice service: The R99 voice service is transported through the backhaul network. The equipment in the network is the OptiX PTN equipment series. The R99 voice service requires QoS guarantee, low delay and bandwidth guarantee.

Figure 14-10 shows the networking diagram.

14-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

HSDPA service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/101, and then transport the service to the FE interface of the ETFC. The ADSL modem completes the AAL5 adaptation and ATM encapsulation, and the DSLAM removes the ADSL and ATM layers. Then, the Ethernet packets are sent to the IP switching network. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC. IP Tunnel 1 is set up between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 for carrying the service. Figure 14-10 shows the encapsulation format of packets at the interface of each equipment. The red lines indicate the VPI/VCI values at ATM layers in the packets. R99 voice service: On the OptiX PTN 1900, perform the VPI/VCI switching on the service with a VPI/VCI value of 1/100, and then transport the service to the POS interface of the POD41. The service is carried by MPLS Tunnel 2, and then is transported to the OptiX PTN 3900. The OptiX PTN 3900 rearranges the service and then converges the service to the ATM STM-1 interface. Then, the service is transported to RNC.

Figure 14-10 Networking diagram of the offload application scenario based on the IP forwarding and packet encapsulation format
ATM E1 ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet AAL5 ATM ADSL ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet ATM PWE3 PW Label IP Ethernet ATM STM-1

CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:1-4

7-ETFC-1

1-EG16-1 4-MP1-AD1-1 Wholesale ADSL service

46/80 46/81 56/80 56/81 56/80 56/81

1/100 1/101

46/80 46/81

Node B 1
1/100 1/101

ADSL modem HSDPA flow R99 flow

56/80 56/81

DSLAM

ATM STM-1

RNC

Node B 2 4-POD41-1 CXP-1-MD1-3-L75:5-8

PTN 1-EG16-19-POD41-1

IP Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 2 OptiX PTN 1900 OptiX PTN 3900

The ADSL modem can work in the bridge or router mode.

l

When the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode, the ADSL modem performs the EoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The OptiX PTN 1900 on the access node uses the MPLS Tunnel or IP Tunnel.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-33

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the ADSL modem performs the IPoA encapsulation on the accessed FE signals. The OptiX PTN 1900 at the access node uses the IP Tunnel or GRE Tunnel.

In this example, the OptiX PTN 1900 uses the MPLS Tunnel, and the ADSL modem works in the bridge mode. If the ADSL modem works in the router mode, the configuration method is the same. In this case, the GRE Tunnel is created to carry the HSDPA service.

Service Planning
The offload is a solution instead of a service or feature. Hence, according to the user requirement and networking diagram of this example, this example uses the offload solution to perform the following tasks. 1. Create the IMA group and configure the member interfaces. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two IMA groups for accessing the IMA services of two Node Bs. 2. Configure attributes of the interface. The attributes of the interface carry the tunnel should be configured on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. 3. Create the static route. Create the static route on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. The static route is used for creating the IP Tunnel. 4. Create the static ARP table entry. After the static ARP is configured, the equipment finds the corresponding MAC address in the ARP table entry according to the destination IP address, and then writes the MAC address as the destination MAC to the ETH layer of the packet. The Layer 2 switching network forwards the packet to the destination according to this MAC address. Static MPLS Tunnel should use this table entry. 5. Create IP Tunnel 1. This tunnel is used for carrying the HSDPA service. The ports where the tunnel resides are the FE interface of the OptiX PTN 1900 and the GE interface of the OptiX PTN 3900. 6. Create MPLS Tunnel 2. This tunnel is used for carrying the R99 voice service, which resides on the POS interfaces of the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. 7. Create the QoS policy (CBR and UBR). Create the ATM policy before creating the ATM service. On the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM policies respectively. CBR is used for the R99 voice service, and UBR is used for the HSDPA service. 8. Create the ATM service.
l l

On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM services, and access the services of Node B. On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM services, and access the services of RNC. On the OptiX PTN 1900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different Tunnel for carrying the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

9.

Create the ATM connection.

l

14-34

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

On the OptiX PTN 3900, create two ATM connections in each ATM service, and encapsulate the services to different PWs according to the VPI/VCI value, and select different Tunnel for carrying the services.

NOTE

In the leased network of the third party operator, the services are configured by the third party operator.

The parameter planning is as follows: Table 14-15 lists the planning of the voice service and data service in the network. Table 14-15 VPI/VCI values of the Node B service Service Service Bandwidth 2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s User-Side VPI/VCI Value 1/100 1/101 1/100 1/101 NetworkSide VPI/ VCI Value 56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81 VPI/VCI Value on the RNC Side 56/80 46/80 56/81 46/81

R99 voice service of Node B 1 HSDPA service of Node B 1 R99 voice service of Node B 2 HSDPA service of Node B 2

Table 14-16 lists the planning of the UNIs. The OptiX PTN 1900 needs to create two IMA groups to access two Node B services. The OptiX PTN 3900 needs to interconnect 4-MP1AD1-1 to RNC. Table 14-16 Planning of the UNIs Equipment Interface OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) OptiX PTN 1900:1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) OptiX PTN 3900:4-MP1AD1-1 Binding Interface 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 Interface Attribute The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the PDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default. The port mode of the SDH interface is set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type is ATM by default.

3-L75-5 to 3-L75-8

Table 14-17 lists the planning of the NNIs.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-35

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-17 Planning of the NNIs Equipment Interface OptiX PTN 1900:7ETFC-1 OptiX PTN 3900:1EG16-1 OptiX PTN 1900:4POD41-1 Interface Type Port Mode IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Interface 192.168.1.5/30 192.168.20.6/30 192.168.2.5/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.2.6/30.) 192.168.10.6/30 (In the backhaul network, the IP address and mask of the interface of the OptiX PTN equipment interconnected to this SDH interface is 192.168.10.5/30.)

Ethernet interface Ethernet interface SDH interface

Layer 3 Layer 3 Layer 3

OptiX PTN 3900:19POD41-1

SDH interface

Layer 3

Table 14-18 lists the planning of the static routing table entries. Table 14-18 Planning of the static routing table entries Parameter Route List ID Board Port Next Hop IP Address OptiX PTN 1900 1 7-ETFC 1(PORT-1) 192.168.1.6 (IP address of the interface of the equipment interconnected to the DSLAM in the leased network) 192.168.20.6 OptiX PTN 3900 1 1-EG16 1(PORT-1) 192.168.20.5 (IP address of the interface of the equipment interconnected to the OptiX PTN 3900 in the leased network) 192.168.1.5

Destination Node IP

14-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Parameter Destination Node Subnet Mask

OptiX PTN 1900 255.255.255.255

OptiX PTN 3900 255.255.255.255

Table 14-19 and Table 14-20 list the planning of the tunnel and related PW. Table 14-19 Planning of the Tunnel Tunnel Tunnel ID Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 1900 7-ETFC Interface of the Tunnel Carried by the OptiX PTN 3900 1-EG16-1 Tunnel Type Sink Port IP Address Tunnel Bandwid th

IP Tunnel 1

50

Static IP Tunnel

OptiX PTN 1900:192. 168.20.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192. 168.1.5

No restriction

MPLS Tunnel 2

Dynamic distributio n

4POD41-1

19POD41-1

Dynamic MPLS Tunnel

No restriction

NOTE

As the type of the IP Tunnel 1 is static, you need to create the static ARP and manually specify Sink Port IP Address of the IP Tunnel. If the type of the MPLS Tunnel 2 is dynamic, manually specify the restriction condition. Hence, the tunnel passes through the specified interfaces.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-37

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Table 14-20 Planning of the PW P W PW Signali ng Type PW Type PW Labe l Opposite IP Address Max. Conca tenate d Cell Count Packe tisatio n Buffer ing Time (us) 1000 QoS Policy of the ATM Connection

P W 1

Static

ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t ATM n to one VCC cell transpor t

100

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.20.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.1.5

10

Service Type: UBR Traffic Type: NoTrafficDescriptor

P W 2

Dynami c

Dyna mic distri butio n

OptiX PTN 1900:192.1 68.10.6 OptiX PTN 3900:192.1 68.2.5

Service Type: CBR. Traffic Type: NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr(cell/s): 10000

Table 14-21 and Table 14-22 list the planning of the ATM services on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. Table 14-21 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 1900 Attribute Node B of the Service Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service ATM Service 1 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) HSDPA 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) HSDPA 2 ATM Service 2 Node B 1 1-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) R99 1 Node B 2 1-MD1-2 (Trunk-2) R99 2

1/101 46/80 PW1

1/101 46/81 PW1

1/100 56/80 PW2

1/100 56/81 PW2

14-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Attribute Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy

ATM Service 1 MPLS Tunnel 1 MPLS Tunnel 1

ATM Service 2 MPLS Tunnel 2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

Table 14-22 Planning of the ATM service on the OptiX PTN 3900 Attribute Source Port ATM Connection (Two ATM Connections for Each ATM Service) Source VPI/ VCI Sink VPI/VCI PW Carrying the Service Tunnel Carrying the PW Uplink Policy Downlink Policy ATM Service 1 4-MP1-AD1-1 HSDPA 1 HSDPA 2 R99 1 R99 2 ATM Service 2

46/80 46/80 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

46/81 46/81 PW1 MPLS Tunnel 1

56/80 56/80 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

56/81 56/81 PW2 MPLS Tunnel 2

UBR UBR

UBR UBR

CBR CBR

CBR CBR

14.5.2 Configuration Process

This section describes the configuration process of the Offload application in an IP-forwardingbased network.

Prerequisite
l

You must know the networking and data planning of this case.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-39

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Because the Offload solution involves configuration of many operation tasks, you are supposed to learn how to configure interfaces and tunnels, how to create the QoS policy, and how to configure ATM services before the configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface. Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and Encapsulation Type to ATM for eight interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-8. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management, and click the Binding tab. Bind interfaces ranging from 3-L75-1 to 3-L75-4 and interfaces ranging from 3L75-5 to 3-L75-8 to Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 respectively. Step 3 Choose IMA Group Management. Then, set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled for 1CXP-1-MD1-1(Trunk-1) and 1-CXP-1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Step 4 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 3900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Set 1-EG16-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Use the default values for other parameters Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.20.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 5 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface. Set 19-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters. Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.10.6. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select OptiX PTN 1900. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface. Set 7-ETFC-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Port Mode to Layer 3. Use the default values for other parameters.

Layer 3 attributes
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

14-40

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.1.5. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Step 7 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > SDH Interface. Set 4-POD41-1 as an network-side interface. Then, set the parameters as follows:
l

Basic attributes

Set Encapsulation Type to PPP. Use the default values for other parameters. Set Enable Tunnel to Enabled. Set Specify IP to Manually. Set IP Address to 192.168.2.5. Set IP Mask to 255.255.255.252.

Layer 3 attributes

Step 8 Create static routes on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Static Route Management . Click Create.
l

OptiX PTN 1900

Set Board to 7-ETFC-1. Set Port to 1(PORT-1). Set Next Hop IP Address to 192.168.1.6. Set Destination Node IP to 192.168.20.6. Set Destination Node Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.255. Set Board to 1-EG16-1. Set Port to 1(PORT-1). Set Next Hop IP Address to 192.168.20.5. Set Destination Node IP to 192.168.1.5. Set Destination Node Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.255.

OptiX PTN 3900

Step 9 Create static ARP on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Control Plane Configuration > Address Parse . Click Create.
l

OptiX PTN 1900

Set ARP List IP to 192.168.10.6. Set ARP List MAC to 00-00-00-00-00-02. Set ARP List IP to 192.168.1.5. Set ARP List MAC to 00-00-00-00-00-01.

OptiX PTN 3900

Step 10 Create IP tunnel 1 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900. Because the type of the tunnel is Static, you need to create the IP tunnels on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-41

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

3900 respectively. For the method of creating the tunnel in this case, see 7.2 Creating IP Tunnels. Step 11 Create MPLS tunnel 2 between the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900. You can dynamically create the MPLS tunnel because tunnel 2 passes the PTN equipment. Set attributes of each interface of the NEs involved properly before the creation. For the method of the tunnel in this case, see 6.2 Creating a Dynamic MPLS Tunnel and the FRR Protection by Using the Trail Function. Step 12 Create two ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 respectively. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management . Then, select ATM Policy and click New.
l l

The ATM policies on the OptiX PTN 1900 and the OptiX PTN 3900 should be consistent. In the case of the CBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Set Service Type to CBR. Set Traffic Type to NoClpNoScr. Set Clp01Pcr(cell/s) to 10000. Set Service Type to UBR. Set Traffic Type to NoTrafficDescriptor.

In the case of the UBR policy, set the parameters as follows:

Step 13 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/101 to respectively 46/80 and 46/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the 7-ETFC-1 interface. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > ATM Service Management. Click the Connection tab, and click New. Set the parameters as follows:
l l l

Set Service Type to UNIs-NNI. Set Connection Type to PVC. Set the parameters for connection 1 as follows:

Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-1(Trunk-1). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 80. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy. Set Source Board to 1-CXP. Set Source Port to 1-MD1-2(Trunk-2). Set Source VPI to 1. Set Source VCI to 101. Set Sink VPI to 46. Set Sink VCI to 81. Set Uplink Policy and Downlink Policy to the created UBR policy.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Set the parameters for connection 2 as follows:

14-42

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

Setting the parameters of PW1 as follows: General Attributes:

Set PW ID to 1. Set PW Signaling Type to Static. Set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport. Set PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label to 100. Set Peer IP to 192.168.1.6. Set Tunnel Type to MPLS. Set Tunnel to created MPLS Tunnel 1. Set Max. Concatenated Cell Count to 10. Set Packet Loading Time(us) to 1000. Ingress

QoS

Bandwidth Limit: Enabled CIR (kbit/s): 10240 CBS (byte): PIR (kbit/s): 15000 PBS (byte): Policy: EXP: 1

Advanced Attributes:

Control Word: Must use Control Channel Type: CW (CW realizes connectivity check of the PW.) VCCV Verification Mode: Ping ( PW Ping realizes connectivity check of the PW.) Max. Concatenated Cell Count: 10 (the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet) Packet Loading Time (us): 1000

NOTE

PW advanced attributes such as Control Word, Control Channel Type and VCCV Verification Mode need be set according to the user requirements. For detailed configuration steps, refer to 10.3.2 Creating ATM Services on a Per-NE Basis.

Step 14 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 1900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. Change the VPI/VCI values of the two services accessed by the two IMA groups from 1/100 to respectively 56/80 and 56/81, encapsulate the services, and then send the services to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the 4-POD41-1 interface. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 13. In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. Step 15 Create ATM service 1 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 1. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 46/80 and 46/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 1 carried by the Ethernet virtual interface on the network side.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-43

14 Configuring Services for the Offload Solution

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 13. Step 16 Create ATM service 2 on the OptiX PTN 3900. Create two ATM connections in ATM service 2. The VPI/VCI exchange need not be performed. Send the services whose VPI/VCI values are respectively 56/80 and 56/81 and accessed by the 4-MP1-AD1-1 interface to MPLS tunnel 2 carried by the POS interface on the network side. For the configuration parameters, see the service planning in the case description. Set the parameters according to Step 13. In the case of PW2, PW Signaling Type should be set to Dynamic. In addition, PW Ingress Label and PW Egress Label need not be set. ----End

14-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

15

Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

About This Chapter

The OptiX PTN equipment provides the alarm input and output interfaces for monitoring the equipment alarms and environment alarms. The alarm input interface inputs the external environment monitoring information to the OptiX PTN equipment, and the OptiX PTN equipment reports the information to the NMS center. Hence, the external environment is monitored and managed on the T2000. The alarm output interface outputs the alarm information to the alarm monitoring center, and then the alarm monitoring center manages the alarms in a centralized manner. 15.1 Application of the Environment Monitoring Interfaces On the system control board, the alarm output interface and alarm input interface are called environment monitoring interfaces on the T2000. The environment monitoring interfaces are used to transmit the information about the alarms for the OptiX PTN equipment and the external operating environment for the OptiX PTN equipment. Hence, the information about the alarms for the equipment and the external operating environment status are managed in a centralized manner. 15.2 Setting Attributes of the Input Relay On the T2000, you can set the attributes of the input relay. You can monitor the status of the external environment where the equipment is operating through the environment monitoring interface. When the operating environment is abnormal, an alarm is reported on the T2000. 15.3 Setting the Output Status of the Alarm Relay The alarm information of the OptiX PTN equipment can be transmitted to the alarm monitoring center through the alarm output interface. Hence, the alarms can be easily managed. 15.4 Querying and Configuring the Board Temperature Monitoring On the T2000, you can query and configure the upper threshold and lower threshold of the board temperature, and monitor the board temperature status. If the operating temperature of the board is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold, the TEMP_OVER alarm is reported. This ensures that the board is operating in the normal temperature.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-1

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

15.1 Application of the Environment Monitoring Interfaces

On the system control board, the alarm output interface and alarm input interface are called environment monitoring interfaces on the T2000. The environment monitoring interfaces are used to transmit the information about the alarms for the OptiX PTN equipment and the external operating environment for the OptiX PTN equipment. Hence, the information about the alarms for the equipment and the external operating environment status are managed in a centralized manner. As shown in Figure 15-1, the alarm monitoring center monitors the operating status of the equipment in the equipment room, and manages the alarm information in a centralized manner. The alarm collection module detects the external operating environment status of the equipment with regard to temperature, humidity, and security of the equipment room.
l

Alarm output interface (ALMO1): The ALMO interface is a common interface for two alarm outputs and two alarm concatenations. As shown in Figure 15-1, the information about the alarms for the OptiX PTN equipment can be output through the alarm output interface to the alarm monitoring center, or the information about the alarms for multiple sets of OptiX PTN equipment is concatenated and then managed in a centralized manner through the alarm output interface. Alarm Input interface (ALMI1/ALMI2): The ALMI1 interface is the interface for one to four alarm inputs, and the ALMI2 interface is the interface for five to eight alarm inputs. The system control board supports a total of eight alarm inputs. As shown in Figure 15-1, the information about the external operating status for the equipment that is collected by the alarm collection module is input to the OptiX PTN equipment through the alarm input interface. When the external operating environment status is abnormal, an alarm is reported on the T2000. Hence, the external operating environment can be easily managed by the NMS.

Figure 15-1 Application of the alarm input/output interfaces

ALMO1 Alarm monitoring center

System control board NMS

ALMI1 ALMI2

Alarm collection module

OptiX PTN equipment

15-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

15.2 Setting Attributes of the Input Relay

On the T2000, you can set the attributes of the input relay. You can monitor the status of the external environment where the equipment is operating through the environment monitoring interface. When the operating environment is abnormal, an alarm is reported on the T2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the icon of the SCA in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select Input Relay from the drop-down menu. Set Using Status of the alarm input interface to Used.
NOTE

In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment, you can set eight alarm inputs, and each alarm input can monitor one external environment status. For the description of the ALMI1/ALMI2 interface, see Front Panel of the SCA in the Product Description.

Step 3 Set Alarm Mode according to the monitored environment information.

NOTE

According to the alarm mechanism of the external environment, set the alarm mode as follows:
l l

An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns On and High Level is Caused: indicates that the relay turns on, and the alarm is reported when the high level is input to the alarm interface. An Alarm is Generated if the Relay Turns Off and Low Level is Caused: indicates that the relay turns off, and the alarm is reported when the low level is input to the alarm interface.

Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

15.3 Setting the Output Status of the Alarm Relay

The alarm information of the OptiX PTN equipment can be transmitted to the alarm monitoring center through the alarm output interface. Hence, the alarms can be easily managed.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-3

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the icon of the SCA in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Select General Attributes from the drop-down menu.

Step 3 According to the actual requirement, set Relay Control to Auto Control or Manual Control.
NOTE

By default, the relay control mode is the automatic control mode. Auto Control: In this mode, if an alarm is reported, the alarm information is automatically output. Manual Control: In this mode, you should manually set the status of the alarm relay. The alarm information is output to the alarm monitoring center through the alarm interface only when the replay status is set to Enabled.

Step 4 If you select Manual Control, you can set Relay Status in Major Alarm and Relay Status in Critical Alarm. Step 5 Click Apply. ----End

15.4 Querying and Configuring the Board Temperature Monitoring

On the T2000, you can query and configure the upper threshold and lower threshold of the board temperature, and monitor the board temperature status. If the operating temperature of the board is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold, the TEMP_OVER alarm is reported. This ensures that the board is operating in the normal temperature.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Context
The equipment monitors the board temperature and reports the alarm only when the monitoring status is set to Monitor. By default, the board temperature monitoring status is Monitor. In this case, you can just use the default values of the upper threshold and lower threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the icon of a board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

15 Configuring the External Environment Monitoring Interfaces

Step 2 Select Temperature Attributes from the drop-down menu, and then set Monitor Status.

Step 3 Set Temperature Upper Threshold() and Temperature Lower Threshold(). Click Apply. ----End

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15-5

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

16 Backing up the Configuration Data

16

Backing up the Configuration Data

About This Chapter

To back up the configuration data is to back up the data stored on the T2000 and that stored on the NE. To back up the data stored on the T2000, back up the MO data of the T2000. To back up the data stored on the NE, backup the NE database. 16.1 Periodically Backing Up the T2000 MO Data You can set a scheduled backup task for the database so that the T2000 automatically backs up the T2000 database at a scheduled time. This facilitates the operation and the maintenance. 16.2 Backing Up NE Databases During routine maintenance, you need to back up the NE database so that the NE can automatically recover the data if the NE software data is lost or a power failure occurs in the equipment.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-1

16 Backing up the Configuration Data

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

16.1 Periodically Backing Up the T2000 MO Data

You can set a scheduled backup task for the database so that the T2000 automatically backs up the T2000 database at a scheduled time. This facilitates the operation and the maintenance.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

Context
NOTE

In a distributed system, back up T2000 data on the Master server.

NOTE

In a distributed system, back up T2000 data on the Master server of the active site.
l

On Solaris, to back up the MO data periodically by using the command line, run the following commands on the active server as user t2000:
% su Password: Password_of_user_root # cd /T2000/server/database # ./configTask.sh

Follow the instructions displayed on the terminal to perform operations.

l

On SUSE Linux, to back up the MO data periodically by using the command line, run the following commands on the active server as user t2000:
% su Password: Password_of_user_root # cd /T2000/server/database # ./configTask.sh

Follow the instructions displayed on the terminal to perform operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Schedule Task Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 Click New, and the Task Creation Wizard is displayed.
NOTE

If you have not defined a scheduled task, a prompt is displayed.

Step 3 Select Database Backup in the Select task type field and enter the task name. Click Next. Step 4 Set a backup directory for the server, and click Next.
NOTE

By self-defining a backup directory, you can avoid the impacts on the backup data that may be caused when you reinstall the system or format disk C. In this way, the maintainability of the system is improved. Make sure that no space, punctuation or non-English character exists in the path.

Step 5 Set the running period and click Next.

NOTE

The interval of different scheduled tasks must be set above 20 minute.

l

The scheduled time for a task is based on the server time.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

16-2

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

16 Backing up the Configuration Data

When creating or modifying a scheduled task, if the running period is set to Running once or Daily, set the start time of the scheduled task at least five minutes later than the current time (the server time).

Step 6 Set the time to run the task. Step 7 Click Finish. The system backs up the T2000 database according to the time settings. ----End

Postrequisite
Use the network management system maintenance suite to back up the deployment information of the network management system immediately.

16.2 Backing Up NE Databases

During routine maintenance, you need to back up the NE database so that the NE can automatically recover the data if the NE software data is lost or a power failure occurs in the equipment.

Prerequisite
l l

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher. Log in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click the double-right-arrow button (red). Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List. Step 4 Click Back Up NE Data. l l If you need to back up the data to the SCC board, choose Back Up Database to SCC. To manually back up the NE data to a CF card, select Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.

Step 5 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. After the backup is complete, click Close. ----End

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-3

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

A Glossary

A
3G A Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Glossary

3G stands for third generation, which indicates the mobile communication system of the next generation. In addition to the audio service, the 3G mobile communication system can also provide enhanced services such as multimedia services and video services.

The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is designed to transfer cell in which multiple service types (such as voice, video, or data) are conveyed in fixed-length (53-byte) cells. Fixed-length cells allow cell processing to occur in hardware, thereby reducing transit delays.

B bandwidth broadcast Bypass Tunnel It is used to describe the rated throughput capacity of a given network medium or protocol. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. An LSP that is used to protect a set of LSPs passing over a common facility.

C circuit emulation service committed burst size A technology adapts the traditional narrowband services, that is, TDM services, to the wideband. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Glossary

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

committed information rate constant bit rate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Through signalling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in support of call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination.

control plane

D downstream In an access network, where there is a clear indication in each deployment as to which end of a link is closer to a subscriber, transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.

E Ethernet Line An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains.

F frame The packet data unit described in the OSI model. It consists of frame header, user data and frame tail. The frame header and frame tail are used for synchronization and error control.

H HSDPA Hold Priority The HSDPA can provide a high transmission rate for downlink data (from the wireless access network to mobile terminal). The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

I Inloop intermediate system A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A node that is capable of forwarding data packets in the OSI network.

A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

A Glossary

L Label Distribution Protocol A protocol defined in RFC 3036 for distributing labels in MPLS network. It is the set of procedures and messages by which Label Switched Routers (LSRs) establish Label Switched Paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly to data-link layer switched paths. More information about the applicability of LDP can be found in [RFC3037]. A group in which multiple links connected to the same equipment are bundled together to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link. A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

link aggregation group loopback

M multicast A communication method used to copy and deliver data packets to a number of destination members in a specified group. Multicast covers point-to-multipoint multicast and multipoint-to-multipoint multicast.

N NodeB WCDMA Base Station

O outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals.

P PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. The unit of data output to, or received from, the network by a protocol layer.

peak information rate Protocol Data Unit

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

A Glossary

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Quality of Service

A set of service requirements to be met by the network while transporting a connection or flow; the collective effect of service performance which determine the degree of satisfaction of a user of the service. (E.360.1)

R route Path through an network.

S Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other tunnels.

T Tail Drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. A mechanism to control the traffic going out an interface in order to match its flow to the speed of the remote, target interface and to ensure that the traffic conforms to policies contracted for it. A secure communication path between two peers, such as two routers.

traffic shaping

tunnel

U unspecified bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. UBR requires no specified traffic parameter. It allows any amount of data up to a specified maximum to be transmitted over the network and does not provide QoS guarantees. In an access network, where there is a clear indication in each deployment as to which end of a link is closer to a subscriber, transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.

upstream

V variable bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. VBR is subdivided into a real time class (rt-VBR) and non-real time class (nrtVBR). rt-VBR is applicable to services that are sensitive to delay or jitter and have the burst feature. nrt-VBR is applicable to services that are insensitive to delay or jitter but need provide certain QoS guarantees for the traffic.

A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

A Glossary

W Wholesale ADSL Service Wholesale ADSL indicates the ADSL network service used to transmit HSDPA services for the offload solution. Compared with the TDM links, the Wholesale ADSL service provides higher data transmission rates with lower cost.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B
A ADSL ATM C CBR CBS

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Asymmetrical Digital Subscribe Line Asynchronous Transfer Mode

constant bit rate committed burst size

D DCN Data communication network

E E-LAN E-Line Ethernet LAN Ethernet Line

G GPS Global Position System

I IS-IS Intermediate system to intermediate system.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

LAG LDP LSP LSR

link aggregation group Label Distribution Protocol label switch path. label switch router

M ML-PPP MSTP Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

N NSAP network service access point.

O OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

P PBS PDU PIR PPP PRC PSN PW PWE3 peak burst size Protocol Data Unit peak information rate Point-to-Point Protocol Primary Reference Clock packet switching network pseudo wire pseudo wire emulation edge to edge

Q QoS Quality of Service

T TDM Time Division Multiplexing

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

V VCI VPI V-UNI virtual channel identifier virtual path identifier virtual user-network interface

W WFQ WRED weighted fair queuing weighted random early detection

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C
C.1 64KTs C.2 AF1 Schedule Weight C.3 AF2 Schedule Weight C.4 AF3 Schedule Weight C.5 AF4 Schedule Weight C.6 ATM Port Type C.7 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling C.8 BPDU (E-Line) C.9 CBS C.10 CC Test Transmit Period C.11 CC Status C.12 CIR C.13 CoS C.14 CRC Check Length C.15 IP Address Negotiation Result C.16 IP Mask Negotiation Result C.17 Specify IP C.18 LSP Mode C.19 MAC Address Learning Mode C.20 Self-learning MAC Address C.21 MTU(byte)
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Parameter Reference

When following the Configuration Guide and Feature Description to configure the relevant functions, you can read this document to learn about information such as description, value range, and setting rules of the parameters to be set.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.22 NNI (Ethernet Service) C.23 OAM Working Mode C.24 Enable OAM Protocol C.25 PBS C.26 PHB C.27 PHY Loopback C.28 PIR C.29 PPP Link Status C.30 PW ID C.31 PW Egress Label C.32 PW Direction C.33 PW Type C.34 PW Signaling Type C.35 QinQ Link ID C.36 RTP Head C.37 S-VLAN ID C.38 Tag Type C.39 Tunnel C.40 Enable Tunnel C.41 UNI (Ethernet Service) C.42 VCCV Verification Mode C.43 VLAN Forwarding Table Item C.44 V-UNI ID C.45 V-UNI Group Type C.46 WFQ Scheduling Policy C.47 Packet Type C.48 Packet Color C.49 Packet Loading Time C.50 Packet Loading Time (us) C.51 Duplicated Policy Name C.52 Local Working Status C.53 Test Result C.54 Policy ID
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.55 Policy Name C.56 Member Interface C.57 Bearer Type C.58 Egress Port C.59 Handling Mode C.60 Handling Mode (Ethernet Unknown Frame) C.61 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame) C.62 Error Frame Monitor Window (ms) C.63 Error Frame Second Threshold (s) C.64 Error Frame Second Window (s) C.65 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries) C.66 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries) C.67 Error Frame Period Threshold (frame) C.68 Error Frame Period Window (frame) C.69 Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag C.70 Unidirectional Operation C.71 Address Table Specified Capacity C.72 Address Detection Upper Threshold (%) C.73 Address Detection Lower Threshold (%) C.74 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes) C.75 Discard Probability (%) C.76 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes) C.77 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time C.78 Port Transmit Status C.79 Port Receive Status C.80 Port Mode C.81 Enable Port C.82 Port Priority C.83 Peer IP C.84 Transmitted Packet Length C.85 Transmitted Packet Count C.86 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM) C.87 Direction
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-3

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.88 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port) C.89 Encapsulation Type C.90 PIR C.91 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm C.92 Load Sharing C.93 Working Mode C.94 Loopback Status (EFMOAM Parameter) C.95 Revertive Mode C.96 Laser Interface Enabling Status C.97 Laser Transmission Distance (m) C.98 Activation Status C.99 Scrambling Capability (POS Port) C.100 Detection Result C.101 Static MAC Address C.102 LAG Type C.103 Control Channel Type C.104 Control Word (ATM Service) C.105 Aging Ability C.106 Aging Time (min) C.107 Connection Type C.108 Enable Differential Delay C.109 Link Event Notification C.110 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing C.111 Traffic Classification Rule C.112 Name C.113 Default Packet Relabeling Color C.114 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules C.115 Match Type C.116 Match Value C.117 Default Forwarding Priority C.118 Coloration Mode C.119 Uplink Policy C.120 Clock Mode
C-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.121 Clock Mode (PDH/SDH Port) C.122 Split Horizon Group C.123 Split Horizon Group ID C.124 Split Horizon Group Member C.125 Sink Interface Type C.126 Sink Node C.127 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address C.128 Used Port C.129 Hop Count C.130 Wildcard C.131 Maintenance Domain Level C.132 Tail Drop Threshold (256bytes) C.133 Unknown Frame Processing C.134 Location C.135 Physical Port ID C.136 System Priority (LAG) C.137 Downlink Policy C.138 Line Encoding Format C.139 Response Maintenance Point ID C.140 Signal Type C.141 CDVT (us) C.142 Service Type (ATM Service) C.143 Service Type (ATM Policy) C.144 Service Type (Ethernet OAM) C.145 Service Name C.146 Source Interface Type C.147 Remote OAM Parameter C.148 Remote OAM Working Mode C.149 Remote Side Loopback Response C.150 Remote Working Status C.151 Used Timeslot C.152 Frame Format C.153 Frame Type
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-5

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.154 VC-Switching-Supported VPIs C.155 Main Port C.156 Main Port Status C.157 Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port) C.158 Compositive Working Status C.159 Impedance C.160 Max. OAM Packet Length (byte) C.161 Max. VCI Bits C.162 Max. VPI Bits C.163 Max. Differential Delay (100 us) C.164 Max. Concatenated Cell Count C.165 Max Data Packet Size(byte) C.166 MBS (Cells) C.167 Max Frame Length(byte)-Ethernet interface C.168 Min. Activated Link Count C.169 Direction

C-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.1 64KTs
Description
The 64KTs parameter indicates the timeslot compression list during the configuration of the structured emulation CES services. The selected timeslots are loaded to the PW packets, and then are transmitted to the opposite end through the Ethernet.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-31 Default Value None

Value 1 5-7 3, 7-9

Description Indicates timeslot 1 is compressed. Indicates timeslots 5-7 are compressed. Indicates timeslots 3 and 7-9 are compressed.

Configuration Guidelines
The timeslot lists at the two ends can be inconsistent, but the number of timeslots must be consistent. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When you create a CES service, 64KTs can be set only when PW Type is set to CESoPSN.

Related Information
None.

C.2 AF1 Schedule Weight

Description
The QoS scheduling modes include eight queues. The scheduling algorithm is: Schedule the CS7 queue > schedule the CS6 queue > schedule the EF queue > schedule the AF1-AF4 queues according to the weights of the queues > schedule the BE queue. The AF1 Schedule Weight
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-7

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

parameter indicates the percentage of the AF1 queue to the weight when the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the weight.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-100 Default Value 25 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
The bigger the value of the AF1 scheduling weight, the higher is scheduling priority of the AF1 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller. Reversely, the smaller the value of the AF1 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling priority of the AF1 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is bigger.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The sum of values of AF1, AF2, AF3, and AF4 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.

C.3 AF2 Schedule Weight

Description
The QoS scheduling modes include eight queues. The scheduling algorithm is: Schedule the CS7 queue > schedule the CS6 queue > schedule the EF queue > schedule the AF1-AF4 queues according to the weights of the queues > schedule the BE queue. The The AF2 Schedule Weight parameter indicates the percentage of the AF2 queue to the weight when the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the weight.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-100 Default Value 25 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
The bigger the value of the AF2 scheduling weight, the higher is the scheduling priority of the AF2 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller.
C-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Reversely, the smaller the value of the AF2 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling priority of the AF2 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is bigger.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The sum of values of the AF2, AF1, AF3, and AF4 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.

C.4 AF3 Schedule Weight

Description
The QoS scheduling modes include eight queues. The scheduling algorithm is: Schedule the CS7 queue > schedule the CS6 queue > schedule the EF queue > schedule the AF1-AF4 queues according to the weights of the queues > schedule the BE queue. The AF3 Schedule Weight parameter indicates the percentage of the AF3 queue to the weight when the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the weight.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-100 Default Value 25 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
The bigger the value of the AF3 scheduling weight, the higher is the scheduling priority of the AF3 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller. Reversely, the smaller the value of the AF3 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling priority of the AF3 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is bigger.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The sum of values of the AF3, AF1, AF2, and AF4 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.

C.5 AF4 Schedule Weight

Description
The QoS scheduling modes include eight queues. The scheduling algorithm is: Schedule the CS7 queue > schedule the CS6 queue > schedule the EF queue > schedule the AF1-AF4 queues according to the weights of the queues > schedule the BE queue. The AF4 Schedule Weightt parameter indicates the percentage of the AF4 queue to the weight when the AF1-AF4 queues are scheduled according to the weight.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-9

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-100 Default Value 25 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
The bigger the value of the AF4 scheduling weight, the higher is the scheduling priority of the AF4 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is smaller. Reversely, the smaller the value of the AF4 scheduling weight, the lower is the scheduling priority of the AF4 queue. In this case, when the bandwidth is insufficient, the packet loss ratio is bigger.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The sum of values of the AF4, AF1, AF2, and AF3 scheduling weights cannot exceed 100.

C.6 ATM Port Type

Description
The ATM Port Type parameter identifies the ATM port type. This parameter is used for setting the ATM port type. The ATM port type includes the UNI and NNI. The UNI indicates the user network interface, and the NNI indicates the network node interface. These two types of interfaces are used in different network locations. Normally, the UNI is used in the location where the terminal accesses the ATM network. The NNI is mainly used in the location between two ATM networks. The standard UNI interface has the flow control function, in which the higher four bits of the VPI reports back whether the congestion occurs. Hence, the range of the number of VPI bits of the UNI interface is four higher bits less than the range of the number of VPI bits of the NNI interface.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range UNI, NNI Default Value UNI

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value UNI NNI

Description Indicates the range of the number of VPI bits: 1-255. Indicates the range of the number of VPI bits: 1-4095.

Configuration Guidelines
By default, the ATM port type is UNI. If the port type is UNI, the maximum value of the VPI configured is 255. If a service whose VPI value exceeds 255 need be configured, set the port type to NNI. In this case, the maximum VPI value is 4095.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When the ATM connection is available on the port, the user cannot modify the port type.

Related Information
None.

C.7 ATM Cell Payload Scrambling

Description
The ATM Cell Payload Scrambling parameter identifies whether the ATM cell load on the ATM port is scrambled or descrambled. This parameter is used to set whether the load on the ATM port is scrambled or descrambled.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the ATM cell load is scrambled. Indicates that the ATM cell load is descrambled.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-11

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
When two ports are interconnected, if the opposite end is set to scrambled, the local end should also be set to scrambled. The reverse case is similar.

C.8 BPDU (E-Line)

Description
The BPDU (E-Line) parameter sets whether the service needs transparently transmit the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. The BPDU is the information transmitted between bridges. It is used to switch information between bridges, and then the spanning tree of the network is computed.

Impact on the System

If the BPDU transparent transmission identifier of the Ethernet service of an NE is enabled, the port where the service VUNI resides cannot process the BPDU packets, and the MSTP cannot be enabled on this port. After the BPDU transparent transmission is enabled, the BPDU packets are transmitted as service packets.

Values
Value Range Transparently Transmitted, Not Transparently Transmitted Default Value Not Transparently Transmitted

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Transparently Transmitted Not Transparently Transmitted Description The BPDU packets are transparently transmitted to the opposite end as service packets. The BPDU packets are processed on the local NE as protocol packets.

Configuration Guidelines
If the BPDU packets need be transparently transmitted to the opposite end of the network as service packets, set the BPDU to Transparently Transmitted during the service creation. If the BPDU packets need be processed on the local NE as protocol packets for computing the network spanning tree, set the BPDU to Not Transparently Transmitted during the service creation.
C-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Relationship with Other Parameters

If the BPDU is set to Transparently Transmitted for the Ethernet services carried by an Ethernet port, the MSTP cannot be enabled. After the MSTP is enabled on the port, the BPDU transparent transmission services cannot be configured on the port.

C.9 CBS
Description
The CBS parameter indicates the committed burst size (CBS). When the bandwidth is insufficient, certain packets cannot enter the queue for forwarding in time. In this case, a buffer, where these packets are stored, is required. Then, after the bandwidth is sufficient, these packets are forwarded. Hence, the CBS indicates the ensured size of the buffer space. When the size of data need be buffered is smaller than the CBS, this data that are temporarily buffered can be fully transmitted without packet loss.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Port policy: 2-64000. V-UNI ingress policy: 64-131072. V-UNI egress policy: 64-1310722. PW policy: 64-131072. QINQ policy: 64-131072. Default Value Unit Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte

Configuration Guidelines
When the bandwidth is insufficient, the smaller the CBS is, the bigger the possibility of packet overflow is. Thus, the packet loss of various degrees occurs. When the bandwidth is insufficient, the bigger the CBS is, the bigger the number of packets buffered is. Thus, the packet loss ratio is smaller. The bigger the CBS is, however, the bigger the jitter is during packet forwarding.

C.10 CC Test Transmit Period

Description
The source end MEP constructs the CC frames, and then transmits them periodically to the destination MEP. After the destination MEP receives the CCM messages from the source end,
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-13

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

the CC check function of the source MEP is directly started. Within a certain period (3.5 times of the transmission period), if the destination MEP does not receive the CC packets from the source end, an alarm is automatically reported. The CC Test Transmit Period parameter indicates the transmission period of the unidirectional connectivity check.

Impact on the System

After the CC check is started, a portion of the bandwidth on the port is used.

Values
Value Range 3.33ms/10ms/100ms/1s/10s/1m/10m Default Value 1s

Configuration Guidelines
It is recommended that you use three period values, that is, 3.33ms for protection switching, 100ms for performance check, and 1s for connectivity check. The configuration should comply with user requirements. If the fast check is required, set to 3.33ms. Hence, the fault can be detected quickly. The bandwidth used, however, descends with the period value.

C.11 CC Status
Description
The CC Status parameter indicates whether the CC check function of this MEP is activated.

Impact on the System

If the CC is activated, the bandwidth is used. Otherwise, the bandwidth is not used.

Values
Value Range Active, Inactive Default Value Active

Configuration Guidelines
If the check is needed, select Active. Otherwise, select Inactive.

C.12 CIR
Description
The CIR parameter indicates the ensured bandwidth of the queue. In other words, the packets within this bandwidth range can be completely forwarded. If the rate of the packets entering the
C-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

queue is smaller than the CIR, all the packets are forwarded. If the rate of the packets entering the queue is bigger than the CIR, the scheduling algorithm discards packets according to a certain packet loss policy.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Port policy: 1000-1000000. V-UNI ingress policy: 320-10000000. V-UNI egress policy: 320-100000000. PW policy: 320-10000000. QINQ policy: 320-10000000. Default Value Unit Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s

Configuration Guidelines
The bigger the bandwidth ensured by the CIR is, the higher the traffic rate can be accepted. Hence, the data packets can be better forwarded.

Relationship with Other Parameters

In the case of a random queue, the CIR value should not exceed the PIR value. In the case of the CS7, CS6, and EF queues, the CIR value must be equal to the PIR value. If the policy is applied to the effect point (PW, port, VUNI, or QINQ), the sum of CIR values of each policy bandwidth applied to this point should not exceed the CIR value of the bandwidth of this point.

C.13 CoS
Description
The CoS parameter indicates the class of service. Eight CoS values, that is, CS7, CS6, EF, AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1, and BE, are available according to the standard. Different CoS values correspond to different queues. The equipment provides different QoS for queues of different CoS.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-15

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range CS7, CS6, EF, AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1, BE Default Value -

The following table lists the description of each value. Value CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE Description The CS7 queue is of the highest priority, and the packets are forwarded first. After the packets of the CS7 queue are forwarded, the packets of the CS6 queue are forwarded. After the packets of the CS6 queue are forwarded, the packets of the EF queue are forwarded. After the packets of the preceding three queues are forwarded, packets of AF1-AF4 queues are forwarded according to the WFQ weight. After the packets of the preceding three queues are forwarded, packets of AF1-AF4 queues are forwarded according to the WFQ weight. After the packets of the preceding three queues are forwarded, packets of AF1-AF4 queues are forwarded according to the WFQ weight. After the packets of the preceding three queues are forwarded, packets of AF1-AF4 queues are forwarded according to the WFQ weight. After the packets of the preceding seven queues are forwarded, the packets of the BE queue are forwarded as possible.

Configuration Guidelines
The name of the queue is specified by the user.

C.14 CRC Check Length

Description
The CRC Check Length parameter sets the length of the cyclical redundancy check (CRC) character for the POS port. Two lengths of the CRC character, that is, 16-bit and 32-bit, are supported. The CRC Check Length parameter is used to check the error in the transmission data of the communication line.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
C-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range 16, 32 Default Value 32 Unit Bit

Configuration Guidelines
The length of the CRC character is set according to the size of the test block. To ensure that 99.998% of the possible errors can be detected, the 16-bit CRC checks all the single-bit and two-bit errors. It is determined that this level is effective for data block transmission of 4 kbytes or smaller. In the case of transmission of bigger data blocks, the 32-bit CRC is applicable. In the Ethernet and token ring networks, the 32-bit CRC is applicable.

Related Information
The CRC is a method of checking errors in the transmission data of the communication line. If the transmission equipment adds a 16-bit or 32-bit polynomial, which is the CRC added in the data block during the transmission. The receive terminal adds the same polynomial to the data, and then compare the result with the result of the polynomial added to the transmission equipment. If the two results are consistent, it indicates that the data is successfully received. If not, the transmit end sends the data block again.

C.15 IP Address Negotiation Result

Description
The IP Address Negotiation Result parameter indicates that the negotiation result can be queried after the MLPPP protocol is enabled. This parameter indicates the distributed IP address after the MLPPP link negotiates with the opposite end.

Values
Value Range Valid IPV4 address Default Value None.

In the case of the OptiX PTN V100R001, the query result is the IP address during the configuration of MLPPP Layer 3 port.

C.16 IP Mask Negotiation Result

Description
The IP Mask Negotiation Result parameter indicates that the negotiation result can be queried after the MLPPP protocol is enabled. This parameter indicates the IP address mask after the MLPPP link negotiates with the opposite end.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-17

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range Valid IPV4 address mask Default Value None.

C.17 Specify IP
Description
The Specify IP parameter, set by port, indicates the method of specifying the IP address parameter of a specified port.

Impact on the System

The IP address parameter of the port is the prerequisite for service creation. If the current IP address parameter is invalid, the services cannot be created.

Values
Value Range Manually, Unnumbered NE IP, Unnumbered Interface IP Default Value Manually

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Manually Description Indicates the IP parameter of the specified port. If the IP address parameter is valid, specify an IP address to the current port. If the IP address is invalid, release the IP address of the current port. Indicates that the current port uses the NE IP address as its IP address. Indicates that the current port uses the IP address of another port as its IP address.

Unnumbered NE IP Unnumbered Interface IP

Configuration Guidelines
Commonly, the IP address of the port is specified. If the current IP address resources are insufficient, the current port can use the NE IP address or the IP address of another port. In addition, the port uses the NE IP address or the IP address of another port only in the PPP link. The IP address parameters of the NE and port whose IP addresses are used should be valid.
C-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Relationship with Other Parameters

The IP address parameter can be configured only when the port is in the Layer 3 mode. In the case of the PPP link, the current link layer encapsulation type should be PPP.

C.18 LSP Mode

Description
When the PW is labeled, the CoS of the packets may be modified. Hence, when the PW label is removed, you should determine whether the CoS of user packets need be written back. The LSP Mode parameter specifies whether a writing back tag is required.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Pipe, Uniform Default Value Uniform

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Pipe Uniform Description Indicates the CoS of the packets written back when the PW label is removed. Indicates the CoS of the packets that is not written back when the PW label is removed.

Configuration Guidelines
The user specifies whether to write back the CoS.

C.19 MAC Address Learning Mode

Description
MAC Address Learning Mode includes the IVL mode and SVL mode. IVL, which is the independent VLAN learning mode, indicates that each VLAN can learn the MAC address. In addition, the MAC address table of each VLAN is independent, and the same MAC address can exist in multiple VLANs. SVL, which is the shared VLAN learning mode, indicates that the MAC address learned in a VLAN can be shared with other VLANs, and the MAC address is unique in the MAC address table.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-19

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

In the IVL mode, each VLAN has its own MAC forwarding table. During the forwarding, the MAC address is found according to the VLAN, and then the forwarding is performed according to the MAC address table. The broadcast packets are forwarded in this VLAN. In the SVL mode, all the VLANs share the same MAC forwarding table. During the forwarding, the egress port is found according to the MAC address, and then the port determines whether this VLAN is allowed to pass. If the same MAC address is in multiple VLANs, the IVL mode should be used. In this case, if the SVL mode is used, the service cannot differentiate the VLAN.

Values
Value Range SVL, IVL Default Value IVL

The following table lists the description of each value. Value IVL SVL Description Indicates the independent learning mode. Indicates the shared learning mode.

Configuration Guidelines
If the same MAC address is in multiple VLANs, the IVL mode should be used. In other cases, the IVL and SVL modes have the same effect.

Relationship with Other Parameters

If the type of the E-LAN service is Tag-Transparent, the MAC address learning mode can only be SVL.

C.20 Self-learning MAC Address

Description
The Self-learning MAC Address parameter indicates whether the MAC address is allowed to be automatically learned. The MAC address self-learning indicates that the learning is performed according to the source MAC address of the packet, and then the MAC address forwarding table is automatically updated.

C-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Impact on the System

After the service with the MAC address self-learning capability is enabled, the MAC address is automatically learned, and the MAC address forwarding table is updated. Otherwise, the static MAC address table need be configured to forward service packets. When the MAC address self-learning capability is set to disabled, if the static MAC address forwarding table is not configured, the services cannot be normally forwarded.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description The MAC address can be automatically learned, and then the MAC address forwarding table can be automatically updated. The MAC address cannot be automatically learned, and then the MAC address forwarding table cannot be automatically updated.

Configuration Guidelines
In most cases, the MAC address self-learning capability of the E-LAN service should be enabled. If the number of CEs accessed by the E-LAN service is small, the forwarding of the MAC address is restrained. In this case, enable the MAC address self-learning capability before the static MAC address forwarding items are configured. Hence, the packets forwarding is complete.

C.21 MTU(byte)
Description
The MTU(byte) parameter indicates the maximum transmitted packet length, which is the length of the packet payload.

Impact on the System

If the length of the packet payload exceeds the value set by the MTU, the packets are discarded during the forwarding.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-21

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range 46-9000 Default Value 1500 Unit Byte

Configuration Guidelines
MTU(byte) should not be less than the maximum length of the user packet payload. Otherwise, the packets whose length exceeds the service MTU are discarded. Hence, MTU(byte) should be set to a value larger than the maximum length of the user packet payload.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The value of MTU(byte) and Max Frame Length(byte) of the port can be separately configured, and then the equipment processes the packets according to the minimum value.

C.22 NNI (Ethernet Service)

Description
The NNI (Ethernet Service) parameter, which indicates the Ethernet service network side interface, is used for configuring the Ethernet service network side parameters. The NNI can be carried by physical port, QinQ Link, and PW. If the NNI is carried by the physical port, the specific slot ID, sub-slot ID, and port number should be specified. If the NNI is carried by the QinQ, the QinQ Link should be specified. If the NNI is carried by the PW, the PW ID should be specified.

C.23 OAM Working Mode

Description
The OAM Working Mode parameter indicates the IEEE 802.3ah protocol mode of a port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Active, Passive Default Value Active

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Active

Description The data terminal equipment (DTE) in the active mode initializes the discovery process by transmitting the OAM protocol data unit (PDU) packets. The DTE in the passive mode responds to the discovery process of the remote DTE instead of initializing the discovery process.

Passive

Configuration Guidelines
In the case of the port that needs to initialize the discovery process, set OAM Working Mode to Active. In the case of the port that needs to respond to the initialization of the discovery process, set OAM Working Mode to Passive.

C.24 Enable OAM Protocol

Description
The Enable OAM Protocol parameter indicates whether the IEEE 802.3ah protocol is enabled at a port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the IEEE 802.3ah protocol is enabled at this port. Indicates that the IEEE 802.3ah protocol is disabled at this port.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-23

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
If the link OAM function of a port is required, set Enable OAM Protocol to Enabled. If the link OAM function of a port need be disabled, set Enable OAM Protocol to Disabled.

C.25 PBS
Description
The PBS parameter indicates the peak burst size. When the bandwidth is insufficient and the CBS buffer is full, these packets are stored in the PBS buffer. When the PBS buffer is full, these packets are discarded. The packets stored in the PBS buffer may not be successfully forwarded. The packets in the queue of a rate higher than the CIR but lower than the PIR, the residual bandwidth is preempted according to the algorithm. If the preemption is successful, the data in the PBS buffer is forwarded.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Port policy: 2-64000 V-UNI ingress policy: 64-16777216. V-UNI egress policy: 64-16777216. PW policy: 64-16777216. QINQ policy: 64-16777216. Default Value Unit Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte

Configuration Guidelines
The data packets in the PBS buffer may not be successfully forwarded. The size of the PBS, however, may decrease the packet loss rate to some extent. The bigger the PBS buffer is, the smaller the packet loss rate is. In this case, when a single packet is forwarded, the jitter is greater.

C.26 PHB
Description
The PHB parameter, per hop behavior, indicates a forwarding action applicable on the DS node. This forwarding action belongs to the per hop forwarding aggregation defined in the DiffServ domain.
C-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range BE, AF11, AF12, AF13, AF21, AF22, AF23, AF31, AF32, AF33, AF41, AF42, AF43, EF, CS6, CS7 Default Value The CoS defines different service classes:
l

CS6-CS7: Highest service classes applicable to transport of the signaling. EF: Fast forwarding, applicable to the service traffic with the shortest delay and low packet loss ratio, such as the audio service and video service. AF1-AF4: Applicable to the service traffic that requires a certain rate, but not a certain delay or jitter. BE: Applicable to the service traffic that does not require special processing.

C.27 PHY Loopback

Description
The PHY Loopback parameter indicates the loopback status of the physical layer of an Ethernet port. This parameter is an advanced attribute of the Ethernet port.

Impact on the System

If you set PHY Loopback to Inloop for an Ethernet port, services are interrupted. As a fault diagnosis function, setting PHY loopback affects the services configured on the port. In the case of loopback, services on the port are interrupted.

Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-25

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop

Description Indicates the normal status. When the equipment is operating normally, loopback is not required. At the local equipment, the outgoing services of an Ethernet port are looped back at the physical layer and input to this Ethernet port. At the local equipment, the incoming services of an Ethernet port are looped back at the physical layer and output to this Ethernet port.

Configuration Guidelines
The PHY loopback is mainly used to locate a fault. When setting this parameter, determine the loopback type according to the service flow direction.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
The ETFC does not support the PHY outloop.

C.28 PIR
Description
The PIR parameter, a traffic parameter, indicates the peak traffic rate. This parameter is expressed in kbit/s.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Port policy: 1000-10000000. V-UNI ingress policy: 320-10000000. V-UNI egress policy: 320-10000000. PW policy: 320-10000000. QINQ policy: 320-10000000. Default Value Unit Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s Kbit/s

C-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
The value of the parameter should exceed or equal the CIR.

C.29 PPP Link Status

Description
The PPP Link Status parameter indicates that the configured PPP link protocol is started again or shut down. When the protocol is shut down, the PPP path is not involved in packet segmentation.

Impact on the System Values

Value Range unshutdown shutdown Default Value unshutdown

The following table lists the description of each value. Value unshutdown shutdown Description The PPP protocol is started. The PPP protocol is shut down.

Configuration Guidelines
The unshutdown working state is recommended.

C.30 PW ID
Description
The PW ID parameter and the PW Type parameter identify the unique PW in the entire network. On the same NE, the uniqueness of the PW is ensured through verification. In the entire network, the user should ensure the uniqueness of the PW.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-27

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range 1-4294967295 Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
The PWs of the same type should not have the same ID, but the PWs of different types can have the same ID.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.31 PW Egress Label

Description
The PW Egress Label parameter labels the specified ingress tunnel during the creation of the bidirectional PW.irection of service forwarding.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 16-1048575 Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

C.32 PW Direction
Description
In the case of one PW, two directions, that is, the direction of entering the network and the direction of exiting the network, are available. The PW Direction parameter indicates whether the PW processes one direction or two directions.
C-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Impact on the System

If the PW is set to unidirectional, the PW processes the packets in only one direction. If the user services are bidirectional, the packets in another direction cannot be processed.

Values
Value Range Bidirectional, Unidirectional Default Value -

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Bidirectional Unidirectional Description The PW processes packets in two directions, that is, the directions of entering and exiting the network. The PW processes packets that only enter or only exit the network.

Configuration Guidelines
If the PW need to process packets in two directions, that is, the directions of entering and exiting the network, the value should be set to bidirectional. Otherwise, the value should be set to unidirectional. Generally, in the case of the broadcast PW, the value should be set to unidirectional. In the case of unicast PW, the value should be set to bidirectional.

C.33 PW Type
Description
The PW Type parameter, which sets the PW type, indicates the type of service carried by the PW.

Impact on the System

The system is not affected.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-29

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range Ethernet Ethernet Tag ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode SAToP CESoPSN Default Value

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Ethernet Ethernet Tag ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode SAToP CESoPSN Description Indicates the PW of the Ethernet type. Indicates the PW of the Ethernet tagged type. Indicates the PW of the ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport type. Indicates the PW of the ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport type. Indicates the PW of the ATM one-to-one VCC cell type. Indicates the PW of the ATM one-to-one VPC cell type. Indicates the PW of the structure-agnostic E1 over packet type. Indicates the PW of the CESoPSN basic type.

Configuration Guidelines
When creating the PW, select the PW type according to the type of service to be bound to the PW.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.34 PW Signaling Type

Description
The PW Signaling Type parameter, a query parameter, indicates the returned parameter during the query of MPLS. This parameter indicates whether the PW is static or dynamic. In the case of the dynamic PW, the services are available after the signaling negotiation is successful. In the case of the static PW, the signaling negotiation is not needed.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Static, Dynamic Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Static Dynamic Description Indicates that the PW is statically created. Indicates that the PW is dynamically created.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

If PW Signaling Type is set to Static, you need to manually set the value of the PW label.

C.35 QinQ Link ID

Description
The QinQ Link ID parameter indicates the unique identifier of a QinQ link.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-31

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range 1-4294967295 Default Value -

Configuration Guidelines
A QinQ Link ID parameter indicates a QinQ link. When creating a QinQ link, you need specify an unused ID for this QinQ link.

C.36 RTP Head

Description
The RTP Head parameter indicates a real-time transfer protocol that is mainly used for clock synchronization. In the case of the PW that emulates the CES service, the RTP protocol head in the packet is processed (including RTP packet head adding and RTP packet head receiving) or not processed. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the RTP head is processed. Otherwise, the RTP head is not processed.

Impact on the System

When the parameter is set to Enabled, the RTP protocol head is processed when packets are transmitted or received through the PW. Also, the negotiation result is enabled only when both ends of the PW are set to Enabled.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the PW processes the RTP head. Indicates that the PW does not process the RTP head.

Configuration Guidelines
The negotiation result is enabled only when both ends of the PW are set to Enabled.
C-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.37 S-VLAN ID
Description
The S-VLAN ID parameter is a 12-bit field, indicating the VLAN ID. If a switch supports the 802.1Q protocol, all packets it transmitting contain this 12-bit field. In this case, a packet is identified by its own VLAN.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-4094 Default Value -

Configuration Guidelines
When creating the QinQ, you should define the port and S-LVAN ID. The port and S-LAN ID cannot be occupied by other services. Moreover, the S-LVAN ID must be set within the valid range.

C.38 Tag Type

Description
The Tag Type parameter sets the type of VLAN Tag learned by the E-LAN service MAC address. This parameter can set the type of the VLAN Tag for the MAC address learning, that is, MAC address learning not based on VLAN Tag, MAC address learning based on C-VLAN Tag, and MAC address learning based on S-VLAN Tag.

Impact on the System

When the Tag type of the service is set, the MAC address learning and packet forwarding for the E-LAN service are affected. If the Tag type of the accessed packets and Tag type of the service mismatch, the MAC address cannot be learned, packets are discarded, and the services are interrupted.

Values
Value Range Tag-Transparent, C-Awared, S-Awared Default Value C-Awared

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-33

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Tag-Transparent C-Awared S-Awared Description The MAC address learning is not based on VLAN Tag. The MAC address learning is based on C-VLAN Tag. The MAC address learning is based on S-VLAN Tag.

Configuration Guidelines
If the transparent transmission port is accessed, the service packets may not carry VLAN Tag. In this case, set to Tag-Transparent. If port C is accessed, the service packets carry C-VLAN Tag. In this case, set to C-Awared. If port S is accessed, the service packets carry S-VLAN Tag. In this case, set to S-Awared.

Relationship with Other Parameters

If the service Tag type is Tag-Transparent, only NULL port can be accessed. If the service Tag type is C-Awared, only 802.1Q port can be accessed. If the service Tag type is S-Awared, only QinQ port can be accessed. If the service Tag type is T-Awared, only the SVL mode can be set to the MAC address learning mode.

C.39 Tunnel
Description
The Tunnel parameter indicates one or multiple tunnels that are bound with the PW. The PW can be bound with the tunnel and it transmits the data to the remote end of the tunnel.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range OptiX PTN 3900 Tunnel number: 1-255 OptiX PTN 3900 Tunnel index: 1-4294967295 Default Value -

C-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
The tunnel to be specified must be available already. The tunnel specified by a bidirectional PW should be an ingress unicast tunnel. If the PW is carried by multiple tunnels, the tunnel type and opposite-end IP address (dynamic tunnel) of each tunnel must be consistent.

C.40 Enable Tunnel

Description
The Enable Tunnel parameter sets the MPLS enabling state of the port. When Enable Tunnel is set to Enabled, it indicates that the port can identify and process the MPLS label, and support the dynamic signaling and routing.

Impact on the System

If the MPLS is disabled, the services on the port are interrupted.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description The MPLS is enabled. The MPLS is disabled.

Configuration Guidelines
When the services are configured, the MPLS should not be disabled.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When Port Mode is set to Layer 3, and Encapsulation Type is set to PPP, this parameter can be set. In the case of the Ethernet port, this parameter can be set only when Port Mode is set to Layer 3. In this case, Encapsulation Type of the port is PPP by default.

Related Information
The MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform, which supports various high layer protocols and services.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-35

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The MPLS uses short and fixed-length tags to encapsulate various link layer packets. Based on the IP routing and control protocol, the MPLS provides switching to the connection at the network layer.

C.41 UNI (Ethernet Service)

Description
The UNI (Ethernet Service) parameter, which indicates the Ethernet service user side interface, is used for configuring the user side Ethernet service. The Ethernet service user side need be carried on the Ethernet port (currently, the E-LAN service UNI can be carried at the Ethernet virtual interface). The Port and Port + VLAN modes are supported.

C.42 VCCV Verification Mode

Description
The VCCV Verification Mode parameter is used for PW continuity check. This parameter is used to set the verification mode of packet transmission.

Impact on the System

If the verification mode of packet transmission is set to None, the PW cannot support the VCCVPing.

Values
Value Range None, Ping Default Value Ping

The following table lists the description of each value. Value None Ping Description Indicates no verification mode. Indicates the ping verification mode.

Configuration Guidelines
If the VCCV-Ping need be supported, the VCCV verification parameter of the PW cannot be set to None.

C-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.43 VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Description
In the case of the E-AGGR service, the VLAN value of the packet is modified when the packets enter or exit the NE. When VLAN Forwarding Table Item is configured, Source Interface Type, Source VLAN ID, Sink Interface Type, and VLAN ID should be specified. If the packets with the source VLAN ID accessed from the source interface exit from the sink interface, the VLAN is modified to the sink VLAN value.

Impact on the System

In the case of the E-AGGR service, the services are available only after the VLAN forwarding items are created.

C.44 V-UNI ID
Description
The V-UNI ID parameter identifies the unique V-UNI in the service.

Values
Value Range 1-65535

C.45 V-UNI Group Type

Description
The V-UNI Group Type parameter indicates that V-UNI groups are distinguished by the uplink and downlink. Members in the uplink direction belong to the uplink V-UNI group, and members in the downlink direction belong to the downlink V-UNI group. A V-UNI in a certain direction can only be available in one V-UNI group.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Ingress, Egress Default Value Ingress

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-37

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Ingress Egress Description Direction from the equipment to network side Direction from the equipment to client side

Configuration Guidelines
The setting depends on the requirement.

C.46 WFQ Scheduling Policy

Description
The WFQ Scheduling Policy parameter indicates that the weighted fair queuing is a packet scheduling technique allowing guaranteed bandwidth services. The WFQ queues all data traffics and monitors their throughput rates, and then allocates weights according to transmitted information flows.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Port Policy V-UNI Ingress Policy V-UNI Egress Policy PW Policy ATM Policy QINQ Policy Description Indicates the port policy. Indicates the policy of the ingress logical interface at the client side. Indicates the policy of the egress logical interface at the client side. Indicates the PW policy. Indicates the ATM policy Indicates the QinQ policy.

Configuration Guidelines
The policy type setting depends on different subjects.

C-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.47 Packet Type

Description
The Packet Type is used to set the packet type.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range cvlan, svlan, mpls-exp, ip-dscp

The following table lists the description of each value. Value cvlan svlan (Not support the DEI.) ip-dscp mpls-exp Description Indicates the user vlan packet. Indicates the carrier vlan packet (Not support the discarding indicator). Indicates the ip packet. Indicates the mpls packet.

Configuration Guidelines
The value setting depends on the packet type.

C.48 Packet Color

Description
The Packet Color parameter indicates the color that is used to label the packet, which affects the forwarding priority of the packet.

Impact on the System

This parameter affects the forwarding priority of the packet.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-39

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range Red, Yellow, Green

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Red Yellow Green Description Indicates the lowest packet forwarding priority. Indicates that the packet forwarding priority is between Green and Yellow. Indicates the highest packet forwarding priority.

Configuration Guidelines
The packet labeled in Green is of the highest packet forwarding priority. The second highest packet forwarding priority is Yellow, and the lowest packet forwarding priority is Red.

C.49 Packet Loading Time

Description
The Packet Loading Time parameter indicates the time that the PW packet requires to load the TDM frames. That is, the parameter is used to specify the number of the TDM frames that are loaded in the PW packet. The period of the TDM frame is 125 us. If Packet Loading Time is 1 ms, then eight TDM frames can be loaded in a PW packet.

Impact on the System

The Packet Loading Time parameter affects the end-to-end delay of the CES service. The configuration of the NEs at the two ends should be consistent. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.

Values
Value Range OptiX PTN 3900: 125 to 3000 with the step length of 125 Default Value 1000 Unit us

C-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
When the PW is used to emulate the CES service, this parameter can be set. In addition, the packetisation buffering time should not exceed the jitter buffer time.ime should not exceed the jitter buffer time.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.50 Packet Loading Time (us)

Description
The Packet Loading Time (us) parameter indicates the longest wait-to-restore (WTR) time for setting the ATM concatenation. This parameter is only used for the PW of the ATM type. This parameter is used to set the WTR time before the encapsulated ATM cell is transmitted. When the WTR time is due, even if the maximum number of concatenated cells does not achieve, the packet is transmitted.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 100-50000 Default Value 1000 Unit us

Configuration Guidelines
The longest WTR time of ATM concatenation is only used for the PW of the ATM type. The step length of the parameter is 100 (us), and the value is a multiple of 100 within the value range.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When the maximum number of concatenated cells is 1, the Packet Loading Time is invalid. In this case, the cells are transmitted immediately after they are encapsulated in packets. When the maximum number of the concatenation cells is any value from 2-31, the Packet Loading Time of concentration can be any value within the valid range.

C.51 Duplicated Policy Name

Description
The Duplicated Policy Name parameter indicates a unique identifier of a policy. This parameter has the same meaning of the Policy Name parameter.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-41

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

You can apply a specified policy to the original policy. As a result, the service scheduling policy of the original policy is changed by duplicating the service scheduling policy of the specified policy.

Values
The Duplicated Policy Name parameter should contain letters or numbers or both with a maximum length of 64 characters. The characters \ or / are not contained.

Configuration Guidelines
For changing the current policy, you can directly duplicate the existed policy that satisfies the requirement to the current policy. In this case, no extra setting is required for the current policy.

C.52 Local Working Status

Description
The Local Working Status parameter indicates the current PW status, and informs the user where faults occur.

Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Value UP Common Fault Attachment Circuit Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Receive Fault AND PSN-facing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault AND PSN-facing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault AND PSNfacing PW Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit Fault Description Indicates that the link is normal. -

C-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Attachment Circuit Receive Fault AND PSN-facing PW Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault AND PSN-facing PW Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault AND PSNfacing PW Transmit Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault AND Attachment Circuit Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault AND Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault

Description -

C.53 Test Result

Description
The Test Result parameter indicates the trail information about the link connection from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point during the LT test. If the trail from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point cannot be obtained, the operation failure information is reported. If the trail from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point transits the intermediate equipment or destination equipment, the operation success information is reported.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Operation succeed, Operation failed Default Value -

C.54 Policy ID
Description
The Policy ID parameter is used to identify a policy. Unlike the policy names, The policy IDs of different stations may be the same. A policy ID is unique to identify a policy on a per-NE basis.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-43

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Policy Type Port policy V-UNI ingress policy V-UNI egress policy PW policy ATM policy QinQ policy WFQ scheduling policy Port WRED policy Service WRED policy Value Range 0-100 0-2000 0-2000 0-2000 0-1000 0-2000 1-256 0-7 0-127

Configuration Guidelines
None.

C.55 Policy Name

Description
The Policy Name parameter is unique to identify a policy.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
The policy name should contain letters or numbers or both with a maximum length of 64 characters. The characters \ or / are not supported.

Configuration Guidelines
The policy name should be unique.

C-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.56 Member Interface

Description
The Member Interface parameter indicates the PPP member port in the MLPPP group.

Values
It is indicated as PPP link slot ID-PPP link sub-slot ID-PPP link port number, such as 23D12-6(PORT-6). Value Slot ID Sub-slot ID Port number Value Range Indicates the PPP link slot ID. Indicates the PPP link sub-slot ID. Indicates the PPP link port number. Default Value None. None. None.

C.57 Bearer Type

Description
The Bearer Type parameter indicates the bearers of the Ethernet V-NNI, including the port, PW, and QinQ Link.

Impact on the System

In the case of different interconnection modes for different services, the V-NNI is carried by different bearers. If the bearer is a port, the service packets are encapsulated in a physical port, which is considered as a tunnel, and then are transmitted to the remote end. If a PW is the bearer, the service packets are encapsulated in a PW, and then are transmitted to the remote end. If the bearer is a QinQ Link, the service packets are encapsulated in the QinQ Link tunnel, and then are transmitted to the remote end.

Values
Value Range Port, PW, QinQ Link Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value PW

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Description The bearer is the PW, and the PW index should be specified.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-45

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Phy port QinQ link

Description The bearer is the physical port, and the slot ID, sub-slot ID, and port number should be specified. The bearer is the QinQ tunnel, and the QinQ index should be specified.

Configuration Guidelines
The bearer of the E-LAN service V-NNI can be the PW, port, or QinQ Link. The bearer of the E-Line service V-NNI can be the PW, port, or QinQ Link. The bear of the E-AGGR service V-NNI can be the PW.

C.58 Egress Port

Description
The Egress Port parameter specifies the port used when the tunnel enters the network side, including the slot ID, sub-board, and port number, which indicate the information of a certain physical or logical port.

Impact on the System

If the specified egress port of the tunnel is inconsistent with the actual physical connection line, the services carried on the service tunnel are interrupted.

Values
The parameter is indicated as Slot ID-Sub-slot ID-Port number, such as 6-MP-1(PORT-1). Value Slot ID Sub-slot ID Port number Value Range Indicates the slot ID of the egress port of the tunnel. Indicates the sub-slot ID of the egress port of the tunnel. Indicates the egress port of the tunnel. Default Value None. None. None.

Configuration Guidelines
The egress port of the tunnel should be configured according to actual requirements.
C-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.59 Handling Mode

Description
The Handling Mode parameter indicates the handling mode for packets of different colors.

Impact on the System

Packets of different colors are handled with different QoS.

Values
Value Range Pass, Discard, Remark Default Value Green, yellow: Pass Red: Discard

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Pass Discard Remark Description Indicates transparently transmitting or directly forwarding the packet. Indicates discarding the packet. Indicates remarking the packet with a different color.

Configuration Guidelines
When a network congestion occurs or the color of the packet needs adjusting, packets of different colors can be configured with different handling modes.

C.60 Handling Mode (Ethernet Unknown Frame)

Description
The Handling Mode (Ethernet Unknown Frame) parameter, which can be set to Discard or Broadcast, is used for the Ethernet unknown frames. The handling modes can be set for the unknown unicast frames and unknown broadcast frames respectively.

Impact on the System

The processing of service packets are affected. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown packets in the service are directly discarded.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-47

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range Discard, Broadcast Default Value Broadcast

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Discard Broadcast Description The unknown frames are discarded. The unknown frames are broadcast.

Configuration Guidelines
By default, in the case of the Ethernet service, the unknown frames are broadcast. Otherwise, the packets whose MAC address forwarding table items are not detected cannot be forwarded.

C.61 Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame)

Description
The Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame) parameter indicates the error frame (in certain period) threshold for transmitting messages to inform the opposite end of a fault.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-4294967295 Default Value 1 Unit Frame

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value according to the size of the time window for monitoring error frames, and prediction of error frames.

C-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.62 Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)

Description
The Error Frame Monitor Window (ms) parameter indicates the specified time period for monitoring error frames.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1000-60000, 100 as the spacing Default Value 1000 Unit ms

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value within the range.

C.63 Error Frame Second Threshold (s)

Description
The Error Frame Second Threshold (s) parameter indicates the threshold for the error frame time during the time period for monitoring the error frame seconds. When the error frame seconds cross the threshold, the board reports an alarm.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-time window for monitoring error frame seconds Default Value 1 Unit s

Configuration Guidelines
The threshold should be not more than the time window for monitoring error frame seconds.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-49

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.64 Error Frame Second Window (s)

Description
The Error Frame Second Window (s) parameter indicates the specified time period within the time span with error frames.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 10-900 Default Value 60 Unit s

Configuration Guidelines
The value should be over the threshold for monitoring error frame seconds.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.65 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries)

Description
The Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries) parameter indicates the time period specified for monitoring error frame signals.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-60 Default Value 1 Unit Entry

C-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value within the range.

C.66 Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries)

Description
The Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries) parameter indicates the threshold for error frame signals that occur during the time period for monitoring the error frame signals. When the error frame signals cross the threshold, the board reports an alarm.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-7500000000 Default Value 1 Unit Entry

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value within the range.

C.67 Error Frame Period Threshold (frame)

Description
The Error Frame Period Threshold (frame) parameter indicates the threshold for error frames that occur during the time period for monitoring error frames. When the error frames cross the threshold, the board reports an alarm.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-time period for monitoring error frames Default Value 1 Unit Frame

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-51

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value within the range.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The value should be less than the time period for monitoring error frames.

C.68 Error Frame Period Window (frame)

Description
The Error Frame Period Window (frame) parameter indicates the specified number of frames for monitoring the number of error frames.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Maxpps/10-Maxpps*60 Default Value Maxpps Unit Frame

Port Rate 10 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 1000 Mbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Maxpps Value 14880 148800 1488000 14880000

Configuration Guidelines
Enter a value according to the port rate and by referring to the table.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The value should be higher than the time period threshold for monitoring error frames.

C.69 Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag

Description
The Enable Traffic Frame Discarding Flag parameter indicates the cell to be discarded when a network congestion occurs. This parameter can be set in the ATM policy. After this parameter
C-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

is set, the cells to be discarded in the case of a network congestion are added with discarding flags.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Yes, no Default Value No

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Yes No Description Indicates enabling this function. Indicates disabling this function.

C.70 Unidirectional Operation

Description
The Unidirectional Operation parameter indicates the capability of the port to transmit the OAM PDU packets when the receive part of the DTE becomes faulty.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description The port can transmit the OAM PDU packets when the receive part of the DTE becomes faulty.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-53

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Disabled

Description The port cannot transmit the OAM PDU packets when the receive part of the DTE becomes faulty.

C.71 Address Table Specified Capacity

Description
The Address Table Specified Capacity parameter indicates the maximum capacity of the MAC address forwarding table that can be used by the E-LAN service.

Impact on the System

If the number of MAC addresses dynamically learned exceeds the set MAC address table capacity, and the items in the address table are not aged, the new MAC address is not learned. In this case, the unknown frames are processed according to the unknown frame processing mode configured by the E-LAN service. If the unknown frame processing is configured as DisCard, the packets with unknown destination MAC address are discarded. If the unknown frame processing is configured as Broadcast, the packets with unknown destination MAC address are broadcast. If the number of packets with unknown destination MAC address is large, the service bandwidth is affected.

Values
Value Range 0-65534 Default Value 512 Unit Piece

Configuration Guidelines
Set the capacity of the MAC address table to a proper value according to the number of the NEs in the L2VPN network.

C.72 Address Detection Upper Threshold (%)

Description
The Address Detection Upper Threshold (%) parameter indicates the upper capacity threshold value of the detected MAC address forwarding table. It is indicated in percentage.

Impact on the System

When the percentage of the number of dynamic MAC address forwarding tables in the total capacity exceeds the upper threshold value, the system reports the FDBSIZEALM_ELAN (ELAN forwarding table exhausted) alarm. After the dynamic MAC address forwarding table
C-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

is full, the E-LAN service does not learn the unknown unicast packets in the service packets. Hence, the broadcast packets are increased, and the service bandwidth is affected.

Values
Value Range 80-100 Default Value 95 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter is valid only for the dynamic MAC address forwarding table. Set the proper MAC address detection upper threshold value according to the number of NEs in the L2VPN network.

C.73 Address Detection Lower Threshold (%)

Description
The Address Detection Lower Threshold (%) parameter indicates the lower capacity threshold value of the detected MAC address forwarding table. It is indicated in percentage.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system. When the percentage of the number of dynamic MAC address forwarding tables to the total capacity exceeds the upper threshold value, the system reports the FDBSIZEALM_ELAN (ELAN forwarding table exhausted) alarm. If the number of dynamic MAC address forwarding tables is lower than the address detection lower threshold (%), the system reports that this alarm is cleared.

Values
Value Range 60-100 Default Value 90 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter is valid only for the dynamic MAC address forwarding table. Set the proper MAC address detection lower threshold value according to the number of NEs in the L2VPN network.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-55

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.74 Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes)

Description
The Discard Lower Threshold (256 bytes) parameter indicates that the packet whose measurement result is undesirable is discarded during the QoS flow monitoring. The user can set Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold for the queue. If the length of the queue is less than Discard Lower Threshold, the packet is not discarded. If the length of the queue is between Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold, the weighted random early detection (WRED) starts to discard packets randomly. If the length of the queue is more than Discard Upper Threshold, all the packets are discarded.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
For the parameters in different templates, see Table C-1. Table C-1 Default threshold for the port WRED policy Packet Color Green Yellow Red Lower Threshold Port buffer size * (3/6) Port buffer size * (2/6) Port buffer size * (1/6) Higher Threshold Port buffer size Port buffer size * (5/6) Port buffer size * (4/6) Discard Rate 100 100 100

For the port buffer size of each board, see Table C-2. Table C-2 Port buffer size of each board for the OptiX PTN 3900 PHB Service Level Port Buffer Size (256 Bytes) EX2 12800 12800 12800 25600 25600 25600 EG16/POD41/ EFG2 1280 1280 1280 2560 2560 2560 EFF8 320 320 320 640 640 640 ETFC 160 160 160 320 320 320
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2

C-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

PHB Service Level

Port Buffer Size (256 Bytes) EX2 25600 51200 EG16/POD41/ EFG2 2560 5120 EFF8 640 1280 ETFC 320 640

AF1 BE

Configuration Guidelines
The length of the queue that can be guaranteed decreases with the decrease in the value of Discard Lower Threshold. Discard Upper Threshold must not be less than Discard Lower Threshold.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.75 Discard Probability (%)

Description
The Discard Probability (%) parameter indicates that the packets are discarded in this proportion if the length of the queues is between Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-100 Default Value 100 Unit %

Configuration Guidelines
None.

C.76 Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes)

Description
Discard Upper Threshold (256 bytes) indicates that the packet whose measurement result is "undesirable" is discarded during the QoS flow monitoring. The user can set Discard Lower
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-57

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold for the queue. When the length of the queue is less than Discard Lower Threshold, the packet is not discarded. If the length of the queue is between Discard Lower Threshold and Discard Upper Threshold, the WRED starts to discard packets randomly. If the length of the queue is more than Discard Upper Threshold, all the packets are discarded.

Impact on the System

If Discard Upper Threshold is set to 0, all the packets in this queue are discarded and thus all the services of this queue are interrupted.

Values
For the parameters in different templates, see Table C-3. Table C-3 Default threshold for the port WRED policy Packet Color Green Yellow Red Lower Threshold Port buffer size * (3/6) Port buffer size * (2/6) Port buffer size * (1/6) Higher Threshold Port buffer size Port buffer size * (5/6) Port buffer size * (4/6) Discard Rate 100 100 100

For the port buffer size of each board, see Table C-4. Table C-4 Port buffer size of each board for the OptiX PTN 3900 PHB Service Level Port Buffer Size (256 Bytes) EX2 12800 12800 12800 25600 25600 25600 25600 51200 EG16/POD41/ EFG2 1280 1280 1280 2560 2560 2560 2560 5120 EFF8 320 320 320 640 640 640 640 1280 ETFC 160 160 160 320 320 320 320 640

CS7 CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE

C-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
Discard Upper Threshold must not be less than Discard Lower Threshold.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.77 Jitter Compensation Buffering Time

Description
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time indicates the buffer size in the receive direction. The PSN is delayed, while the TDM network is plesiochronous. The packet needs to be saved temporarily so that it can be transmitted to the PDH port smoothly. The buffer size is measured in time. This parameter can be set when the pseudo wire (PW) is used for the circuit emulation service (CES).

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 375-16000, with the step length of 125 Default Value 8000 Unit us

Configuration Guidelines
The minimum jitter compensation buffering time is 375 us. This parameter can be set when the pseudo wire (PW) is used for the circuit emulation service (CES). In addition, the packet loading time should not exceed the jitter compensation buffering time.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.78 Port Transmit Status

Description
The Port Transmit Status parameter indicates whether the service packets and EFMOAM protocol packets are allowed to transmit.

Impact on the System

When the port is in the FWD state, it is the normal forwarding state.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-59

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

When the port is in the DISCARD state, the service packets and upper layer protocol packets, except for EFMOAM protocol packets, cannot be discarded.

Values
Value Range FWD, DISCARD Default Value FWD

The following table lists the description of each value. Value FWD DISCARD Description Indicates the normal forwarding state. The service packets and upper layer protocol packets, except for EFMOAM protocol packets, cannot be discarded.

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter indicates the query result. No rules are provided for selecting a value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.79 Port Receive Status

Description
The Port Receive Status parameter indicates whether to extract the service packets and EFMOAM protocol packets.

Impact on the System

When the port is in the FWD state, it is the normal forwarding state. When the port is in other states, service packets and upper layer protocol packets, except for EFMOAM packets, cannot be extracted.

C-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range FWD, LB, DISCARD Default Value FWD

The following table lists the description of each value. Value FWD LB DISCARD Application Indicates the normal forwarding state. The service packets and upper layer protocol packets, except for EFMOAM protocol packets, cannot be looped back. The service packets and upper layer protocol packets, except for EFMOAM protocol packets, cannot be discarded.

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter indicates the query result. No rules are provided for selecting a value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.80 Port Mode

Description
The Port Mode parameter indicates the port mode in which the port can process packets. The Port Mode parameter determines the headers of which service packets that can be identified and processed by the port.

Impact on the System

Set the Port Mode parameter only when the port does not carry any service. If the port mode does not match the service, the service is not available.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-61

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Port Type E1 port (D75/D12) Channelized STM-1 port (CD1) ATM port (AD1, ASD1) POS port (POD41) Ethernet port (EG16, ETFC, EFG2, EFF8) Ethernet virtual interface (EOA virtual interface) Ethernet virtual interface (VLAN sub-interface) Value Range Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3 Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 2, Layer 3 Layer 2, Layer 3 Layer 3 Default Value Layer 3 Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 3

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Layer 1 Layer 2 Description Indicates that the port can identify and process only the physical-layer information about the packets. Indicates that the port can perform the packet encapsulation at the physical layer and data link layer, but cannot perform the packet encapsulation at the network layer. Indicates that the port can perform the packet encapsulation at the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer.

Layer 3

Configuration Guidelines
Change the port mode only when the port does not carry any service.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Set the Port Mode parameter according to the required functions of the port. For example, to set the IP address for a port, set Port Mode to Layer 3 for this port.

C.81 Enable Port

Description
The Enable Port parameter sets whether the Ethernet port is usable.

C-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Impact on the System

When services are available on the Ethernet port, setting this port to disabled interrupts the services.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled. Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description The port is usable. The port is unusable.

Configuration Guidelines
When a port is used for transmitting services, enable this port first.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.82 Port Priority

Description
The Port Priority parameter indicates the priority of the Ethernet port. If other attributes, such as the port rate and port working mode, are the same, in the LAG member ports that enable the LACP protocol, the port with a higher priority carries services first. This parameter is invalid for the LAG (manual LAG, for example) that does not run the LACP protocol.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 0-65535 Default Value 32768

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-63

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
The port priority increases as the value decreases. To make a port carry services with priority, set the priority of the port to a higher value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

In a LAG, which port has the priority to carry services is jointly determined by Port Priority and System Priority of the LAG, and is first determined by . For example, as shown in Figure C-1, the non-load sharing static LAG is created between NE A and NE B. Figure C-1 Non-load sharing static LAG is created between NE A and NE B

NE A

Port1 Port2 LAG a

Working Link

Port1 Port2

NE B

Protection Link

LAG b

Each port of LAG a and LAG b meets the requirements of carrying services. System Priority of LAG a is higher than System Priority of LAG b. In LAG a, Port Priority of port1 is higher than Port Priority of port2. In LAG b, Port Priority of port2 is higher than Port Priority of port 1. In this case, in LAG a, port 1 is the working port, port 2 protects port 1, and port 2 does not share the service traffic. The protection relation in LAG b is the same as the protection relation in LAG a, because System Priority of LAG a is higher than System Priority of LAG b. That is, in LAG b, port 1 is the working port, port 2 protects port 1, and port 2 does not share the service traffic, even if Port Priority of port 2 is higher than Port Priority of port1 in LAG b.

Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see System Priority.

C.83 Peer IP
Description
The Peer IP parameter indicates the peer node ID that is set for the PW creation.

Impact on the System

If this parameter is set incorrectly, creating the dynamic PW fails.
C-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Legal IP address Description The value is an IP address in the dotted decimal notation system. The unicast IP address cannot be any one of the following addresses, that is, the 0 address 0.*.*.*, the local loopback address 127.*.*.*, the multicast address 224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255, the network address *.*.*.0 or the broadcast address *.*.*.255.

Configuration Guidelines
When the dynamic PW is used for the service, the peer IP address must be consistent with the peer IP address of the tunnel. The node IDs of the NEs at the two ends must be legal and unique IP addresses and cannot be the same as the interface IP addresses of any other NEs.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.84 Transmitted Packet Length

Description
The Transmitted Packet Length parameter indicates the length of the transmitted loopback message (LBM).

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 64-1400 Default Value 64

Configuration Guidelines
The default value is 64. Packets of different lengths may have different connectivity test results.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-65

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Related Information
None.

C.85 Transmitted Packet Count

Description
The Transmitted Packet Count parameter indicates the number of the transmitted LBM packets.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-255 Default Value 3

Configuration Guidelines
The time taken ascends with the number of transmitted packets.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.86 Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM)

Description
The Transmitted Packet Priority (Ethernet Service OAM) parameter indicates the VLAN priority in the Ethernet service OAM protocol packets transmitted by the equipment.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

C-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range 0-7 Default Value 7

Configuration Guidelines
Value 0 indicates the lowest priority, and value 7 indicates the highest priority. By default, value 7, the highest priority, is used.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.87 Direction
Description
The Direction parameter indicates whether the PW to be created is unidirectional or bidirectional.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Bidirectional Default Value Bidirectional

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Bidirectional Description Indicates that the PW is set to the bidirectional mode.

Configuration Guidelines
Currently, only the bidirectional mode is supported for the PW.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-67

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.88 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port)

Description
In the case of the flow control, the data traffic that passes through a node or link is adjusted to avoid overload of the node or link. Set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode parameter to specify the flow control mode of an Ethernet port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control Send Only Receive Only Description The port disables the flow control function (in both the transmit and receive directions). The port transmits flow control frames and also responds to flow control frames. The port only transmits flow control frames. The port only responds to flow control frames.

Configuration Guidelines
Set the flow control mode of interconnected ports according to the flow control requirements. For example, port A and port B are interconnected. To realize the flow control in the receive direction of port A (avoid congestion at port A), set Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control or Send Only for port A, and to Enable Symmetric Flow Control or Receive Only for port B.

Relationship with Other Parameters

l

When Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode are set to Enabled at the same time, the flow control mode of the port is determined
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

C-68

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

by the working mode of the port. When the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control mode is auto-negotiation. When the working mode of the port is nonautonegotiation, the flow control mode is non-autonegotiation.
l

When either Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode or Non-Auto-negotiation Flow Control Mode is set to Enabled, the flow control mode of the port is also determined by the working mode of the port.

When Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is set to Enabled, if the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control mode is auto-negotiation. If the working mode of the port is non-autonegotiation, the flow control function cannot be realized on the port. When Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is set to Enabled, if the working mode of the port is non-autonegotiation, the flow control mode is non-autonegotiation. If the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control function cannot be realized on the port.

C.89 Encapsulation Type

Description
The Encapsulation Type parameter sets the link layer encapsulation type of the port, and specifies the link layer encapsulation type that can be identified by this port.

Values
Value Range Null, ATM, PPP, 802.1Q, QinQ Default Value For details, see configuration guidelines.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Null ATM PPP 802.1Q QinQ Description No link layer is available, or the link layer encapsulation is not processed. The ATM encapsulation is identified and processed. The PPP encapsulation is identified and processed. In the Layer 2 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port is 802.1Q by default. When the Ethernet port is used for QinQ Link, the port attribute should be set to Layer 2, and the encapsulation type should be set to QinQ. In addition, QinQ Type Domain of the two interconnected Ethernet ports should be set to the same value.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-69

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
1. Currently, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port, E1 port, POS port, and serial port can be set. In addition, the encapsulation type can be switched only when the port does not carry services. 2. In the Layer 2 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port can be Null, 802.1Q, and QinQ. In the Layer 3 mode, the encapsulation type of the Ethernet port, which is fixed to 802.1Q, cannot be set. 3. In the Layer 1 mode, the encapsulation type of the E1 port is fixed to Null. In the Layer 2 mode, the encapsulation type of the E1 port is fixed to ATM. In the Layer 3 mode, the encapsulation type of the E1 port is fixed to PPP. 4. The POS port is fixed to the Layer 3 mode, and thus the default encapsulation type is Null. Currently, only the PPP protocol is supported. 5. The serial port is fixed to the Layer 3 mode, and thus the default encapsulation type is Null. Currently, only the PPP protocol is supported.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
For details, see the Port Mode parameter.

C.90 PIR
Description
The PIR parameter indicates the maximum rate at which the packet is allowed to be transmitted.

Impact on the System

If this parameter is set incorrectly, the QoS cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to an excessively small value, the service flow that exceeds the PIR is discarded. If this parameter is set to 0, the service is unavailable.

Values
Value Range OptiX PTN 3900: 64-10,000,000 Default Value None. Unit kbit/s

C-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
Value OptiX PTN 3900: 64-10,000,000 Description The PIR of the PW for OptiX PTN 1900 and OptiX PTN 3900 ranges from 64 kbit/s to 10,000,000 kbit/s. The PIR of the PW for OptiX PTN 912 ranges from 64 kbit/s to 100,000 kbit/s.

C.91 Load Sharing Hash Algorithm

Description
The Encapsulation Type parameter indicates the traffic distribution algorithm for different ports in the aggregation group.

Impact on the System

If multiple ports in the aggregation group can carry the services, the traffic distribution effect varies with the Hash algorithms configured. If the Hash algorithm is properly configured, the traffic on each port is evenly distributed. Otherwise, the traffic is not evenly distributed, and the port bandwidth cannot be fully used.

Values
Value Range Automatic, Source MAC, Destination MAC, Source and Destination MACs, Source IP, Destination IP, Source and Destination IP, Source Port Number, Destination Port Number, Source and Destination Port Numbers, MPLS Label Default Value Automatic

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Automatic Source MAC Destination MAC Source and Destination MACs
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Description The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and destination MACs of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source MAC of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the destination MAC of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and destination MACs of the packets.
C-71

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP Source Port Number Destination Port Number Source and Destination Port Numbers MPLS Label

Description The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source IP of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the destination IP of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and destination IP of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source port number of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the destination port number of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the source and destination port numbers of the packets. The traffic is distributed among ports according to the MPLS label of the packets.

Configuration Guidelines
To evenly distribute the traffic on each port as possible, select a proper Hash algorithm according to different packets on the ports.

Relationship with Other Parameters

This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing.

C.92 Load Sharing

Description
The Load Sharing parameter indicates whether multiple ports are allowed to carry the services at the same time when multiple ports in the aggregation group can be used.

Impact on the System

In the Non-Sharing mode, one active port and one standby port, which can back up each other, are available. In this case, only one port carries the services. In the Sharing mode, multiple ports can carry the services at the same time. When manually configuring the aggregation group, ensure that the load sharing modes at both ends are same.

C-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range Sharing, Non-Sharing Default Value Indicates that the load is shared.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Non-Sharing Sharing Description Indicates that only one port carries the services. Only one slave port can be configured. Indicates that multiple ports are allowed to carry the services at the same time. A maximum of 15 slave ports can be added.

Configuration Guidelines
When manually configuring the aggregation group, configure the load sharing modes at the two ends to the same. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.93 Working Mode

Description
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board. The Working Mode parameter indicates the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of a port.

Impact on the System

If the working modes of interconnected Ethernet ports are inconsistent, the services are not available or have a severe packet loss problem.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-73

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M Half-Duplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10G Full-Duplex LAN, 10G FullDuplex WAN Default Value Auto-Negotiation
NOTE The value is 100mfull for the port of EFF8 board

Configuration Guidelines
The Auto-Negotiation working mode is recommended. If the communication fails and the working mode of the port is set to Auto-Negotiation, you need specify the working mode of the port according to the working mode of the interconnected port. If the working mode of the port is set to any other mode instead of Auto-Negotiation, the working mode of the interconnected port should be the same. Otherwise, the communication is not available. In the case of equipment interconnection, set the communication modes of the interconnected ports to full-duplex.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.94 Loopback Status (EFMOAM Parameter)

Description
The Loopback Status (EFMOAM Parameter) parameter indicates whether a port is in the loopback status, and, if yes, whether the port is in the Initiate Loopback at Local status or Respond Loopback of Remote status.

Impact on the System

Set port loopback to diagnose the link. If a port is in the loopback status, the carried services are interrupted when the port starts loopback or responds to loopback. If the EFMOAM detects any failure when the command is issued to release the loopback or when the link becomes faulty, the two ports exit the loopback status and the services become normal.

C-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range Initiate Loopback at Local, Respond Loopback of Remote, Non-Loopback Default Value Non-Loopback

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Initiate Loopback at Local Respond Loopback of Remote Non-Loopback Description Indicates that the port can transmit services, but cannot receive services. Indicates that the port cannot transmit or receive services, but can retrace the packets to the opposite port. Indicates that the port is not in the loopback status that is stipulated in IEEE 802.3ah.

Configuration Guidelines
If you issue the command at port A to start remote loopback when the connection between port A and port B is normal, port A is in the Initiate Loopback at Local status and port B is in the Respond Loopback of Remote status. When you issue the command for port A to release the remote loopback, port A and port B resume the Non-Loopback status.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The Loopback Status (EFMOAM Parameter) parameter is valid only when the Remote Loopback Response parameter is set to Enabled.

Related Information
Start the loopback only when the finding succeeds.

C.95 Revertive Mode

Description
In the case of the link aggregation group (LAG) that does not share the load, if both the main and slave ports meet the requirements for carrying services, the Revertive Mode parameter determines whether the port with the smaller port ID carries the services. If the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive, the port with the smaller port carries the services. The port ID indicates the numbering of the port on the board. For example, in the case of the EG16, the 16 GE ports are numbered from 1 to 16.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-75

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

If the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the port that carries services remains unchanged.

Impact on the System

If the port with the smaller port ID recovers when the Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive, the services are switched to this port. During the switching, the services are transiently interrupted for not more than 500 ms.

Values
Value Range Revertive, Non-Revertive Default Value Revertive

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Revertive Description When both the main and slave ports meet the requirements of carrying services, the port with the smaller port ID carries the services. When both the main and slave ports meet the requirements of carrying services, the port that carries the services remains unchanged.

Non-Revertive

Configuration Guidelines
To prevent frequent switching and to switch the services only when the service-carried port fails, set the Revertive Mode parameter to Non-Revertive. To ensure that the port with the smaller port ID carry services whenever the port is fine, set the Revertive Mode parameter to Revertive.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The Revertive Mode parameter is valid only when the Load Sharing parameter is set to NonSharing.

Related Information
None.

C-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.96 Laser Interface Enabling Status

Description
Set the Laser Interface Enabling Status parameter to enable or disable the laser of a physical port. The Laser Interface Enabling Status parameter determines only whether the laser transmits the optical signals, but not whether the laser receives optical signals.

Impact on the System

When the physical port carries services, disabling the laser interrupts the services carried by the port.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the laser of the physical port normally transmits and receives optical signals. Indicates that the laser of the physical port does not transmit optical signals, but only receives optical signals.

Configuration Guidelines
Do not enable or disable the laser unless necessary. When a laser is disabled, the laser stops transmitting optical signals.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.97 Laser Transmission Distance (m)

Description
The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the effective distance for which the optical signals transmitted by the optical module of the laser can travel. Hence, this parameter is a physical attribute of the optical module.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-77

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

Setting this parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
The value of the Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter is a number whose unit is meter.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
Refer to the OptiX PTN 1900&3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description for specifications on boards.

C.98 Activation Status

Description
The Activation Status parameter indicates whether to send the CC packet. The CC packet refers to service connectivity checking packet.

Impact on the System

When the activation status is "Active", the NE where the maintenance association end point (MEP) is located starts to send the CC packet and the receive end, that is, the NE where the remote maintenance association end point (RMEP) is located checks whether the CC packet is received. If the receive end fails to receive the CC packet, the receive end reports corresponding alarms. For example, if the receive ends fails to receive the CC packet within three cycles, the receive end reports the LOCV alarm. If the attributes of the received CC packet are inconsistent with the attributes of the packet in the maintenance association (MA) of the maintenance domain (MD), the receive end reports the Mismerge, Mismatch and other alarms. When the activation status is "Inactive", the NE where the MEP is does not send any CC packet and the NE where the RMEP is does check for an alarm.

Values
Value Range Active, Inactive Default Value Active

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Active

Description Indicates that the NE where the MEP is starts to send the CC packet and the receive end, that is, the NE where the RMEP is checks whether the CC packet is received. If the receive end fails to receive the CC packet, the receive end reports corresponding alarms. Indicates that the NE where the MEP is does not send any CC packet and the NE where the RMEP is does check for an alarm.

Inactive

Configuration Guidelines
The activation status is "Active" after the MEP is created on the NE and the service connectivity can be checked. The activation status can also be set to "Inactive".

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
Before setting this parameter, obtain the information about the MD, MA and MEP.

C.99 Scrambling Capability (POS Port)

Description
Set the Scrambling Capability parameter to determine whether to scramble or descramble the PPP frames of the POS port.

Impact on the System

When the POS port carries services, setting this parameter causes bit error and packet loss.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled. Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-79

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Enabled Disabled

Description Indicates that the PPP packets of the POS port are scrambled at the transmit end and descrambled at the receive end. Indicates that the PPP packets of the POS port are not scrambled or descrambled.

Configuration Guidelines
Set the Scrambling Capability parameter only for the POS port. If the Scrambling Capability parameter is set to Enabled for the POS port that transmits signals, set the Scrambling Capability parameter to Enabled for the POS port that receives signals. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
If you enable the frame scrambling for a POS port, the frame descrambling for the POS port is also enabled.

C.100 Detection Result

Description
The Detection Result parameter indicates the connectivity of the service flow from the source MP to the destination MP.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 0, 1 Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value 0 1

C-80

Description Indicates that the service connectivity is normal. Indicates that the service connectivity is abnormal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter is used for query only. No rule is specified for selecting a value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.101 Static MAC Address

Description
The Static MAC Address parameter indicates the packet forward MAC address that is manually configured for the E-LAN service. This MAC address is not automatically aged. When the destination MAC address is the same as this MAC address, the packets are directly forwarded.

Impact on the System

If the MAC address self-learning function is not enabled for the E-LAN service, and if the destination MAC address carried with the packets does not match the configured static MAC address, the services are not available.

Values
Create the static MAC address table. Service ID Value Range 1-4294967294 Default Value None.

VLAN ID Value Range 1-4094 Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-81

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value 1-4094 -

Description If the E-LAN service is in the IVL mode, you can specify that the packets are forwarded according to the VLAN and MAC address. If the E-LAN service is in the SVL mode, the VLAN learning is not supported.

MAC Address Value Range 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FE (The multicast MAC address similar to *1-**-**-**-**-** is not allowed.) Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
This broadcast MAC address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) and the multicast MAC address similar to *1-**-**-**-**-** are not allowed.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.102 LAG Type

Description
The LAG Type parameter can be set to Manual or Static. In the case of the manual LAG, the LACP protocol is not enabled. In the case of the static LAG, the LACP protocol is enabled and protocol packets are exchanged. The protocol state machine determines whether the port can carry services.

Impact on the System

As the LACP protocol is not enabled for the manual LAG, the LAG Type parameter should be set to Manual for the interconnected ports. In addition, the Load Sharing and Revertive Mode parameters should be set as the same for the interconnected ports. Otherwise, the working ports do not belong to the same link and services are interrupted. If the manual LAG works in the full-duplex mode and a unidirectional fiber cut occurs, the services are interrupted.
C-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

When a static LAG is initially created, the services are interrupted until the two ends negotiate and determine a port that can carry the services.

Values
Value Range Manual, Static Default Value Static

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Manual Description The LACP protocol is not enabled. The link status, rate, and duplex mode of a port determine whether the port can carry services. The LACP protocol is enabled and protocol packets are exchanged. The protocol state machine determines whether the port can carry services.

Static

Configuration Guidelines
If the user does not require the LACP protocol, set the LAG Type parameter to Manual. If the user requires the LACP protocol and the two ends use the LACP protocol, set the LAG Type parameter to Static.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.103 Control Channel Type

Description
Set the Control Channel Type parameter to specify the mode for detecting the PW connectivity. Three modes are available for checking the PW connectivity, that is, control word (CW), route alarm label, and time to live (TTL) label. Currently, the equipment supports only the CW mode.

Impact on the System

None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-83

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range CW, None Default Value CW

The following table lists the description of each value. Value None CW Description The CW is not supported, that is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. The CW is supported.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.104 Control Word (ATM Service)

Description
The Control Word parameter is used to set the usage policy of the PW control word. Based on the negotiation at the control layer, this parameter is used for the packet sequence test, packet segmentation and reconstruction. When the Control Word parameter is enabled, the field of the four-byte control word is added to the head of packets to be transmitted. This field is used for testing packets. This parameter indicates whether the PW enables or disables the control word function.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range No use, must use Default Value Depends on the PW type.

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value No use Must use

Description Indicates that the control word policy is not used. Indicates that the control word policy must be used.

Configuration Guidelines
When the Control Word parameter is enabled, the setting is valid only when the settings at two ends are consistent.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.105 Aging Ability

Description
The Aging Ability parameter indicates whether the learned MAC address is aged in a period after the MAC address is learned. The MAC address aging helps increase the overall resource utilization and avoid that certain packets use the system resources all the time.

Impact on the System

When an MAC address is aged, the port clears the original unicast forward trails and broadcasts the received packets whose destination MAC address is the aged MAC address. The port forwards these packets only when the port learns this aged MAC address again.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description The MAC address is to be aged. The MAC address is not to be aged.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-85

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
If certain MAC addresses are not used within a period after the aging function is enabled, these MAC address are aged. Then, the packets with these MAC addresses are broadcast until the unicast is formed.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.106 Aging Time (min)

Description
Set the Aging Time (min) parameter to set the aging time of the learned MAC address. The Aging Time (min) parameter indicates that the MAC address is automatically aged after the timing is set.

Impact on the System

When the Aging Time (min) parameter is reset, the MAC addresses learned before the resetting remains aged according to the original aging time, and the MAC addresses learned after the resetting are aged according to the current aging time. When the aging time is up, the original unicast E-LAN services are broadcast.

Values
Value Range 1-640 Default Value 5 Unit Minute as the unit and one as the spacing.

Configuration Guidelines
Set the aging time of MAC addresses according to the user requirements. The minimum time is one minute.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.
C-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.107 Connection Type

Description
The connection types are classified into the VPC and VCC. The virtual path connection (VPC) indicates that only the value of the virtual path identifier (VPI) is changed and that the value of virtual channel identifier is unchanged during the exchange. During the VPC configuration, only the VPI needs to be configured and the VCI does not need to be configured (The VCI is invalid). For the VPC, every connection can carry all services with the same VPI, including different VCI services with the same VPI. The ATM service on the PTN equipment is static. Hence, the VPC parameter is replaced by the PVP parameter on the T2000. The virtual channel connection (VCC) indicates that an ATM connection is identified by both a VPI and a VCI. The VPI and VCI of an ATM connection can be changed during the exchange. Thus, both the VPI and VCI of an ATM need to be configured. For the VCC, every connection can carry the service that is identified by both the VPI and VCI. The ATM service on the PTN equipment is static, so the VPC parameter is replaced by the PVP parameter on the T2000.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range PVP, PVC Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value PVP PVC Description Indicates that every connection can carry all services with the same VPI, including different VCI services with the same VPI. Indicates that every connection can only carry a service that is identified by a unique VPI and VCI.

Configuration Guidelines
PVP: To converge the services with the same VPI to one port, set the connection type to VPC. PVC: To transmit a single service that is identified by a unique VPI and VCI, set the connection type to VCC. As shown in the following figure, both the PVP and PVC are virtual and the PVC is contained in the PVP. If you choose to configure a VCC, the VCC indicates the smaller channel while the
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-87

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

VPC indicates the bigger channel. All the services in this virtual channel of this virtual path can be transmitted.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Once a service is created, its connection type cannot be changed.

Related Information
None.

C.108 Enable Differential Delay

Description
Set the Enable Differential Delay parameter to set the delay detection for the MP group. This parameter is valid only for the E1 link.

Impact on the System

If a member link has excessive delay after the delay detection is enabled, this link does not perform the data packet slicing and the MP_DELAY alarm is reported. In this case, the bandwidth for the MP group decreases. The reduced bandwidth is the bandwidth for this member link, that is, 2 Mbit/s.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
C-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Related Information
None.

C.109 Link Event Notification

Description
The Link Event Notification parameter determines whether the local end sends the link event notification packets to the remote end when the local end detects that the bit errors cross the threshold.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the local end is capable of sending the link event notification packets to the remote end. Indicates that the local end is not capable of sending the link event notification packets to the remote end.

Configuration Guidelines
If the local end need send the link event notification packets to the remote end, set the Link Event Notification parameter to Enabled. If the local end need not send the link event notification packets to the remote end, set the Link Event Notification parameter to Disabled.

C.110 Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing

Description
Set the Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing parameter to enable or disable the traffic classification bandwidth sharing. Flow Classification of V-UNI Ingress Policy includes the preset Committed Information Rate. When packets on multiple V-UNIs that use this policy match this Flow Classification (in
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-89

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

other words, flows that match this Flow Classification are available on each V-UNI), if Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing is enabled, the total bandwidth of these flows is restrained by the CIR set by Flow Classification. If Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing is disabled, on each V-UNI, the flows that match Flow Classification are restrained by the CIR set by Flow Classification.

Impact on the System

None.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Disabled Enabled Description It indicates that the traffic classification bandwidth sharing is disabled. It indicates that the traffic classification bandwidth sharing is enabled.

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter is set according to service requirements. For example, packets on multiple V-UNIs that use a certain V-UNI Ingress Policy match Flow Classification of this policy (in other words, flows that match this Flow Classification are available on each V-UNI). In addition, the service packets of these flows have the same service features, such as the same destination IP address. In this case, if these service packets need share the CIR bandwidth set in Flow Classification of this policy, set Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing to Enabled.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When configuring Flow Classification of V-UNI Ingress Policy, set Bandwidth Limit to Enabled. In addition, the CIR of Flow Classification should be configured. In this case, Traffic Classification Bandwidth Sharing is valid.

Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see Traffic Classification Rule.

C-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.111 Traffic Classification Rule

Description
The Traffic Classification Rule parameter indicates the rules for classifying service packets. The necessary parameters should be set for Traffic Classification Rule, that is, Match Type (required), Logical Relation Between Matched Rules (required when two or more traffic classification rules are available for one flow), Match Value (required), and Wilcard (optional).

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Set the traffic classification rule in the following formats: [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] And Logical Relation Between Matched Rules (the matched packets should meet all the traffic classification rules) [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] & [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] &...& [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] Or Logical Relation Between Matched Rules: (the matched packets should meet one of the traffic classification rule) [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] / [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard] /.../ [Match Type : Match Value : Wilcard]

Configuration Guidelines
The traffic classification rules are applicable only to the port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. The character string of the match rule (match type, match value, and wilcard included) can contain a maximum of 128 bytes.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
Currently, the equipment cannot identify the IPv6 packets. For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Match Type, Match Value, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-91

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.112 Name
Description
Set the Name parameter to set a name for the physical port or virtual port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
The port name should contain characters and numbers. The port name can have a maximum of 64 characters.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.113 Default Packet Relabeling Color

Description
The Default Packet Relabeling Color indicates the color that the NE sets to the user packets on the V-UNI side by default. On a PTN NE, the packet color indicates the priority for discarding the packet. The packet colors are red, yellow, and green. The red packet has the highest discard priority, and thus is discard first in the case of congestion. The green packet has the lowest discard priority. The yellow packet has the middle discard priority.

Impact on the System Values

Value Range Red, Yellow, Green, None Default Value Green

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Red Yellow Green None.

Description By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set as red. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set as yellow. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set as green. By default, the priority of the user packets on the V-UNI side are set according to the mapping relation of the DS domain.

Configuration Guidelines
The user packets of a higher priority should be marked green. The user packets of a lower priority should be marked red. The user packets of a medium priority should be marked yellow.

Relationship with Other Parameters

If a certain V-UNI does not use the V-UNI ingress policy, the packets on the V-UNI is marked according to Default Packet Relabeling Color. If the V-UNI ingress policy is used, the packets that do not match the Traffic classificationof this policy should be marked according to Default Packet Relabeling Color.

C.114 Logical Relation Between Matched Rules

Description
When multiple traffic classification rules are set for a flow, set the Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameter to specify the logical relations among these traffic classification rules.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range And, or Default Value And

The following table lists the description of each value. Value And Description The packet matches the flow only when the packet matches each traffic classification rule.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-93

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Or

Description The packet matches the flow when the packet matches one of the traffic classification rules.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Before setting the Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameter, set the Traffic Classification Rule correctly.

C.115 Match Type

Description
Each data packet has many feature values such as the IP address, MAC address, and port number. These feature values can be considered as match types among the traffic classification rules.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Source IP Destination IP Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address Protocol Type Source Port Destination Port ICMP Packet Type DSCP Value IP-Precedence Value CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority DEI
C-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Default Value None.

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Range CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority

Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Source IP Description The source IP address is matched. The traffic classification rule that the source IP address matches is in the format of [Source IP : Source IP Value : Wilcard]. For example: [Source IP : 192.168.1.1 : 0.0.0.255]. Destination IP The destination IP address is matched. The traffic classification rule that the destination IP address matches is in the format of [Destination IP : Destination IP Value : Wilcard]. For example, [Destination IP : 192.168.1.2 : 0.0.0.0]. Source MAC Address The source MAC address is matched. The traffic classification rule that the source MAC address matches is in the format of [Source MAC Address : Source MAC Address Value : Wilcard]. For example, [Source MAC Address : 00-e0-fc-54-aa-59 : 00-00-00-00-00-00]. Destination MAC Address The destination MAC address is matched. The traffic classification rule that the destination MAC address matches is in the format of [Destination MAC Address : Destination MAC Address Value : Wilcard]. For example, [Destination MAC Address : 00-e0-fc-54-ab-59 : 00-00-00-00-00-00]. Protocol Type The protocol type is matched. The traffic classification rule that the protocol type matches is in the format of [Protocol Type : Protocol Type Value]. For example, [Protocol Type : icmp]. Source Port The source port is matched (available when the protocol type is TCP and UDP). The traffic classification rule that the source port matches is in the format of [Source Port : Source Port Value : Wilcard]. For example, [Source Port : 23 : 23].

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-95

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Destination Port

Description The destination port is matched (available when the protocol type is TCP and UDP). The traffic classification rule that the destination port matches is in the format of [Destination Port : Destination Port Value : Wilcard]. For example, [Destination Port : 80 : 80].

ICMP Packet Type

The ICMP packet type is matched (available when the protocol type is ICMP). The traffic classification type that the ICMP packet type matches is in the format of [ICMP Packet Type : ICMP Packet Type Value]. For example, [ICMP Packet Type : echo].

DSCP Value

The DSCP value is matched. The traffic classification rule that the DSCP value matches is in the format of [DSCP Value : Value of DSCP : Wilcard]. For example, [DSCP Value : 7 : 7].

IP-Precedence Value

The IP-Precedence Value is matched. The traffic classification rule that the IP-precedence value matches is in the format of [IP-Precedence Value : Value of IP-Precedence : Wilcard]. For example, [IP-Precedence Value : 6 : 6].

CVlan ID

The CVlan ID is matched. The traffic classification rule that the CVlan ID matches is in the format of [CVlan ID : CVlan ID Value : Wilcard]. For example, [CVlan ID : 100 : 120].

CVlan priority

The CVlan priority is matched. The traffic classification rule that the CVlan priority matches is in the format of [CVlan priority : CVlan priority Value : Wilcard]. For example, [CVlan priority : 4 : 6].

SVlan ID

The SVlan ID is matched. The traffic classification rule that the SVlan ID matches is in the format of [SVlan ID : SVlan ID Value : Wilcard]. For example, [SVlan ID : 100 : 120].

SVlan priority

The SVlan priority is matched. The traffic classification rule that the SVlan priority matches is in the format of [SVlan priority : SVlan priority Value : Wilcard]. For example, [SVlan priority : 5 : 6].

DEI

The DEI is matched. The traffic classification rule that the DEI matches is in the format of [DEI : DEI Value]. For example, [DEI : 1].

C-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
To process different service packets accordingly (make ACL for packets, apply different scheduling priorities or discard polices), perform traffic classification for the packets according to the varied feature values of packets. The feature value that can distinguish the packets according to requirements is adopted to classify the packets. For example, user A and user B access to a port. The PTN network should provide services of different QoS for the two users. Hence, the packets of user A and user B should be distinguished at the port. The analysis shows the following: In the case of the service packets of user A, the prefix of the source IP address is 192.168.1.0 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. In the case of the service packets of user B, the prefix of the source IP address is 192.168.2.0 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. The packets of user A can be distinguished from the packets of user B according to the source IP address. Hence, two traffic classification rules should be set at the port. [Source IP : 192.168.1.0 : 0.0.0.255] [Source IP : 192.168.2.0 : 0.0.0.255]

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
For the setting of this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification Rule, Match Value, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.

C.116 Match Value

Description
The Match Value parameter indicates the value set for a specific match type among the traffic classification rules. If certain bits of the match type value (source IP address, for example) are consistent with the mapping bits of the match value of the traffic classification rule, the packets match with the traffic classification rule.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
The following table lists the description of each value.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-97

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Source IP

Description Indicates the source IP value when the source IP address matches the traffic classification rule. For example: 192.168.1.1

Destination IP

Indicates the destination IP value when the destination IP address matches the traffic classification rule. For example: 192.168.2.1

Source MAC Address

Indicates the source MAC address value when the source MAC address matches the traffic classification rule. For example: 00-0f-ef-54-aa-00

Destination MAC Address

Indicates the destination MAC address value when the destination MAC address matches the traffic classification rule. For example: 00-0f-ef-54-ab-00

Protocol Type

Indicates the protocol type value when the protocol type matches the traffic classification rule. Protocol type range: tcp, udp, icmp, igmp

Source Port

Indicates the source port value when the source port (available when the protocol type is TCP and UDP) matches the traffic classification rule. The source port value ranges from 0 to 65535.

Destination Port

Indicates the destination port value when the destination port (available when the protocol type is TCP and UDP) matches the traffic classification rule. The destination port value ranges from 0 to 65535.

C-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value ICMP Packet Type

Description Indicates the ICMP packet type value when the ICMP packet type (available whether protocol type is ICMP) matches the traffic classification rule. Value range of ICMP packet type: echo echo-reply fragmentneed-DFset host-redirect host-tos-redirect host-unreachable information-reply information-request net-redirect net-tos-redirect net-unreachable parameter-problem port-unreachable protocol-unreachable reassembly-timeout source-quench source-route-failed timestamp-reply timestamp-request ttl-exceeded

DSCP Value

Indicates the value of DSCP when the DSCP value matches the traffic classification value. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.

IP-Precedence Value

Indicates the value of IP-Precedence when the IP-Precedence value matches the traffic classification value. The IP-Precedence value ranges from 0 to 7.

CVlan ID

Indicates the value of CVlan ID when the CVlan ID matches the traffic classification value. The CVlan ID value ranges from 0 to 4095.

CVlan priority

Indicates the value of CVlan priority when the CVlan priority matches the traffic classification value. The CVlan priority value ranges from 0 to 7.

SVlan ID

Indicates the value of SVlan ID when the SVlan ID matches the traffic classification value. The SVlan ID vale ranges from 0 to 4095.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-99

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value SVlan priority

Description Indicates the value of SVlan priority when the SVlan priority matches the traffic classification value. The SVlan priority value ranges from 0 to 7.

DEI

Indicates the value of DEI when the DEI matches the traffic classification value. The DEI value can be 0 or 1.

Configuration Guidelines
The match value of each match type should be within the valid range.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification Rule, Match Type, Wilcard, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.

C.117 Default Forwarding Priority

Description
The Default Forwarding Priority parameter indicates the forwarding priority that the NE sets to the user packets on the V-UNI side by default. The OptiX PTN NE forwards and schedules packets according to the priorities of the packets. The forwarding priorities supported by the OptiX PTN NE include CS7, CS6, EF, AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1, and BE (arranged from the highest priority to the lowest).

Impact on the System

The system running is not affected.

Values
Value Range BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, CS7, NONE Default Value BE

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 CS6 CS7 NONE

Description By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to BE. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to AF1. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to AF2. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to AF3. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to AF4. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to CS6. By default, the user packets on the V-UNI side are set to CS7. The priority of the user packets on the V-UNI side are set according to the mapping relation in the DS domain.

Configuration Guidelines
CS7: Indicates the highest forwarding priority, for delivering the control packets (very important protocol packets) in the network. CS6: Indicates the priority that is lower than CS7, for delivering the control packets (important protocol packets) in the network. EF: Indicates the expedited forwarding priority that is lower than CS6, for the low delay services (for example, voice services). AF4: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 4, whose forwarding priority is lower than EF. AF3: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 3, whose forwarding priority is lower than AF4. AF2: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 2, whose forwarding priority is lower than AF3. AF1: Indicates the assured forwarding priority 1, whose forwarding priority is lower than AF2. BE: Indicates the best effort forwarding priority that is the lowest forwarding priority, for the services without QoS in the network.

Relationship with Other Parameters

If a certain V-UNI does not use the V-UNI ingress policy, the packets on the V-UNI are forwarded according to Default Forwarding Priority. If the V-UNI ingress policy is used, the packets that do not match the Traffic classificationof this policy are forwarded according to Default Forwarding Priority.

C.118 Coloration Mode

Description
Committed access rate (CAR): When the packet rate is lower than the minimum allowed access rate, the packets are marked green. When the packet rate is higher than the maximum allowed
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-101

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

access rate, the packets are marked red. When the packet rate is between the minimum allowed access rate and maximum allowed access rate, the packets are marked yellow. The Coloration Mode parameter sets the coloration mode of a certain Traffic Classification. Two coloration modes are available, that is, Color Blindness and Color Sensitive.

Impact on the System

The system running is not affected.

Values
Value Range Color Blindness, Color Sensitive Default Value Color Blindness

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Color Blindness Description Indicates the color blindness mode. The CAR is directly performed for the user packets, which are marked according to the CAR result. Indicates the color sensitive mode. The CAR is performed on the packets, and then compare the CAR result with the color of the packet. Then, select the color that is darker to mark the packets. The darkness of the packet colors descends in the sequence of red, yellow, and green.

Color Sensitive

Configuration Guidelines
After the upstream DS domain marks the service packets accessed into the local DS domain, on the ingress node of the local DS domain, if the coloration result of the upstream DS domain need be considered, Color Sensitive is applicable to the Traffic Classification that matches the service packets. Otherwise, Color Blindness is applicable.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When the service packets from the upstream DS domain enter the ingress node of the local DS domain, the color of packets is obtained according to the mapping relation between the packet priority and color, which is defined in the local DS domain mapping relation. If Coloration Mode is set to Color Sensitive, the color of service packets from the upstream DS domain should be restored. Ensure that the mapping relations of the service packets in the upstream DS domain and local DS domain are consistent.

C-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.119 Uplink Policy

Description
The Uplink Policy parameter indicates the traffic policy ID for the ATM connection in the specific direction. For example, if the service for this connection is of the UNIs-NNI type, the specific direction is UNI-to-PW; if the service for this connection is of the UNI-UNI type, the specific direction is from the source UNI port to sink UNI port.

Impact on the System

In the case of an ATM connection, the uplink policy determines the traffic policy in a specific direction, such as the priority scheduling, leaky bucket processing mechanism, shaping processing, and network-side priority scheduling. If you select an improper uplink policy, packets may be lost or the QoS may not be ensured for services of higher priorities.

Values
Value 1-1024 Description Select one from the created policies and enter the index.

Configuration Guidelines
The uplink policy affects the traffic parameters and QoS parameters in the specific direction of the ATM connection. In addition, the network QoS sets the forward priority according to the uplink policy. Select a proper ATM policy according to the features of the data carried by the ATM connection. In the case of the services that have high transmission quality requirements, select the ATM policy that ensures the transmission quality with priority.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Make sure that the entered index indicates an existing ATM policy.

Related Information
None.

C.120 Clock Mode

Description
Set the Clock Mode parameter to set the clock mode of the CES service. The Clock Mode parameter indicates whether the clocks of the PDH/SDH services accessed at both ends are synchronous.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-103

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Impact on the System

The clock mode setting affects the synchronization of the PDH/SDH services at both ends. If the settings at both ends do not indicate that the service clocks are synchronous, alarms such as the bit error alarms are generated for the CES service. The clock mode setting should be based on the networking planning with respect to the clock synchronization.

Values
Value Range External Clock Mode, Adaptive Clock Mode Default Value External Clock Mode

The following table lists the description of each value. Value External Clock Mode Adaptive Clock Mode Description Indicates that the clock of the CES service uses the system clock and thus is synchronous with the clock of the local NE. Indicates that the clock extracted from the received service packets in the MEN network is used as the clock for the CES service. In this way, the clock of the CES service is synchronous with the service clock of the opposite NE.

Configuration Guidelines
Currently, only the external clock mode is supported on the PTN equipment.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.121 Clock Mode (PDH/SDH Port)

Description
The Clock Mode parameter indicates whether the PDH/SDH port uses the internal clock or the line recovery clock as the working clock.

Impact on the System

None.
C-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range Master, Slave Default Value Master

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Master Slave Description Indicates that the port uses the internal clock as the working clock. Indicates that the port uses the line recovery clock as the working clock.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
Perform self-loop with a fiber for the POS port during the test (connect the transmit and receive ports of the same interface with a fiber directly). If the Clock Mode parameter is set to Slave, services are interrupted.

C.122 Split Horizon Group

Description
The Split Horizon Group parameter indicates a special group configured to isolate the communication of each member port. In the case of a split horizon group, the member ports should not communicate with each other.

Impact on the System

The member ports of a split horizon group do not communicate with each other.

Values
Create a split horizon group. Service ID

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-105

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Range 1-4294967294

Default Value None.

Split Horizon Group ID Value Range 1 Default Value None.

Split Horizon Group Member Value Range Slot number - board - port number - VLANs Default Value None.

Selectable Interface Value Range Slot number - board - port number - VLANs Default Value None.

Selected Interface Value Range Slot - board - port - VLANs Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C-106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.123 Split Horizon Group ID

Description
The Split Horizon Group ID parameter identifies the split horizon group.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Split Horizon Group ID Value Range 1 Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.124 Split Horizon Group Member

Description
The Split Horizon Group Member parameter indicates the logical port member in a split horizon group.

Impact on the System

The member ports added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other.

Values
Service ID
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-107

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Value Range 1-4294967294

Default Value None.

Split Horizon Group ID Value Range 1 Default Value None.

Split Horizon Group Member Value Range Slot number - board - port number - VLANs Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.125 Sink Interface Type

Description
Set the Sink Interface Type parameter to set the sink interface type of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR service. This parameter can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI.

Impact on the System

Set the sink interface type of the E-AGGR service same as the opposite logical interface type. Otherwise, the E-AGGR service is not available.

Values
Value Range V-UNI, V-NNI Default Value None.

C-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

The following table lists the description of each value. Value V-UNI V-NNI Description Indicates that the sink interface is a V-UNI interface. Indicates that the sink interface is a V-NNI interface.

Configuration Guidelines
The logical interface type of the sink interface of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR service can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI. The interconnected logical interfaces, however, should be of the same type.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.126 Sink Node

Description
One PW provides the emulation connection from the local NE to the opposite NE. This parameter identifies the opposite NE of the PW, that is, the node ID of the opposite NE.

Impact on the System

When the PW is dynamically created, this parameter indicates that a PW from the local NE to an NE at a specified opposite end is created. If this parameter is invalid or incorrect, the PW creation fails, the PW creation succeeds but cannot be up, or the PW is connected to an incorrect NE.

Values
The IP address of the opposite NE of the PW, that is, the node ID of the remote NE.

Configuration Guidelines
The value should be a unicast IP address, and thus the following IP addresses are not applicable.
l l l l

All "0"s address (0.*.*.*) All "1"s address (255.255.255.255) Local computer loopback address (127.*.*.*) Multicast address (224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-109

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

C Parameter Reference
l l l l

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Reserved address (240.0.0.0-255.255.255.255) Network address (NE number field: all "0"s) Broadcast address (NE number field: all "1"s) Network address (network number field: all "0"s)

C.127 Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address

Description
The Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the maintenance point (MP) is located.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Any valid destination unicast MAC address Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
Indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination MP is located.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.128 Used Port

Description
The Used Port parameter indicates the optical interface on the CD1 where the serial port is available.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
C-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range Example: 5-MP1-1-CD1-1(PORT-1) Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.129 Hop Count

Description
The hop count, also called time to live (TTL), is carried with the OAM packets. The Hop Count parameter indicates the connection from the response MP to the source MP. On the trail from the source MP to the destination MP, the hop count for the packets decreases by one when the packets pass through each maintenance intermediate point (MIP). For example, the packets pass through one MIP and reach the response MP, the returned hop count is 1. The maximum value of the Hop Count parameter is 64. If the packets pass through 64 MPs and fail to reach the response MP, the OAM packets are discarded. In this case, value "/" is returned.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-64, "/" Default Value "/"

Configuration Guidelines
The Hop Count parameter cannot be set. When the loopback test (LT) is complete, a value is returned. When the OAM packets pass through 64 MPs and fail to reach the response MP, the "/" value is returned.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-111

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Related Information
None.

C.130 Wildcard
Description
The Wildcard parameter indicates that the packets need match only a portion of the match values. The number of digits of the wildcard is consistent with the number of digits of the match value. After the wildcard is converted to the binary format, digit 0 in the match value should be matched, but digit 1 need not be considered. For example, if the Match Type is Source IP, the match value is 192.168.1.100. In this case, if the set wildcard is 0.0.0.255, it indicates that all the packets whose source IP address starting from 192.168.1. comply with the flow classification rule. When the wildcard is set to all "0"s, it indicates that the packets should strictly match the match value. In the wildcard, digit 0 indicates the digit in the Match Type (for example, Source IP) that the user need consider. In the user packets, if the value of the digit in the Match Type (for example, Source IP) that the user need consider is equal to the value of the corresponding digit in the match value. In this case, the user packets match the flow classification rule. Otherwise, the user packets do not match the flow classification rule. The digits of the wildcard, user packet match type value, and match type value indicate the digits after the values of the wildcard, user packet match type value, and match type are converted to the binary format.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Match Type Source IP Description Indicates the wildcard value when the source IP address matches. For example, 0.0.0.255. Destination IP Source MAC Address Indicates the wildcard value when the destination IP address matches. For example, 0.0.255.255. Indicates the wildcard value when the source MAC address matches. For example, 00-00-00-00-00-ff. Destination MAC Address Indicates the wildcard value when the destination MAC address matches. For example, 00-00-00-00-0f-ff.
C-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Match Type Protocol Type Source Port

Description Indicates no wildcard. Indicates the wildcard value when the source port matches. Value range: 0-65535.

Destination Port

Indicates the wildcard value when the destination port matches. Value range: 0-65535.

ICMP Packet Type DSCP Value

Indicates no wildcard. Indicates the wildcard value when the DSCP value matches. Value range: 0-63.

IP-Precedence Value

Indicates the wildcard value when the IP-Precedence value matches. Value range: 0-7.

CVlan ID

Indicates the wildcard value when the CVlan ID matches. Value range: 0-4095.

CVlan priority

Indicates the wildcard value when the CVlan priority matches. Value range: 0-7.

SVlan ID

Indicates the wildcard value when the SVlan ID matches. Value range: 0-4095.

SVlan priority

Indicates the wildcard value when the SVlan priority matches. Value range: 0-7.

DEI

Indicates no wildcard.

Configuration Guidelines
The wildcard value of each match type should be within its own valid range. When the wildcard is set to all "0"s, it indicates that the packets should strictly match the match value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
For details on how to set this parameter, see the description of the Traffic Classification Rule, Match Type, Match Value, and Logical Relation Between Matched Rules parameters.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-113

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.131 Maintenance Domain Level

Description
The Maintenance Domain Level parameter indicates the level of the maintenance domain (MD). The MD level restricts the usage scope of the OAM.

Impact on the System

In one MD, the OAM packets at the same MD level can be normally transmitted and received. The OAM packets at a higher MD level are not processed, but are transparently transmitted. The OAM packets at a lower MD level are directly discarded.

Values
Value Range 0-7 Default Value 4

The following table lists the description of each value. You can also define the maintenance scope for an MD level as required. Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Customer Customer Customer Service Provider Service Provider Operator Operator Operator

Configuration Guidelines
"0" indicates the lowest MD level and "7" the highest MD level. The parameter level defines the maintenance scope of the OAM operations.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
C-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Related Information
Before setting this parameter, obtain the information about the MD.

C.132 Tail Drop Threshold (256bytes)

Description
The Tail Drop Threshold (256bytes) parameter sets the packet discarding threshold of scheduling queue. When the buffer space used by all the packets in the queue exceeds the tail drop threshold, all the subsequent packets are discarded.

Impact on the System

If the tail drop threshold is set to 0, the packets cannot pass through this queue, and the services are interrupted.

Values
The following table lists the trail drop threshold of the port policy. Value Range 0-960 Default Value 960 Unit 256 bytes

The following table lists trail drop threshold of the service policy, including V-UNI ingress policy, V-UNI egress policy, PW policy, and QinQ policy. Value Range 0-4095 Default Value 4095 Unit 256 bytes

Configuration Guidelines
If the tail drop threshold is set to a bigger value, more packets can be buffered, and the packet loss is decreased. The service delay, however, is increased. If the tail drop threshold is set to a smaller value, less packets can be buffered, and the packet loss is increased. The service delay, however, is decreased.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When you configure the port policy, only one of Tail Drop Threshold and Port WRED Policy can be configured. When you configure V-UNI ingress policy, V-UNI egress policy, PW policy, or QinQ policy, only one of Tail Drop Threshold and Service WRED Policy can be configured.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-115

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Related Information
None.

C.133 Unknown Frame Processing

Description
The Unknown Frame Processing parameter indicates how to process the unknown frames in the service packets. In the case of the E-LAN service packets, the frames whose MAC address matches neither the static MAC address configured by the user nor the self-learned dynamic MAC address are called unknown packets. If you set the Unknown Frame Processing parameter to Broadcast, the unknown frames are broadcast in the E-LAN service. If you set the Unknown Frame Processing parameter to Discard, the unknown frames are discarded.

Impact on the System

In this case, the E-LAN service may be not available if the E-LAN service is not configured with any static MAC address.

Values
Value Range Broadcast, Discard Default Value Broadcast

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Broadcast Discard Application Indicates that the unknown packets are broadcast in the ELAN service. Indicates that the unknown frames are discarded in the E-LAN service.

Configuration Guidelines
If the E-LAN service is not configured with any static MAC address, set the Unknown Frame Processing parameter to Broadcast. If the E-LAN service is configured with the static MAC address and the unknown frames need not be processed, set the Unknown Frame Processing parameter to Discard.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
C-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Related Information
None.

C.134 Location
Description
The Location parameter indicates the role of the logical interface for the Ethernet service.

Impact on the System

The role determines the position of the logical interface in the service.

Values
Value Range Source, Sink Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Source Sink Description Indicates that the logical interface is set as the source port for the service. Indicates that the logical interface is set as the sink port for the service.

Configuration Guidelines
The source port can be either the UNI interface or NNI interface. The sink port can be either the UNI interface or NNI interface. If the sink port is a UNI interface, the display format is "slot number - board name - port name". If the sink port is an NNI interface, the logical port can be a port, PW or QinQ link.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-117

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.135 Physical Port ID

Description
The Physical Port ID parameter identifies the physical port that applies the QinQ policy.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Slot number - board name - port number (PORT - number), for example, 1-EG16-11 (PORT-11)

Configuration Guidelines
None.

C.136 System Priority (LAG)

Description
The System Priority parameter indicates the priority level of a link aggregation group (LAG). This parameter affects the working state of the member ports in the LAG.

Impact on the System

When the LAG at the local end negotiates with the LAG at the opposite end by using the LACP packets, the LAGs can obtain the system priority information of each other. The result computed by the selection logic of the LAG with the higher priority is considered as the common result for both LAGs. If the two LAGs have the same system priority, the system MAC addresses of the two LAGs are compared. The LAG with the lower MAC address is adopted. The system priority increases as the value decreases.

Values
Value Range 0-65535, 1 as the spacing Default Value 32768

Configuration Guidelines
To adopt the result computed by the selection logic of a static LAG, set a higher system priority for this static LAG.
C-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Relationship with Other Parameters

The System Priority (Link Aggregation) parameter is valid only when the LAG Type parameter is set to Static.

Related Information
None.

C.137 Downlink Policy

Description
The Downlink Policy parameter indicates the traffic policy ID for the ATM connection in the specific direction. For example, if the service for this connection is of the UNIs-NNI type, the specific direction is PW-to-UNI; if the service for this connection is of the UNI-UNI type, the specific direction is from the sink UNI port to source UNI port.f the service for this connection is of the UNI-UNI type, the specific direction is from the sink UNI port to source UNI port.

Impact on the System

In the case of an ATM connection, the downlink policy determines the traffic policy in a specific direction, such as the priority scheduling, leaky bucket processing mechanism, shaping processing, and network-side priority scheduling. If you select an improper ATM policy, packets may be lost or the QoS is not ensured for services of higher priorities.

Values
Value 1-1024 Description Select one from the created policies and enter the index.

Configuration Guidelines
The downlink policy affects the traffic parameters and QoS parameters in the specific direction of the ATM connection. In addition, the network QoS sets the forward priority according to the downlink policy. Select a proper ATM policy according to the features of the data carried by the ATM connection. In the case of the services that have high transmission quality requirements, select the ATM policy that ensures the transmission quality with priority.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Make sure that the entered index indicates an existing ATM policy.

Related Information
None.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-119

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.138 Line Encoding Format

Description
The Line Encoding Format parameter sets the line code type of the E1 link.

Impact on the System

If the line codes of the two interconnected ports are inconsistent, the services are unavailable.

Values
Value Range HDB3 Default Value HDB3

The following table lists the description of each value. Value HDB3 Description Indicates that the HDB3 code is used on this E1 port.

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter must be set before the services are configured. In addition, the line codes of the two interconnected ports are consistent.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.139 Response Maintenance Point ID

Description
The Response Maintenance Point ID parameter identifies the response MP according to the MAC address.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

C-120

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range Indicates the MAC address of the port. Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
Indicates the MAC address of the port where the response MP is located.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.140 Signal Type

Description
The Signal Type parameter indicates the label allocation scheme of a PW, that is, dynamic or static. When creating a PW service, adopt the dynamic or static scheme to allocate the PW label. In the case of the static scheme, the PW label is allocated manually. In the case of the dynamic scheme, the downlink node allocates the PW label by using the signaling.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Static, Dynamic Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Static Dynamic Description Indicates that the PW label is allocated manually. Indicates that the downlink node allocates the PW label by using the signaling.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-121

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
None.

C.141 CDVT (us)

Description
The cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT) indicates the capability of tolerating the burst ATM cells. The CDVT unit is us. If certain cells arrive later than they are supposed to arrive, these cells are considered as burst cells. The volume of these burst cells is measured based on the arrival time difference. If the volume sum of multiple consecutive ATM cells exceeds the CDVT of the leaky bucket, the coming violation cells are discarded.

Impact on the System

If the CDVT is set to a small value, the leaky bucket may lose packets in the case of a large volume of burst cells.

Values
Value Range 0.7-1310000.0 Default Value None. Unit us

Configuration Guidelines
To reduce the lost packets to the minimum, set the CDVT to a proper large value. For example, if the value is approximately 1000000, the services can tolerate most burst cells. If the PCR/SCR value of the connection is relatively large, you can set the CDVT to a relative small value. The burst time decreases as the cell rate increases. Hence, the CDVT can be set to a small value. If the PCR/SCR value is relatively large, the cell spacing is relatively large and the burst time may be also relatively large. Hence, set the CDVT to a relative large value in this case.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The CDVT is converse with the PCR/SCR.

Related Information
None.

C-122

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.142 Service Type (ATM Service)

Description
The Service Type parameter indicates whether an ATM service passes through a packet switching network (PSN). Two service types are available. The service of one type passes through the PSN network and the service of the other type does not. The former is created on one UNI (Layer 2) port and one NNI (PW) port, and the latter is created on two NNI ports of the same equipment.

Impact on the System

If the service type does not match the ATM connection to be created, the creation of the ATM connection fails.

Values
Value Range UNI-UNI, UNIs-NNI Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value UNI-UNI UNIs-NNI Description Indicates the service traveling from one UNI (Layer 2) port to another UNI (Layer 2) port. Indicates the service traveling from one or more than one UNI (Layer 2) ports to one NNI (PW) port.

Configuration Guidelines
Select a proper service type according to the application scenario. In the scenario where two sets of user equipment are interconnected, create one UNI-UNI service. Then, you can create an ATM connection between two UNI (Layer 2) ports on the basis of the UNI-UNI service. In the scenario where the user equipment accesses the network, create one UNIs-NNI service. Then, you can create an ATM connection between any two UNI (Layer 2) ports on the basis of the UNIs-NNI service.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-123

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.143 Service Type (ATM Policy)

Description
The service types are described as follows: Constant bit rate (CBR) In the case of the user end, also service applicant, the CBR service is extremely sensitive to the delay variation of the service data stream, and requires that the data should be transmitted at a constant rate. In the case of the network side, also service provider, certain static bandwidth should be always available for the CBR service in consecutive periods, and the highest priority should be provided to the CBR service. The main feature of the CBR service lies in the stability of the service data stream. The user end transmits data with a regular period. Hence, the service burst seldom occurs. The circuit emulation and audio services are typical application cases. When applying for the CBR service from the network side, the user should provide the peak cell rate (PCR) parameter. Real-time variable bit rate (RT-VBR) The RT-VBR service is extremely sensitive to the delay and delay variation. The audio service and video exchange service are typical application cases. This is similar to the CBR service. The RT-VBR service, however, can tolerate certain service burst. The data rate at the source can be different in different periods. In addition, the service provider does not allocate any static bandwidth for the RT-VBR service, but adopts the multi-path multiplexing mode. When applying for the RT-VBR service from the service provider, the user should provide the PCR, sustainable cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS) parameters. Non-real-time variable bit rate (NRT-VBR) Compared with the RT-VBR service, the NRT-VBR service does not require the real-time feature. In the case of the NRT-VBR service, the service data is processed at the network end with a lower priority than that for the RT-VBR service. The NRT-VBR service is similar to the RT-VBR service with respect to burst, statistics multiplexing and service parameters. Unspecified bit rate (UBR) The UBR service is also applicable to the scenario where there are high requirements for the real-time feature and there is much service burst. The services as the FTP and E-mail are typical application cases of the UBR. The UBR service, however, only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. When applying for the UBR service, the user need not specify any QoS parameter. The network side does not provide any ensured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first.

Impact on the System

In the case of the CBR/RT-VBR/NRT-VBR service, the system allocates the switching bandwidth specified by the PCR parameter. In the case of the UBR service, the system does not ensure the service transmission when network congestion occurs. The bandwidth for the UBR service may be preempted by the service of a higher priority.
C-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range CBR,,RT-VBR, NRT-VBR, UBR Default Value UBR

The traffic descriptor type and traffic parameter vary with the service type.

Configuration Guidelines
The service of a constant bit rate, such as the audio service, requires the real-time feature, low delay and low jitter. In the case of such a service, apply the CBR service, which has the highest priority for transport in the network. The service of a variable bit rate, such as the video service, requires the real-time feature and low delay. In the case of such a service, apply the RT-VBR service, which has the second highest priority for transport in the network. The service, such as the file transfer service, does not require the real-time feature. In the case of such a service, apply the NRT-VBR service, which has the priority lower than the priority of the RT-VBR service but higher than the priority of the UBR service for transport in the network. The NRT-VBR service can ensure the transport based on the SCR bandwidth. The data service, such as the Internet access service, requires the best-effort transport. In the case of such a service, apply the UBR service, which has the lowest priority for transport in the network. When the network congestion occurs, the UBR service is discarded first.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.144 Service Type (Ethernet OAM)

Description
The Service Type parameter indicates the type of the service to be detected by the OAM during the creation of an MA.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-125

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Values
Value Range E-Line, E-LAN, E-AGGR Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value E-Line E-LAN E-AGGR Description Indicates the Ethernet private line service. Indicates the Ethernet private network service. Indicates the Ethernet aggregation service.

Configuration Guidelines
The OAM performance statistics can be performed only for the E-Line service.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.145 Service Name

Description
The Service Name parameter indicates the type of the service to be detected by the OAM during the creation of an MA.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value A character string of not more than 64 characters Description -

C-126

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.146 Source Interface Type

Description
Set the Source Interface Type parameter to set the source interface type of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR service. This parameter can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI.

Impact on the System

Set the source interface type of the E-AGGR service as the same as the opposite logical interface type.

Values
Value Range V-UNI, V-NNI Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value V-UNI V-NNI Description Indicates that the source interface is a V-UNI interface. Indicates that the source interface is a V-NNI interface.

Configuration Guidelines
The logical interface type of the source interface of the VLAN switching table for the E-AGGR service can be set to V-UNI or V-NNI. The interconnected logical interfaces, however, should be of the same type.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-127

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.147 Remote OAM Parameter

Description
The Remote OAM Parameter parameter indicates the configuration information about the remote port received by a port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Example: 3-EG16-3(PORT-3) Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
Only the port number of the port where the EFMOAM is enabled can be entered.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.148 Remote OAM Working Mode

Description
The Remote OAM working mode parameter indicates whether the remote OAM is in the active mode or passive mode. In the case of the passive mode, the remote OAM does not start the negotiation or loopback.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Active, Passive Default Value Active

C-128

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Configuration Guidelines
In the case of the passive mode, the remote OAM does not actively transmit the protocol packets. Hence, if the remote OAM is in the passive mode, the local OAM should be in the active mode.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.149 Remote Side Loopback Response

Description
The Remote Side Loopback Response parameter indicates the capability of the 802.3ah protocol of a port responding to the remote loopback.

Impact on the System

If the Remote Side Loopback Response parameter is set to Enabled, the services are interrupted when the local end starts the loopback.

Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the capability of responding to the remote loopback is available. Indicates that the capability of responding to the remote loopback is unavailable.

Configuration Guidelines
When the remote loopback need be responded, this parameter is set to Enabled. When the remote loopback need not be responded, this parameter is set to Disabled.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-129

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.150 Remote Working Status

Description
Currently, the equipment supports the bidirectional PW, but the tunnel is unidirectional. One PW is carried in two tunnels of opposite directions. Hence, to know the running status of the PW, you should know the status of the two tunnels that carry this PW. This parameter is a query parameter, which indicates the running status of the reverse (from the remote node to the local node) tunnel that carries the PW.

Impact on the System

When this parameter is down, it indicates that the reverse tunnel that carries the PW is unavailable. In this case, the PW is not up, and the services cannot be created. Determine whether the configuration parameters of the tunnel on the opposite NE are correct.

Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Up Common Fault Attachment Circuit Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Receive Fault AND PSNfacing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault AND PSNfacing PW Receive Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault AND PSN-facing PW Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit Fault Description Indicates the service is normal. Indicates faults occur in the receive direction on the user side. Indicates faults occur in the transmit direction on the user side. Indicates faults occur in both receive and transmit directions on the user side. Indicates faults occur in the receive direction on the user side and in the transmit direction on the network side. Indicates faults occur in the transmit direction on the user side and in the receive direction on the network side. Indicates faults occur in the receive and transmit directions on the user side and in the receive direction on the network side. -

C-130

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Attachment Circuit Receive Fault AND PSNfacing PW Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault AND PSNfacing PW Transmit Fault Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault AND PSN-facing PW Transmit Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault AND Attachment Circuit Receive Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault AND Attachment Circuit Transmit Fault PSN-facing PW Transmit & Receive Fault AND Attachment Circuit Transmit & Receive Fault /

Description Indicates faults occur in the receive direction on the user side and in the transmit direction on the network side. Indicates faults occur in the transmit direction on the user side and in the transmit direction on the network side. Indicates faults occur in the receive and transmit directions on the user side and in the transmit direction on the network side. Indicates faults occur in the receive and transmit directions on the network side and in the receive direction on the user side. Indicates faults occur in the receive and transmit directions on the network side and in the transmit direction on the user side. Indicates faults occur in the receive and transmit directions on the network side and in the transmit direction on the user side. Indicates no PW parameter is queried on the T2000.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Local Working Status Non-up status Non-up status Up Up Remote Working Status Non-up status Up Non-up status Up Compositive Working Status Down Down Down Up

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-131

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.151 Used Timeslot

Description
The Used Timeslot parameter indicates the VC-12 path number of the channelized STM-1 port. The path number corresponds to the 63 VC-12 timeslots in the STM-1.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 1-63 Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.152 Frame Format

Description
The Frame Format parameter sets the frame format of the E1 link.

Impact on the System

If the frame formats of the two interconnected ports are inconsistent, the services are unavailable.

Values
Value Range CRC-4 Multiframe, Unframe, Double Frame Default Value CRC-4 Multiframe

The following table lists the description of each value.

C-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Value Double Frame CRC-4 Multiframe

Description 32 bits form one G.704 basic frame. The double frame is a multiframe formed by two G.704 basic frames. The double frame is used for alignment. 32 bits form one G.704 basic frame. The CRC-4 multiframe is formed by 16 basic G.704 frames, which is defined in G.706 standard. The CRC-4 multiframe carries the cyclical redundancy check (CRC) information and line monitoring information. In the case of the CRC-4 multiframe flow, align the frames in the double frame mode. After the frames are successfully aligned in the double frame mode, align the frames in the CRC-4 multiframe mode. The signals are continuous bit streams, which have no frame structure.

Unframe

Configuration Guidelines
This value must be set before the services are configured. In addition, the frame formats of the two interconnected ports must be consistent. When the IMA, MLPPP, or structure-aware CES service is configured in the E1 link, the frame format of the E1 link should be set to Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe. When the structureagnostic CES service is configured in the E1 link, the frame format of the E1 link should be set to Unframe.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.153 Frame Type

Description
The Frame Type parameter can be set to Unicast or Multicast. In the case of the E-LAN service, the unicast packets whose source MAC address is not learned are called unknown unicast frames. In the case of the E-LAN service, the multicast packets whose source MAC address is not learned are called unknown multicast frames.

Impact on the System

If the unknown unicast frames are to be broadcast as configured, they are broadcast in the ELAN service. If the unknown unicast frames are to be discarded as configured, they are discarded in the ELAN service. If the unknown multicast frames are to be broadcast as configured, they are broadcast in the ELAN service.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-133

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

If the unknown multicast frames are to be discarded as configured, they are discarded in the ELAN service.

Values
Value Unicast Multicast Description Indicates the packet frames except the multicast frames and broadcast frames. The MAC address with the eighth bit of the first byte as 1 is specified as the multicast MAC address (The FF-FF-FF-FF-FFFF MAC address is excluded). If the destination MAC address in the packets is the multicast MAC address, these packets are multicast frames.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.154 VC-Switching-Supported VPIs

Description
The VC-Switching-Supported VPIs parameter indicates the count of VPIs that can be used for VC switching on an ATM port. For example, if you set this parameter to 2, it indicates that two VPIs are available when you crate a VCC connection on an ATM port. In this case, the other VPIs can be used only for the VP switching.

Impact on the System

This parameter affects the values of the VPIs for the VCC connection on an ATM port, and the count of VPC connections.

Values
Value Range 0-64 Default Value 32

The count of VPIs for VC switching ranges from 0 to 2VPIbits (VPIbits: the maximum number of VIPI bits). Due to the limitation of the sub-board hardware resources, the maximum count
C-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

cannot be achieved on certain conditions. Especially when the VPI/VCI bit number of certain ATM port is set as 12/16, the count is extremely small.

Configuration Guidelines
The count (VCX) of VPIs that support the VC switching depends on the values of the maximum number of VPI bits and maximum number of VCI bits. For example, if the number of VPI bits is set to 5, the maximum number of VCX is 32. In addition, due to the limited sub-board hardware resources, the VCX value is converse to the maximum number of VCI bits.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Each sub-board has certain hardware resources, which are shared by all the ATM ports on the sub-board. The count of VPIs (VCX) that support the VC switching is affected by the VPI and VCI values on this ATM port, and also the values on other ATM ports. The VCX varies inversely to the maximum number of VCI bits. The number of VCX x VCI varies directly to the sub-board hardware resources on the equipment. In addition, do not change this parameter when the subboard carries services.

Related Information
None.

C.155 Main Port

Description
The Main Port parameter indicates the LAG member port available for creating services. Each LAG has only one main port. If the Load Sharing parameter is set to Non-Sharing, the main port carries the services. When the main port becomes faulty, the services are switched to and carried by the slave port.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Example: 3-EG16-3(PORT-3) Default Value None.

Configuration Guidelines
Every Ethernet port on the NE can be used as the main port.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-135

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Related Information
None.

C.156 Main Port Status

Description
The Main Port Status parameter indicates the port status computed by the selection logic for the LAG.

Impact on the System

If one port is in the out-of-service state, the service cannot be loaded on this port. If a port is in the in-service state, this port can be added to an LAG. When the load sharing is configured for this port, the service can be loaded on this port.

Values
Value Range In-Service, Out-of-Service Default Value Out-of-Service

The following table lists the description of each value. Value In-Service Out-of-Service Description Indicates that the port can be added to an LAG and can carry the service. Indicates that the port cannot be added to an LAG and cannot carry the service.

Configuration Guidelines
This parameter is used for query only. No rule is specified for selecting a value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

In the case of the static LAG, the LACP protocol is used. The port status depends on the port working mode, port working rate, port priority, and LAG priority. In the case of the manual LAG, the LACP protocol is not used. The port status depends on the port working mode and port working rate.

Related Information
None.
C-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

C.157 Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port)

Description
Flow control is a kind of function to adjust the volume of the data traffic passing through the node or link to ensure that overloading does not occur on the node or in the link. The Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port) parameter indicates the flow control mode supported by the port. Finally, the two interconnected ports negotiate to obtain a usable flow control mode.

Impact on the System

If the port carries services, services are transiently interrupted when this parameter is modified.

Values
Value Range Disabled, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Default Value Disabled

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Disabled Description Indicates that the flow control function of the port is disabled. (The flow control function at both the transmit and receive directions is disabled.) Indicates that the dissymmetric flow control function is enabled in the auto-negotiation state. (The flow control frames can be transmitted, but the received flow control frames are not responded. The flow control mode used is determined by auto-negotiation.) Indicates that the symmetric flow control function is enabled in the auto-negotiation state. (The flow control frames can be transmitted, and the received flow control frames are responded. The flow control mode used is determined by auto-negotiation.) Indicates that the symmetric/dissymmetric flow control function is enabled in the auto-negotiation state. (The flow control mode used is determined by auto-negotiation.)

Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control

Configuration Guidelines
If the flow control mode is auto-negotiation, the flow control function realized on the port is determined by the auto-negotiation flow control mode set on the interconnected ports at the two
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-137

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

ends. The following table lists the negotiation results when the interconnected ports at the two ends are set to various auto-negotiation modes. Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode Set on the Local Port Disabled Any auto-negotiation flow control mode Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode Set on the Opposite Port Any auto-negotiation flow control mode Disabled Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control Negotiation Result (Flow Control Function Realized on the Local Port) Disabled. Disabled. Disabled. Disabled. The receive direction realizes the flow control function. Disabled Both the transmit and receive directions realize the flow control function. Both the transmit and receive directions realize the flow control function. The transmit direction realizes the flow control function. Both the transmit and receive directions realize the flow control function. Both the transmit and receive directions realize the flow control function.

Relationship with Other Parameters

l

When Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode and Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode are set to a value other than Disabled. at the same time, the flow control mode of the port is determined by the working mode of the port. When the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control mode is auto-negotiation. When the working mode of the port is non-autonegotiation, the flow control mode is non-autonegotiation.

C-138

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide
l

C Parameter Reference

When either Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode or Non-Auto-negotiation Flow Control Mode is set to a value other than Disabled, the flow control mode of the port is also determined by the working mode of the port.

When Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is set to a value other than Disabled, if the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control mode is autonegotiation. If the working mode of the port is non-autonegotiation, the flow control function cannot be realized on the port. When Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is set to a value other than Disabled, if the working mode of the port is non-autonegotiation, the flow control mode is non-autonegotiation. If the working mode of the port is auto-negotiation, the flow control function cannot be realized on the port.

C.158 Compositive Working Status

Description
The Compositive Working Status parameter, a query parameter, indicates the PW status. When remote running status and local running status are both up, this parameter is up.

Impact on the System

This parameter indicates whether the PW status is normal. When this parameter is down, the services can be configured, but cannot be normally transmitted. Services can be normally transmitted only when this parameter is up.

Values
Value Down Up Description Indicates that the PW is not normally created, and the services are unavailable. Indicates that the PW is successfully created, and the services are normal.

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The following table lists the relation between Compositive Working Status, Local Working Status, and Remote Working Status. Local Working Status Non-up status
Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Remote Working Status Non-up status

Queried Compositive Working Status Down

C-139

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Local Working Status Non-up status Up Up

Remote Working Status Up Non-up status Up

Queried Compositive Working Status Down Down Up

C.159 Impedance
Description
The Impedance parameter indicates the impedance of the interface (electrical).

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 75ohm, 120ohm Default Value -

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.160 Max. OAM Packet Length (byte)

Description
The Max. OAM Packet Length (byte) parameter indicates the maximum length of the OAM packet. The near port and remote port compare the values of this parameter, and consider the smaller value as the maximum length of protocol packets.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.
C-140 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range 64-1518 Default Value 1518

Configuration Guidelines
The smaller number of 1518 and the port MTU value is considered as the maximum packet length. In this way, the protocol packets can be normally transmitted.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.161 Max. VCI Bits

Description
The virtual channel identifier (VCI) identifies the virtual channels of a virtual path. The VCI and the virtual path identifier (VPI) identify a virtual connection. The VCI uses 16 bits of the ATM header. Due to the limitation of the hardware resources, the maximum VCI bits cannot be achieved at the same time for every ATM port. Hence, before configuring a service, set the maximum VCI bits for each ATM port. If the maximum number of VCI bits is set to 16, the maximum value of the VCI is 65535 (216-1).

Impact on the System

This parameter affects the value range of the VCI for setting up a connection. For example, if the maximum number of VCI bits of an ATM port is 8, the VCI value should be 255 or less for creation of a connection on the ATM port. In addition, if a sub-board on the equipment carries services, do not change this parameter for any ATM port on the sub-board.

Values
Value Range 0-16 Default Value 7

Configuration Guidelines
The VCIs in each VPI are independent from each other. The VCI value ranges from 32 to 2MaxVCIbits-1. The VCI value less than 32 is for exclusive use of the network management, and
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-141

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

cannot be used by the user cells. In the case of the OptiX PTN 1900&3900, set the VCI value to 0xFFFFFFFF (invalid value) during creation of the VP connection.

Relationship with Other Parameters

As the hardware resources of each sub-board are limited, all ATM ports on the sub-board share the hardware resources. The valid value for the maximum VCI bits of an ATM port on the subboard is affected by the values of other ATM ports on the sub-board. In addition, do not change this parameter when the sub-board carries services.

Related Information
None.

C.162 Max. VPI Bits

Description
The virtual path identifier (VPI) identifies the virtual path in the VPC/VCC connection. In the case of the NNI cell format, the VPI takes 12 bits of the ATM cell header. In the case of the UNI cell format, the VPI takes 8 bits of the ATM cell header. Due to the limitation of the hardware resources, the maximum VPI bits cannot be achieved at the same time for every ATM port. Hence, before configuring a service, set the maximum VPI bits for each ATM port. If the maximum number of VPI bits is set to 12, the maximum value of the VPI is 4095 (212 - 1).

Impact on the System

This parameter affects the value range of the VPI for creation of a connection. For example, if the maximum number of VPI bits of an ATM port is 8, the VPI value should be 255 or less for creation of a connection on the ATM port. In addition, if a sub-board on the equipment carries services, do not change this parameter for any ATM port on the sub-board.

Values
Value Range ATM port type (UNI): 1-8 ATM port type (NNI): 1-12 Default Value 8

Configuration Guidelines
The VPIs of each port are independent and the VPI value ranges from 0 to 2MaxVPIbits - 1. During creation of an ATM service, the VPI value can be used for either the VP switching or VC switching, but not both.

Relationship with Other Parameters

To set this parameter to a value larger than 8 for an ATM port, set the ATM port type as NNI. As the hardware resources of each sub-board are limited, all ATM ports on the sub-board share
C-142 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

the hardware resources. The valid value for the maximum VPI bits of an ATM port on the subboard is affected by the values of other ATM ports on the sub-board. In addition, do not change this parameter when the sub-board carries services.

Related Information
None.

C.163 Max. Differential Delay (100 us)

Description
Set the Max. Differential Delay (100 us) parameter to set the delay difference of the MP group members. This parameter is valid only for the E1 link. The Max. Differential Delay (100 us) parameter indicates the delay difference of each member link in the MP group. If the difference between the delay of a link and the delay of any other link exceeds the maximum differential delay, the link is not available.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range 25-500 Default Value 30 Unit 100 us

Configuration Guidelines
The spacing for the differential delay is 100 us. The differential delay should be multiples of 100 us.

Relationship with Other Parameters

The Max. Differential Delay (100 us) parameter is valid only when the Enable Differential Delay parameter is set to Enabled.

Related Information
None.

C.164 Max. Concatenated Cell Count

Description
The Max. Concatenated Cell Count parameter indicates the maximum number of concatenated cells for an ATM service. This parameter is applicable only for the PW ATM type. Set this
Issue 06 (2009-06-01) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-143

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

parameter to set the maximum number of ATM cells that can be encapsulated in each packet when the concatenation is enabled.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range OptiX PTN 1900: 1 to 31 Default Value 10

Configuration Guidelines
If this parameter is set to 1, it indicates that the ATM cell concatenation is not performed. Only one ATM cell is encapsulated in each service packet. If this parameter is set to a value ranging from 2 to 31, the value indicates the maximum number of cells that can be encapsulated in each packet.31, the value indicates the maximum number of cells that can be encapsulated in each packet.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When the maximum concatenated cell count is 1, the maximum concatenation WTR time is invalid.

C.165 Max Data Packet Size(byte)

Description
The Max Data Packet Size (POS Port) parameter sets the maximum length of the data packet on the POS port.

Impact on the System

After this parameter is set, all the packets of a length longer than this parameter are discarded.

Values
Value Range Value range: 960-9000 Default Value 1620

Configuration Guidelines
The maximum data packet length has a filtering mechanism, through which this parameter is set to filter the data packets received on the POS port of a length longer than a certain length. When setting this parameter, consider the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite end.
C-144 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

If the parameter value is less than the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite end, this link cannot normally transmits service packets.

Relationship with Other Parameters

When this parameter is set on the POS port, set the Encapsulation Type of the POS port to PPP.

C.166 MBS (Cells)

Description
The MBS (2-200000 Cells) parameter indicates the maximum number of burst cells of the VBR service that can be continually transported at the PCR higher than SCR, and do not lose packets.

Impact on the System

As the value of this parameter increases, the depth of the primary leaky bucket for the ATM connection becomes deeper and thus the primary leaky bucket can tolerate more burst cells.

Values
2-200000 cells Value Range 2-200000 Default Value None. Unit Cell

Configuration Guidelines
To reduce the loss of packets of the VBR service to the minimum, set the MBS to a proper large value.

Relationship with Other Parameters

Set the MBS only for the RT-VBR/NRT-VBR service.

Related Information
The formula for computing the burst tolerance (BT) of the primary leaky bucket is BT = (MBS - 1)(1/SCR - 1/PCR) + CDVT. The MBS varies directly to the BT of the primary leaky bucket. If MBS consecutive cells of the ATM traffic burst at the PCR, the overall burst time is (MBS 1)(1/SCR - 1/PCR).

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-145

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C.167 Max Frame Length(byte)-Ethernet interface

Description
The Max Frame Length (Ethernet Port) parameter sets the maximum length of the data packets allowed to be received by the Ethernet port.

Impact on the System

After this parameter is set, all the data packets of a length longer than this parameter are discarded.

Values
Value Range Value range: 960-9000 Default Value 1620

Configuration Guidelines
The maximum data packet length has a filtering mechanism, through which this parameter is set to filter the data packets received on the Ethernet port of a length longer than a certain length. When setting this parameter, consider the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite end. If the parameter value is less than the length of the data packets transmitted from the opposite end, this link cannot normally transmits service packets.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

C.168 Min. Activated Link Count

Description
The Min. Activated Link Count parameter indicates the minimum count of activated links. Set this parameter to set the minimum count of available links in an MP group. When the count of available member links of an MP group exceeds the minimum activated link count, the protocol shuts down the entire MP group to remind the user of rectifying the fault. This is for protection. If you set the Min. Activated Link Count parameter, the MP group can work normally only when the count of member links in the MP group equals or exceeds the specified value.

Impact on the System

When the count of member links in the MP group is less than the minimum count of activate links, the dynamic service is interrupted. In addition, the MP_DOWN alarm is reported if the MP group is originally in the Up state.
C-146 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

C Parameter Reference

Values
Value Range 1-16 Default Value 1

Configuration Guidelines
None.

Relationship with Other Parameters

None.

Related Information
None.

C.169 Direction
Description
The Direction parameter indicates the direction for the policy application.

Impact on the System

This parameter does not affect the system operation.

Values
Value Range Ingress, Egress Default Value None.

The following table lists the description of each value. Value Ingress Egress Description Indicates that the policy application direction is uplink, that is, from the UNI or NNI to the cross-connect board. Indicates that the policy application direction is downlink, that is, from the cross-connect board to the UNI or NNI.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-147

C Parameter Reference

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Configuration Guidelines
None.

C-148

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Index

Index
A
advanced attribute of Ethernet interfaces setting, 4-18 advanced attributes of PDH interfaces setting, 4-13 advanced attributes of SDH interfaces setting, 4-9 attribute of Ethernet interface configuring, 4-14 attribute of PDH interface configuring, 4-10 attribute of SDH interface configuring, 4-5 MSP linear protection, 2-23 control plane address parse, 5-16 creating a CES service trail function, 9-8, 9-10 creating by using trail function bypass FRR, 6-5 dynamic MPLS tunnel, 6-5 static MPLS tunnel, 6-10 creating subnet, 2-13 creating V-UNI group, 11-19, 12-11, 13-6

E
E-AGGR, 13-2 E-AGGR service, 13-2 E-LAN, 12-2 E-LAN service, 12-2 creating, 12-4 E-Line, 11-3 port carrying, 11-14 PW carrying, 11-15 QinQ link carrying, 11-18 UNI-UNI, 11-13 E-Line service, 11-3 equipment-level protection creating TPS protection group of sub-boards, 2-11 Ethernet aggregation, 13-4 Ethernet virtual interface configuring, 4-27

B
basic concept linear MS, 2-22 board adding sub-board, 2-10 board parameters configuring, 4-1

C
CES service basic concept, 9-2 creating on a per-NE basis, 9-12, 9-13 clock defining uniform quality level for unknown clock source, 2-20 enabling extended SSM protocol, 2-17 enabling standard SSM protocol, 2-17 network interconnection clock setting, 2-21 setting clock priority, 2-16 setting phase-locked source for external clock output, 2-19 setting protection switching condition, 2-18 setting reversion mode and WTR time, 2-19 setting SSM output, 2-21 switching clock source manually, 2-21 configuring protection linear protection

F
fiber manual creation, 2-12 flow control configuring, 4-18

G
general attribute of Ethernet interface, 4-16 general attribute of Ethernet virtual interface , 4-27

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i-1

Index

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

general attribute of PDH interface configuring, 4-12 general attribute of SDH interface , 4-7 general attribute of serial interface , 4-21 GNE creating, 2-5 GRE tunnel creating, 8-2

point-to-point, 6-4 MPLS tunnel creating protection group, 6-15

N
NE searching and creating, 2-3 NE configuration data backup, 16-3 NM user switching, 2-8

I
importing route parameters, 5-12 inband DCN configuring, 2-14 IP tunnel creating, 7-2 IS-IS node attribute setting node attribute, 5-10 IS-IS port attribute setting port attribute, 5-11

O
Offload solution ATM forwarding, 14-16 ETH forwarding, 14-28 IP forwarding, 14-39

Q
QinQ Link creating, 11-18 querying board protection SCC and cross-connect board protection, 2-12

L
layer 2 attribute of Ethernet interface configuring, 4-17 layer 2 attribute of SDH interface configuring, 4-8 layer 3 attribute of Ethernet interface, 4-17 layer 3 attribute of Ethernet virtual interface configuring, 4-27 layer 3 attribute of PDH interface configuring, 4-12 layer 3 attribute of SDH interface configuring, 4-8 layer 3 attribute of serial interface, 4-22 LDP peer entity creating LDP peer entity, 5-13 LDP protocol configuring LDP protocol, 5-14 parameter of LDP protocol, 5-14 link TE link information, 5-13 LSR ID, 6-12

R
RSVP protocol configuring RSVP protocol, 5-15

S
serial interface configuring, 4-19 Creating, 4-20 shutting down T2000 shutting down T2000 client, 1-5 shutting down T2000 server, 1-6 starting T2000 logging in to T2000 client, 1-4 starting T2000 server, 1-3 startingT2000 startingT2000computer, 1-2 static route configuring static route, 5-15 system monitor, 1-4

M
member of MP group, 4-26 MO data scheduled backup, 16-2 MP group configuring, 4-23 creating, 4-24 MPLS, 6-3 MPLS Tunnel, 6-3 application, 6-4
i-2

T
T2000 client exiting, 1-5 login, 1-4 switching NM user, 2-8 T2000 data periodically backing up MO data, 16-2 T2000 main topology
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Configuration Guide

Index

main topology, 1-7 T2000 main window NE Explorer, 1-8 T2000 server running status, 1-4 shutdown, 1-6 starting, 1-3 topology object fiber, 2-12 GNE, 2-5 NE, 2-3 topology subnet, 2-13

Issue 06 (2009-06-01)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i-3